/
Arm, 420,*ix 033 479 di V.? . , TITLS / 'Nrilitary currics0,100 *aerial, forkVOcational and TeChniCal.:ZdUcation, INAAnunicatlena TedhpiCin44 q .2,-- ,,,_-______. _. INSTITUTION :Iti.::lSOUcation'and Training ;00404 WisisacOli,
; - 1141,=.1 Ohio Statn-Uiiv.,,COlusibui.-Natibnal-CoUzer f or 114MaarchjiVecatiOnit'SdUcation, ' J. .° e . \ MOW: 2690.
. , kW Nuct ,N141/PC11 PI* *stage:- -'i*SCRiPTORS Mitoinatructianal Aids; Behavioral Ob3ec4vea4 *CoillunicatieesT *C40000nicatiOni Satelliteel t0000POndence'Studyl -Court, Desatiptions.), *XlictrOilic pluiprOnt, nquipment maintsian44.First- A4dr Sigh Scheolaf--Individulk Instruction;:ilscingI-
PontteCOldert Sducetiont ,Safetyl Secon401 \ _ idueiltionl-TA0-0001004 Trad,and- Induttrial-SdUcatioa)- Nerkb44.10 --- , Iterniirits *Antenntutt C icatjons Octupitionii'Military CurriculUm-pro ectl INS*0 Propagation- 0
, . - APS'1utC11-
' These-tisignmeistsandtast fora Amcondary-postsecOndOty lOvelBorreipondence.cpuris in'electronic cOlmunicatient compriso one rot was:Aber of AilitattldeVelopod . curricajwp4Ohaget,selected for adaptation to vocationalinstruction and durtiOuI0A4140.19PPent-iirea civilian slatting.Ourpose,of the ° individUaliSW tielf.rticed course is to-proide tudents 1,4th leckgrouad informationiAnclUding-fUndamontils of cOmmluoiCationa, compunicationslimiditm-andsguipment- end maintenanceena4afaty. Sin ,- essignmeati containing.AUltip14 Ohoic4,guestiohs cOver,these- topicsi CoMmunicatiOns Basics; (2) Satallite CommUsiCation44:Wave Oropegation-andAntonnasl 13) W414-Propagation Ind Antnnas (coneinued),-CoMpuwication-Translitters and Rowel:Vara, !acilities (-Control Operation!). (4) facilitisi Centrol.Operations(continuod)4 aild'(S, 4) Naintehanci and Safety. Thp sevenchapterill,the text ar4 CompuniCatialls Basics, Sateilite.Communications, NayPropagation-and icatonnap;. CoMmunication Trap-slitters and leceifers, Facilies 'Control pperitions, SWALVerlainal *Opulent, andNiinienakce,and Safety. Appanditos 1:m14(14_41:rating:proceduresfor-vari4us -Joguipasont, Aillaricai Standard Code for Information Interchangeland lnforAption on ths Astrid system. An index is provilded. (YLS)
-
4 . . . . . **********1****,;******************** * * ReprodOctions suppliod torEDAS-are the.beet that cab boiAde . , , .*. -- * 4 . ?froai th4-origital document. .
*******************************o**********************************i****. , . , . . m -03; CE, 033 479 -
TITLE -Military Curriculum Materials for4Vocational and Technical .Education. COmmunicationslachnician,
, k . INSTITUTION '714aval EdUcation and Training- COmMand, Pentacola, 1141,1 Ohio State-dniv.,_.COlumbut.-Wational'Ceriverfor Researthjn:VOcatiOnal EdUcation. : \ ' IVA, DATE- U82,] NOTE 269P. ..
= 'kola PRICE -MF01/PC11 Pl us Postage; %DESCRIPTORS Autoinitructienal Aidsl Behavioral* Objectives; 4COMmunicatiOnal., *COMMUnicaticins Satellites; torregspondenCe Study; CourSe DeStriptionsv, *EleCtrOnic,Zguipmentl *Equipment ,MainteninCe; .First Aid; High ScheolsIAndividuik InStruction;;Oacing;,
Postsecondary -Edudationf *40fetlil_ Sacondfry\ . Eduditioni. Textbooks; Traderand Induttrial-EdUcation,;- Werkbooks - IDENTIFIERS *Antennae; CommUnications Occupitionsr Military - Curriculum project; 'Nave Propagation
ABSTRACT ThescaisignMents4n4text -foe a Secondary-postsecendary level rporrespOndence cipursein'electroniC cOmmuhications comprise one-of wnumber ofmiltiarrldeveloped ',CurriCUIOA'pickages,selected: for adaptation to vocatieWal instruction ana dUrricul0-deveiopmentinta civilian setting. Purpose of the ° individUeliOd-, Silk-paced course is tO-proVide students.tith - 1background inforiition, inclUding fundamentals of cOmMunicitiona, zommunicationslaadiUm and ,eguipmeni, and maintenance ina *afety. Si* . assignmentS containing. multiple Choiciluestiobs coverthosi topics: (I) ComMunications Basics; (2) Satellite CoMmunicationS,A4ave Propagation-andAntennar; (3) Way T.Topigation andAntennas (coneinued),-CoMmunicatiOn Trallimitters and ReceiVers,Facilities Control OPeratiOns;, (4) FacilitieS Control,Opsrations(Continued)1 and (5, 6) Maintenance and Safety. The sevenchapteri of_the text are CommuniCations Basics, Satellite:Communications, Wave Prepagation,and Anteiinas CoMmunication TransAitters and RoCeiliers, Facililies Control ,Operations, led 'Terminal Equipment, andMaintenance-sand Safety. Appendikes include_operatingprodedures for-various- -,eguipment, American Standard Code' forInformation Interchange, and "informetiow ow the metric system. An index iS provided. (*,LB)
A
. . , *************************************************1;******************** * * Reproductions supplied loTrIDRS-are the best that can,be4nade .
, . , * * 0 froM the-originaldocument. *********************************************************************** .
a . Correspondence Couree 5=3
4
OOMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN Tahle of 'Contents
-CoureeHeedription- Page 1
0 Assignments. Page 1
COnnnication Technicitob
ChaOter 5-- COmtunication Basics Page 54 , 0 4. ChaOter 6-- Satellite CoOmunications 0, -Page.76 Chapter 7-.- Wave Tropagaton,.and'Antennaw Pagell 2 Chapter 8 tdffimunication.Traostilitters and 'Receivers Page 119 , Chapter -9-= FACilitiew Control Operations .Page.138
Ohapter 10- En& Terminal =Eiluipment . Piv-147 Chapter 16-_- Maintenance and Safety Page 181
AppendiOies 'Eage 268
1
,
1, 0
0
_o
0 MUT= CLIRRICULP4* MEP-WS t military,developiad.-curriCuluM-Anaterii.alS in'this-dourte intkage; were-,Selectedby-the National -Center forResearch in diasern- Vocational :EdudatiOn Military CUrriciilirm Projectfor inationto the sixregional:CurriculuniCoOrdinationCenters and other inatruCtrional Materialsagencies-: The purpose -of dissent:Oat-44 these COurses -Vas-to make -6p4tiCulinn Materials _deVelopedbythe !military mdre racCessible,tc) Vbcatianal educatorsin the Civilian-sett-41g.
Theoburte materials ,were-atquired,_eValuatedbyproject -Staff and practitioners.in -thefield, and,prepared _for diSsechination._Materials -w4ich were specific tothe nilitary anitted or appro- were deleted,cOpyrightect.-materials were-either Use was-obtained.These;course .packageeContain val. for their support curriculum resourCetnaterials can be adaptedto -VocatiOnal --inatruction:.andcurriailum development. :CioriCultim- vs e 'MatOialS for The National Center Vocatidnal and Mission Statement TechniCal Education' er - A
,
The Naticinal: Center fOr Researtit in Thforrndtion, 664 PiOld- VocatiOnalIducation% mistion-iitoincreise SctvictiPiviott, the- ability of diveise agen'ciesi:initittitiont, - and organizations tO-solve-eduCational-prob. lems relating to -individual Career Planning, preparation, and otogressien. The -National- The Wationnl Centr for-Research Zenter fulfills its.Mission by: : .in'VocationnKdneation
Generating Imowledge -through researdh
- beveleping educational Peograms and I t_ Products
EValuating individual program:needs- and outcomes a Installing educational piograms and ,products
'OperatingInfoiMation systems and services
Conducting leadershio development and. -tr*ing programs
'FOR FURTHER INFORMATION-ABOUT Military Curriculum Materials WRITE OA CALL Program Infix-illation Office 1 A The National.Centerfor Research inVocational . 4
Education <,
The OhloStati University '1,,, ," ", 1960 KennyRoad, tolumbus, Ohio 40210 ;-...1H, 5 Telephoni: 614/4863655 or Toll Free 800/ , 4rt,'"i. s. .`"t' 41'?"-,. 04,', t 648.4615,within the continental.U.S,- (excifit Ohio) .-,et,., Military , Curriculum Matdrials What Materials e, How Can These )9 btamed? Distemination Is..... Are Available? Materials 'Be ...14,...,,II,: . .1.. .i.` t. '' . --' 0 ::: arai;-mgal..L.:.41-4.14.rj
One hundred twenty cputses on microfiche ---Contact thedorriculumCoordinatiOn Center an- actiity.to increase the accetsibility of obtaining military.déveloped curriculum -materials to (thirteen-in pe6er form) and descriptioni of in your region for-information-on thetv.iali (e.g., availabititY aii'd cost).Thei -vocational-and technicaLeduCatórs. eachihave been provided to the-vocational CUrriculurn.Coordination Centers and other will respond io yoUrrequestdirectlyorrefer matériais agenCy .-Thisproject,Junded by the-U.S. Offite instrUctional materialtagenCies -fOr.disserni- you, to an instructional .Education, includes the identificatiOn 'and nation. closer-to you. 'acquisition of-cprrictilum- materials in print o Course materialsinclude programmed .0 . iorm from the- Coast 'Guard, Air Force., Cf4W rERS Army, Marine Corps.and:Navy. instruction, curriculum outlines, instructor 4CUR 'imam COORDANATlOi3 guides, student workbooks and technical NORTHWEST manuals. EASTCENTRAL Aecess to military curriculum materials is William Daniels prOviried- throu4h a "Joint Memorandum of 'Rebecca S. DoUglass Director pnderstanding" between--the-U,S. Office of The 120 'courtet -repr,sent thefcillowifig Director 100 North`First Street Building 17 EdUcation and. the-Department of-Defense-. sixteenvocational.subject areas: Springfield, IL 62777 Airdustrial Park Oly;npia, WA 98504 Agriculture Food Service . 217/782.0759 The acqUired materials areJeviewed by staff .to -2067153-0379----- and subject- matter specialiits, and courses Aviation Health Building & Heating & Air 4eerned applicable to vocatibnal and tech- SOOTHE ASI Construction Conditioning MIDWEST nical.education areselected for dissemination. James F.-Shill, Ph.D. .1;rades Machine Shop Robert Patton Management & =Diree4pr Directbr The National Center tor Research 11' Clerical Supervision 1515 Wes! Sixth Ave. Misfissippi State University, Vocational Education is the U.S. Office of Occupations 'Drawer bx, Communicat;ons Meteorology & Stillwater, OK 74704-- ,..Education's designated representative to -Mississippi State, MS39762 - Druf ting Navaigatiqn P51377 .2000 a acquire the materials and cond.utt the project 601/3252510 activitieS. 'Elect rp nics. Photography Engine Mechanics Publid Service . 7f NORTHEAST: WESTERN ,f Project Staff: LaWrence F. H. Zane,Phi). ,- The numberof Courses and the subj'egt areas JOseph+._1(elly, Ph.D; Viesley E. Budke,.Ph.D., Oirector represented Will expand as additional mate- Direci-Or_ Director National Center:Clearinghouse rials with application to vocational and _225 West Staie Street .076 Trenton, NJ 08625, Honolutu,411 96822 Shirley A. Chase, Ph.D. technical edUcation are identified.and seledted 608/292.6562 808/948.7834P Project-Director for ditsemination. 7 ,COMOUNICATIONSEPHNICiAN Correepondenci-Course
A
-Owe Wood by; 13wl'----etWLroal Ares: -portwaunicatickv
.Dowi Isipment and lbrintPages: 1114nnew patio. $4.75 . . , 1975 "MilitarY Ourrie.islurh.Prisjeer; The Comer for-Vocations! Edtkation,1960.1..Cengy- Rd_Ccilitinbus. OH 43210'
"Sugiewed 814* Ound:
_
Electronim
Target Aisdienose:
;Grades 10odult
Oiganisition of Materiels: 4 Laecon shists with objectives, assiinnents;:end reviews:Within; taxi
; 7Yae of. Instri robin:
individualiCed, sellOaced
- a aterjels; N. of Pages: CanWietion CornmOhleatiónsTechnkian.
'Assignment 3. r.cimniunication Basics . _ Asaignment 4 Satellite domaimications:Weve Prdpagation and Antennae 27 Flexible . 0
Assignment 5 Wive, Propagation aii4Antinna . Icontiribrid)rdstiMrnorileation-Traitsritters . Ind kes:eivemand FacilitiesCOptrOl Operationi 37 -Flexible
Assignment 8 Ficilities.Controlperationsicontinuw9; it;la End yerniinel 'Equipment 38
Aisignthent le -Meintenanee andlahrty 16,
%Assignment 11. ; Maintenance gild Safety (continued) 48, Flexible
: Exercise :s 45
Supolameniary Materials Required;
Wine r
ea 04 e/Nri i Expiri*July 1, 1978 A =1 , . -Cows: Duette, 4it:
. This °Wise wee dodge* to proeid thestudent Withbadtground information on electronic communicetions. It discusaisthe'fundamentels of CommUnica= end nasty. The textis used as an intreduction tO many courses and includesinformation ,'dons, communication meditim and equicirt*t and meintenence ''on Militaty proadures and equipment at well es basic infonnadon. rniiitsitY-protidures and equipment -.finest. The course consist of. eleven-assignments with objectives; reedioge.and reviewexercises. Filectif those deal with ' ' eitchirivelyisd,they were delt Cid. The remaining six assignments are dist:VOW beloW. .., . .' k ' communication; explains Araignment 3 = Comhiinkanallasies deport.* various types ind operations of electrical, visual, and sound the cheraCteristics of theradiaphone.-facsiMilti. radiotelParaoh; and teletypewriter; dascribeslrettuencybinds; identiflei acegicetions oi frequencY spictrurn fortone distance comMunicstiOn; covert thecapabilities,-ftinctions, and opkrations of' switehed netWorks;and.identifies thi chansiteristics,of tragsmiesion 'systems and carriers.This assignment deicritteis the Procees.of modutatioa and Identifies the operational iharactirisdcs and uaesof sinele sideband, microwave and scatter i . . . tiantmlisions. e
sSetallitatOmmimications; Waite Propaaation and Antennas describes coMmunication satellite systems and identifies specific Aisignment 4 ;4, sitellite end mirth terminal Characteristics; ettplains the role of satelliteceminunicatiOnt ind identifies idventagis and limite, tiOns. Charecter'itics of electromagnetic wives and factors affecting waveprOpegation arealso covered. . . . kontinuti4;,COminanication-Tranamittan and Receivors PaailitieaControl OporatiOns Assignment,5 We Propagation sad Antanna provldes-additional characteristics of. electromagnetic waves and.factors affecting wavepropegition;ldentifies Me principhi and charactevristics...of communicstions transmitting and reeeiving equipment;describes the Purpose of Communications, floW of a snuff ComMunitition system:, and describes features COmMon systems; determinei the'Nerious stages of signet ,... 0 ell awitchboirdOperidons; : a , . . ,, e fracilitias parr* OporationiAtontinuatil identifies.the uses. functions, anctcharacteristics of keyconvplars and Converter= -Assignment 6 . . comperator groups; desdrilies the methods of diversity operation; covers,the pUrpose, operating principles and components, for distribution frames ind , otaMultiplex system; and determinerthe purpose of and the batic installatiortrequirements 'pstching facilities.' The functions ,of the different types of patch cords ofa"patch 11,ide Ad characteristics of-the patch .. . .. panel sire identified. Digital signets; DC teletypewriter circUits. anddistortiefi ate diktissed., * -" . , . . D , of equipment maintenance; describes maintenance tasks, cleaning Assignment 10, Maintenance ad Safittrexplains Ywious types and levels proceduris.-and care of efictronies eqUipment and air filters; describes care Ind preventivemaintenance 'requirements for teletypewriters, typeirriter.s, hasdphOnes. and Mierophorwi; end discusses sofety,pMeautions. .. d
1 ' r a, proceduret to follow.when working on electrical ,Assignment 11 7. Maintanancit and Safetylcontinimall covers safety precautions end equipmant, the causes and'effects Of electric sheik,the hazards presented by electronicequipMent operating it high frequenciet, and the sifety precautions tit follow in handling cithode raytubes and cleaning electroniC equipthent.
designed tech assignment is organized around learning objectives, readings, and exercises.No answers are provided for the exiicises. Th. coursels for student selfstudy jn basic and some advanced commUnication principles.
,
C.
2). .;
'0
Carte vociamit impel 44 wok UNIVI RS F.
' P \ :
\ 6 'COUR.§E 0SJEdTIVE
underst nding of coUrse-materiels by correctly antwering.items on the followi g subjects:.sbo0,0 find responsibilities of the-dommunicatiOns i 'TechiicIian 0 ritingj indiVidual end Command,security p4nciples; - sne*ge cY'dettruction ptOCedutios and devices used.by NavalSecuiity Group, ctivities; the mission, policy,'end vatibus organizatione of Nav1 ComuniCatiohss,veriatiOns ofthe ion0e0here and hOw they affecflradio frequencies;:digerent antenna configurations and,how , theyre used; ths,funotions,of comunication transmitteti, receivers, and,tereinal equipments; the operation of a immix* teletyPe coMmuni- Cati ins system; the basic-message format and the rulet -of preparation fot, GTODIN and DSSOS; coMmunication dividion adeiniStration incldding typ s an4 accotintability.,of publicationsi, and. first aid. 0 4 .9 0 0 0 moDIFIqATIort 9 'a \6:6 /41of thia.publication hag', NiveY been del'eted: adapting this-material for inclusibn in the"Trial Implementation of4 Model tystem to Provide Military CurriculumMaterials for Pse ih Vocational and Technical EdUcation." Deleted material involvesextensive use of and was not considered appropriate., military forms, prodednres, systems, etc. _ . for use in vocational and technical education. 9 . '12 P. Aisigrinie0 , tö Nqval 1fliC41O1j (continu40411 Tiiiboo*..pegeo 60thsough-46 in-order toensUreimuu,yontib44on to the inissionof*e.,c'o'm-aild,4the- conmuni- cator ihould { , .. 2. possess en Undersv'endini-OptheConnvni- 4. catien facilitiei%hdAisea4 . be failliar:yith'iheklinitatdons_end -capahilities otlieieeted ceii4Oni= cation iyitene 4. ,t11.064bly underitendOnnunicaticn theoy'g,sPeCifietypei--of:eaulpsent. 3-6. What are the.3'typel'of'teieCOnmvpicatione vied in-the/404'r 1. Eieptri44.4i644**,161.114 2.' VisualoioVna,,siinv!' 3.'"M1ectrical,_Visuisound.- 4: hectrice1-01aVf24 ipagee Whitiiltar4,thi,neane=6f.Connunicating electricalyv C. 1. Radio , 2. )ilike- peth-fiet,veeri-eender-end 3.":4i:i4413: 4 h, Boths(1) and',(2) Whichrstateminl, *2164 is true cOneeirnitily/ 3-8. redlot , 1: .41adiOuies'eleCtronamietict,veves berried :breleatricel cniductOfs / usis."elithtronainetle*rei.nOt _guidd,by a phisieiepith heteeen eidei and'receiVW 3. Pidlo'is"thelaWslesat iliportant n As of cceiuniciti.ans 4!. The amens af,conmvnientince1sctridellY are exclusivelOricidio- .! 3-9. WhatA.s'the lain advaikagev,ofxvidiote1earar ?,. . , ._ ,. , . pbYT . 1. .The-relitively. high apeed oft'iani- . ' niasiónc _ s" . Learning-Objectivet Recognize the 2. Therequireneni fOr. noi.es-ninir typeeind_Oeprition,ofeiectrical, , :eFperieiced-oPerators visual, and sound ccimunication used- 3.' ReliOilit$, . in the Navy.- _i4. iOrili ci'r.the above .o 15" :13° f,' Wich sound dommunicition system is not 1H.O. Betiusebf its, airecthess, convenience 5-49. aid ease OfoPeratiOn, .- is.ohe used by ships for-tranamission\of-eMer- Of,the.mOst.,neftil Military cd*uniCitiOn ,gency warning signals? .1.- Methods. 1- Sirens radiotelephone- 2: Acoustics 2. radiotelegraph- 3. WhiStles, '3. ieletyPewriter 4. Bells 4, ,4*simili 3-20. SeaAtalk is used for which of the foilow-- ihg PurPoses? Ridiotelephone For items 1=11:through 3i14;.select=frourco1uMn 2. CW B-the electrical telecommunicationsysiem 3.- Both (1)_and 12)-abOve described -t Sonar only -DescriPtion B. -SYstem ' 3-21. Use of pyrotechnics is-normally1 mited 1=11. A-iiiiable mahui/' Radiotelephone 'comMhiliciting syitem . 3-22. What is the principle regulating b dy- ` s ,2, Face:mile fOr radio ,cOmmuniCations worldwide a. ITU .3. Radiotelegraph 2, FOC . '4;ed'aUtoMatic,com- _thunications 63. Office-of Emergency Planning. 14. -Teletypewriter 4. COMNAVTELECOMM Yalutbie 'ibrehort ringe-tactical Comment- . - .cetions- ' 3=14:- Prodeessuied to Learning Objective:.Recoghize the fiviquency'bandaand identify'the ,%- griphe-andLchirts-! application or-the frequency Spec- t trum;for long dietance-communication., 3-15. VIsual commuhicatiopalrebormelly more 4 eecuretharCri4io,4-.-.. 41 Whieh of the folloUing stateMents iatittle concernipg U.S.-frequency management?ii 3-16, Which,vi*ual Commypticition-system i* the' 1. The president hi; 'delegated authority _principal meana_or.tranOitting brief for assignment of radio-frequencieS used by non-goyernMent,agencies to the tactidal meseageCbetwien'ships-ih com- . . , pani? DirectOr of Telecommunieations -Management - .1. Radiotelephone, 2, FlashIng 'light 2, The FCC is responsible to Congresifor regulating, freqUenciAlse by U.S. . 34 Fleghbist Gbernment activities ' 4 SeitaPRU4: . 3. The assignmenp of ,aii,l'requencies used by any coiponent of thet Navy is the 3r17. Which ofcthe iollowing.methodk 9f visual coMmunicitiOn is the. most securet responsibility of po 1. Flashing light 4. The FO Is 'responsible for regulating 2. Dim4Ciionil fiashing light frequencies uied by the Federal 3. ion Alreetionillights Government agencies . 4.-.DirectiOnal infrared 4 .3-24. A frequency of 75,000 KHz could'he\ 3-18. What-ii-on,',-best visual signal subetituie eMPressed 48 tbr handling administratiVrtrafficuhen .1. 1,500 MHz radio silence is iMposed? 2. 750-MHz 1- Directionl flashing light . 3.- 15 MHz Ilaghoist, 4. 7 GHz. j. NOn-directional.lights SemaPhOrl",. , 16 14 a . 0 _Prisary reliance and'applicition ofthe 3-32, ,What iathe primary factor vhich permits VLF range-may-be-expected for 0 reliable:point to Point service of'HF covihnications? 1. 'broadcast of standard-timeand frequency Signals' 1.- Large, higil gmin-antennasaiMedat oPposite terminals.of each-iink 2. operation-of synchronous crypto devices 2. 'Path letgth and direction are variable 3. Ompidirectional.antennis 4 3. operatiop of singlesidebati'trans 4. Several frequencies ere usually sissioti A 4. caolunicaticiii!toa largeshiber or Assigned satellitei 333.Application of-Ship-tO4hore ccamunica- 3-26. -The-distribution of stiOdard,frequency tions in theNVband require-shiiboard and-tile eignalsis-eisentiel for which' ' ntennas to-be. of the-folloyingl i. omnidirectional as Possible 1..-Traikitg,space vehicles 2: rotatable high gain.tyPe 2. World-lade clockainchioniaation 3: rhombic 4. large, efficient_HF ahtennas 3. -RadiaaayigatiOral aide 4.::Eich of the above situations. Whith-tyPe of service yithin the-HF'bind normally always ProVides frequenei 3-27. The-difference in-frequency-between 13 megicyciei and.14000-kiicciclei is diVersity tratimissiOns so that the 1. 1,004:.cydles, teralnal cat chootie the best-frequebey for the pea at thektime? g. 100441oCieles . 3. 10-megacycles 1. Poitt-to-point 1 iesseyelee. .2. Ship,-to-shore .- 3-28:What trequetcy band includeathe Inter-t 4. leet broadcast national Disireiairequency? ..- -Whieh freqUitci band(s)-undir normal con: I., -HF 3-35. ditionahave.lihe dk tight characteristiCs? 2. MF , a.4T-Aricv130.6.4 9 '4. "viii vir std-UKF' J? UHF ahd.SHF-only 4. _mT:only 3-29. Which frequencylahdTelies Principally On,grOutd YiVes-and,is used for-moderately long diitance over-eater in lts,loierpor.- tion and commerCiatliroadcasting in its Determine the middle portion? ..Leartitg Objective: differetce betyeen Strategic and 1. Li . - Tactical ComMuticationsand identifi -2.- Litt 3.MP 'the-modes-of operStien. _ wr 3-30. Which frequetcy.bandyould cease-to -exiit 3-36. Ahle of Stich type-of cammunication is If the ioniied layers ahem* the earth. uStally limited to-a Siecific area of , disapPeared? operatioh and-is -used totirect or. . report-theaaveien.of specific forcest 1. Mi o 1. Strategic-Commutications, 2: HF . 2. TaCticsl:COMmUnicationsc 3. lifir 4. intr. 3. =Duplex coMmuticitiOns 4. Simplex-cOmmunitatiots- . . 3-31. What_techniqUe increased the capacity-of the allighed-fortiOn.ofthelOt 3_37, AUTOVON, AUTODIlf-ind DSSCS coUld(be con: Spectrhm? sidered-sc stratigic-coimunieitions l. Uie of singlersideband eqhipment . skates:IL "2.." APplication of itdepehdentaideband, . _ 3-38. A path bityeentwo ormarepoints,capable -3'. 'Satellite communications- 4. *loth (1) end-12) above.' otpiovidinrchantels tor-the-transmisiion of intelligence is identified as a 1. comiuniCation chahhel 2. tr.Ctical net 3; motte Of oPeration 4: biliodeart,..31t 17. 4. `. 3-39. When a terminal must wait to receive an What capability is proyided to-subscribers in-progress-mesenge before it tantrans- , of normalAUTOVON-servicell ;mit, 'the-technical arrangement coUld be_ 1. The-ability to-cOMMunpate with other . termed ` subsaribers.on wit]. -wide basis . 1. .Simplex 2. .The ability toirer. th'igh precedence 2:Semi=duplek traffic 1. Iediate -cbnnectiyn with predeeignated 43' FUllHaif-d4D1-ex Duplex. distant insiallattons 4. dOnfirence capability.on a random _ . 340. The PrilarY-means.of,transmittingAlessages basis tO the-fleet trosi shOre.stationals-bythe , 1. Point-to-POint method By which mechod iay lbcal coMmand-voice 2. reCeipi.mettibd Communication systems-be 'Connected to 1- Aniercept astihod s AUTOVON? k 14. broadcast method;" 1. Ninually,Operated sioliChboirds 2.. Autaistit diiiing exchanges 3-41. How-do fleet units_determine if they have 3: Local-priyate branch exchanges reteiVedAkil of-the ieesages transmitted 4. Each-ot-the abo-Ve -On-a specific tleet.brdaddast? 1. By tietking-Alequentiil-derial., numbers 3146, What lsthe purpose.of Automatic Secure to-enamie.none is missing - Voice,OommunicitiOns? 2. 11y-requesting verifiCation Of the 1. To ridute ieissge delivery time and , -number Pf-amisageS sent- delay , c 3. -By keePing tiro-receivers on the line 2./ To-eliminate the.need OfAnatchboard. -it ailtiaes oierators ' -A. By Viiiting-NAVCOMMSTAs-when-in port 3. To pidvide a telephone-network for _ the exthange-of classified information 3-42. One-of the-chief-advantages-of broadcast over officially designated aPproved tranemission over intertept Ii its circuitry assuranteRthatmessages have been, -4. Toprovide a radio network for-the reteived exchange of classifd inforiation -2. abiiiti to Verify-messages andto over officially-designated frequenCies laige,corrections 3. power to reach shipaas-welljas shore 3-41. An important function.of the ASC in Om installations -AUTODIN.system ii ip 4., capacity to-handle heavytraffic aore 1. proVide direct dialing service rapidly' prevent Txtilde signal interference 3: detect and correct message errors Which_ai the f011owing statements ie true 4. convert analOg signals for transmission- concerning broadcast opeiationy. 1. All ihips topypnly certiin,messages 3-48. The AUTODO.systea is revolutionizing on thabroadcest schedule whith they communicatione-because it has reeulted are guarding in a-decrease inthe 2. Tile method-A:noire the-fleet to pre 1. number of messageabeing sent serve radii) silende-4' 2. length pf mai-sages 3: Lower precedence-messages lay not be 3. number of skilled techniciansrequired interrUitedto transmit a Message of 4. manual handling oriessages _higher precpdence 4. Broadcast4eception is possible by 3-49.. The primary reason-DSSCS_ came into exis- 0 choice of two frequencies tence Was to li, forma gingle automated network for , SI communications 2. provide two eeparate syetems.within Learning Objective: Aecognize the, AUTODIN , .. taPabilities, functions,. operations 3. ensure'strict,Physical separation of Of the-sWitched-networks. all DSSCS and,AOTODIN traffic 4., integrate the CRITICOMM-and AUTODIN. into a single.automated network a 18 3-50. Considering the AUTOD- IN/DSSZZ high -speed 3-54. A coMplete cycle ;if a wave is xtpfesented environment,-which statement *below is- in figure 3A by the distance correct coficerningemoVement'of traffic? 1. AC 1. Ali input subscriberi sehd-messages 2. .AD WE* to an-ASC 3. AE 0 -* 2. Prior to forwarding ScAzeisagc, the -4. BC ASC m4it receive each message inits entirety 3,55. The frequency-of a-wave is the nuMber Of 3. Ilhe 6114a of,a.giwen iessage iS Hertz that.oacur in one ;simultaneous-with lts_inpUt 1. period BeCause a station is connected to an 2. dycle ASC, dbes not-necessirily mean it will 3. phase, benefit from the high-speed, enxiron- 4. Second *int The maximum value of a radio waVestenergy 3751.; Which-coimunication network exists in . Measuremint,is.a.measurement of the Am:es° sUpport of-Only designated Navy-revire- 1. frequency menti? 2: ,instintaneous amplitnde 1. HICOM 3. peak aMPlitude 2. AUTODIN lc. amplitude 3. AUTOSEUECOM 4. AUTOVON ' 3-57: The:(A. friqbendy/wave1ensths) and the (B..Oeriod/phase) of a:carrier-wave cambe 3-52. COmmands afloat can comMuhicate via voiee varied-to produce an intelligence carry? with commanda-ashorp-using-the-ship/shore ing.sighal. radiotelephone service-knowli is- 1. A. frequendy; B.-period 1. AUTobIN '2. A: 'frequency; B. phase 2. AUTOVON 3. wairelengthS;, B.-period 3. JORATE, 4.. A."-Aalielengthi; B: phase 4. ptses - ,Learnini Objective: Describe-the Learning ObjeOtive: Identirytrans-t -proOess of Modulation and identify- mission gyatims, and the character- the operational charaOteristl.os and -istics ot4-carrier, uses-of 25140.0., sidebind crowave. and scaticx traniuissioh. , 3-53. A subsystem whole WormitiOn-darrying bandwidth iA l'imited to' 4-voice channels ion Ahich-Of the _following emission-m.1es or fewer-wOuld`bc.classified as a :Nlbes the inteiligence carrYing signal 1. midrowave system -.Vary the darrier frequendyt 2. narrowband4Yitem 1. CF p 3. .FPTS-system 2. A -M 4. Aideband sistel 3. F-M 4. p-tr. 3-59. the space on i frequency spectrAm that ,is occupied'bi a carrier and its-associated sidebanda is-dalled a/ah 1. upper-sideband 2. shannei 3. bandwidth 4. circuit 3-60. What is the carrier frequency of.an amPlithde'modulated signal which has its .upper sideband on 15,000 KHz and is being Modulated by a 20P0 Hertz note? 1., '14,998 KHi Figure 3A.--Diagram-of a radio wave. 2:. 13,000 KHz 0, 3. 14,996.KHz- 4. 1t,000-.KHz ,a How-many'teletype,pannels are avrilable 341. 3-61. fa -the systel Of single-sidebend sup!. ld'each of-the four 3-kHzaudio-channels, Preised Carrier, at what pointie the 7' -of an ISB-circuit whenfrequency divisfen Cerrier-supPressed? multipleXequipient is used? At-the transmitterbefOreeodulation 1. 1. 4 is. eccomplished. 2. 8 After'it reachee the,poweremplifier 2. 3, 16 stagi.ni thetransmitter4 4. 52 ,At the-receiver'wore thedemodula- tion-proaist - 348. Which componente of themodulated signal, 4. it the transmitter after Modulation- tre suppreesed tO-produce theISB=signal? is_adcoMPlished 1. The upper sidebenkonly Provides forusing 2. lbe ldWerSideband only 3-62. WhiCh type-of maission frequency bind- 3. lloth sidebends less power-and-a sMaller 4. /be cirrier 007Y- width? 1.ASSB that use a micro- 3-69. Longehaul coUthunications 2. isp wave transmission systemaremade possible A=M 3. bY end redeiving, 4.: P-M, T. aiming the transuitting =tennis it the sermiPei= in Pace rtatemente Conc46, 3-63. Wbich of the follOwing with 300 Milesseparatingthe rwo ing SSB is correct? antennas : ISB transiission ir usedtoeake uP -forming chein.of-repeaterstations- fOrthe lick of essentialcfiannela 2. froi initial:transmittingstation that can he provided bySp lonkbaul teletype to finalreceiving-station 2.,SSB ie used,on ail 3. using wirecabletkinsmiision-lines circhits 4. using coaxial Cabletranraission 3. -treiciever-7wireciqUitsbetwieh 4nes. NAVCOMSTAs ilwiys UseSSW, ISB'Oppressesthe carrier and-filter microweve radio 4. One of the limititions-of .sidebind, in SSB ohlytheeerrier 3-70. aUt is its- is.suppreteed Oligh PoWer requirements V ' frequency 2. low reliability 1=64. Whish_Orocedure conserverthe use-of a largepart ofthe frequency ,spettrume sever manpower,ahd preVentr'- 3. circuits?' spectrUm oVerloading ship-otters 4.. narrow bandridth , - 1. Frequenpy-divi ion multiplex utilising nne ship us- 2. Task, group,n, What method of tranthissidn ismost eco= from-which traffic cen be 3-71. e guardshi nomicel in-rreas WhereconstrUction and -, relayed shore . ,--- maintenance ire a,problem? nic crypto deviceson_circuits 3, Elec 1. Forwerd-PrePegat:nn Tropospheric- meesages - um .to send classified Scatter (FPTS iMinating manual encryption: , 2. Openwire landlines Time-division multiPlek 3. Coaxial cable 4. Forward PrOpagation Ionospheric -6 . Whiti; ihe moit common.type Of communica, Scatter (FPId). ticin link presentiy:in'usep 1. CW 2. AM 3. PM Learning Objective: Identify ihe 4. SSB veriOustyPer and uses of landlines. circuit likch, 3-66. A.single sideband teleype hes =electronic cryptodevice that linc,uaed%for'shori haul 3-72: The type of automatically enerypts prior to trans- teletype circuits or keying a mission and-decrypts.after.transmission eitter -a7in r- is referred to- as landline 1. direct current (b-C) a broadcastcircuit 1. 2. audio 'frequency landline a.poitii-tO-point circuit 2. 3.. -Wire cablea a covered circuit 3. 4_, coaxial cable 4. an open.circuit 'a 3473. One Teir of (A. audio frequency/direct 3-75. What is/are the advantsge'(s) current) landliries-are'capsble,of of under- greund vire cable?' earrying up to 16 teletyPe channels ant" 1.- they,aie less susceptible are:considered to be,in the (B. to sabotage videband/ 2. 'They are'lets vulnerable nerrovband) systeM. to-storms 3. TheY eliMihate 1. A. aUdiO frequency; B. videband unsightly_congestion especialiy in mitiei 2. A. audio frequenck; B. narrovband 4. Each of ihe above 3. A. direet current; B. wideband h. A. direct current; B. narrovbatd: Why is air-or nitrogengas introduced Aulder pressure into edaxial-cabiein twit betVeen tubes ind,vcres? I. Keépi out-moisture 2. Aids in detecting any damage 3. Prevents crosstalk betVeenVarious eircuits in the cable For the.reatons Stated in (1)and (2) aboVe _ 3 S. 21 1 9 - : Satellite'CoMmUniCitionst Wave Propagation and-Antennas Textbook.pagesltrthrough,47 is-identical to_ 4-5. If .the period of an orbit that of.the earth it is referred to as learning ObleetiVe: peicribe'a a/in _. orbit. coMinhiCation satellite eystie-end synchronoUi 'Identify-specificjatillite mind 1. 2. 'ipaCial. -earth terainelchiracterietitsi- 3. asinehronous -4. Circuler 4-1. What does the Navreepect to-am-Complier: , use a satellites? 44. lovemay,earth terminals can by-use of comiunioatfon satellite at one tine vith the present Replace eiisting conventionil trans- 1. Operational military comiunication miseipaiedia-° satellite system? Lower Produriment%and deVelopient. 1. 2 . coati for fUtureCOmiuoiPatPminetworks, li. 3 1. 'Meetlonghiul_CpmeUniestiOn demands J $ . -4 for pritiiously inieceisibleareas:. 3. 4. 5 4 Control tiliteri-pperatiOns'Witil AreaterreliabiliWand;:securIty 1 o How will the oyerallperformenceOf-the b-2. In items 4-7 thibugh-4-91 eelect fromcolumn Phalle II bscs be-enhanCed overthe,capabil- the paremeterethat are describedimcolumn A. ity proVided'inthe IDCSP? - 'Phase II'DSCS ProVides-for-i,grektlr '0 1. A. Description IL Paromeier , inireasedeffective rediated-power Phase // DSCS utilimesWide-beam 2; ciAit.of a satellite I. Angle of . . ., antennas. nearest the center incline- Phase-If latellites are dePloyed'in , 3, of the earth tion % non-iynChronous orbit . 4. Bich of the above 2. Perigee , . Orbit in iny plane .... 4-8. . . . Which'dharecteristic beet,describes a. -not coincident with .4-3. _the equatorial plane 3.Apagee passive litellitet . 1.- /t-acte as-&rePeater 4.Naar 4-9., Orbit, of A satellite atthe 2. The signil strengthof a paiiivi -satellite is.far superiOr to inY other greateet diotance from , the center of the eirth satellite 3. -A pasaivesatellite-merely reflects radio-signals hack to-earth 4-10. A satellite orbit with an angleof incline., .-A-Paaeivi-eatellite.will a'oplify the tion of-near 90 degrees isreferred io as ,receiver signal beforeretransmitting a/in orbit. it-hick to earth. , .. , 1. equatorial .. , . 44. cleasified 2. circular . the inolinition or an orbit is 3. elliptical as. 4. polar. 1. '.alther elliiticel or--circular A. .eynchrenoluse-' . 3. aejenthronoui Paaror-equitorial 22 0 2,0 :4-11: When (A. tWo/thr.et) satellites -are_ Used 14-17, tWhet type 's,;tennai will suPport earth to proVide .coyerege, byes; -moat os :the - Ccestinunicatfons ,between 'facilities oUtside eerths sur fade ; .t4ey -woul-d1bi .plabed-in 'the narrow- beam Coverage in Phase II _pscst - riear.,s Orbits.. I.-Four high giiñTñtenñas 1..A:ttio;" B. synehrondue "74. 1.1tyo,-hOrn interinas, 21 B: -near 9Fifc_firectional entennaa 3..A.. three; 'near s-YnctirphOus Wectional -antennas A. three; B. syndhfonotii* ; What is gained by- !satellite' eitrth terminale 442...Iif which, type _of' orbit.i 3:1 aatellite- bCing-iocàted in- areas: remote from- tbi appear to-be -itatiOnify? . userat . 1.SYnchronOus- equitorial 1: transmitter power is requiied 2.Near syribhionoue 2.Greater -security 3.Medium altitude 3.Reduction, in the number of antennas 14. POlar- ", ItedUction., interference , Whieh power sourbe isconsi:;deredi cal =Choice for satellites?, . . , -SOlar cells Fort iteMs 4-19/thrOugh .selebt-.from-emumn - 2... 8"U:rage batteries -the antenna- that it .,describeil in -reollien, A. 3.-A- -colibinittion of sólr cgile,,and 0 _ , a A. liescilVtione '. . 'B. Antonini:- storage. batteries . ..,...., Suhlight and energy . . , 149likes n:pirehOric 1. 0/T6q=54 4-14. qhat, .tievel4opsent in "Satellite Ccimisunicar entenna-'60 'feet in" . t idyls imprOVid back.:.up 'power eclipsésr 1.An- increige of' sorer cills4ziOunted .on -4.40.'use's a paizahOl:ig- : 3-' AN/MBr16 the isurface Of -the satellite - 7 antenna 49,rfeet, fn; . _2. Instaliation-öf_ nuclear Power doureis 4.iimeter 44Installation of a- niakel cadMiUis . tattery 1-21.. -.Uses a" OlUmiter' of Eaciosini. solar cells to the- aun con- "0 14 Paraboiib inteinsa . . , tinuotisly , . _ -15.Why is 'zit-el-lite orientation in space so _ 14-22:.Why ,is- it,,üsenti11 that all earth terisi7 important?,` 4itiais.fiave a ciiibinatiOn bt`highnOWered. 1:To me,et the requireinenta 'of -spin' traOsmitters `and IsighlY40.1iectioir:1_, high stabilization ,gain'.isittennas? . , -, . 2.It is a° priitary factOr 'used for bask-, TO overcome- the upldirikliaitations up power - , .2.To-'ensUre eignisls14re 3..'To ensure that '.sunlight_ converging on -to, be 'deteeteCby the sitellite the solar cells is-converted to 3.. To' peit,,dola44,1inliopei-itinli condi- I. electrical power - Within:the -litel.11.4' 14: Because it jessential that the axi- 14 ' Both, 4,*.ve; mum number of the eolar ceilis4 be erposed to the shn and":that -the What unit equipment:4s instil...0.0 satellite antenna be. visible to. municitioUs -aatelliteg aliaw Chadians apprOpriate eirth Of -the 'spin alit -Or ,peimit" Monitorilt of . the -Operatiiiirctelditlionsr:Withtn-a-liatel- 4::16..A Small part of the total radiated energr lite? - of spin-stabilized satelliteii Aiirected 1.EzoitertaodUlator toward -the. earth by' Onb6airi 2.Power. :spiffier 1.antenhas thit, radiate in Atil 3.Telemetry tionsAirotshd- ihe "spin , 4.Axial jets 2.sOlailbelle around the -periphery 'of 3.pulied-,raciii; 'jets Ocial jetik. 4. 4-214. Which -earth-Nsriihill(s)' 4-31.The JA-111-Sitellite keration Center/ . 'Naval Tilecciikainicitiona CoamificlY allo= - table, ina narnally 'be. ;aiSembled'or .-disientlia. fa less than tit, hoisrs.,by' ,-. cites lialry astigned operating time to well 'trained. eXpirienced oresa C.Aile/Cits ) .whi.Ch4in turn deeignate Ak/MSC446,-: pairs' or earth 'terminals to uie -the 2-. 'AN/TSO.i5(4.. aesigned tine. 3. ANIrs-c-9 , 1.3 A. /air/ sAellite 'Operation Center; )i4 i.' Both .B. CAMS.. . 2.-A. BaVy, Satellite NeratiOnCente.r; I425.The earth terminal-designed for:nee CAL.% 3.A. ,Navai. Teledommunicat ions commanir; , the shipiOlid link.. 'is° deeignated4 i., AN/SSC-6 0.ro 2.AN/SSC,* Naval. TelecomthunicatiOns Comman4, 3. AN/TSC-54, -B. -c*" 4. AN/MSC-46'. . >. . eatellite inra 'orbit par- 1 . 4-26.;he:extent Of diffiCulti'in acquiring. . tieularly Placeè severe requirements on- and trOitne To. sate/lite is determined- . the -aequieitiOn system by. a _ground System ,. ,d largely by, the_ equipped rnith i3erge antennae. 1.' earth terrninal antenna . 1.equatorial br ,pnlar =Z.3 satellite-aerbital:parimetars- , 2.mediUm. altitude "Or-eiliptical 3:- .slOw relative. inotiOn of the satellite. 3. *relatively xapid .changa in .poiition: 4f sYnchronous or-,near,synchrOnous Why '14 it. -more diffictilt taacquire and: yhat -tharacteristic'of a; satellite effecte .'-`4=-27. trick satellites:in e/liptical Orbits? the dotan..link irequendi? 1.BecauSe the -"satellite 'is °stat1Olicry. 1.Antenna- Point. ndata 2.Umiak of the eibwmoverient of 'the "°'.. 2.Orbital geopetry7 satellit e.*' 3:Acquisition sistem 3. 'Because-of thexi/quires:lent to keep. 4.Bearing, and elevation the narronbeam anterma Jointed.,-- towarci3he" satellite 14.73k. Satellites:in (A. near 'synchronous/ 4; Because' of the, wit' changes in- Orbit exPerience the . ,position laXgestionalleit) frequencY variationi. 1.-A. near *synehrdnotis ; 13-*largeet 14t-2,8`; InfOrmition -shoving tile calculated 2.lc" near synchronoui; 3. aMallest. ,posOlons of a. satellite *t reghler inter- , 3.A". elliptiCal; B. lirgest , A. elliPtical; B. Jimallest . j Of tine is celled's/in . table. -1'. ePherieris 4-35."The antenna. pointing infOrnatiOn -that' As 2., -aciiiiition generated-by comparing, the ,direction :of .. Predidt Ion the antenna-41s with 'the- diteation_ from . 4. parimeier ,4 which-an- actual aatellite.-Sii4f- is 144§y, only important local coordinate of reeeived -is referred to ea ,polition to*acquire radio .contiet with a 1.Trequincy "Contr.6,1 satellite. la ,* 2.timing, Control 1. -..tetlo:61.4 artd elevation 3.. , eutonatie tracking" ...2.yelocity nand bearing .' 14. Progriuimed tranking- 3.0 44,4:ration and'bearing . Since. uncertainties, such-as poor 'itmos-; .4. ',,direstion,..and _velocity, pheric and ionoSpheriahenciing .of radio A.t et:yds:Lig is 'Ion- 4-30.What ?Oust be t intO.'coneideration..in wave 'Edit, AuttneatiE order to- mikOkit use ot sateliths? side-red _unsatisfactory and not used.- I.Failure of electiOnth equiPment, - Noatelii:te in'cOMmon view of certain 14-3T. Which of the following 'function!, répri-;* pairs . of ground stations fOr minute!, cents minimum satellite-outage tine? or hours. at a -time 1.Sieving the earth terminal antennas 9 Varying -and contingent -needs. of users 2.Acquiring, the satellite 5iial 14.. -Bach Of the above 3.Checking fOr circuit Continuity' ikli Of 'the above ' 24 WiUch stiiiient helpiT Identifies the 14.7144. .31hich statement -belbw, -beat ,describes the . - -reason:a:safeilite may itot..be- available advantage-of satellite COMMunicitions in ;Ind. adde Aii;.oytage time. , tenne-of r..Uniat is factory,programmed tracking l. '-<;certain..earth terninats are'-housed 2.- Teo' nr.more earth: terminale, ncCupy vine-and can -be-tianaported, to resiote., the- COMmon hOlume -of the link terminal Areas , 'Ian-tenni Minter,/ satellite- cemaunieitiofir arc 3.Bun&iiig of satellites With .gepa caytble oi. handling- hum:11;03'mi Voice 4.,Drift velodi ties -Of "earth. terthinals- -Channels . 4 The antrIna- group of any earth` termi- _ .can-Ve'sfounted-nn,_ a 3214p weather deek, Learning Objective:.ftecOgnize the role " 4.;A high- degree -of ,Proteeticin to jamming -or:Satellite casmatiiitations and Iden- is erfórdekby ihe highlY.direetiOnai ,.tyfy the, advantages end limitatióna.- -antennas at- earth terMinals 4-45. .What determines: 'the. limitations of' Whiah citlyie,folloing links is NOT con- satellite ciimennicatiOns system? -5.eOnientional ,theans of .communi- 1.The- satellite teChnicb: Character= .0 datiopei, , i.Sitellite -2.,The sailites Orbital parameters /if radio 3.The', satellites low -gain' antennas -TropOspheric seater BOth 1 afia. 2, &bpi* crewthe . C -401 _ Whet application* satellita,cOanannice: . - tin* resioutais offare More reliable; eon- Learning -ObjectiVe:. /dent ifY Chasse- astniCitioni.and is. lees euhject to, -teriatice elentroMagnetic wives .dateciiinf and..factOrs *fleeting. wave Tropaga-' dontingency OperatiOns. tioe. ob.jeative- cOntinuelln. .2.;'Collie/1d aid contrOl aSsignment 5-.1 .3`. TaCtical DCS-long-diatince 4,41.Whia "Oft the .f011ohing is/are.,Cansidered' Wow 21. unique advantages di Satellite communida- AR ATMOSPHERET ,. -MTO tionti? - PORTION OFRAMO WAVE. Satellite ,linki -are affected by ,Propar' INTERCEPTE6111Y -Winntime- abncirmalities " only part of the NEc,EWINS ANTENNA 2 Satellites',offer greater reliability A D., and- flexibility "- TRANSMITTING RECEIVING 3: "Satellite links are -capable --of , ANTENNA - ANTENNA cohering greater range-With 'the !, numeionsi repeater Stations ,E 4 Each -.Of 'the abohe TRANSMISSION TaawstassON' , LINE 4 LINE, , Thereliability or active eatellite-COm- , municationbsyetems -denendent !upon ,which or-the 'following -ConsideratiOns? The equipient employed 2. The ski-11-of the oPerating and ftecznign -nance personnel 3: -Reflection or- refraction of :satellite- frequencies 4..`ROth 1 and 2 above 14-43 .What is the RP channel capability 'of ,tne 0 Figure 'IA.BasteRadio-Communication Phaie / satellite on the-down link? - System 1.One ,- 2, Two 3'. Four .4. -.Unlimited channel capabilitY 25. 4-54. 'Eddy Oriente are set up by an_induced Mhich tolOonent(4)-1n,figure4A,generate(i)- energy in the form OlfaleCtieligaitic Vo/tage in theiarth cahiedby the, ,waVei? paisige Of . 1. 100-weves, 1. A 2. k&B Z.' 8;04nd-waves ,space-waVes 3; "C 3. 'increased" ehergy- U. -B`'& 1 Whatimit of ihe energy radiated by,-an 447. How many'ellesCan a radio .Waie treVelin 4-55. entenniPisses throughtbe'troPoiphere' one second? ^ ,o and is.acted.on by'the ionosphere? . -1. '1;86o I. -:SkY-WeVe 2. ,. 18"600 2."Sround-,wave 3. 186,000 Suriaae wave 4. 186,000,cfoo 3. . 4. ".4ace'wave. 4-46. The ability. of,a-receivertbemplify.weak si#nalt iZ a meazure 4-56. yhich'of the following,situations affect Athe quality:and distance of electrpniO -1. .,seiectl7ity. transmisliOns? 2: Sensitivity. - 1. Ite.rOtitionnf-the sun on its axis 3. ,entenneconfiguration, The-annual.couree ef-the sun' around, 4, field strength 2. theeirth spots Which Of thefollowingConditiOns may 3., line-development of sbn -4-4.9. the.ndmher of ions Preeent in the caute in uninteiligible'signal?- 4. ionoiphere.- 1. Interfering si#nals 2. ,NOise The,number-orlayers,in the donoiihere 3.' Tranamlision-line lossei, 47'57. their heighti,and their iOnizatiOn 4. .Each Abf-ithe-ibOe . (ileCtron) deneityliary, f Which,type..ofieve iviaost eatisfactOry i. with the ntimberof iongipresent .453. ilonnt,Otaii4present 20g-diitanee commnnicatiOni? 2. Adth the 2L-'with the;efrefigthradiaticin frok, Sky.ieye the sun 2. Proan4 wave 04. both geographically,and,with tile 3. IhTfiCe'Weve , Ground reflected wavelt 14.48. The-sky iseve"portion of.alOng distance traniliesion at 15 HHZ,durint.daylight 4-51. Redid ground'weves follow the curvature ,of thwearth,because-of theaffecf of "inittriiimostlikely be fefieeted by the 1. abiorption 2. \ditfraction IFI:layer 3. '-reflection 3. 4. refractien 4', F?-1.eyer - $ - 4-52. -The phendienon Where part _Of the energy 4.59. :The'irequency of oc"onrrence.and degree, ori-radinvave Will changedirections -ofiiOnitation pisporadict varreignifi., frOm the'llne of Sight Pathwhen:it Passes cantlY according to that. produce.it the edge Of sp:00eCt iskhowd-ss 1.; PhysiCal pioeesses 2., its-opaqueness 1. ,refraCtion , 3. .;latitude 2. diffractiom iosiisphiric storms , 3., eddy,tUrrents 4. 4. eteinuation 4,0. Which of the following Characteristics re4leCting: What are the requirementeforutilizing , could result from partially ' .ground waves forlong_range_ommuniCations? spbridic k? Seid6TOTEIItipith interference 1.. High frequency & highllowfr Favorable iodg-distance tranemissión ,.2. High tiletlyency & low-tooter' 6 2., tow frefidency & high power at verihigh frequencies 3. Coeloca- 4. ,Low-frequency4 low power 3. 'Short distance transmission tions.thatlioald ordinari1 y0A ine skip zong Each of the above 26 e2 9) tj0 14-61. The most- highly -ionized of -all layers aid 4- Tile distance between the 'farthest point , -the most important for IfF .paimunicationti thettheeound wave extends froi tbA is the transeitter and:the fiiii point where -.the . laier skyWaVe is riturned.by refraction from 2. 'E ,layer the ionbSpheri is cilled.the 3.. EllsyCr 1. Area Of bestreCiptiom 4. layer 2. skiP distance 3! -Skip lone Which Of-the tollowing.characteristics is- 4 Saturation area true cOncerning the iOnosphere? 1. It acts. as,a Conductor 4-69%'Which-of the following.conditIoni is edn- 2. It sbeorbs energYyin.specifie amounts Aidered*MajOr problem in electronic 'irosi the ilecirOnic Vave 2recePtion2 at refracts ground Vaves.babk.to-the 1, MindOM variation in.vive pOlarization - earth, 2 5èletiO nloim FOT too cloaz to the 4, The-ionopPhere does by detraction '" MUF what Vatter does to a beam of light .3; Irregnlar.iariations of-the ionos-phere d :4. Fiat* Which of the: folio4ing cOnditions depends on the amdUnt of reiractiont, 4-70,, ijalmt is*one-Method.of oieradming the 1. The-Mngle-at which the sky wave Prohlempf.a. received Signal that varies- strikes'the ionosphere in intensity over a relativelY short 2. The frequency,of.the wave .Period 3. The ion dendity I.DiVersity'reception , 4. All of the iboye, 2. Octibine the audio outputs 3.'Feed twe Separate reeeivers, 4-6u, The highest.frequency that can be sent '.4v :Place tio antennas.a vivelength.apart \ .direCtly upward,and.be returned tb earth '1 by,the,ionospheric is knovn ilthe 4-71.- What causes-ducting? \, , for that layer. ' 1. IOnoiiherie storms- 1.maximum usable frequenCy 2, Temperature inversion 2. critical frequeocy 3. Frequeacy flUctuitions 4. aee-elehay,masiei. ' 3. vertical frequenct 4.- refractive frequency 4-72.'What propagation techniquemarbe Theellectionof maXimum ussble'frequencies employed to-attend pu transmisSione - (MOP), for fixed,:distinee transmissions impoutltbellorizon? at specified timee dePends Upon 1. Tropospheric,scatter 1. atiositheric temperature 2... Ground reflection 2. ionospheric iOnimation, . 3. Atmospheric refractien 3. tropoipherie humidity, 4. IofiOapheriemcaiter 4 'stratospheric-Pressure a 4-68. The-highest frequeday that yill be. iretUrned tO mirth ai the desirid"ldeation 'is-knoWn ai.the- lOvrefragtion Irequency 2. APeeffieefreqUency 3 ; maximuMusahle frequency" .4 frequency of Optimum *Mlle, .4 " 4-67. ;:lhe-distanee from the transmitter to the neSrest,point' at which the refracted waves '.returntolarth:ls:cailed the 1. ,skip,distince 2:skip zone 3. ground-waveraige 4. arei of best reception I 27 7 .6. .10 IMP ..... RECEN074 TANSMITflNG SITE :SITE , rigure 4.-ScatterPropagation. 'Wbat effect willAin igereigi,in;$hte: A , 4-75. wWbich of the.folloVing.conditions affect .ingle-roresentettly.poinf-S-ctigure ihe aeiection- ot freqUeneies ior 0 . 4thave-on.the reeeived'iignilt" communication in the-WSPAiend? 1. The.received signal Vill increaie. 1. Propagation conditiOns ,2. The receiVed,Signai,will deereaie 2. Frequeney.availabilities 3. Thcreciived'signal Vill r6t be -3. Trequeney authorization affeciesd- 4. Zsch of.the aboVe- It is not POslible to determine-what effect this eilI havi'on the received 'signal Theiropospheric scatter signal often is p 'characterized * very rapid fading-caused .ty - 1.-turbulence in the atmosphere 2. the-angle:sof-the trensmitted beam 3. multillath iwojiagation. 4'eitreie,pith lengths u - ( A 21! 26 4 a .0 0, Assignment Communicati n tWfm.Fropuk,,ation-and.Antenilat,(continuid4 'tc-mmeitters and Receivers': FaCilitiesControIoinerationt _ Textbnbk pages 117 ihroUgh 154 4. . Will tranifer 547, pF trarismission lipe ,energY More 'efficientlyat ----Le3:11.1 nt-Gbieettie-Cconp.nued)::. --47. higher frequenciei - fy- characteristict-Of "thé freqUencr_for which theline electrOmagnetiO'veVis and-fact:Ors: -is-designed ,affecting WaVepropagation. : relatively low fregnencieS - .4: Medi* treqnencies selection,:regardless 5-1. The key to frequency A "dipole" is bestcharacterized as being .of thetime -of day-or pightNs. the' condi- a/an antenna. tion Of the (A.troposphere/ionosphere) 1. , quarter wave , (B. over/midWaY betWeeri)-the twostations. 2. half wave I.'A. troposphere:13. 'oirer Ling wire 2.. -A-.-trOPOapberei B. midVayloetween 3. 4. unidirectional. 3. A. lonOsphere; B. Oyer ° . A. itvicaphere; -B.' midway'petween . 5-9, :Thequarter-wave'antennm,-ofien Used-where spice is limited, lia*,known as a/an 14avo3.ungthof a-radio.wave is commonly . antenna. expressed in. 4.- Vee-. 1., 'inches 2. Hertz ' . 420feet 3. ' long wire' meters 6 3. 4, MO.coni Cr h.slues 0 . , Thd most comionlyUsedkfitenna for-navale !the position of an antenna.withrespect, 5-10. HF pOint-to4oint camiunicatiOns is the to- the-earth is termedtile .1. terminated-Vie xediation -pattern 4' I. . "2. .conical monopole 2. 'horizontal cr 'vertical polarization- 3. broadband Sleeve . 0 3. Magnetic hOrizontal rhombic lilectric field' 0 a:rhombic antenna_may 5-1I.o The-psi-forma-nee-Of be liproved by which,okthe-following The twotypes of antennapolarization,give- _ when they Methods, if. any? about the sametfieYd-iptena'ty: wire-te are Iocated,it.least one wavq.ength above 1.! ItyUsing-MOre-than aiingle - form-each-leg- , -- - the- . F end-spacing ," 2: By adding a aedondwire radistion'pattern is thelborizentiliy 10 feei apart 5-5. If an antenhei Vertical lenith Of , altered lb that it radiates.inonly ope 3. By reducing the .direction, it is said tO be ,each leg 1., unidirectional 4. NOni of the aiiove-Will addtotlhe 2. bidirectiOnal performInce "3. semidirectiOnal Which of thefollowing types of comMuni- omnidirectional 5-42. . 4. -Cations is not aprimary%applicatiotr'of. the Sleeve Antenna?- W.bat device.is used fortransiitting tar 5,6. 1; Ship/shore/ship guiding electrical-energy-froarone,point 2. Broadcast to another? 3. Roint7to-point - 1. transmitter 4. Groungairiground 2. receiver, .3. antenna 29 C. o I. V 5-13. Which or the Tollowing tytea of shore 5-21. For reliable communications, it is aiationeeteni4ui, ire-also installed,on necessary for Ali tropospheric scattEr ihiisf -Systems,t6 employ 1- ,Rhombid-end'conicalelonop'ole long wire-antenua system; 2. Rhoibic Aun',1 Sleeve f, 2. line ofeight traremisaions 3. SleiVeand-conical.mOnejole' 3. on-off4eying 4. Rhorgbia,, iiieve eitd-conical_MOnopole- 4., diversity reception z 514. On what frequency ranges_iei vire -5-22. -What method,of diversity reception-employs traOàmittingantepnedesitned to'onerate the technique Of illueinating two dif-P abioardephipf ferent Scatter voluMes in-the triopospheret I. lOw.and*ditna 1. direular,diVersity 2: i4edium e.nd high 2. Angle diversity 3. .High,endvery high .r Rpace-,diversity 4. 4ery-liighend ultra'high 4.. ,Frequency diversity 5,15.- The wire for-vire antenna! 5-23. Which-ofthe following entennas_operate aboard ,shiprdifters frointhitiased,for over-ah eatremely-iiidefrequency range? shore inetaiiitioni in.:that-shipboard' 1. Sleeve antenna wire. 2. Iog petiodic c. 1. IS phiiitilly longer 3. Conical Monopole 1 0: his ,elargerdiameter It. Parabolic 3._ has-a-smeller diameter 4, -iemeds Ofsolid, unstrindeCcOpper What la-a dietinct advantage of the . , tOtatib1e4ersion-01the-LPA compi'red-to. 5-1. What is 't)' best lticatidt for' creceiving- the hxed LPA? antenneaboard shipt 1. The abilityto rotate the array- 1. Asmetirthe'trenamittingentenna. 366 degrees es pdintible: .2. The ALFA can be Mountedon-steel 2. As far !roe thetiansmittiAglintenna,, toWere or utility poles _ asopoasible*, 3. -the phYsicalform otthe RLPA re- 3- Near the eiittei,' of-the qiiip - quire! leap-intenna are& 44, Away-fromell Vertical ProjeC4iona The RLPA can be 1.1464 inehip/shore/ . or in.point-to-pOint cOMMuni- 5=17. 'What is-the deligned frequencYrange of tCations :the inVerted One iitennit 1.. yu only many.cOntintrie circles.m4e,up the 2: 1LF onlY It*? MIF-onW The,enkire 4F-spectrum Twd , 2: Three- . - , 5-18.. Which.oflhetollowing enienneeere used _ .inliinsportabie,-_coimUnicationeytitims 4. FiVe, fibdreterrand_shop instillatione?'- 1.' WhiPenienna What actiondo arealtake to restore 2. Sleeve inbenna cOmmunications when one of the high 3. Farapolic antenna frequency antennae aboard-your ship is' Xagi antenna 'severely daTaged during heavyveather? 1. 'Perform emergency repairs to and 5-19. ;kat is the 'usual lengthof HF Whip reinstall the-damaged antenna Ihtennatt? 2. Install a iempOrary,-eatergency 1, 21 feet Antenna- 2. 28 feet S. -Remove the end of the transMission 3. 35 feet line-from the damaged antenna and' 4. 40 feet connect it to the nearest undamaged:' et. antenna' 5.20.-Why ars-whip antennas so widely nsed't 4. Connect an insulator to one etilifof the 1- 'They are inexPensive" damaged antenna and-raise the antenna 2, Tilt/0. rtipiri.,min4044pace away.from the deck 3. They areeimple' to install 'Each-of the above reainns ) 30 IF 5-27. Which endef an.emergencY antenna is 5-33 Whet part Of a transmitter supplies aiticilici to the-equireent trinsaisiidn -energy which is radiated-by a transmit-, iine and-when?. ' 'tincantenna? 1: The iniulator eild, before the antenna 1. Fewer itspply hie:been hoistad-and sechred- 2, *safer. 2. Thi.intulatet end, sifter the antenna . 3: Osaillator has heen_heisted-andliCured 4. Power amplifier 3: The-alligatOr lurend,-*befori the intenna-hat-been;hoisted_and secUred 5r34-. -one.ofthebasic differences between low' lug.ebd, after-the and higirptsWer transmitters is the,nUibir of steges. aiienna.hia,beem-hoisted,iiid-secUred'. 1. oscillator 2. _buffer 1. amplifier \,Learnine;Objective: ,Recognizethe, -4. *reamplifier 4rinciples and-.Chaiactiristies-of -60mtiniCationstransmitting_and receiving eilisiOmene. 5-28. Whatiethe purpnise of a reeeiveri 1.TO receive Ant -verify thi,aisdio-,,, -frequency- signal 2. TO xeject undeeired_lrequanciesl' inte11igikle-elit09' TO ini*.yr pOtential to-04- ,-Antes14-19anOli'pyricpose,cif receiidng ioice-transelee1Oie fros,au,* triMemitter - 4.. TO OrdvideAhi signi1s:neceesary to mOdUlati-inAF-Carrier 5I-29; yhith-pi thefolldWini ridio conr siuniCstiesuswisAised-firitt' ; 1: Centiquouelwiee (0) .g ",2.. sO4u1sie41(AM) 9 3, FreqUinCiaedniated-(P0)- Fi1Urc5A r tirgotelephone transiitter block' 4. Singla*ideband-(SSI) 5-30. Which-A:if theloilowing chareetwristice 5-35. Whia coipeeint Of the-transmitter-in -ia-consfderedYan-adVantegt of-CW-trans+! --figure 54 cdmverts the au6eAsound) input Into 4iiiipondinceIectridaI . aisiiont 1. lifide,bandWith * energy? Oscilletor. . 2.ligh4begree'ofinTtSlligibility 2: iiiffer: 4. '14cWoftherahovi- , 3. ,Microphone 4. -00dulafor 5-31. The Part of a.trinliitter that,genarates-4 beeic radio freqUeeiy (F) eieigris-ike. 5-36. On,amplitude sioduletion, What situation 1. -buffer 'listed-belOw-Occurs-if the :adulating 2. -okfllator Signal is absent? F. 4 contintioUs IF carrier is radiated- 3. -Power-suppiy, 4. :poelsr esplifier by,the-antenni. * 2. the Oarrier is supOrespea 6 5r32. The miit that amisitifiei the-Oscillator 3. ThaRF cirrierie varied carrier passes only io the ". 4..14oel anci-lsolates the 'Oscillator from -4. ths Seplifiei 'Siege. is celled the buffer'stage 1.-buffer 2: preteCtor 3.: iioiiior mitleigier,_ 31 1-41. What- islthe second harmonic of the fundamental frequency°4550_1(Hz? 1. 217-5-kHz 2.', 4350-kHz 3. 1700-kHZ . A. 13050 kHt 5-42. Which of the following Communication- devices-is deeigned to use some of the saie eleitronic-circuits for transmitiing and-receiVing to achieve equipment tom- Pactheis? TransmitterTTedeivert 2. Tranaceivers 3; -bonverter=cpmparators 4. ModulatordelOdulators -of 2 to (B) _ , . Figure,51-- 8Si-transmitter block diagram. , megacycles. , \ I. (0 aity ,(B) 28 Which component Of the tranedittefin 2. (A) 10 kw(1) 32 - figure 5B caibines.:Cheauctio inputfrom 3. (A) 100 Kw (B)- 28" -the,frequency generatOr tOiOroducetHe 4, (A) 190-Kw (B) 32 , two aidebands, and-thdh suPpresiesthe \ carrier? 5-44. The interiediate power asiPlifier section iOdio-aaOlifier of-the AN/FRT-40 considis of the dedifieC 2. -BSB-CeneratOr . of the AN/FRT-39. 3. Mixer 1. powef amplifier itage 4. Frequency-Multiplier 2. antenna tuning-controls 3. Ooder-araplifier.atage and'antenna- s, 3,38. Whit is the-definition.pf"hsfmonic"?- \ -tuning Contras 1. A spurioUs end-mhdesiraae radiation . ` 4. relay and indiCator control pane/ cadsed-by!faulty eqakipment \ 2.A.OhenoMenon,that al-1Owsradio-waves -5=45. he-princiOle fundtion of the A14/FRT=.39 of eeftain frequencies to be detected .4 to-piovide long range comiunications randomly throughout'the-frequency by the . type-of operation. spectrum 1. CW 3. An exacf-dultiple pi a Andamental 2. -f equency-shift carrier 4. Athinlylground crystal used-to 3 in ependent-sideband . generate-a particularfrequency- 4. sin le-sideband , 5=46. Which of: tie following Operating require- -- Infordation for- items 5-39-m16d-5-49i .. The fundamental frequency of's radio- ments is-the principal basis foi selecting frequency (R.4) Oscillator is 15 -kHz. the AN/URC-32 for instillation aboard a- _ . particular sh p? 1. FM Communi,iiton 5=39. The R-F oscillator.ginerates-1 true fourth. 2. iong range Communication hardonic at a freqgency of 3. Short, range CoMmunication 1. 30-kHz 4. low power inpd 2. 45 kHz 4 3. 604Hz 5-47. What is the maximum ower output rating 4. ,75 kHz of the AN/WRC-1 tran itter? e 1. 75-watts 2. 100 waits' 5-46.-What is-likely-to be the highest-tr 3. 125 watts harmonic frequency generated bythe R-F 4.. 50500 wattswts . oclao-taegiiateeg_eeloscillator-at-a-eignificant_eaergy_levell AA. 300 kHzkz 22. 455 kHzkz _ 33. 600 kHZkZ 44. 755 kHzkz ,32 5748. Ineddiricnr to-having an interconnection theAN/W1C-1 radio iet Consists,of a- 16 KCS l., trinanitter and_a rieeiver_ 16,KCS 16 kCS. ISKCS 2. trinseitter, a reCeiver, aid an-R-F aeplifier 3. traisCeiVerend a sidebaid generator 4. triniceiver, a Sideband generator, _ and guili-F &uplifter So-thit en antsfina,can betuned.WithoUr causing Unwanted radiation, a .(A. remote control unit/duilly:antainna) iivcennected tethe:(11,-7Output Of-the trahamittor/ , transuissioirline). A.-remote'centrol ueit;e B.toutpur_14 the transmitter 2. -A. rinote'conirol unit; llñá Figure-SC-Bandwidth Characteristics of- I. treneufsaien lour typeeof Feceivers 3. A. 0100 entenna; outOut of tbe transmitter I. The reo.bandeidths:in figUre SCthat are 4, A. dumiy"antenna; 2.:7+4-..). -5-!54. abet charaéteristic/of commercialbroad,- 3. traiimiision line A ceitteceiverieri-lettered 1. A and 3 5-50.-14' beat frequenCYoaciliatori i required for 111 reCeivers which are r ceiving 2. A.and-li- 3. -Land C 1. A4transuiesielli 3 and.D' 2,, F-M trinsniesions 4. 3; 4-M ireniaiesions 5-55; 'Which of the receiverswhose bandwidth-4s. 4. cfuti:Ositissiee, shown in figure SC is tuned thesharpest? I. A \ The anteena,O1eriteiver'eXtracts only- ofelentromigneticenergy r-a,signai Voit agethaileissaeured in- terns ol a fee nicrovolts 1. The process.ina radioreCeiver Which ellIivoita 5-56. 2. combines.an Oplified'R'signal4P with tbe 3. ififts Outpbi-of a local Oscillator is called: 4. dOian Volts 1. modulation:, ' "heirodyning The usaeure'of a receiveeiOeffectiveness 2 5-.52. deteCtion in-amplifying weak signal& own is 3; 4. reProdUctionN 1. 'selectivity 2. einsitivity 3: capture ritio - itabilitY ii,a 5-33: The selectivity of it receiver aeasure of its- ability to- 2 1. receive-desired-signals and :reject all others 2. enkl.ify weak Signals 3. receive die-tent Stations i 4. perform all Of Oki abovelfUnctions, -` , . 33 -RP MIXER, AMPLIFIER 6 OSOLLODR Figure 5D -4194-diagram of a giUperheiterodifie receiver. 'The-miker-ostillatorlitage-of the WhOt friqUency range ii-the 11-451JUBB receiier intigUre 5D-ects to capable-0 receiiing? 1; .r4MO*4 audio-Modulttion in-the.ILI 1., -241Hi tO 32 MHz , iniermedieti-frequenorli=0 sign 2. cOnvert ths,radiorfreqUincy (r4) 2. 241Hi-td.30:7MHz . f signalto-6:fixed intermediate- , frequeney(i-f).:!..-- _ 3.- 115-MHz-to 15641Hz 3..'ilitei Out the'intermediéte- 4 , fiemiiney,(1.--aaarrier . 4. 225 MHz:to 400:MHz 14. 44,6t the.rsaio=tiflueney-(r-f)of the deSired frequeney .542. WhichL4f the-,l'ealdwing r!....ceiral: is a , 0-58.Theti.--0.o.recei-liiF-Rz390A/UthiroVili4 10.1131 'State, -general -Purpose-IF-receiver-- reeeptiod-of which of- the following iniendod,priMarily for Operation in-fiked CW .* i. 11-1051YUBB 2. .0SK 2. 11,1401A/G_ 3. SSB' 3: ,A4414/uRE Each of the' aboVe Media ,. 4. Ar001-19A, / 5-59: Which mOde of operatión-requires use of 5-63. Which,characteristi$ below is available ihe-CV 591? with the'li -1414/UBBleceiver,. but is not 1. CW available vith thelf390A/URE recei'Ver? 2. FSK 1. RedUced Size 3. SSB 2. Cooler operation I. mcw 1. A digital electronic.frequency counter c1,41PlaY -,5r6o. WhiCh_s#stamtamed'beloW tt used-pritarily 4. Tech of the aboVe for the reception*, multicbannel ridio, teletypewritertransmistions? 5-64. Superior frequency Viability is an impor- 1. Audio.spaue diversiti 'system tait featute-of the P 2, Space diversity-radio'telletypewriter 1. A1!/spR=.19A .:37--Singls if-de-band-radio teletyilevriter 4. cw . 3: A -2,414/un -4. -591AluR- -34 32 if anY, 5-70. Whichof the folloWliglactors, 5-65.. How-dews the CVA-591A/USR single= deteiainei the coinunicatiousystea_pro7 used_in,conjUnction sideband con eiterf vided.everk ship or itation? Al#11 eaten 'd CoamuniCatiOns reCeiverc Mission- 'simPlifithe Unini of-single-sideband 1. -2. Allowance-dictatedby.TOMNAVSECGS0 signalst 3. Siie Of-the activity 1. Final tuni g is done atthe-Converter, 4. Nonerof the-ihoie snOt the re giver ,COntinuous tithing-is done-at the 2. What Is tho-primirktunctionof any converter 571. The,cenyerteriewhe maedwith cemmunication *yetis? 3. 1. 'The aienability Of an informatl,on remote eteitel--aystea _ , al- coutreieare located source, -4. Alf operiii The wissity of-acommunications on the4rOnt panel link 3. ThLefficienttransmission and recep- tion-of iororaatiOi 16-irOvide a:sigbal path hetween,two Leerning-Objectiire;.. !ecognise-the . 4. stations AesPensibilitiee,Of perlonnel Cosigned te.perfori-dutieein faCilititse k r lamirting Objective:,Deteiveine.the - vaiious stagis,Of a ifiati-flpir of a .tel'Oeiy.-operations ig,bec,of the secure comiunicition'systim. vithin tie NAYSECGRU \daimunieationi Cinter-becanie I. theticiiities Ccbtroller sest-be 542..- The incdateg Signe./aoraallreoters.the high17 control-ipace at the 2, thelacithiesoontrblier Coordinates restoration =of elieuitmreith,&Miter- , audio dletribution aniiiiers 1. dietritMtion fl.eyis dePluxiint- 3. *nage traffic 3. 'Conieraion, Upon the,qUality;of\thititinits 4. end teMainal deVicei of-the varibui-sophiaticated-equip- -Meta: that Muit'beliaintainecV encryption, the 5=73. Immediately,.following teletyie signellsted to-the libidh.04reen(C) WOuld-,nOreaLlypertorm red_patch panel , lecilitieetontrol fun:Caen-ate-small 1. 2. black patCh.panel* itationr 3, mUltiplei iqUipment 1, .66Ciunication,SUperyisot '4, receiver , 0 2. CceimunicitiOn,Operctor 3.leaintenende-Pbreennel' 4. Eaci-of'themhove. FundementalreepOnsibilities Of the . -Learning Objectiiii- Indic:ate-features 5-68: fecilities_cOntr011er-vhange froi station Commte all silichboard.operatiOns. tontatioi, 5-69 WhichOftheifollOing-functionavould common to all-receiversiitchboard thefaciliiiii;conireller.Most:lihely 'inetallitions? 4erforia 1. !Webs are installtd_inthcoff 1. FrequencY changes positiOn 2' . 44/PMent,peilormance teats 2. ReciiVeri-Cremlways connected to the 3, °EqUipment.fnitillition vertical rows Of switches 4 Zither 1 ;T:24bOye. 3. linOte-etetionseie.ilways.connected -to tie bOiisontal rowsof seitchei 4 Mach ofthe .469441 RiCognisithe Learning;Objectivet What poaitiow.of each rotatysieitc of the , 5,75. pUrpOne of any cw.imuniaation_ transmitter tanafer'switchboard isPro=' system. vided,for connictiOni to enividitionil switchboardlo.contiel extratransaittet.re 18 .2. 19 3. 20 4. 21 35' o 1, ' ' -.1 4 ,,, ' .. ',I ,'.., i e , -, , , - signment , `. Facilities ,Control OPerationi (corrtirinedv3llerminal Equipment Textbook ,pages 155'throughf3513, /- ' , _ 6-6. ilhat-component in-i diiiersity recePtion .."." ,- ... t,,'',, --. - . Learning Objeetiie: Eetognise-the- skitem_seleetS-thebefterertvo receiver , tees,. functi60,4fid:chiiactirisiloa 7.. ieletypewriter.pulies? -- ...... _ ...... -. . . , , . , . .3 of-keyer/converttreand,converter-, - 1. 'Antenna comparator igrauis. , , 9 2.. Comparator . - - - ; . . ...... = ' . -, '3. "COnverter. ., f= 4 Pit0,ioanel 4, 6-1. Ihe Xiyerend-converter ineCrediOtele- type systimere alWays incOrporated4n =" 'one-piece'of.equipient. Learning Objective(Determine the 6-2. whai ia tbefteetion Of,thS4OnVerter in' *Pone; OPeratinglprinciples and " r tha frequeneyekifteyatena comPopenteofeeultiplesekeiee. 1. Convertemrk and spece400u1ses'leto. , fixed-krequencyee I . , . 2. Conliert,theeUdie signal-intn-deliqi Altiplexinkcan he-defined'ea i systei .. and-spaceAeletype - -Or iinaii4 ,' x, ' -. ., . 3., Convert mark and,space impulses-into 1. misSagee-tO,e`multitude of.stations et , smdio'iones_ , the same.,,t* 4. .Convert variable frequency: ae into mark 2,., twO pr-mere signals,skUlteneousTy Over and space iiPnisee eeinglOF chanhel 3. repaatleeseagee siiCh,sa dia'ti.esi---. . -63.7" A device used-to conreif,teletyievriter eignais ' eark And-apeee signale intedarrier 4." meisages-through emuitigraph freqUencyehift sighalssis-called 1. ,kAyii The Purpose-of a mUltiilex systieis te 2. " converter 1. Aecrease-the aPeed-of,teletyWieneages' 3. iepeater 2. reduce-thenumber of teletipewriters,%, . 4. transformer --reqUired in the corimUniCatienS network!, 3. incieise theeeseage=hindiingpaeiti of radio coneunication Or telet'ype-, writer Channels 2 4 Learning Objective:, .Identify-the 4. eliminate the keyericonverter-équip= . method; of diVeraity Operation. . mini in-the teiet)peWriter , _ tion- . 9 , I-Wee eption-ir- - 6-9. Horeidoeetime,divilioneultiplexing,(TDM) employed on4 ato shore ,t,itations 'because- 4iffer frem frequency-division multiplex?, 1. tramped:lions are lieited to ing,(FDM)V , . . sight distances 1. TDM separatea,signil Images by filter- 2.-fading, Occurs 'in Arens-miss ione at a ea ing; FDM'eeparates signal erequeneiei. 3. the antennas mutit- be,spaced some by synchronizeiraWitching.. . ' . distanceepart' 2. TDM seParates iignal sampleuby Syncro-, , I.'great' power is required nized-sWit6hing;!FDM separatei ifinak ,irequencies.bV. filtering 5. What method of reception is commonly used 3. IDM separates signal:trequencies'by aboard,ships to copy fleet.broadessts? filtering; FDIpseparatea signal . 1. HUltichannel samples.by synchronized switchink , 2. MUltibop 4,' TDM Separates signil frequencies .by ppece diversity ,- Synchronized evitching;,FDM-separates 4. Frequency diversity signal samples iy filtering, 36 t. 34 ; . - , O-16: What distribution4timetetminatea eqUip- 6-10. Iftlai. is the naximtim:fiUmber of channels byAile'AN/F0.-6 and , manta enC,PaiChboardajthet.proceii:bleCk tbat maY be hendIed OfOriatiOni, ANiittzqd TelegrePh Terbina11- 1. 'NOY! 2 , 1. 2. IDP .2. 6 3. -DIM. 3. 16 * 4. ,-,1)P h. 32 ,PhyeiCallyttseparated, demnitiplexes .6-17:. The IDP should he .( A.ANOCC4; AN/PCC="76). frOm. the' DIDP- by At 1east, AncI.operates.'on the; . a towns:ate. Signal .inches Principle cif IA. trecluericydiiision; 4!'. 3,feet , . _ tineivii6n). 3. §`feet .--A. AN/FCC69; B. frequency'divieion 4.34feet- . 2. A. AN/Fee-69; B ieivfs1oy trequencY division ' 3. -A. 'Ariota.,..7o; la 'Width Of- 'the o1low1n stiteMents." is ,A..'AN/PCC-76.;!1... tile division- 6-748. ttue caecerni.ng'distribution ftaMeS? with,vertical blocks 1. ',Ehi,loy. terminating ,Circuit ttntering ,1 c, the Wilding,. 4 Learning. Objective z Determine the, thit 2. The."1Diu tereinate petchbler4 PUrpose of ancrthe 'bake installs- , -piOceSit, claSitif lad 'Oferiaticn tiOn reqUirements fordistributimn Ca-trying, , 3e The t:eriii`tuttiOnot ieireuits fiemes end .patehing facilities. lniorms tion ' the ;same- _ _ distribution Irame Asthoie ,cirrying , unalasaifietrinfóreAtion ii Atrietly Trames serite -12._ What'purposeAo,listrubution forbidden t large coaMunice- ai CoMiUnication 4.. a, CDP' is -used%O.nlYA vile- joatoi of e,quiimentintercOnnee I.., 4 tit* - 64- ' 2. thle, interfade Poi0beimeen, the MAdmimm diStributlan: ' Aide- Sorld end*. dependent uptin, U4t1411- Copauiiica0op, buil'Oni tee; -equipment,taineWireA into,* OPeretors V.> ' 3. The'access Point,t6t -.patch panel imonitor . eaeft Circuit beingiinretAlled' 4-. BOth 2. afid 2.abolie wheneVer poseible the= ingenuity And 'resourtteful'nisi -41E- -a 3, 6-13, 'Whet deaf tlie:! circuit peichboird- thefacilities controller . faCility communication itiatiOn -offer the 4 . -pita_pasel jaeks comtrml Operator? - -parallel to the .diitributiOn'frame 1. i method of rerouting ,ci.reuits " 2. 'Permits oPerator to ,Aubetttute Petchlanel jacks 'are -wired. inVe.Aieriell, equipment 4iirilla0,to the distributioniframe so "."4' point'to Monitor' , 3. 'Serves as-.in access 'that Onder normeIoperetiOn ,patOh'Corda -VW : (i.:ire; are not) neceiiary. 4 . Zach of the aboii .a..,T-series;, B. -are 2. A.eariesT:B.-ere not ------6:.*--Maximum-operational_file*ibility_ 3. .; 'Parallel;1:are ikehieved- by, the installatiOn mf'Circuit 4. 'parallel; B. ate not 'PatchbOarcl and distribnifon. Armee. - , 0 . Which, statement below -properlyidentifies ,Main.Distribu-. 6-15: Whit: is- the pnrpose ot the ;the unClassified blank patch.,panelf ' k ti i oii Tram?, , The 'patch panel with the crypto. trans- 1. ' To eliminate,thi .r'equirement Tor sitter dihput, and cryptoracei4er ,Circuits : patching taeiliti!es -on all put Circuits. 4e,,,poirit liatween v inceming' Ond 2. , To serve,:as- a 2. The patch panel with the .1. within', -iclu4sient 'and4aricnis..spaCei outgoing signal- . incoming tAbuildingz , 3. the ,patch panel :with' the. 'which carry , 3. To terminate 'Circuita receiver -end' outgoing -send:lines information with any send. , '-claisified 4. The patch Panel.ivired .. To: Serve al a division _Pointbetween propeiii labeled, 4`..'s and receive 'de4ice , , comPonent ou..td- the ' - a .c6ssiuni.cationc - outside , 4 - 37 l ea) , istatament rbiloW is .cerriet-coneern- 6=27..:Thet,..,_,,,_7_cords are, uaually dolor .coded ieg Patnhpanelra? ' _ .,, .f-i:Patch panel. are wired':'sci, the k eny 1. :receiver, diVice !ley !)4...3iaeihiict;!to any 2. e4ceive receiVe device 3. -fertestzsen 'Two 'liana.= divines-.0einhet'icigither will 4.,meter nauee-4 visual and audible: 'alert 3 ZAny send,deVice petehet to t. _4=2E. tke.- meter-button- located on the. end of the patch-penal dud shelfis used with -alarm . whicik.of the-follesiing patch cordi? Any; receivei/levit4,-nitehed.to' a tend' ''tesi 'device vill .caust a. visual i1at - 2: Meter and enema Otilf 'tatching . '4. ZIA -Of the .abOlie Which-, of ;Olt-. foi lowing Itiest of .1,00fOrme:-. woUld.,-;appear- nt'iht eireuit'6-29.thsipetik.cords lonated- in 'the tWo ,back' 'identifination` slip of -a circuit tersdeat- t.roWs 'farthest:00 "fres- the.conttoller fining the "patch penel.ere usually AL.- 1.Teimitil teletypewriter equipment ,,:ereen; f.black) ii-coloiand, aie 2.Pins 'Oh ,,.T12, to-TIP; RING '..to "4-10 cirduit nwebers straight ,thiough repieductions ank. 4. ;:ROM: of thS abciveo 'aigneViit, ewe circniti. , , , 1.A. green;, TIP,'.en. TIP .67.24. /what ,elieene .or:thit leech-panel jenk-. 2.A. ireen;, L Ilk :it. III:: . detail permits monitoring and aoal*iing 3. A". ,B.s TIP ,tn'IP .the .,coeking ;or .outgbingCircuits -wi th- 4.7" A: bleik,;-11. 'R`ING'.te TIP' 'out interrupt** 1.1ie,.klev-of- traffic? 1. NtoiArack 6-30.Which of .:the following statmeents. 2.EqUipMent jack correct conceibing- the autiiolpateh 3.°I:int jeck 'panel?' , y COttfol iwitch 1.The .andio Patch panel operate. In 'a red (nlissified) envirenment..indy" What action would. a iicilities controller 2.DC to- addie convereion is eccomplish- take if it Ifeie.-aeCeliarrPtO cure,Off , ed ,,a`t the audio patch.-penel incosins sigesi flier ketireeii4the- equip- 3.The ieeoncy section: of the audio 'WO slant jaak!eiid'tial thi.f1ine, jack? panel. contains the fteist.equip- 1.Insert t painh nerd in the "Monitor meAt Janke, ; -4.- **keit jacke-on. the audio board Iniert t'netch.cor4 into the- iend are connec tad, . . 3. .-Retatethe :control switch' to the 6 Other than the, absence:of * in the verticral-poiitioir -RED-Patch panel, iis design 4.Rotate fthe.,conttql switch- to the . . cally/Mechanically the same ai the .5tACK horiinnYral poraition pitch panel. 1.eqnipment jacks line jacks 3.monitor jacks ,I.maraing--Objentive:Recognize the' 4.actiVity lamps 'kunctions.,Mf the differrat typei, of, patch cOrdsof a Pettjuciail aP4 6-32.Which of' -the, following, statements true .:ehtiecteiistici=of thi,petéb conceitirag 'the, "SW" tignel? , :1.The SW-Signal 18.1 tined ,pulse it- ted by the' cilitoiarisaiitter. 6-26.Whap.portion of the jack Or ,patab, core.' 2: The STEP :signal. is used;tb, synchronize , causes 'the iudible .and. mieual .stperyitory , the teletype keyboard/TD with the alarms tb ackivate twhenaAmispatch is etyptoliqUIPMenr.' side? ,< 3.The S-TEP signal activates a nlutching ,1.Ring circuit 2. Tip 4% Each cif the -ibove is erue 1.Sleeve 4. -Cord 38' , e 6-40. dhiractere-or sylibpleriansMittedAm-the iTA-72'code tie repreiehtediby-i,aeries4f '-Lesrnirti:Ob$;t4VO,' 40inites , ii*i.-eq0a1 trantitifini end termiMardeViteib- 1. '1 iy004,1-eoae:elesieniv 26,combinatione-ef. mirk-end ipace, "- 3. , -cOdeiet of? leMents' 6-33. Whmclim enditerminal -devices liper.anikeutiutCeletype -equipment A. short and-lowmarkingsignils sepa- rated,by 'short anci,iong epacing aig- - 2: .liodulitiCn-and-deeqdulation.device. ,AnteneivendlAns#:: bile , 4f Either-Tcr72-06Ve' Eicludinglunetiona/ chsiacters, how many .-,ftinfed-aberacters Can-be sfo from.a 0. AeletyPeeriter-heyboaidt, :Learning ObjeCtive: lecognite the" ,26' . ;. "32 CharecteristiC a , 3. '2: A '4. UV. . thit contain iwo digerene. steps' Af; bit of fhe.ACIl eade is a.checkbit orlevele are termed: math. 'weed to ineurerhat 1. *s in eneh chnractii.-tia47 1.° -apace., *teed?: 3. ,digifil binary signals -Start bit 6.4Mtat, signal* 1. ;. :bit '-3. .-Paritkrbit 4=35. Signals-require equipments td reeet to ".NAIWWhich indicate-a paesilie condition 4. Synchro-bit -ind.SMCES anectiVe conditions - . _ 6.73t. ildv-many pulies are generated'for each ",cheraiter iiansmitted of the'Inieriational Learnidg Objective: ,,,DistingUiWbe- --6,..tp,neutral end Odle* operation, 'Taiegraph' alphabet No. .2.(ITA -2)? . . of' Ticteletypeniiter circuits. 1. 4 . 2.' 5-' , J.. 6 6-43. In teletV0Swilier operatien.whenMcycnit" , operirea nivi-Cuirencand no,currentbane, AAhai ter*ii usea:tq,designite theOrCitit? , , , Synchrónizes,the teletype-maChinee ind 1, .6M-OfL . , signals With each-other? 2. Neutral 3. itaat T.Ulie '4,.....fpnits,l' and 2 4. 1,i, Baits-I/and:7-- Which.of the statements listedbelmf con- Onite'iTin,t4 6-44. 4. cerning-neutral and polar operatiOn-As ol -correct?' ' 6-38; Which"Of thi,t4itiwing charatteristics a-teletypewriter, siinal Code-hasvitro 1. A readimret zere-on-a-milliometer qn. 'a indlcite*,a_Complete time duration:,, '..,, ross_of,cutraile -1. 'Narking The noimal i:ciar_operation,in Spacing- 2. 2. NAVSBCGRU is i'60NP 3.--Transition - .COn4ition. 4. mo4ylitiou race 3. Neutral circuits areqtot common Wow is,the modulation rate(signalling within-OCS1 In polar.operation, current is present speed) of aCeletypewriter-signelsdeter-, 4. only-during, a'apace condition, mlnedt- 1. By the uniform lengthening' end , sborteniigef'each unit t 2. By the duration qftranneion tile Learning ObjeAtiver -Detirminl the .3. Sy tbi nunber ofirensitionsper effects various types of'distortion . unit havi= a teletypewriter sigMml. -4; By the nuiber of millisetonds-required to tranerit'esChunit , , '045 In de.termining, the ,quality-of -teletype- 6=56. 'What im the first step'S techniOal e66- Writer ciretiit perfórinincip, trol -operator usually takes,when -bircuit' .'Onxideration-giVen to thesiieeivW. troubitis,reported'to,hiea, teleiY04writer eignali is-thet the. 'ignal 1. Plug ""Orinter into the monitOt jack . elimehti of the circuit in queation dild Verify. , . be,--iikeivedet_precileip.the correct: . the ,trouble RePort the--tre0b1Sto the bifedit 2. be.reidable at thAlteceiVini-diviCe sUpplier, 3. undergOuniforis-lengthening and _ 3. Pluesprinter into the.line pick of, shOrtining during- trinaniesiOn* thccirCuit in-question and evalitate 4.ilba unifOii in length -the :trouble , . Patch-s.test into"the equipmentAack 6-46. What typs:öf'teletypewiiter'distortion of the-Orcuit in question iSsiOneel,bY itmelphOrlt noile,,Powei . line induCtion,, end diniy keying contaCts? 6-51). Seforesimuming that a-relay, is-defective, I. the output'distortion of:the-relay should. 2: Parinitous ,,bscOmpared- with the - - 3.. ZharaCteristic 1. dietortinn of thetest'keyer 41 Carrier 2. output Of:the Patch panel milliammeter 3. distertion-of the input signal.- 4-47,An-example of diitórtion-would -4. standirA-of,aceeptable reley,distor- be the repeated-shortmning of the-fourth tion-MeaSureients- intelligence vnitai the expense,of thee a 2nd inielrigence of's Character'. ""4 mutis the-first Ite0 required Of a, eharacterietic faciIitiei centroller after verifying 2. cyclic,: that-the incóming signal; iS.Substandard? 3. carrief I. -Swiich-to,plaislanguite- 4., delay- 2. Make arePert to-,.,the,circuit supplier ,3. Notify ,ihe distant "tation io iiolate 64111. bncmathod Of preventing, pignal,distor- the problem tion On-synchrondus circuitAisto 4.. ASiume.a defeekive relay is present 1, dean keYing cinitact. , and'ehange equipaients Change-the lengthof -the-transmission line - a. use-the trafismisiioX"deley coMpensa- toi . learning Objectilie: 'Recognize the 4. adjuet line reitys 'function" of tha-Diiital-Dcti Distortion Test Set. , gearning'Objecti4ie:4dentify the 653. The need-for is emOhasized with . responeibilitiei 4-34 a techniea ..the:trend toward-higher transmission --controller-during a period Of c speeds and ihe introduction Of new-modes. Cuit ontage,,and,deicribe the Of-operition-in,communidationsv troublr-shooting procedures-which 1. in efficiSst antenni arsmaployedto-eliminatejoutage. , 2. perfbrmanCi-teiting _ ' 3. betteequaliiy control 4: greater,security 6-49. If outage-sbould,occur.,on-a' circuit, whav is thi,remponsibility:of,the station' heving.the reCeivecaida-of the:circuit? '' Troebleshoot- the, circuit,working 'Laarning-Ohjective:. 'Recognize the -back.mo'the signale.ouree- functions-of the Digital Data Dis- 2.AdVisitheAending station period- tortion Test,Set. "Callif%tok progress:being,madt in .;.ifforte to restore the-ciecUlt o 1. 'Provide tbe.sendinp,station With 6-54. Which unit of the Digital Data'Distortion the reasd4 foi ihe outage, once Test-Set.proviae. simulated teletve the circuit has beerrreitored -signals uied to teXi digita/.data end 4. bo-each,.of the:Above. ,ieletype equiPmentit sc-aa5-(P)Asm g -1-41293--(4/mg,c OS-212/USIC .4. AN/USM 329(V) 40 .111E11111111- . . The -primary difference `between the,AWN*, 6-60. Which of' the-folioWing tatelientii rele. 329. M. 1 test equiPment iad'iha'AN/W1M, tive to atodet 28 reltityPewriter ,equipment .329 0)1; task 4-valiant istha&thal, is. fakhe? - ,AN/DEM- 329,0) .1 rest equipment, 1.it tequiiei, . leialesintenance than 1.` is mOinited, in a caii; the-WEM' 329' (V)-, older models tick ,mcolited- 2:It is not Practical leishipboard- speed use-due to 'ieniitiiity to -Nib tit ien -2..- is lip' di iied te_ aecoledate_ -only wp- to -606,bindi 3. 'It 10, lighter and ,lesir hulky than 3.proViees degree of long-term accuracy earlier- eqUipmeMe net 'keiitle With the A14/UM-329 (V) 2 . .4.It is not oa itoi.y- as-previous.Cypas 4 requires c*Peraiiir ititirpretatiOn of dlitortion -displayed- by the front 641.4.114, keYboard; typing Unit., and tranmaittar. , distrihutOr are tennetted -panel Meter ', series) in the signal line, but aelectioa' s oUtheme. comPonenti fOr eitherindividual -simUltanebus Operation..ia,hz the Learning Objective: 'Describe the (Di selector.seitcht. Ube testawitch).. facilities- Controller ,OParational. 1. "A. parallel; I. ielector.switch .praiticss aid. recognise the donteats 2.A. parallel; test SwitCh. SC the virieua record.. : 3.A.leries; B. selector miffed' r* , 4.A. setiefa; 1. linatest ,sWitch Dew doem the fecilititatentroller address.6.42.What component of the ,A11-UGC-49 teletype- -,6-56. .vriter is- Powered by its ewn.motOr? 4 a distantitation en the-order vire? 1 2 signal's 1.Keyboard 2..Unclaseifiedlixed station' call' ligns 2.Automitic tiper routing, iidicators.. 3.terfOrator ,3. 4.Deparferator .. 4. language cileeignators - a - roi the ,PuiPepe- of_ recording eircUit outages6,63. -Which -..atatelent concerning, the_Model-2e ,eaCh heUr`bf .the radii) day an.thearcuit ' telitypeirriter is correct? , 1:The dommunitatien and weather key7 Performance, Log,.1s. divided into - 'board.' contain letters,and .punctOa- '3 landte segment' .. tionatarks cOmeon'to-jthe Itaddar4 2.10.-ednute:segmenti . ,.15 MinUee eegmenta . tiPeeriter 3. - 2.IE. Speratint speeds:ere limited tO 4.. 30-minute. segments 100 Or 300,Words per-Iinute: one !Piled to another 6-31.Which- item of infOriation lieted below 3.=Conversion' ifieluded.,in.atircuit: outage report? can, Oaly-1?e-icttaiplighed-bY chengiig 1.' DirCuit eXperienciag the outage . _the -mOtor , GeOgraPhicil lecatiOn of Originator 4.8ymbole for transmission oi weather 2. data ire -conteined la ,the-uppercipe 3:reason fir the'putige re.toration key.- of the bettow,two rows, of the Expected tile weather keyboard 6-39,Ai a minimum` requireMent,:how -of taa should beard he 6-44 .',The hey on the- model 28 teletypewriter .the facilities- control "statui kayboardthit xou depresa, to .returs- the verifiedr carriage when- the transmittingsiatioli 1.- 01mi-7:v00'12 ho-ura the 2:Once-every, 24.-.hours has °flitted-the C_Al 1*T' fuettien is 3...... 0nce.mprry 48 thilure, 1.4.00-Clt. Once,:ivity watch- LT-LOC-LT .4 3. WAX 4.,HIT A. rePerforttor differs Learning Objective:-itsdognise the ^ The medel 28 typitig basic ,printiples of: teletypeiriter from the auxiliary:typing riper fora tor in cosmunicitiOns... that the inXiliary typing reperforatOr 1.00.34tell a different kind of typing mechanism 2..produces a different typaof perforated tape . 3.has .no hick.picessethanism 4.hie it. owo,Miperate.maror and a sePaar' rite keyer ia the electronic gerVice assembly At 3 9 .6=66. WhiCh-of, the_following,bosk:401ains the 6-71.-10lich teletypewriter-nat.:00 not,proVide , . lunttion.Of the ifenemittef dialer/buy:4 ' ce0ibilitiee fOr-trantmitting.tioisage?' of the4110e049I- , 1. AN/UGC-49- 1, .0444reifna- : - ANAJGC-,50 I, 3. AN/0004,1 4Y4chroMiiition 4,TT, 471/00. Siehilieeti40. . 6-72. Which,groUief the-AN*0=69 *4004- 647, "which-ef b. Ail/uttl..49=4,pri.Ana-modavot Writer set is 4n-operator Working.with. -60eretiom iiiked-441em, When-hcietiaiing off riplifOrated'fapes,- Charactef.coun- logging thee in.-and then plaang the' ter.-ind the trineilitieX distfibutottp tapes in-ergrid on ifie iend-balk? 14tinoperablif" 1. TT-a366 ileYbeaid 2. TT-308 0 2. ,Kaybdifd-Taps 1. Tta309 3. TT31.0 4. t4AMOoi-the4ove; the'trinseifter 4iatributSr is opeieblein,411 "lades 6-73. 'Thetraniaitter-distributors of the TTa.308:'.TT-310) groui-are-autoeitià et1,0 6-68. Itartieg-fromlie extremes-loft hand-mar- apply,a.sequential channel .(1...*UmberI gin Mith,theeeleCtor-seitch deeignater )to, eichntrgoing message. 'Onsitien, if You tyPe NOW ISMIR TIME 1. A. TT0-108;.3. number 12345 the isidliwnethe-charicter coun- Z._ A. TT=3.04'1. -delignater ter Will*: 3.' ,A. TT-I10; i.nuister , '1. 17 ' 4. A. TT-310i., 3..deeignatot.- 43 2. 19 a . 3. 21 6-74. In-what order-,,:. ii:iny,ermeUtgoing.tapes A. 22 transmitted bY the:iend-binkeperaters/ A-. ic-Cording.to length; along One, 6-69: Id crder fox the Th-colpenentfof the-. 'ihen-eshort one . . ANIUGC-49 to ba,operable, the;ielector '"2. ily preCedence . .4witch mMet,b4 in the"K-T or TAkisitión 5. Ietheerder received °end- a ; 4. Sens 1. theSZNO'keVmustbe depressed . ,4 2. the operatoi mnst firet traniiit'S Which4ronp.of the AN/FGC-59 teletype- - .a.- St 2-CR and 1 LUbilkeybOird, writer iet provide* dupiiEate Copie0f- 3. the-BLANE.Rayedst bedepressed two tapes being trattsmitted.inClnding the, times in set up:e receive Condition channel number ofeech trinsmiision? on-the-circuit 1. TT-306 4 the stari-stop:144er on th4 Th'must* 2.' TT-30S be in thelPIUMNIRLINChpoiitiOn 3. TT-309 4. TT-310,- -6=76: Which of the following fuactions.will the TT-471/UGC *oriel* 1. lioeide a_pasecopy of mmeisges traeslitted er_received a 2. PiinCh a tapeef incoming toWeagee. 3. Priperexipi:Ifer_transmissien. 4; Provide aind capabiliti from a TR, only 42 ft MODIFIcATIONS _ of 'this putilicaaow -hae *UttVeLbein deleted in adapting" this, material fOr iriclusiOn, in, the"Trial Iteplementation of a - , , for Use Vocational. Model SYstem to :Pro:Ada-Military CurriculUta_ -Materials , - 4-- . .'. - , , . , and Technical ,Educatidn..". ll;ieleted umterialinvolves. extensiVe .uae df ' 4 t militerfty forms: procedures, i5-atests, etc. and was not considered appropriate . .:. ) .. - . s foruse in:vocational:andteihnical -education.. 0 . , ft .? A 6' t' # 41 101=20. Which.Mr the folloving,actionsm;UldNOT be inciudeclis,a-Part-Of Operatbr mainte= nineit 0 l.cleaning :2., LubriCation 3: Major part.rep1acement InipectiOn : Whntresulti fred,the-reguiarfUndtional ,tests.and a 44.74.4 recera,of the per-, fOrmanCe dita en-eseh-equipmen04 pOipleie eliminitien,ofequipment in'shiis . ?: Inioiiiti**,t4it'eXPOdOtire-pf reeoUreen,intainielning-ship --; tnereaied,opératienalreidiness-in ships -' -Self ip#iimentingjimyiteiance schedules in-ships , 4 ft In,th43-14fsystem, the 34-Steads for 1. PreVenti've Maintenance; corrective miiintenande,:ana diteria1 -control - 2. maiiteninee,indterialdOntrel, and , .Mmlfunction repairs Letsning-pbjective: beterdine:the, maintenance; materialand,sdnagemeni !Crimp types, and leVeli3Of'001P 3. 4. malfpnOions and-mmteria1 manageient ,meht daintsaince. 10-32. Which are'the major coMponents-Of the 0 WhiChelivefoilikintensacm-has the. 3=heysted? - Planned Neintenanee-SUbeysted end cniabilitYte,undertake Major-overhkul 1. man=hOur-accOunting:syitem, , 2: TlinniChnintenance Subiyitmm and 1: trganizational shipbberd ceordinated alloriance-iitt 2. intermediate 3. Mi1ntenance-Dain-.0iiectien SubsYstem 3. Pep* and-Plinned Meintenancelubsyitin 11% Tender' pnta ColiectionSubsYstem P' - 'asui.ain-hour accoUniing'iyited- 10-27, MdiAtinance:4Ork UbeacComplishe4,11 employing,the ieriices-of-sPedialints. Use thmfolloyinualternativei-for items, normiliy'doii NoT'incidda 10!-33 through 10-35: 1. OrganizationalleVel.maintenance, To define maintenence standards and6 2.4,,inferdediate level MilAtininee 1. preseribe preeediarei e4Minagedent ' . 3: depotievel,daintenanCe maintendnce teChniques uied to;miintaimiquipMent To",sPecify categories, of maintenande needed fer verious eTliPmentmnd estiMite-the cost incurred in-iver- forming-the maiiiinancetOks. learning-OhjectiVel, ,SecOgiiie P To-provide infOrmation,conCerning- miiitenanCe tasks that:are-1A- 3, equiP0mt pal/Unctions and the clUded-in provientiyemeintenincM MaintenanCe that is performed on ' and-the definition,Alcdls%and equipMent Components,of the 344 systeg. ce 1;._ To schedulOind describe mminten -tasks and list tools anctmateri 10 needed'to perford themaintenanc , 1028.' ThatPortion of the,overallOoncept=of: equipment . . .. the mentenince'Ot eleCtrOnic 'which:condists of Checii to-determindif ,10733,Milat is the.tinetion'ofthe- Planned eMaintenance Sublysted? b equipment iirfUnctioninglproperlyMnd vieutlinspections for:damage is referred ce : 10=34, What is the fUnCtion ofAheAeinten to as . . , 0 RequireMent Card ,Oltc)? 0 1. ,scheduled.maintenance 2. preventivemainienance 10-35. What is-the.function of-theMeinte rice 3. -ccdtrolled-deintenance, Data co/lectiOn SubnYited (MDCS)? o . 4. yard Maint,Inam:ce -64 . . or v? . 3 A 10-40. You should neVerPunderestimate the iiportimee-ol even the most minor mainte? Learning_Objective: RecOgniie pance-procedures-relmeiber that the -eleading_Proceduresaand-methOds for -electioniCs equilMmht-andthe, majOrity of failures to electronic iainteSenCe needed tor iir eituiiMent arStriceableto 1. eiceisSiVe heating due tb dirty air - filter* InfOrmatión for itemS 10-36 Imod.10-37: 2. excessive vibration resulting from YOu'arialreParing to Cleanthe challis dirty Shock mounting sPrings- of ii,ridiO'triniSitter. 3: -overloadieg' of cOmpiments due tO fluctuatiOn'in-power YOU begin-Your-Cleaning:tali by: .4. careleas Soldering-techniques_and groMaditiethe-tipacitcris-With- aloPPi-titubltahcatiis praetices- length of copPer.wire-ind rubbing 4114cceisilp* ceniacts- with-..ekery, ImPer 2. -blowing-looie,dust aMik:witha,hand- 'Learning-Objective: 'RedOgnize the belloiaand'rubbiMg-ail aceesisibie care-and Preventive-maihteninCe- Oontaats-With--MierypaPer -requirement of 'teletypewriter,-type- writerS, hea4phones-and'aderophones. 3. tUrning4:111-the=poWir *witches and. :grounding,the Capaiitoravith,a-, _ _ , Ashertinebar tUrningbfr-the-pOeir SWitches-and .10741. Preventive,Mminteninci.actiOns that an ilmeing loose duit away-With iliand. operator imy Oa:* out Cti,a teletype- writer-include t' 1. replacingrdemaged--part* and lUbri= cating-thi-eituipme4t, i0-37. iihat cleaninugear-should you, uietp aean-dUat frawthe chassirofthe trams- 2. Visuilly4kamininuand-manually. mitter? the-equient- eiaiiiimg antreplicing 1. A:hightfeseure,mirlose and a dry 3. -toothbruih damaged'perts.owthe iqUipment mi4.0g-adjuStmeMti-and replacing 2. A,da4rag,ind-w-moiitemettoothbrush 3A AtoOthbrUsh-mokitiMed-with carbon ,demeged,parts-onthe eRUiPment tetrichloride-and4 hand,heilows 4. Apeman tipewriter sleining biush 10-42 . A teletypieriter Operatingaat,C4.-60; end a iadUcleiner. lillawyrds per'isinuie shOuld be-lubri-- cmteCit (B. 2460-hour;-6-mOnth). , interials;.' 10-38: In cleaning a.trinsaitter'siith ayvacuum cleiier, you,find-thatthe-noizle Of, the- '1. A. 604 B. 2400-heUr eleaneeS,hOse'liill.not,reach-Soie dust A.,60;-3. 6 Month' .c011ected ina.noarea thataii,particularly 3, A. 100; 13.2400hour Congested:, ifty:should-move the,duit to , 4. A. 100; 3. 6 Month- more sccies.ible aresrwiththeaid,of a 10-43. iftatmmergencymmintenamce)sey'the 1. 1. hand-bellowe' operttor-ofa teIetypeeriter perform 2. @Mill tipewriterbrush. onthe-eqUipment? - 3. rubber-tube:attached-to a.cOmprissed eir line 1. Iubri-citing and replacing dsmiéed, .steireire%brush Paris 2. Checking'connections.aat-terminal What material must,never be-used-to clean: boards.and cheCking contact sPring or-repair ileCiromic e4uipment? tension- Replacing fuses-aand piiot lamps 1. Soap ,and water 3. 4. Replacing_diMaged parte 2.: :Alcohol 0 iiethYi chlorofork 3... Sandpaper"Or files ' 4. EMery-cloth 'Or iteml -wool 65: - 1, 1040. You shoUld neVer Underestimate the Learning-Objecti*e: lie-cognize imPortalice-Oieven the most minormsintm. cleaning_procedUres,afid:methOdk yance-procedures--remember that tie * for electronics icing:mint endithe xklority-of failures:tn,eleCtronic- MaintenanCe needed fer-air-filteri. equipment are traceable tO 1. excessiVe heating-due to dirty-air -filteri . InfOrmMtion-fór-itene 10-36 and.10,31: 2. -exceisive iihritimresulting_frOm YoOkre,pieparing:toclean the-chiiiis dirty ihock:MOunting _ -. !of t-radio-traiiiitter: 3 mVerlOidinrof coMponitti-duo to fluctuatiOn in-,power 10-36. You begin Youm-eleialtig-teik by -4: careless soldering-techniques-and 1. irOunding,zho-iopmeitors-with.a ilóppy-troubleihooting Prictices length,of-copperwire,anMi* Onitieti vith,imery Patter _ ? 'I:lowing -looser-duet; aWayseith,a hand Learning-Objective:, 'Recognize the heilów*And M-uhhing ell,accestihle cire--add preventiii&maintenanee contiicte44th-- emerY ji.isier requirement ofteletypiwriter, tYpe- tUrning=offlihe-lOwer iiitChes and' writers, heidphones-and-microPhones. _ groUnding*OCipacitors with-a . . ShOrting bai. . 4. tukning,off-the-pOWer switches And 1041. Preientive,maintenance-aCtions that an_ bloWing lnose,dUit,aWay with-a-hind Operator maYtarry out on a,teletipe- beli64s writer include 1. replacing deMaged=parts and lubri-- 10-37e lr,kat cleaning gear should Youuie to Ce04115'f4i440iimiiit cleanidUst fraathe.chassis Ofthe-trans- 2. visUally examining andmanually '" Mitteri testing the-igliiment 1. A-high Preseure air-lOsi-ancia-dry 3. visuillY examining and replacing toothbrUkh damaged- parts-onthe equipment 4 making-adjUitments,and.reflicing_ . A diMpe.rag and a.sioitened-toothbrush damagecyparts-anthe-eqUiPment . kteothbrUshmoistened'iith,Carhon -tetrachloride ind'whand-hellais 4. i snail typewriter-clgining 'iikuilh- A' teletypewriier-operating at,(A.-60: and.a-vacUmaICleiner' 1:00). words' "per-minute 'Should be lubri- cated,st.(B. 2400'hour;-6 10:-.38. In cleaning,a,traismitter-with a-Vacuum intervals:" ,Cleaner; -YoU findtthit the nOzzle-Of_the 1. A..'60; B. 2400 hOur cienner'ehOie libt-riaah,iOie, dust 2; A. 60; B. 6 mofith, Collected in-an aria.that is partiCularly 3. A. 100; B..2400-hour congested,You.ihOuld-moVwthe dust"io 4. A. 100; 6"month. imore-accessible.erea with thi-aidoi a 1. hand,helioes- 1043; What emergencymaintenance-may the iMmlLtyieWriter brish oPerator Of ateletypewriter-perfOrm 3: rubber tube attichedtp & CoMpressed- on the.equipmenti air line' 1. Lubricating-and replacing damaged J. -.steel Wire brush .parts- 2. Checking connections at terminal '10-39. 'What Material mUst_heirer be uied to-clein boards and ,checking-contact spring, tension . or repair-sieCtroniá eqUiPment7 .1- Sos,P,and,Weier 3. Replacing fuses andTilot lamps 2. AlCOhol or:methyl chloroforn 4: Renlatinidamaged parts 3, 'SandPaper Qr. files 4 Emerieldth"or steel Wook, a !. 65 44 s 10-61.,Safety precautions that electronics _ is-the criterion -10-55e As-a rule., maintenance peraonnel Should obgerve of Shock intensity. -when therAfOrk with eneritized circuits 1. current, include all of tht following practices vOltage ' .2. eicept that of' 3, renitence, .i. working with one-hand ooly,as much L. impedance, as pOsaible wearing a;rubber-glove cih thehand 10-56..!,Ar parson Who has suffered a-seVere 2. -electric shock-uanally ghows which,of that ie_not-holding tools 3, 'keeping metal tObls out ofthe 'the folloWing symptoms?' pockets-of clothing -;1;; 44*-414..ie Using dry canyte-sheets as intulation 2. 'BWins 4. from-grOund ,COnyulsions- 4. Both 1.and-2 abóve idulate 10r62e What-material Phould yOu.uSe to the handlea of-tools tobe usedfOrwórk CTO3 Miller; is Cleaning, a piecepf 10- 7., ohenergzed circuits? radio lear'whan heectidentlytoutbes itgionndire and ahenergised.power 1. TrittiOn-iape Varnighbor pnamel sable. The inienaity of the-resnitine shociAnocks,Miller unC-Onscions hd 3. Bubber tape I. Coticin tWine ca4es-himto fa/1 acloss_the cable. , -You.quiCkly.Cut oif the source:of power pert: ot circriit IreakerS are 't() the dable aWay frOn 1c1-63. 'plesqu 'ent," Conduttive;,, The aafes' way to cloSe a power If you,had in-uneble tb cut off the 10,64, es-to-the-cable...you Cdrild- is to source.Of mieve'iirepidlY throngh the.full_ have-dragged_ t41ler ,away from-it by 2. wic-of its-travel using- iiyer or iribb -to a posiOon 3our-han4s 2: eese . lt -where,Sefeend-quick.eetsioncaelie 2. ybrii,beIt imadi, arid then-make the finai-mOtion_ 31 i.leagth'orwire positiim and rapid . 4. Al alL4 2jñe OZ, lcàR oftanlies 3 eese it is gently-aa'pogsible through the inil,arcof ite travel 106,58. Mutt_ is-the-safest and,most-priferied- precautionery MeaSure to be takenbefore- L. mdie it kapiody tu the-position where it.it rea4Y to click and then starting tiny Work oneIectrOlc*circuitg? eaae it ,elOsed:as gentlY;as Pdasible 1. 'DeeCtiiate all poyer,iou eo 2. ,StiliätTompliance:with_proceduresin 10-65. Who has the arithoricy to rembVea tag 0 the NavalShips.Teehnical=MAinal been A_pericri qnalified tó-iender f from a power switctryhiCh has 3. lOcked:open with the folloWing jotation aid fOr=elebtrical abdck- Should -On it: -s-tending by Ea0b.ofthe above are equally impor= "THIS,CIRC7IT'WAS,OROMED opiquAxi?,smALL -4, 30T4t:gtospo,ExdOt-By DIkECT-OBDEBOF tint _ . . 1. Cummunlcations,Watchbffiéer 10,59. To:ensurethat rnbber,mattin&remaing Theipersoweaking, or in charge of) effebtiVe east:safe fornie, -it iwit be- 2. . - the repairs . periodidaliy inapectid.end,cleaned.to make-certain that which of the following 3. CaimuniCatiOns-Offierr properties of the mattineare.not Comeendincofficer. imOnredt 1. Elaitic, 6 2. Capacitive 3. Dielectric 4, pondricilve- 10-60. What is the reason all repair-and-maintc- nanCe-work oelectiOnic equipment Should be-coipletrdonlyliy-authOrited,persona___ 1.' AVold the:deafer of fire 2. PreVent damage,to neteriale 3. Minimize periOnnel in3riry. .4. Each ofthe above' 0 - 67. / 10-66: Which safety_irecaution should.be 10-71.WhiCh-orgen(s) ot-the body is/are likely obseried'ahei4our-work-requireitheiuse to be damaged by-beit.resulting'from viPOrtible.jriesier.- toils? ekceisiVe-ekiosure to isAiation? 1.Mike SUS* that the piilotY"-eilteli._ Luage . is: le--the,Oliiiiiiitioe-betore-iniert- '2: 1041.. ineOrieeleiiinutbeldtchms the ,3.-Gill bladder receitacia, h.Mich ei the ,above Iniert theAnitention Cord-into-4 eeieeetlig-t- 44,4sigerOf-e1ectromagnetic(r04) teel lite -*be' radiatiOn.ciusingtbe-preriiarefiring or_rockets-Or-miestles-and the-ficiloSion- 3. Alvais-unilUg-theriatelsibn-cord-from Warheads, VT fuler, eic. is identified thir4ociitacle hetOrethe viid.Of the es iertable tOol, UnilUggedt 1.ZEiG)-(hazardeio,electronic.exPloSiim- OrdisnCe) ' A frols the-Msteurion- cord, . '9 , le:. -Do not 1410 Siliced,csbleS under any 2.-Rim iridiaiion-Sffecting,electronic i Onditiol eiildiive ardnindel- 3.NEROjhakarda-ofelectromighetic 10,67. Awat0-comioUid.CantiOt be UleCtOrclean 'redistiOn to ordnanma . a.pieei Of *Silent. Which-solVeni_msy BADNAN(radiatiOn-hasarde) , 0 . . ' . 'You_use?' . . 1.- Gasoline Use the'followincalternativetforities 2. Denzil', 10-73i . 3.ltier, A. ,TreadtOvardstmoremlsetroekilosive 4 Mithyl Chloroform deViCe*-11=4, *sophisticated ( *liens iroierty. Of tathOde,'rariUhes 11., Trend tolards-nore teehnicianS-in ORT407 ieki, Oinz. titre:sly. -balte**,st 1.4-Of7warc ,40 1: COittia C. Trend-towards-higher autoeetioli.in -2. Copier', 3.4,ead D.Trend towirds-nighei amoUnts Of : rediitea-eleCtioaignetic enere 10-69: What-type edergriiiilgincon-an-object 10-73. Which trendmdombine_ to form HERO dangers? aii-electilisiaansitefield Coisiitutes 1. A &11 : !.a.bioiogicil hazard? 2. .A.& C I.Absekbed,enerkr & D Pelétrition,of-energy 4. 134-C 3: RefleCted%enere . itleCtrcmighet* energy 1074. Nigh voltage warning-iigmmare-iosted to- -0 1. ensure perionnelaafety . 10-70. Ildetromagnetic.energy-frtsie,frequency 2. satisfy maieri4'OAadministrative in,thimiCrowave-region is eltreme ineiections dangeroUs to,cluman'beiSubecaUse At 3. ideUtify.pOwer sOurcesifor portable, -,causes,his tools 1. internallamperaturito.beat -faster elilinite use-of guards for warning than-hiS abilitrtO-diseliate the ierSohnel - ii8iesia, 2. 'bone tiesups tO,break--down-through induced-molecular wibritiOn - 3. nerve tisiuesto-breskiloen'through V. induced,high eleCtridil enerelsvils 4. bodyto,becOme:part bk-a ,electriCal Circuit anAbelsmhooked ; 68. 4 6 r!, Assignment- ItiAntenatiCi anik:Safet (Continued); endixes P1hroU hVI Textboek pate' 310-thieugh-348 " 114. -Iteafterassumingthit the victim's head . and-Jaw-are propail.y.positioned, you '1.saininge-Objecti4e,.(continued): when Deiermine4afetY precautions end are unable;to Obtain,air exchanga edminiatering_edutitto,mouthereauscits- -procedures to fellow:whin-Work- , "-" ing-on electrical eqUiPleot, the whataCtiOn-whoilld yetttake? 1.Tiarnelamlace dOwn'and uee thiback caisies-and'effeciw-of electric _ . shtick,: the,hazird. preeentedlty ,presiure ariliftwethod ilectionie.equipment Operatin& Try*eget at-higOrequencies: and the 4.tain-,him,on hitraidijand St,tike .sifety, pteeautinni to lolloW in it4erai shirp-bloWs'betWeen-his i6u1der blades- -handling cathode iiy tat-1.44nd _ cleaning.electroniC equipment. 4.Place a,cloth-Overehia,mouth and !teeth-through* / , A victii of_eleCtrical shock has=been . 1175. . Siimil4AVVIt is a, viCtWitf- electiic remoWedfroi.:iontser with circuit, hut_he is Uncoiscfoui andhis 'shock aidehaanolteart.beat.Ate-eloit,irohably cardife.arrest.There Ai com- breathing is Weak indeirregular.' Should p1ete_3bsence-,04U1se-atibe.wiiit.. Additional- he-be give-tie-artificial tes-litratiotread lyi-the.ptiOiltvor his-iyee-4re Very. dilated. , if sop_ at apprOxinately what ftetinency? , 1. 110 l-1-Unless tirCulatiohjs reestablisht-A wtth- 40; 3,,iiietyper minute, 3. Yes; 12 iinew_per-mintite, . ievete-brain'domage yei;- 13 times Perlidante could resat-. 4. one ' 2. tap 3.threor 'iearningedbjective: 'Recognize the '. e 4: lOut OroCedureseand extinguiehinCegents- Q to use to lighteiectrkel fires. 11-2. -loittrOptie.to reestablish.SeamanJONES' e circulatiOneenould first be ittempted-by ,. 1176. he.first'ihinge_thet?you should-do is to 1; applicitionof cardiac massage i. close ail doors;inthe-sOace 2. meuth-to-mouthtiepiration 2. turO'off ail bleweri ih-the space 3.-iim-Ilft deenergiii,the equipientinvellied in 4. ',beck pre-saute armlift 3. the.firek, 4. eieOre-the'ventilation to the Space 11-3.The method of irtificial respiration,that is-most effectiVe for an individual of : TO,:eectidLtER to.spree4 the alarm. in ,any age who_has'stoppedbreathing is 11-7. spteiding...the-aitrm,,toIihem Should < MI4EAtepOrt ihe firejirst. 2. irmlift l. comeninding officer: -3. back4ressurearmcIliftz Senior damage controlman A. back-preisure hip-aft' 422. , 3r.066, 4., x6:` 1. 69 o, - 1114.AllaL1E:i..leieveM.=to ;spread .tha alarm ;yea .t4a .nsaisit Portable carbon . 0034di fire extinguisher!hi 0.3,c4i.. Ii4ski* is sinfppid-i54 a iinUSSsigriP -stile istelis,yilYS;*pyout--riadY -4 for, opeiiiti6a?tt, ' yve_soctisniss.,_ .4S4n)-.401= squItni#1;itti imind r grip hold.ng it erect 0/0*.ieettatiti.: Oka. valve )-004111 dt.-mith-fits aide -1:lown. On the° deck-4nd lotking Pin lejing ite-,aide:dosiU on the. end,.sqUiexing:4M,haMdegrip. . , . Whitly'of the- folltneinitjpel` of -fire6 fiiihiing' equipment le' beat'agilinst electrical 'fires?.',', :'* el , Fog, applitator 2.ioan.--eppLicator' " 3.Cirikin diOxide (0.02) ,extinguishisi 4. ,Zire hose , YOu-direct eks oi aarbanAiimicii ,frow the outtingUisiisr toward-004.4_ at a point 1oiated, .1..above the tiPsep,othe highest flame 2..it -tbs tips of, 'Oa 3. middl?of,,the flines . tha bale of ths,:flamas e A 11711.Why is there a--hexitdP to; personnel when' usini large quantitist of alibi:41 dieXida: t'o fight a fire in m:-Ceafined-sps:nef' ' L. CO2is poiionOus inlargi,concentri-. tions 2.CO2 disilsces,air '(with its 114 supporting -oxygin) fens 'Space 3,CO2 bacons:. explOsiyi in,Airgs Centrationt: 4.CO2. Chad's*. iato deadlj, catbon- monoicide (CO under 'higiL. tempera- ; tura caiditiona . LEGEND IfCarbon dioxide fails,to conttol -an NEAD- AND: NECK electrical fire,-,yoU ihould.aPP1y, 1. M stream of later directed ,at the 2';b3AOITEER111,09RRTTRIJRUNNKK a e base of the fire -: stream ofmatar-diiected. a; ,the 3: ARM§' 7 uppar partof-thi.'flimes '3. -frish'uater fog 4. ,LEGS . 4.chest/Cal fog 37 G6NITACIA AND OERIN6LIM . . Figure 11A.--CompUting body surface whom fec snipy igwrt :4your teitboolc states; the 11-15.FroM.the extent 'of their injuries, JACtor in, tetermiiing the 'seri= can ysiu expect td:go--into-spock? - principal TOINOEXTER ind'.ANDERSON Ouabess. Of- a. bhrry ,the extant of bodY,,area 1. 2. itibEit§orrarIToSTEIN,t' .-.bigned.'To estihate,..rhe- amount skin,area ,in- -volved, .use the. rule of nines.illuetrated-in.' 3;srgIN'arid- LAINE such calculations, ytl. oftenhaVe, .4. ANDERSON anS- LAINE -Pereentiges, of /Partial areaiin- to eStimite- -r_he Unless -adequate mediCal triatientis 'volved.For . example,- a Vitt ii:hasi 11-16., ing-thefrontof, thii entire, left leg as yea as 41 renderedwhose life Is endingered by hie. the'iikeher.iii hie lift srm,and burnt? hind: ",low-.woureeet1isite -thetOtai-.Surfsceares 1'. -POINDEXTERI.S. 2. ANDERSON' s- burned ln4;the4ollOWineWay- STEIN's, , 418= -,Front-AtiO. Of entire le4t 2, --- 4 e: Whieb cishalty hae-firai 'degreeburnil Stomach, approximately: 4 9% 11-17 - LrIINDErrER 'AilDER$01, ..--7=FrOnt olialy.of_left skit ihdAfahd< a -27 a 14E' 3. $TEIN ;ApPreilmate total ; .LAINE e _11748.4hich Of ;the toll:owing gashilties would .:loi should- remember, that -esrimatee-iSade -acCOrd-,, ,ProbablY exParisece , the _isOit ing rio, the rule- of ninee. ire-Ofily_ aPProici- tiOnS=Yoisde hotheed' ixect -perCentiges of POINDEXTEViiid STEIN- Akin'Atees'burneci 1-0 order -in 'firer Aid, for- 2.-,AiiMSON aid LAINp, burns,. -The:rule Of nines -IS-presented-here OilY 3. sTpfi,And LA/NE- 4.' ANDERSON and STEIN- as :a.g.,*at`,g414iiine ,'th wee ie estimating the; ieveriry 11-19. JAINEleforle .you that 'hisburns are not , unuivali Jo. InfOrmation ,fer ltese11713 through 11-27: :painful.Is this absence of pain "You are Tint :to arrive' aithe_icene of 1.Yes; -this- degree_ of hurn alwys a fireNou,find-,the causes SeVere iight hahd and- foreirm'are No; this degree- of pain-nsiiaP.y POINDEXTER, des troYs seeseryvnerireendieii reddened and t 044 .ADERSON,; Whose,etie inereAsed wirmth, 3.Yee; -this, degree of .bUrn 1:Shelly left -leg 'exhibits= srePtomi Of inVolies -highly eensiti-.4 musCle tenderhese.,,an'd a reddish apP'earaece..STEIR, o whese *et, neck, -end' both hands)4 --noMPletely tisstie is bleck. NO; thiedegree of burn pi_oducea Aeatroyed And the WnderlYing severe shock _which -eliminares pain LAINE, whole .burn-On =hisright:leg 'from-rim- knee doWe tharacteriied by compleee destruction .of- the skin, with charring andcoOking, .of the , /er tifsufs. , w., 11-13.tieing rhe rule `of nines; calCulatethe approximate:extent each CA_Sualiy!. 1. POINDEXTER 6%, ANDERSON 9%. -STEIN 15%, -i.AINE 18t 2. -POINDEXTER12 1/2%:,*NDERSON 15t,, STEIN- lit,- -LAME 12k_, 3. POINDEXTER 9%, ANDERSON 24%,- STEIN -:29%, -LAINE '10X 4. PoiNDEXTER 4 in:2, ANDERSON- 18t, STEIN 22. 1/2t, LAINE, it WhiCh cailualty do you consider. the host seriously burhed? rOIND,Alpt 2. ANDERSON 3. STEIN' 4,.LAINE 71 .. ' Ao Foritsms ll=20:ihreagh,11,46, noun 11.-2$. Asa drening for STSINNI burns you thietherierviCee2ansedicil Pei:oink apply < chhebebe' ebnind within the-nneloer-hehrs, =1. steillé,petrolatum geese covered in You,_ine to ideibieter the hateitary "flieraid turibilluffs,of gamre and adatim "- ,preetmant.-141-4tiiiv,neciesiiisiVIciitreating : 'Oadded%dteliing ieur-;ust. 'buE . :Aodiheind-sealthe-burns:wig' , 1 - idhesiVe,tape - TOur-main inki%inigiving,first aid to 3. 4.Wet antiseptic compress covered the nit:elan-4ra th. ' With-za large sterile dressihg preVentie*ic4ani;,ielieverpeie. sterile abierbehi Cotton hekd in atid.Orevene.ortrierthoCk- ,piace,by ethia:2eterile bandage' lainbilin the : Owtheitereas,,.e0.4004'intinOtice 114 fter you.aren STEWS:burns, the Cele. . ' ,t -precaution:you-Should take regarding- 3.. Prevent ihockk openbligitere:end' the-dreaming 1to ',6 apply-wee actisinic areseingi-to: 1. keep-theAressing,wet-with.eaolution- Of zeihirie chierie ' 4. ramie:foreign material: fres ehe 2. remo44 ihe-driesing:-6e0e period-of ,buinst440iy=bei leiii.patki io the' 10,minuies-everY4ve hears . burniaand'Ornent iefe.;tiemst. 3. -seethat the driesing is undittUrbot . . Untilriedink anistince-arriin. 11-21. As in,Oirgeney Manure, whartreetient 4. applye freeh dinsingeverylwar-, may yangive 1!OTIOMIXTICAMOSOW4nd LANE telnen the-damiging effects of Which-of the loilowing treaenets should their-bureit youleive given,STEIN-hid-Oh-eXpected' 1, Imeeraing_their buraid'eXtremities mediCal beurst ' ie-warim iaii watei petrolatum.to-the,burneen 2. Orapiing the bareedareatinaary -his face ind-neek ahd isiersing his, sheet :armein leevater- 31 ApplYing-ethin.cnating.of butter 2. Cowering the burhecLeren With a to-the hurnedereas stirile-wrappingencrtnitingtise e 4..Soakingtheburhe&ireas ie ice for shock, ,aster S. Cleihing the burnedTateae-with soap and water:and applying sterile-dry 1142i What ie-the'principel difigerfrom:STSINIe gause.Aressieg burn?, 4. Leaving thcburned areis,opewand Jafection 'dry end treating-him for'shock. 2. 14oedcpoisohing- 4,!. 3- 161.0.._,ir4a0, lefore,giving-ierphipe tO relieVe a 4., Sheck bUrned-patienes pain,yeu should make, . ceitain-that=beis 'free of .11-23. WtriatingSTSIWifeenocklIhat excep- interhil injaeies . tion should.yeir Make 1O,the%geheral pro- bieff,injaries ceOure-ei ifiock treataintf -enere.bleiding 1. :Keeping-himceek 4."broken bones 2, .4vinghim li4uidi braieUth'' 3. iqaciaghisvin,isitting peeition 11-i4. The correct _first aipproceduretegard- 4. Allimhia-1/4 grain et morphine ., ihg foreign asterial-thai is adhering , to,a teverely burneOiet is to 11 Tou,cahAelp,te preyeat ihfsctioe of remove it carefully, using seerile STITS's-berhe by 1. weriig emisk to:Fusing sterile 2. ::=Those Vieh-warm maljwiter tehaieen.n.much as.pessible- 3. cleihse the-area with na0 and water ' 2. wearing rubber glovee and..ipplying leave it alone 'antiseptics to the burn.' , 3. -applying chapresses*aked.with iodine to thalburni 4." applying a thick-coating ofbacitra- cih to the - 72 11-30:Ap,first-ald,tiastment=for athermal 11-32. What iWo controls Of theteceiver are . JhUri3Oethe;oYe, Yob-lint intothe aye lbeited on.lipe pc of-figure-11V ,M4iw-drops:of 1. Break- in-switChmnd function switCh clean-mineril,Oii 2..4i,aib responie,Controi ind zero 2., tlnii-lineial oil'Oi^dilUted adyost tontrOl 3. AUdie reeponse,-.control and break, 3! dilOtid,winegar Or wati-silt.witer witch 4, wain imilewaterbr-bOric acid .4. bF0 eWitchmod-aero Adjust Control, 11---33. Close to the freeuency.,indieetor dial on line'Di of figUre 111.arOthe-two 40prning-Objectivei 'ReCognize, cOntrills ofihe receiver naasd- ihnloostion,Of'rhe'conircils-on. 1. iocal gain cOntrol and R7 gain _the fitont4iiel.Ond the?operiting conticil procidiii"for. the:reptisintative 2.: dial lock and-gero-Adjult contrOl - -radio inCiiver, R-390A/U134 3. dial lock-ineRF:gain Control' - 4. ziro.idjuet'and Local gain'coitrol 11,44. Where ercthe'pi6 pitch, lticel gain, IT -cARRTR LEvEL ,gaihmnd functiOn,contrOia located, in' METER' figure lli? i, pitchand. local gain cOntrOli On RANOWIDTH 17,sein end-funetiOncontrOle KC WATCH ' on 2. FunctiOn and Argain_dontrple on end ITO Pitch controls on line LT' 3. 310 pitch and functiOn-contiole on ' linestir, local gdin.a141.7,spin, controlis online El . Ri gain and,function.controls-on line 33, local gain and, 370 pitch 'cOntrole-online CR. . 7 11-35. To energize the filament supply,voltages Without supplying-platwiupgly.voltagei FREOutmci. to the-tubes bf-the robsiirer, you,set the " . COUNTER `KILOCYCLE:: -1. function switch to its ROC,iosition 2. function7switcht0 its sTAmpri. 004tion . Mai4CYCLE- 3. bteak in switch to iterON_position -CHANGE 4.1115 svitaito-its ON Obsition -A Irigure,113.--piagran of thmfront panel of I , the lp.300A/ORNridio'recetwar. 11,31. Which controls are located alai* lips A7 ot-figuiwliti iine:mstit COptrol, line gain con- trol, antennstiimmei!tontrol, break- in snitch, end,audiii:ieeponse, control 2. Line meter control, line'gain Con- trol,,antenna-trimmer"COntiol, ACC, and limiter tontrol 3. Line astir Control, antiona:trimmer control, function switch, limiter contiol; and dielloik Limiter ciontio2:, AOC, dial 1Ock, Jinn gain control, ind.functioh switch 4 73 *. ° What are typical settings-of thelimiter - 4,. Infornatied for items 11-36, and-ilr37: tiiir,areiriparing to verify that the control.if you ire,monitoring-vbite , reading,Of:th4rtnning. dill cOireaionda to thic 'Signal: and lek4Indulated.aignils reel- 'fiequirnrt riCeivid,by-the.1-,190A/011,,ranid. pectiveiyt 1. 'Voice.ind-fsk, 2-or 3: '- .. 2.. VOiee i or 3; fsk 1141-0 11-46 , fo,which:oUtha,following-freqUencles may *14,4 euis,the.iiceiver in',order Co tali-, j: .3/dice 8 orl, fsk t oi, 3 brita*t, 4. ,Voice anctlak, 8'or-9 r.`406kflz 2. 125-Or 11-43. Which,maters.of the receiver.help You in.making tape Ticordinge -(T1), in- = 3. 750'kHi 777,kft Odjuiting the intenne'rriimer (AT)', and .. 4act'uniuS tb the exact friquency-thai, .- . O 11=37., Yew activate theatable crystal oscil- giesathe strongest ilignal (r)? 4strt thatauPplias ths,celibrating :1. -Ca;rier 1,401 miter (TWATY, line ievet4Ster (t) 'signal to-the iveitiver by. . 'Carrier level-meter (AT)(T); line :"I. sitting the function switch to its .2: d4L'Oositidh jevel.meter (TR) t 2.. turning the-BPO.switch to-ita ON 3.4 Line meter (TR),(AT), carrier . . .' leeel mete; (T), . 4asition . Line level_meter (T1)(T), carrier' . .1: aereinOthe functionawitch to its ,44. -, , leael meter (Af) NOC-pnsition . - ,! . . 4. . settinfihe BYO switch to%its,oN ,position and the 110a4piteb control' , to:its'42-position' , , ...,teirning Objective: licOgniii ' the umes,AunetiOns-and charac- teiisties.,Of, the,Converter In items 1I38 through 11r40,, ielectfiom Comparator OrouP AN/U1A47C. columa,i,the contiol-of tbe.*-390A/U1R-reeeiver that causea theaction in column.A. , The AN/URAT17'is capable of how many .4 ' 1144, B. CONT1OtS separate.modes of operations? , X: ACTIONS I. One;4iVersity receivei. idjuating ths tuned 1.,Local gain 2. .0ne; Tao; dUal receiver and diversity .pircults,lif the i-f f. Two; single receiesr and,divorsiti-- ; 'portion to change the .2.11reak in A. 1 eilectivitYWthe What aspect-of cdnverterOperaficnis riceiiii., 3. Bandwidth .11645. most important tOachieve good communi-, 11-39. 'COntr011ing tha level cations? 1.. Allbwing st.least 10'iinutes forthe of the oUtOut to the '4. Antenna equi.pmenf to-warm up , 'phonwjack. trim 2. Adjust control: in rear o. equip- , ment Activating circuits 11-40. Proper tuning of the receiver feed- that know the receiyer 3. ing.the converter to be lused=with a' study visual presentation of signal .transmittet. on oscilloscope li-41.-You adjust ths level,of'the audio out- put used to operateterminarequipment by adjusting Oa front pineiControl labeled' 0 1. line.gain 2. lodal gain 3.- RI gain, 4. audio response 0 .0 74. 52 ON. Figure i1C.--Diegini,ot monitor.nscillo_ -860,0*Amtterni for freqWentY- shift Can4irters..-. (1.230.3 rev404- . 11-46. Which scopcnatteri,of Figure:At-I/4111- 11-51, Whieh Rpeapp-seciumice moves the cursor iustratss a*:cOrieCtly tUned.eignalf u0,,one-line? 1. ESC 0- :2., 2 end 3 .2. ESC,/ 3.,14.A4 , ESC 7 4, 4 4. ESC 3- 11-47,. The function contrOI s!itch,of at AN/ . 'URA47.-converter 'Poiiiini.if the,insont,Iinal:-fron,the LearningCtjectiVei Remognise the, Teletyieprinfer4nremovid. function Ofthe-DigitaiDati Distor= tiOn Teit'Set AN/USN-329(F): 1, sucu . ;1 TUN& . . - 3.'DIFICISITY e : 4. DUAL, Which signal,gonerator switch Selects the-signelnatteint 11-48. The' (A. FOLARITTIFUNCTION) switch of 1. CODULEFEt' the AN/URA=17 shouldibe adjusted to-the 2., CHARACTER RELEASE 13. NORMAWRIVERSE) pOsitien if the - 3. DISTORTION441CT: Telstype print.r is garbling. 3Z) -A., OUTPUT' .° 1. A..POWITT; I. Motu 2. A. FOLARITT; 3; WEISZ 11-53. Tbe signel lamp of the signal, generator 3. A. FUNCTIONi-3, NORMAL sloms COntinuouily wbeneVer the signal A. A. !UNCTION; 3.-RiVERSE, 1.-at a 1. nark level 2r steidy..ark 3.- space level. Learning--Objedtliii: Deterwhwi the 4 4; ntoidy space functions ind,contininbf the AISCII- cedennd=hon they apply-tokindel 40 11-54.Ifbat-type of maintenance,cannn operator dee. terminal. parform on signal-generator esuipsentt 1. Preventive maintenance 2,**placement of the lamps and fuses 11-43. Why mai the MCl/ aodu developedi Replaie.tubes 1. Accompliih data-trinenissions 4. Each of.the above 2. Provide for idditionar symbols 3. Furnish posit* checking 11r55: Which statenent is TRUE regarding opera- . . 4. 'Eich-nf the above tionof=ths.Analyzer-Oicilloscepe? , 1. The-FOCUS control display. Digital 11-50.'Which AiCil-control displays.the symbol Waveform ind moves tha cursOrro Start of 9 . 2. ThnOaCilloscope'is capable of newt lin:, antcauses-printer-inpiini messuring-distortion 0, next chi:net-et_ at Start of nextline? - 3. Separate operation-of-the oscillo- 1. WT 0 scope isnot recommend.d ,2: 4. Tfie CRT sel.cts syn4ronieing signals 3. LP for, oscillopeope sweep 4. CI 75 , o 11=56, 'Which.comtroI_Of the enal*Ser 'selects 11=63. 'What operatiagoignal vould:be-tuied to :band.ritolrels 34.1 te.4800,of intirnal requeit infOrmation-On a diemtivis timepiiieW' -itt-1 I. 1.0-4Mitch- Z. 1..,.TIlli Witisilitch ,ZDK. 71111, r44, 3.1 _Ilintilltih, ' 4. OLA;411-iiiiich, , *. 1 Learning-Objective: Identify.M630 :LearnisiutRidactiie: Ide4ify.the - . _ - 41-r64. Which operating-eignal,iM part of' the -eeieggi-fereit indiaaring the .srari of -text?. -t In itell-14-57,-kh06110-11:-61,.ielect froo-Coluen ZP3%, I-the eieratiorsigAsI-Uhich 44t-Vos the Puse 2: ZEN, deikilbed 3. 111 4. ZVo A.-Purposes 1 .11-63. Which Operatiog.signa is ueumi,on thole 11-37: ReceiVing,gerbled- requiring:- computer-processing? , iraffic: -.1121ro . .21::ork4 11-51. 'Thisisay 3. ZGA - seiond rattiest. '4.'ZYU s 11-59. Message-sot 11-66. ThoUii of'whichmperstincsignal. must received. be lilitad to conditionsof tirgepey? 1. ZZR' Receiving massage- .2: .ZiS clear. 3. 'ZIT 4. 7.1J Massage unidenti- t a- data. ,11-62: Which operating iiimel'Uould,modt likely be Used.if a message is,beilg paseed-for coolant? l.ZXA 2. ORK-3 4 3. ZIW-3 4. ZFI -# 76 5 4 `o- 0 '.-PREFACE \ Th.e ,Communkation- 'Technician to 3 & 2,iS; Written for, enlisted -perSOnnel of -the 1.1n#ed,StatesIstavrarid:Naval'Reserve *hose dutiesrequire them- tO have a knoWledge- Of the. fundainentals of coniniunicatiOns.,The' primary -objeCtiVe of this Rale Training Manual- int NonresidentCareer 'Course (RTM/141kCaistOentiancegthe Agree of-dffeetivenessind qualityof corinnunicitiOns._ This :Rate- Training _Manual' iMt Nonresident CareerCourse prOvides . surnmirization- of the-marious 'ftmctions- of comfininicatioris and -. the- processes; -that suijport- these. functions. The- opening_ Chapters Provide general s infonnatiori cOncerninc.ther-trd rating, security and orgsnization: Thikis figoviet'by.altudkorctimmunicationlheory Offith includes-a cuscussion of niodulation, the, frequeney sPeCtrunt, 'Cominunication links, transmission systemi, and. waie Propagation. This. coverage Wilt be .Very helpful to the reader- since message; traffic flow- iSIdipendent- upon .the quality of circiaits and equipinents,Provided. . . - YOU. Will note abrOad-area of -this Manus! desLA-ibes message preparation !and forMats. Althotighlarge.-nUrribersof messages_areProcesseditranSmittid: arid received:via Sophisticatet4Utoinatetequipments, the key-to the system, iSthe 'Care- With 4.thich you-Prepare -.the Message. The coricluding chapters eoVer the mission of each NAVSECGRU . ccsitinuniatiOn diriiiesn- ant s,nunger .of standard practices:dealing with maintenance and safety. ;4 The subject.niatter presented- in ea.li c apteris sUppOrted by references topublicatiOns and directives-thatProvideimore Specific information. Those- who work in conimunications know how _frequently-procedures and Piiblicatiois Changet This Rate training Manual and-Nonresident Career Course WO up to ,date 'When published, and it will, from -time to time, be .revised. Between reviiions some.obsolescence is unavoidable: For thisreason itis suggested thoyou use official communication_ publications as mueh as possible:in-your study 'for advaiicement antrefreshertraining. .Designed -fOr individual study .,isnd not' formal classroom instruction, the -RTM provides subject Matter that relates directly -to the occupational' qualifications ;of the CoMmunication Techriician 0 rating. The NRCC FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY , n' 7 5 a" 4 0 provides the uival *ay of satisfying the requirements for completing the -RTM. The set, of 4signmenti in the Not inciudeslearriing, objectives and stippcirtirig Reins deiigned 'tolearstudents-Through:the -kW: t , This, training ,manual" and',noriresident career -course -was prepared by-the .Naval -Technical- Training Center, 'Cony Sil2tioh, Peniacoia, Florida, for the Cliief Of Naval iEducation and Training. Technidal-assistanc&Ons provided by the fleadquartett,-NaVal- Secarity- Group'CoMmand -and the NavaFEducation G and Training Progra,pevelopmeht: Center, 'Pensacola. Revised, 19 75 --- *t) .0 Published-by .9 NAVAL EDUCATION AND TRAININd SUPPORT COMMA/4D Stock Ordeting-NO. 0502-LP-051-11760' UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE WASHINGTON, D.C1975 S. 56 c - 1 THE UNITEDSTATES NAV); GUARDIAN OF OUR COUNTRY,. The United StatesAaVy is responsibleifor maintaining control of the sea and is a ready force on watCh_at hotne and overseas, capable of strong action to,pm,serVe..the peatedr otinitant offensive action to win in war. It is Otio.n,the_mlintenance of this control that our country's gloribus future-deOends; the Unite.cUStates 'Navy exists tO makeit So. WE SERVE 'WITH HONOR Tredition,_Valor,:and_vittoo_ere the Navy's heritake from the past. To_ _these maybeadded delicationi discipline, and yigilance as the-watchwords of-the present andlheluture. At *home or on distant stations we sarve With pride,-ccinfident in the respect' OfbOrcountry,dur shipmates-, anddiirfamiliet. burrespontibilitiei sober Us; ouradversitieSitIngthen us. --Serrice to dodandtountry is-our special privilegth. We serve with-honor. 4 0 THE.FaTURE-OF-THE NAVY The Navy will always employ new Weapons, hew techmquesiand._____ greater_power to protect and defend-the-United States on the sea, under the sea, and in the air. ' Now and in the future, control of the;sea gives the United ttates-her -greatest advantage for the maintenance of.peace and for victory in war. Mobiiity, surprise, diS'persal, and offensive poWer areethe keynotes of --the new. Navy.the roots of the Navy lie in a strong belief- in the future, in continued dedication 'to our tasks, and in reflection on our heritage fromlhe pisi. Never have our opportunities and our responsibilities been greater. .0 a CONTENTS CHAPTER Page 1. The CTO (Communications Technician o) Rating 1 2.Security 13 3. Emergency planning for theprotection of classified material 41 4. Introduction-to-naval-communications 54 S.Communicat;ori basics 68 6.Satellite communiations 90 1. -Wave propagation and antennas 107 a 8.Communication transmitters and receivers 133 a 9.Facilities control operations 152 . 10.End 1.81 11. The message. . 218 12.Routing doctrine 241 1-3.Tape preparation and fransmission formats 245 . 14.Communication.publications 268 ,1S. Communications division administration and- - operationalreSponsibility 274 16. -Maintenonce and safety 293 S. paga APPENDIX . . 320 I.Reeeiver R-390A/URR operatingprocedurei II.Converter.comparator group AN/URA 17-C -oPerating procedures 323 III.American,standard code-for information interchange (ASCII) 326 IV. Digital data distortion test set AN/USM329(V) 'operating procedures 332 V. Operating signals 346 .347 . VI.- DSSCS operating' signals .. VII: The Metric.System 349 INDEX 355 Qualificationsfor Advancement 370 ,- Nonresident-Cal'eer-Coursefollows Qualifications for Advancement . ck 3 N 4 N, CREDITS , The following figures are4epthited by special permission of: - SQURCE FI6URES . Life Magazine figures 2*-9 ElectrOnic Design 'Figures 2-6; 27.8 Teletype-Corporation Figures-1.0-3-1-through--10-4,34 - _ rr MODIFICATIO14S 4'1 , this publicaton has (have) been deleted in adiptihg thismaterial for inclusion in-tbe "Trial ImPlementation of a MOdel* System to Provide Military Curriculum Materials for Use in Vocational and. Technical EduCation."Deleted material involves exienSive uSe of, military fofms, procedutes, systems, etc and was-not considered Opropriate , for use in vocational and technical edUtation. , .0 a 0 9 a 61 WI/ CHAPTER+ MIMICATION, BASICS' Every naval oommand afloat: and ashore is '0:LEctitiems assigned amissiori and supporting ta.sks-that inaY ; vary froin combat operations to support ,o'f, the The means of communicating electrically are fighting forces. In each case the comintipication byradioandwire.Theformer.mses requirements of the command' are, derived from electromagnetic waves pOt guided by a physical, < , . . , , its mission and tasks. path between senderand receiver; whereas wire In order to ensure maximum contribution to uses .etec tromagne ticwaves carried by the mission of the comMand, the communicator electrical:conductors, that ,connect the sending shoUld!P:Ossess- an understandingOf-the and receiving equipment c,onirriurii-cati onfacilities ,heuseS. itadioisthe< Navy'smcsiiniporfant Conimunication equipment today is becoming effective means by which -theactivitiesof increrf.singly more complex and, although you widespreadnavalfOrces can be continuously required. to, qualify ai,a-Specialist in coOrdinared. ,eleetronict, you- shoUld 'be farniliar witiv the Oniinurii-cation'methods,principles -of- .Radiotelegraph ioPeration, and the liinitafionsan &capabilities- of selec tedsystentsukdin cOmmuniCating Radiotelegraph jcontinuous wave or G-SV 'between distant-points.', telegraphy) is a- system for transmitting Signals The objective of .this chapter is tO present by using a wave -of radiofrequency.(r-f) energy. certain. basic corieepts jrlCoMmtinications in The radio operator separates the continuously vt,tich-the,cOinrnunicator .shotild-be',ata transmitted wave into-dots anddashes,-based on aWire ar4donveisant. The Subject of dieMorse Ode, by opening and closinga. Qoiiimunicatiop dieory :and, the functiOning of, telegraphic,handkey. spepific type s. of equipinent.. will be discussed later in thismanual. Theinformation presented Radio -telegraphy 'was thefirst means of in. titis Chapterwill_providea :basis.for, radio-comthunication.of, military and Understanding these subjeets. commercial importance. Although, there have 1 been many advances in the field-of radio since Marconi succeededin Sending his first wireless" - -TELECOMMUNK:ATIONS message, radiotelegraph, still is used as ,a means ; of cdinmunieation tO, from, an'd among widely, ,Lterm- -telecommunication_ _refersto separated units of the wavy. coMmunication over a distance and includes any The relatively slow, speed of transmission transmissiOn, ernission, or reception of signs, andth e.requirementfor many experiefic4 'signals,writings,images,and-sounds;or,operatorsare.the-major disadvantagesof intelrigence of any oture by visual means, oral radiotelegraph. The main advantage is reliibility. means, wire radio, or other electromagnetic The need fOr a thinking person at.both sending systems. Telecommunications used in the Navy andreceivingstations provides a degree of are of three types: electrical, visual and sound. iiltelli,gibility not present in automated syqems. , ! 62 Chapter 5COMMUNLcA-TJ,OWBASIC-S Radiotelephone _cominunicationst 'adroSsOceanareaStThe- teletYpeWriter put, is equipped With "akeybOard: Radiotelephone is one of the 'mOst Useful similar -toa .ptypewriter, -When the opeMtot, rnilitary domMunication Methods. Bedause ofits Pressesakey ..asequence,ofsignals directness, -convenience, -and ease of operation, transmitted. At redeiving-stations, the signals:are; -radiotelephone is used- by shim aircraft, and, fed into terminal equipments that -tYpe the_ shOre si-a-tions for ship-to-shore, Shore-to-ship, MessaaeAutoniAtidally.' ship-to;ship,air-to-shiP and- The .RATT mode, of tratismission/receptiOk air-to-ground. conimUnications. Modern. ,niodes is rApidly becOming more, efficient and of operation make it possible to corninunicate -forcommunications -between.SitipsAn4 laround the World by radiotelephone. One ofthe shiP-to-shore. AdditionallY, all ships-so equipPed mottiinpOrtantusesor radiotelephoneis. 'copyfl eetbroadcast messages.: on -sh o rt-rañ ge tac tidalrcomniuniCations.Its radioteletypewriters The 'speed,Qf ; clearing caPability of trarisinitting voice .signals enables inesiage traffic.on iadioteletype circuits.depends. , the responsible officert6 talk. direaly With the, on the equipment inUse: Normal speed -.of officer ihtactical command and *ith other operation is 190 words per Minute, but:may -be ships. Little delay resUlts while a Message IS,' faster or slower. The-use of juin has_brotight' p-re p-Ariedfol_transmission,,and" about a considera`ble saving in manpower. acknoWledgements can ;be ,retiirned. instantly: ,Radiotelepheneequipment fOr 'tacticalute. Facsimile nsuallY 'is -Operateddr:ifieqtiehcies that are iiigh enough to ,have line-of-Sight ,characteristics; that Facsimile (FAX) is- the proceit uSed -7tpt is, thrwaves:de riOt-follow-the-curvature-of-the-__transmit photographs, chart, arid-Other-graphid; earth. -These characteristics limit the usual range` information electronically. The: image' to be of' Tadiotelephone from20to 25 Miles. transinitted is scanned by a, p176tOelectric ° RactiotelephOne procedure can be learned easily and 'electricalVariatiqns- in the ce1L ouiptit, *by ,pers-onS,'withnoothertrainingin contiponding to the light and,dark'areas.being coramunica ons. scanned, Are transmitted to- thereCeiver. Atthe 'Radiotelephonealsehasdisadvantages: receiver,the signal ,operates á ,recorder -that. Transmissions, may be unreadable because of reproduces, the picture. The-FAX signals may be .stalic, eneMY Interference; of' high_ local' noise transmitted either bylandlineoor radio: level diused- by shouts, gunfiret;And bomb or -FacsimiletransmisSions Wier. -distortiOn shell bursts. Wave, propagation characteristics of ' froin all of the common sources ofinterference ra di ot eleph onefrequenciessometimesare experienced withordinary radiotelegraph and' unpredictable, and transmissions may. be heard radioteletypewriter.IloWeyer,Certain fromgreatdistances.Mostradiotelephone characteristics Of facsimile tranSmission Make it Messagesareinplainlanguage,and-if less- susceptible tc.-.)- complete lets of intelligence. information is to 'be kept froin,the enemy, users Por example, a pidture will_ be, downgraded by must keep their, messages short, stick to the any noise bursts, since facsimile recording is A proper procedures, and, be_ careful of what they continuoui recording of sign* coming from A say.. 'receiver. 'floweverlr, because.,the-,machine scans' materiaLit:the iate'of apprOxithately, ibUinet Teletypewriter per inch each iine is otilY WOOth of an inch , t high. Therefore, if I ribise burst interferi* with Teletypewriter(TTY),signalsmaYbe the signalyit vfiltclistort a line Only I/106th 'of transmitted by either landline (wire), cable, or an indh -high, leaVing 'the image Still readable'. radio. The landline TTY is utilized both by the Under similar circumstances on i cOnventionif militaryservicesandbycommercial circuit -(teletype), such distortiOn coilld. Cause a communication companies. Radioteletypewriter portion of the page-copy to be-Unreadable., ,(RATT), either single- Or multi-channelt is used Pacsimile transmissitm is noi intended to be mainlyforhighspeed autOrnatic a replacenientfor, teletypewriter, rand other 69 63 %. COMNIUNICATIOIIS TECI-INICIM4,03:. :Si2 ernployed inettiOds oftrarisuissiori; FlaShinglight: -rather,- -it is An iportant surtplement't-rapid cOnunuticatiOn, Providing a:meani..Of handling_ .Flashing,light ia a, visual, telegraphfc. system .certainitypes Of graphic ancLpictOriallritelligenCe, that utilizes ,Visible or infrared- light bearns,;- it by-rapid comniunication methods..., ° May, be -direetional Or nondirectional, - A directional flashing' light, is pointed and s"- VISUAL 'trained so, ak.ikte'viiible,orilY by tie-addressee of the ''Measage. Thit method maites--tiie of Vitual comniimications are, generallythe Installed -,,aignaf- searählight,onwhich the. preferred -means for doininunicating-at .short orieratOr -openi and -Closea the-Plight shutter ,i6 ran ge;; weatherconditioris,.-Permitting.'In form dota arid' daahes, arid portable light, in ,,aridconvenience,.visual' Which the sOurce of light is-switched:on and off doirtinutnpations-,often art the equal-of radii:, rand, to-Torm the-Morse-code characters, under circumstarices are ,more aecure thari -raelib, For example;:,omnidirectiOrial radio Nondirectionat (ornnidirectiorial) light's- are transMissions '.maYbe intercepted, by many located-,abovethesuperstructure' :ontie undesired listeners, whereas= unidirectional visual yardarfn. Becaise the- light beama ate visible in. signaling is limited _to those-positioned along-the every -direction from the ship, thismethOcf-of line of sight =, cdmmtriteatingivsiiitabre lot-messages. destined , for severafaddressees: Visual' siraling, systetria include flaghoist, flashinglightand semaPhore tinieo-fwar,flashingligh.t communications carried on, 'after, dark 'usually Flaghoist infrared-beanis that are-not visible, Unless viewed throigh- a special receiver. As a general- Theavy usesapron sign r g Ilrto rule, irifiarethis-the-iiiost-seetire-rritans-of-visuaf---- , convey taQtical and inforrnational, messageS of commimications. Directional infrared uses the reasonable lengthcduring daylight .betWeen ships standard signal- searchlights fitted with 'special thatare inclosecoMpany.Flaghoiatis filters. ,For 'omnidirectional signaling, yardarms pnsideted One, of the ,bett ways, to ensure are fitted-with infrared blinker lamps. uniform eXecuti Ori -Of inarieriVem In- signalingl by flaghoist 'the U. S. liavy ,and allied riaVies use, Semipilore international' alPhabet ,flag,_ numeral° pennants, and four repeaters, plus wiet, Of spedial Meaning Serriaphore is. a 0 Communicationmedium by flap and perinant, and ten- nUmeral flap that which `a..'signillmari with . two hand 114s, mOyes are not _part of theintemationaljystem,; Eaeh his arins throdgil various positions to represerit flag and-pennant has -a- name;:-_various fl ap, have letters, nutrierals, and special signs. "particular meaning; arid alinost all- hoists, axe Coded dgnals. , Seniaphore and flashing light -can be 'used jit terchangeablyformanypurposes,but flaghoist signaling is the most. rapid and ; semaphore is more rapid for ahort diatance accurate visual- method when thiris- are within tranamisaion in clear daylight and- may be used signaling distance in daytime. It nOrmally it :the to send Metsages to several addresses at once _if primarytacticalmaneuveringmetliOdof they. are -insuitable ,pbsitions. 'Because of its transmission betWeerir ailiface-units wheneyer --speed,sernaphore.. is. _better adapted_to., the visiVility conditions permit. Signals are repeated- sending of long messages Oari .are- other visual -by the addreasee, -thus providing a sure cheekrin methods. Whenradio_ -Silenceisimposed, the 'accuracy Of reception. Texts of messages semaphore is the beat -subatitufyi for handling which may be conveyed directW.by flaghoist are administrative traffic. It is more secure 'than a limited by meaning contained in the signal light or radio because- there is less ;::hance 'for books einployed. interceptiOn bY unauthorized. persons, 4, Chapter S.:-COMMUNICATION' BASICS SOUND transth i ssi On sip nd i d us t ri al , me di capfia-o-th-er scientific uses. Sood, communicitionSystemsiriclude The nee& for worldwide regulation and whistles., sirens,, 'bells, ,and acoustics. The first _ contervation 'of this :limited resource is easily. :drive arc used`- by ships !Or transiniSsion- of recOgnized.Therefore, frequencyregulatioris :emergency .WarningsSignalS-such_as airraidalerts,. exist on an international as well as a national for -navigational . sign als -:pres,cribe ct by 'the Rules and ageney level. ftbsRbad;and' sinwartimefOr TheIntern ãtionàlTelecommunications cominunicatronsUtween ships in conVoy. Union(ITU),' functions astheprinciple regulag bodY for radicr communicatiOns all Provisionis made in many ,search sonar over the 'world: It establisheS and promulgates (underwater sound) equipments to-permit their the internation-al allocation of, and regulations use' ,for CW transmiSsion. The term acoustic :for the use of, the radio frequency spectrum. communicatiOns..hOwever, usually pertains to an These regulations have treaty status and, uPon underwater ,sônar -communication equipment- adoption by a country, become the law of the called Sea-Talk-Sea Talk.arequently referred ta land. Each nation regulates its own stations a as, Ge rift:WOmaybe used_ foreither withinthe broad liniits set by international. .radiotelephone -or CW communications. The agreement. range -of tranSmission' varies with the cdndition In the United States, the basis for U. S. ,of the tearind.the selative noise output of the frequency Management isderived from the ship.Under the most' favorable Conditions, Communications Act of 1934 as amended. ,comniunications may take place between ships Under this act, thi Federal ComMunicatiOns at ravges in_the vicinity of 12;000 yards. Commission (FC0is responsible to Congressfor re-gutaangfrequency Useby U.S. PYROTECHNICS non-GOverriment, activitieS and the -President is a. responlibteforregalatiriguse--4- Fe de ral Pyrotechnics for signaling -are, fOi the.most -GoVernmentagencies.. ThePresidenthas part,of the "fireworks'!variety.. Common. delegatedthe authorityfor assignment and sOurceS are colored , shell .bthsts '(Parachute control of radio frequency resources used by fiares),. aircraft parachute,flares,,roman, candleS, Governmentagenciesto.thebirectorof and fibat-type flares. TelecommUnications Management under the The ineining,öfa--pyrotechnie signatdepends 'Office of Emerge:ley Planning. oil the color instead, of the type of pyrotechnic The allocation,, assignment, and protection emplOyed. of all .frequencies Used by any componentof the The authorized _useof pyrotechnics for NavYaretheresponsibilityof _communications.is,ingeneral,limited 'to COMNAVTELCOMM: Detailed execution of the emergency-Signals. respo6sibility :is,vestedin a frequency- Management office, organizationally within the Naval Telecommunications Command. RADIO,FREQUENCY SPECTRUM' Authority for any use of the radio frequency spec trummustbe'obtainedfront The rapid .-Pre,Wthinthe quantity and COMNAVTELCOMM. c ompl e xi ty oof c omrhunication-electronics equipMents and ,theincreasedinternatiodal FREQUENCY BANDS requiriinents,, for radio, frequencies have Placed unprecedenteddeniands -uponthe- radio An.1967_, the'U. S. Navy adopted the term frequency spectrum. These' demands include, Hertztodesignateunitsciffrequency 'per such serviceapplications as cOmmunications second. If.a frequency was, formerly 10 cycles (fixed, mobile, broadeast, 'sPace); location and per second, it is ncfw referred to as10 Hertz ran gi ng(radar, - l)eacons,'radio-n avigaticin); (Hz). Because units, of radio-frequencies become identification;standardtime and . frequency so large numerically, they are 'countedin terms 71 COMMUNICATIONS-_TECHNICIAN'O*3 & 2 of thousands, millrons, ,billions and trillions of coyer the face Of the earth. New sea frontieri to Hertz,using appropriate ,,,prefixeS -fromthe , the.north have opened:a four-million square.--mile -metric systern: kilo, mega, ,giga, and tera. The ice-covered ocean of strategic importanCe. The latter tWo,,giga and .tera. as yet-have, limited requirement- for positiVe contrpl of U. S. Navy applicationinnayalcommunications. A- -forces-operating-in new-and expanded areas has Kilohertz is 1 thousand Heat. and is abbreviated dictated.an-urgent eed:foradditiOnal -kHz; a megahertz is-1 million Hertz, abbreviated communication caPaCity, fange; and reliability MHz, and, sp on. A frequency,Of 15,000 -Hertz, for the Navy's command responsibilities. Tills for eicample, is expressed as 15 .kHz. 'When the . need ihas bebn confirthed through.fieet exercises numberofkiloheritbecomes toolarge, The need; has been particutarly treat the megahertz are.subsfituted to-simplify the,figure. North Atlantic, arfd the nei;yly opened Arctic Thus, 8,2,000 kHz is expressed as-82 MHz and-so Ocean.,High frequency-circuits which are subject on. / to numerous :outages from- atirbral and Frequencies are divided -into eight bands; as disturbances prevented `reliable cornthunicatiobs Shown ln TABLE 5-1. The propagation of radio from previouslyexisting, U.S. Jiaval -Radio waves varies widely at different frequencies Stations.Verylowfrequency(VLF) throughouttheradio spectrum, aSwillbe transmissions proyide a highly reliable path for explained-in Chapter 7. This provides.a,Choice of communications in these northern iatitudes, as frequencies best suitedfor various types of well as over and under alLoceans and.seas of the communications as discussed in 'the following world. VLF traffic reached a peak in the earty paragraphs.. twenties when it was the only means of -long distance wireless coMmunicatiOns., After .this -3/LF-COMMU1S4C4TIONS. period,nany commercial VLF stations were =4,,) abandoned in favor of high frequency-(HF), drie The'paceofprogres,sandworld partly to thb toiver cost of HF equipment. At devei op.ments-political,ge-ogreaphical. present,:psactically all-VLF transmitters are used .technological and military-hoe broadened tlk. for fleet communications or navigation. In this Navy's ,commitments far communications to connection, the U. S. -Navy has been-using VLF Table 5-1.Radió Frequency Spectrum FREQUENCY bESCRIPTION ABBREVIATION 30GHZ-306GHz extremely high frequency EHF 3(34-30GHz super high' frequency SHF 300MHz.:3GHz ultra high frequency UHF o, 30Hz-390MHr very high frequency VHF 3MHz-30Hz high frequency HF -30'01tHz_14MHz._ Medium frequency' MF 30kHz-300kHz low frequency LF 3kHz-lOkHz very lovr frequency VLF .;= 31.20 72 66 4 Chapter5--COMMDNICATION' sAws ,liiiise,_particularly at' haMpered=-by--atMospheric the for-general- broadcasting-toships atsea:torn-10Y latitudes.Inaddition of reception is-such -0low geographical decades,. The- dependability increasing- demandfor radiodommunicatiOns of the_ receiVed message_is congestionof that no conflririation- soon-resultedinserious of tie nOrinally required. transinissions -withinthe- development -? systeins.About-1924, -Of all -high frequency "beamed" offered an Recent -history hasshown.an _increase it was found thatde highlrequenciei this is especially 'trueof VLFt to-- manylong-distance -radio. traffic -and again, -not attractive'solution Stich -an increase _may,be exp,ected- and the -uaaof lhe but, -for coMmunication ,PrOblems, -as fornavalCommuniCations, b e cameconsidered- only of satellites, lowf re quen cies factOrs ' communidationsto lair numbers Outmoded:Nevertheleaa, propagation arid: as- a backup toshort wavecOmmunicationa low-frequenty-band haveresulted- The. strong peculiar to the on., blacked out bynuclear activity. their continued useforradio coMinimicati VLF by the world's-navies -low frequency reliance ,placed; on In particular,the reCeption of communications is goodevidence of seriously affectedduring perioda for crucial_ waves is nOt so -when VLF reliability'during hostilities. ofi on ospheric-distitti-,bance SecOndary applicationsof the VLF range the highfrequenciesis standard communications 'at include the WorldWide_transmission -Of of -this, there is-apatticular for -disrupted. :Becinse frequencies, at -freguency and- timesignals. The reqUirethent interest- in theapplication ,Of loW of standard:frequeney and-time Since_ the initiat-useof radio the distribution 'long northern latitudes. -ate hest accttracy over purposta,contidetable sighals in forconnbunication both the distances has -becomeindeasingly important advances' have -been-Made in improving science. It iseasential -for the quality ofcOmmunications by Many, fields of clock efciencyf and the tracking of spacevehitles worldwide df:Communications'theory,radio calibration,. -the application ayonchronizationandoscillator propagation studies,_and- new techniquet. -Of atornic frequency wave provide -the. beat -international- _comparisons dationomy, --The---Nav-y7requirethent_to_ standards, radid_navigational- aida, to the fleet!Tilt-rites-it-- laboratories,4nd possible COmmunications engage-in n a ti onalstandardizing ,40 ''OPerate onall frequeney -bands, - improveits,existing communication systems. have , -constant-researchto Experiments -overthe last few years utilizenew syttems:and . broadcast, of capabilitiesand shown thebenefits-of VLF for the developments as theybecome operationally friquency signala with -more. standard- thrie and- reliable (provensyatems). preasion for -theoperation of Fleet BroadcastSystem than adequate devices In the past the synchronous cryptodeVicesi deppding ,provided shipa atseawith lowfrequency4LF) and sinOe sidebaridtransmiSsions. conimhaieations via -CWtelegraphtransmissions. advanced;thesysteMwas As --tcchnology Metype LF COMMUNICATION ,convtrted -to ainglechannel radio communication ,also only a Iransinissions. "tOday- LF The 4)W-frequencyand occupies operates as a segmeiitof the Fleet 'Multichannel very sMall partof the radiofrequency speetruin. prOViding eight channelsof band' of frequencieshas Broadcast Systein- traffic on Nevertheless, :this small' Fregtlency DivisionMultiplek -teletype eommunication 'sincethe advent been used for signifiCance of each trarismisskin. of radio. Althoughthe historical bandis well; known,the great the low frequency MFCOMMUNICATION- extent of presentusage ofthis band is not the-part. generally appreciated. The .ineditnn-frequency band coVers radio communications,the from 300kIL in the history of installations of the of the radiOfrequency spectrum_ low-frequency transmitting InCluded .inthis range arethe characterized by theirlarge to 3 MHz. frequency 500 kHz(to pioneering eta virere conatruction and . Iriternarional Distren, --PhysicaLsize and bytheir high andeOproy.imately484- kHz- to Role-Over, -then,- -as-now. monitor) maintenance costs. respond fromaliorestations-(Coaat-Guard). signal reception atlov,freqUenciea:-was seriousls 73 . 9 . .tommtniicATIpN4 TECHNIcIAN o 3 & *, _Every ship hava_ receiVer and 4,transmitter distinCes is, dependent Upon: refraction_ of radio set for these emergency frequencies; ,when at waves hy layers, of the ionosphere,discussedin sea, -the receiveriS continuously monitored and qtaPter 7. The -height and density of thete thetransmitter is 'usuallyinthe standby laYersjorthed'Primarily-,by ultraviolet radiation, position. Ashore, the receiver and transmitter ficirn the sun, varjr- significantly with the time of configuration is usually affiliated, with search day, season ,of the year, andthe eleven_ year * and -ietcue, organizations, which are..-generilly cycleof. Sunspot activity. Because of -these located near the,Coait. .Variations, -it is ,generally nedessary -to- use more than a singie-frequency,:sometinies up to four or There are occasions When ;he 560 kHz 0 . _ frequenoy is used- for calling another station. five, to maintain cOmmunications on a circuit. Since all' Navy,and Merchant ships-must-mOnitor In-spite-of the difficUities encountered' with this -frequency,- i t is sometiemes convenient(when, HP propagation, pie. economic,, and, technical the sender does, not :know what Otherfrequency adViiitages pf'using high frequenciesNhave led to thereceiver is Monitoring) to send a- Short rapid_ expansiOn of the use dr the HF band. message stating_ what TrequenCythe, receiVer UltiMately, as:the.number of users-increased,- use ShOuld turn to:for- further communicitioni. The of the HF spectrum-approached saturatien.. only restrittion_ is Ihat no-call-uP,transmissions- The HF band it shared bY many users) bbth are permitted, during the periods 1.5411Minutes . foreign* anddomettie,andonlyportions and_ 45-48 minutes Tast _the hour,,every hOur 6f scattered ihrotighout the band are allocated-to the day, These peds of time arc commónly the ,itilitary serVices. in common with other referred to as silen riods. and are reqUired by ageneles,.NaVy requirements have-grown so as tO law to -pennit the fre.qUency to- be- clear --of"-all severely tax_the capacity of the Navy's, assigned butsmergencycomnidnication. portiOn a the -HF -spectrum. Use of Only the upper ahd lower encr of ths MF singleirdeband equipment and the apPliCitioit-- band have naval use ,betause- of the commerdial :ofindependentsidebandtechniqueshave broadcast band extending from 535 . -ta 1605 increased the capacity, but not enough to catch kHZ.frequenciesin the loWerportion of the MF °uP with the dethand.. Some predietthattatellite._ band (300 to SOO kHz) ire tied primarily for communications (discussed, in_Chapter 6) Will ground wave transMissiOn _for ,Moderately ,long eventuallY relieve congestion-in the HF band-an4 distances over Water and moderate. :tO shOrt that; for sometypet of service', it will replaCe distances oVer land. TransmisSion. in the. upper for long,diS t afiCe- communications. Nevertheless, MF 'band is generally limited-to,short- haul (400' it :apRears that:the HF spectrUm will,continue to mileS), reliable, point togoint cireuits. intigh dethand for some time. Naval conimunications within the HF band HF CCiMMUNICATIONS can The grouped into four general types Of service):point-to-pOint,ship-to-shore, " The-Navy began t.iing high frequencies, for groun&to-air, and fleetbroPdCast.SOme of these . radio communications around World War-l-when services involve ,ships and aircraft which present a few communication systemsowere.ciPetateditin. specialPrOblems,becauseof theirphysical frequencies near 3 MHz. In view of the extensiVe characteristics and Mobility. denerallY, the less pi-esent day use ,of high frequencies for long than ,optimum HF performance of.theie,mobile distance CoMmunications, it seems curious now terminals is at least yartially Offsetty powerful that those Navy sy4items.Were intended-, for very transrmtters and, sensitive receiving systems..at short range coMmunications. of -aieWtniles-c The the shOre'terminalt. - general belief ,it -the time was -that freqUencies above 1.5, Mgt:were useless for communication Point4o-,Point Communications purposes: , OnLcthe _prominent features Of .high Point-to-point.syStems are those established frequency -iong-distance communidatiOn IS the to communicate over lông-distance -trunks or varable -nature ,of _thepiopagation_ medium. linksbetimen-fixedterminals.Generally, Suedaiful tiaiismission_ of HF signals over long ,Sufficient real estate is atquired it the terminals 7.4 68 ,A Chapter '5----,COMMUNICATION BASICS to permit- the, Use of large, high ,gain .antennas4 ground terminal. For example. higher powered aimed at opposite terthinals of each link. This transmitters, lower noise receivinginstallations, increases _the effective, radiated power, and the and more effiCient antennas can be Used on the sensitivity of the receiving slisteril, and-it also- ground. reduces 'susceptibilityofa circuitto , intc&rence,. With the-path length and-direction Fleet-Broadcasts fiXed,:a'ctommcidation of the Other propagation yariables andhighlyreliable As ,,the name implies, this type of service coMmunicatiOns can be achieved. involves broadcast 'ai.ea, coverage from ,shoie : - based-. tranSmitters to shipsat. Sea. Messages Ship-to-Shore Communications. addressed _to- a ship in a designated broadcast area are delivered by various means to the This apPlication of the 14F. band is More appropriate fleet broadcast station where they difficult than the .point-tp7Point-case, since one arebroadcastfor pickup bythe ships. To terminal, the ship; is mobile. In this ca§e the, overcome the-propagation difficulties, the same path -length. and direction are variable. At the inforMationisbroadcast §imultaneouslyon §hipterMinalthit) limitedspace andother severalfrequencies.Thatis,mostfleet restrictiOnsprohibit_ installaiionoflarge, _broadcasts are, frequericy-diversity transmissions efficient -Ht. antennas. Because ofthe providing theterminalto choose the"best of shills, shipb.oard-antennas are designed to be frequenCy-for the path_ conditions at the time. asnearly omnidirectional as possible. - The -cOnstraintSzre notaScsévere,at the,shOre VHF AND ABOVE terniinal Where there isstifficient sPacefor-more efficientomnidirectional .an tennasor arrays, Frequencies above 30 ,i-negahertz care not -designed for area coverage. MoreoVer; at,the normally refracted :by :the ionosphere, nor is shore terminal_ a rotatable, high-gain antenna or ground wave range appreciable; hence, service-is one:of the fixed point-to-point antennas may be confined to dIstinces approximately within the usedunder, apProPriatecircumstances.For iine of sight. A significant exeeption to this example,a rhombic'antenna., may-serve general -prindiple isthe .increased range 'made 40 admirablyfOrlongrhaul_Ship-to-shore possiblethroughtheemployment 'of communications .when the 'ship is ata -distance trop osPhericscattertechniques.-Forward suchthatit§operating area withinthe propagation bYtroposphericscatter -(FPTS) coverage of the antenna atthataistance._ (discussed in More detail later in this chapter) SeVeral_frequencies are usually assigned 'for has provenfeasible up to several thousand .tach circuk-so that the best freqUency can he megahertz. Certain atmospheric and-ionospheric .chosen, fOr the. propagation .path -conditions, condition§ can- also cause normal line Ofsight° between the shore terminaland- the ship's _range to be extended at tirnes. Frequencies at ,P 1i:cation. the lower end Of this -band are capable of overcoming the shielding effects of hills and Ground-to-Air ComMunications struoturesto some degree but-as the frequencyis increased the shielding effect becomes more .Theappliegtionof HFradioto pronounced. Receptionis notably free' from communications -betweenthe. groundand, atmospheric 'and man-made static. The -V-HF and airborne aircraft is'similar to the shiikb-shore UFH bandsare known as"lineof sight" case,excepttheaircraftterminalchanges transmissionbands.Thatistosay,the position- Jpuch, mOre ppidly thRn doesa ship. transmitting antenna is in a direct line With -the Transinitter power and antennarestrictions receiving_antenna; it is not over the horizon. Tht imposedby ,stheairframedesign. limitthe "line of sight" characteristic makes the bands -effectiveness of the airborne HF radlotertninal. ideal or utilizing the VHF for amPhibious Ali major Circuit improvements must be made operations (beach :landing from sea craft) and. by the application of 'suitable techniques attA theUHF fortactical'voicetransMissions 75 9 COMMUNICATIONSTECHNICIAN 0, 3 ac 2 (maneuvering of ships, traveling together). The grminals, but not simultanepuily.All -May SHE bandisused for radar and satellite. receive concurrently, but only one May send communications whereair-the EHF bandis in the -time. : exPerimental stage and not in active. tise by the Navy. -Half-Duplex-(HDX) A Ainidireetional'flowOf infamation COMMUNICATION:LINKS betWeen terminals. Technical arrangements-may_ permit -transmissii* in -either direction, but nOt A cOmplexoflinks.forinsaMajor sitnultaneously.Thistermthen,mustbe to`show S/O (send only)1210 (receiVe a c-om mu-air:at:ionssystem.TheNaval . qualified Communication System .is broken .down into only); S/R (send 6?receive)., two,grouPs: strategie and tactical. :StrategiccornmunicatiOnsaregenerally Seinkluplex (SDX) global. in ;nature and-are- operated-On _a CommOn user- or -special-purpose- basis:-While a, Strategic A technical_arrangementWherein one system_ ma? be confined, within-,a-specifled,area terminal is siMplex configured and the otherFull or limited -to a specific' type of-traffic, the duplex using. two channels or frequencies. A contigurationis such fhat inter-operation With clarifying example WOUld he a ship With only. other' strategic ,systems is ,possible lyhen desired one, key4bard/Printer or oueC 0,M.S EC or: required. For example, Autovon,Autodin deviceterminatedfullduplextwith' a and D$SCS. NAVCOMMSTA. Tactical tomminications usually are limited Duplex (FDX) 4, 7 to k'specific_area of operations,and are usedto direct or report-themovenient.ofspecifie-forces. A Methodofoperationin,which Sometacticalnets.areutilized,onlyfor telecommunications between stations May take,' ,Operati6na1traffic.;, others May be used for place simultaneously in both directions. The .operationalandadministrative.traffic,For- term `!fu11 duplex" issynOnymouswith instance, the task force .andlask groUp netk and "duplex." air contrOl nets-Ordinarily _are ernPloyed for P operationaltraffic..Ship-to-shorenets, and -Broadcast (pcsT) .broadcast nets-can terve -both, typesoftraffic: c., 'Broadcast is,that pipe of operation iivwhich MODES:OFOPERATION one',station emits information, on one Or .more channels;. which, may be received by -mOrt than Communication links Shave numerous modes one station and/of- unit. There is no,prOvision of operation. Inthisdiscussion, modes of for receipt or reply in a broadcast syStern; operation can be identified as a, link or path however, specialarrangements.may require reply between two or morepoints,capableof at a later dine 'by other- means.Broadcasts are providingoneormorechannelsforthe the cpritnary means of delivering Message traffic transmissionof intelligence. Thefivemost -to tile fleet. Units copying sbroadeast are not prominent modes of operations: plustheir required to receiptfor Messages received 4nd can whilestill standard abbreviations are as folloWs: Simplex therefore ' maintainradio' silence N (SX), Half Duplex (HDX)*, Semiduplex (spx), ,redeiving essential traffic'. c Duplex (F.DX), and,Broadcast (BC$T): There are-three-Win-Which radio trYfficis senttothefle : broadcast, intercept, and SimPkx (SX). receipt. ThefirSt, 'two are "d4 not answer" methods, while the thirdas its .nanie implies,. A single channel or frequency used to .requires a receipt from- the 'addressee (addee) for exchange inforMation between. two or more each message. Broadcast and intercept 'methods s'd 76 70 43 Chapter 5- CpMMUNICAT1ON allow tlIket to pfeserve iadio-silence. which is dypartmen tsand, other defenseactivities.In agreatadvantage from ihe standpoint pf essence the IX'S Lombines into a single system securit.By the intercept method, a shore radio those eleMents that make up the NaVy!s Naval station ,transmhs messages to another shore Communications8ysteni,-theArmy's station -Which repeats them back. Ships intercept STARCOMM, and the Air Force's AIRCOM. 4nd copY all traffic. _ Tlw, switched networks discussed -in this Broadcast is preferable to intercept chiefly sec lion,NUT-OVON, AUT(5SEVOCOM, because It is faster. -It is the method by whi6b ,AUTODIN and- DSSCS,:are part of the -DC,§,-arict nearly all .fleet traffic is -handled, and it- utilizes are managed -by the Defense Lommunications all. Sour s9stems of radio comniunicatiork: Agency (DCA). These PCS:Switched -Networks radi-ote-/-egraph, _radio-teleph-one, should not be confused with the HICOW(Fligh radio-teletypewriter, and fassiMile. Command) and NORATS (Navy Operational. Them is-some:Similarity between civilian and RadioandTelephoneSwitchboard)nets naval brdadcasts. Just as- commereial stations in mentioned later in this section which suppOrt the broadcast band. transmit,programs .to -radio only designated-Nar, requirements. receivers in -the homeS ,intheir Communities, Na vy c Omnu n ic a t ionstationsbroadcast Autoinatic-Voice Network (AUTOVON) messages-,7toffeetUnits. la theirparticular geograPhic areaS. 'The terni."broadeaSt, in fact, The DCS AUTOVON offert rapid, direct Originated in naval communications. interconnection.of DOD andcertainother TheresemblancebetweenNavyand ove rn me n ti ns tallati&s.AOTOVON is- cointhercialstations 'ceaseshere,however. in-tendedtob-e a single,worldvride, n fornia tion broadcast -bynaval. cornmunications general-purpose. diiedt dialing SYstem. Its .goal Stati onsiscontainedin chronologically -to coinplete connections betWeen. iwo points numbecred messages addresSed to-the ships. The anywherein -the world in about 2 seconds.and td messageS are copied by the fleet units. which complete regular connections- with' pushbutton cheek the serial -numbers AD -ensure -that they speed.' have a:doinplete The KUTOVON .sy§temis comprised of Ffeet broadeasts follOw regular schedules. several installations comparable in -function to Messages are placed-on the schedules in order of commercial-telephone exchangeS. An installation precedence. If a :message orhigher precedence is is referred to.as an.AUTOVON switeh, or simply giventoa-transmitterstation-while a switch`.. WithinindividualareasareIda- lowCr-precedence' message-is being transmitted, command,. control,and administrative voice thelattermessage...Maybeinterruptedto coninnMicalion systems. The systems can be Iransmit the message, of higher precedence. connepted intothe world wide .AUTOVON' All ships cOpyall meSsages-a'ppearing o ____ths_o_ugh. _manually -operatedtelephone broadcast-seltedule-whieltthey'are guarding. switchboards, or autbinatic dial. exchanges, by To ensure-secep.tion-of these verrimportant provision of direct in or out dialing tapabilities. broadcasts, they normally are transmitted on *veral frequencies -to allow a Choice fOr best Nbrmal ALINVON service makes it pOssible reception, cOnsiderinv the -time Of day -or night foksubscribing stations to óall other statiohs on and theatrnosphenc conditions: a worldwide basis 'for day-to-day .noripreemPtive traffic.Dependingon'thetypeof service SWITCH,Eb-NETWORK available in each locality, AUTOVON-calls-inay be accOmplished either -bydirect dialing of As discussed in the previous 'chapter, the 'hrough a loeal operator. Where users, require DefenseCommunicationsSystem (DCS) is priority calls to be made, they place" the call confposedofall'wOrld-wide,long-haul, with their local- operator or:the AUTOVON-dial -goVehNent-owned and leasedpoint-topoint serviceassistanceOperator.Moredetailed circuitS,trunks,terminals', switching centers, information on, AUTOVQN can be found in control Jacilities, and tributaries of military' JANAP 0 77 - 'COMMUNICATIQNS TECHNICIAN-0 3 & 2 .. Automatic Secure -Voice Communicatioms Ithercofinec.tion-of AUTODIN switching (AUTOSEVOCOM) centers is accomplished through a network ,of high-frequency-radio channeltsubmarine cables, AUTOSEVOCOM is- a woddwide, switehed -microWave tropOspheric channels; .arid telephone network -whose pu.yoseis to proyide variety of wire lines. these tthusmission medias- authorized- users with_ a means -fck exchanging areairailable from existing DC§ transinisslon classifitdinfOrmation ovcr C 0 M § 'E C _resource's, AUTOVON. and front, commercial securecireuitryorofficially -designated2S dothmunication apprOyid, circuitry. the systeni conSists 'ofboth Backbone of the WUTODIN, system is the mant4 and_ automated networks uried- together, AUTODINswitchingcenter,(ASC).Basic -to forma Mnge Systein. functions of the ASC ,are to acdept, store, and Interfacearrangenientiarenecessaryto retransmit.digital messages frcirri- one location go ,overcome differences in the:security equiptnent another, automatically detect and' Correct errors. and- transmission-modes be tweencircuit switcheS andace oriipl ishalternatef-outing.Each andfor subscriber terMinals of-one system, to, the switChing.center -has-a high degree of _reliability -other. -There--are-tWO-gypes--of4witches-inthe.___ ulting,from..dupliCatemajor unitsr, which can .AUTOSEVOCOM:systern: ,b activatedwitha rninirnurn of disrupted service: The- _current, statils, of an ASC Cari be (1) 'Switches' diat provide- Users With an checked' a t, any 'Moment by obtaining a- prin totit autanatically -sWitched: secure voice capability. of exactly hrivi narly messages, by Precedence ,(2) SwitChes /hat requite-the assistance of an (required speed Of transMissiOn) and destination, operator. are' in- the -center. The interface4 service Provided by switchboard Each overseas, ASC is capable 'of recogniiing operators is-in addition to nonnal-switch'service .and routing 921non-relay routing indicators provided- for their locally-conneeted subssribers. -(routing indicators of five or more charaqers). -Ad 4tionally,gnne haVal=coriimunications Thistotalincludes21,5collectiverOutifig stationsareequippedtoextend indicators,(encoMpassingfmorethanone AUTOSEVOOM-Serviee'to shipboard- uSers. addressee). 'Ind 512 relay l(fOur letter) routing A telephone directoiy ,published- periodically indicators. contains 'subscnberlistingS, general 'instructions The Aole concept of AUTODIN isto - forplacingcalls,and=troübletreporting =reduce,manual' handlingOf messagestoa procedures. Additionally., JANAP 138 contaths minimum by, the use of automated eqUipment; coinple teoperating' instruction&on to reduce message deli'Verytime& .and *laY AUJOSEVOCOm. anywhere in /he viorldgba _matter of secOnds-(in essence, _real-tirne). rather than in minutes or, AutOmatic Digital Network (AUTODIN), touts,. >lore informationon AUTODIN equipments The DCS AUTODIN a, fully' automatic and message format. will be covered in later ,digital,data switchingsystem capable of handling chiApters of this manual. Operating procedures anY type- of -information- in, digital form. The for- AUTODIN, can- be found in JANAP 128. ., system conSiSts of high-speed; electronic,.solid , "state switching centers;.variousgypes of data and Defense Special Secuthy Communications teletypesUbsc riberterminals,and System (DSSCS) interconnecting transmission media. AIITODIN'isintendedto ,. afford TheDefe,nseSpecialSecurity instantaneous,errot-free,and.5 secure CommunicationsSystem(DSSCS). was communicatiOns around the wodd to several eStablished by the Deputy Secretary of Defense thousanddirectlyconneetedsubscriber on 4 Noverfiber, 1964. Thepurpose of 'the terMinals. Dady capacity of-the system is in the PSSCS was to integrate the Critical Intelligence _neighborhoodof 5.millionaverage-length Cominunications (CRITICOMM) and Special IntelligenceComfnunications(SPINTCOMM. messages. ,- , 4 78 72 :11 0 'rphapter 5=--POMMONICATION BASICS n'etworksit-toaSingleautornated not-to-interferebasisforrestoration _ctithinunications netWork.Ineffect,the coordination,asnearly' all ,NAVCOM TAs integrationOf .DSSCS ,subScribeisInto guard their respective area nets, AUTODIN:, prOVi dos tWo, separate Systonis,:wi thin AUTODINI. one -systeM -for- SpeCiay:Intelligence Na3r. Operational Radio and Telephone (SI), -iinesSagetraffic -and the- 'Other. -fOr the Sivitchboard (NORATS) AUTODIN,coiMrion user: While ,the AUTODIN andpsscsiraffic 4 interiniZed.within- The NORATS Meets' theneed for an AUTODIN -ASP and onjnter-ASC trunki, strict interface between .Navy tactical voice systems of physical seParatiOn Of all'DSSPS and AUTODIN the' operating forces and the Variousfixed- input andoutputterminalfacilitiesis telephone senices ashore, so that the -tactical. niaintaine4.:40 ASC Pitch-and Test Facility vOice Can,be .extend0toshorerbased (PTF) is conAgUted With-a unique YelloviPatch operational- commands. NORAitt' Provides bay isolated from the standard,RedPitch bay-to common terminal point in the Fleet Center of inSure-that- PSSCS accesslitiii/COMSEC each communication station where installed-for equipmen't andotherstibstriberacdeSs alt ship-4-04hcie -voice- circuits and all- applitable: iiheQMSEC, equipmentcannotbe .local_ shore telephone systems, andextensions. A driterCimnect ,coinbined -AICOM/NORATS, cOnsole exist). at Althou'the .above explpgion -is primarily % Certain NAVCOMMSTAs. devbted td-- lugh speed:,operations, many -'Nayy stationi ,cantinue to operate low speed; -100 WPM; circüits. Itoweier, !Most of thes Stations TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS .afe. alsO .connecte'd toan Age -to, tieneflt froirf ..ttie automated extern4highspeed enVironment. Transmissionsystemsareclassed 'either As ah ='eXamPle,-oneiriput Subscnher-souldsend "nartowband" of "wideband." These termsrefer -a,message at 100 W,PM- 0-an ASC. The ASC, in to ,the bandwidth of a transinission sYstem, and turn, could pass this_ traffic to aziother ASp _at the number of channels utilized.in tranSmitting 4300 Stri)k or ,to*other subsoriber at 200- mess a-get i n-o-the r.words,the WPM; The "output ^Of a' given Message is ;not information-carrying capacity of a- transinission simultaneotis witkitS-input. Each Message ,Must- -systeM. be reCeivedin its-,ettiretyin theT,''store" position Nartowband'transmission systems .consist of of the ASC before,. forwarding, of that-message a group Of. facilities .(or subsystems) whose can -begin. informationrcapying 'bandwidth is 4 Nolte Should alsO'b, noted, a number, of circuits channels ;of few,er. NarroWband :Systems.include terminating at Navy SI communtiOns.ceriters highfrequency ,radio(singlesideband- and . ,(e.g.,Ship/Shore,Conon:arid/Control, independent Si deband)', and -laxidlines. liroadcasts,etC:,)remains aciive. pi) support, Wideband tranimission 'systems consist of a designated_Navy requirements andlias =not been groupcf °transmissionfacilities 'havingan integrated into, AUTODINMSSCS. -informatión-carrying 1?andwidth.- of more than 4 Voice channels, regardlest -of transthission means, Iligh Cornmand.(HICOM) Networic or frequenCy utilized. BandWidth and-nUmber of Voide Channels uied depend -on ttie -type of The HICOM network provides a voice link , system. Links carrying 1800 -voice channels between CNO, the Fleet Commanders in Chief, through a single transmitter and receiver are, and subordinate commands ashore, afloat and available, ,Included in wideband Systems, are ..- airborne. CNO is the master control station; the forwardprOpagaliontroposphericsCafter, FLTCINCS are area network' contfol stations. (FPTS),inierowave, and cable systems. All NAVCOMMSTAs are meMberS. In the past and to a. large -degree in lite In cases where afle,etunit is suffering present, narrowband systenis -are(and have coMmunicationsdifficultieswithnormal been) 4the main link between communicatiOn channels,HICOM oanbe.usedona faCilities. Although .wideband systerne are inore -COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN 0 3 & 2 desirable than natrowband_ systems, their- USage antenna is approximately 186,000 miles per Gf arvover-crow4edlreqiiency second. spectrum As technidal eqUipthent In-thisSection We willdiscuss how mod systenit- are deyised and.econoinical se of -electroinagnetic waves, are prôduced, the _frequency speCtrunvIS4Olved,-indreased. use ,prOcess-of rnodidation, by which the message.* Wideband-systernais,expected. _attached -to an eledtiomagnetic-wave mesSage: 6'2-ler. tater -in this Manual me will- deal- With TRA$SMISSION-OF1NFORMATION' radio wave-propagatiOn and antennas. AY RADIO° 'CARRI CHARACTERISTICS To .,,conyey 'I -message- betWeendistant-pOints a message-Oarrier is Tequired. Sihce the-majority The- r-f (radio frequency) signal Used, to -of the- NaVy's commtMidations is to-arid from tranSmit intelligence from one point to_ anOther lieet units, the-only practiCal and ideal message iscalledthecarrier.Itcontists -ofan -carrier for transmitting inforMation to theSe el e c from agir eticwavehayingamplitude, Units-is throughrSpace by ele.ctroinagnetic waves, -frequency, and.phase. If the-voltage variations-of COniMiinlyalkd radio- -waves-."- The-speed- -of an r-U-signal-are--graphed-in-respect_to4ime,;_the___ transmission through' thSpace Medium frOm result is a waveforin such as that in --figure-54. thetranstittingantennato, therectiving The =Modulated carrier isa_ sine wave that PEAK tO PEAK AMPLITUDE 0-- 1-07--- ONE CYCLEri PAE .31.90 ,Flguro 5:1.Groph of Typikal thimodulateddaffier. 80 71 " N ( Cliapter 5-=COMMUNICATION pA'sIcs _ repeats itself iridefinite intervals of tiMe. It swings first .inthitpositive and their in the negarive...direetibnabout the time axis and, representS-eluinges in-the amplitude of the-wave. ThiS adionissimilar to that 'of alternating l Current in a wire. Where these swings-represent #11111},ti 0.12 3 4 56789 10-11 12 reversals,inthe direction,ofcurrentiflow. _PerhapsthesiMPlestapproach- an understanding.ofthesineWaveand'its, characteristics is- ,to considera rotating vector used' to kenerate a sinewqve. In actual- practicer- 31.92, 'sineWaves arc generated _by _electricaldevices Figure.5-29.-Nector after-30 degreesrotation. designed:for thStpurpose. Assume that a vectOr. as ,shown in *figure 5-2A. is -lying in, a horizontalTlaneand-pointing from the ,point of the vector asbefore. The to the right. A line -divided into increments procedure is- repeated 'fOrevery 30 degrees of -representing Hine lies-to the right of thevector. rotafiab until th,,e vectortaS completed oneluil If the vector in figure 5-2Awere rotated; a revotution. of 860 degiges and's, returned- to -its, certain angle would exist between its starting -originalpoint, ,as shown in _figure '5-2C. A , position- and its position- atany given instant. If continuous line drawn, through--the-successiVe-- theSINE(a trigonometricfunction,not poinis plotted -willbein- the' Shape,szif one discussed here) of the andes formed by the repetitiOn ôfa sinewave: :this single repetition-is vector at- a series of regular intervals_ is 'plotted known as, one .CYCLE ofthe sine wave.-Itrcan be' along the time base. the resultantcurve will;be -seen that if the tiMe base were extended and-a -in the shape of a sineWave. Second revolution, of the vector ,plotted there Woidd -be two, cycles. of'the sinewave.. Nate that the 360 degree paint of one cycie-doincides Witk thebeginning, -Or0,, degrees, ,point ôf.th e folloWing cycle. If you -study, Figui:e 5-2C fora mont; -Several impor;anf characteristics or, sinewaves can be seen: , . a.Rotating the vedtar at a constant rateof travel through. one; 360 degree cycle takes a specific amount of, time. ecinal to the, ethpsed 31.91 Figure 5-2A.--A Vector and a Time base. ,400"7," 30, ` -Looking at figure 5-2E, assume that inone, Ste 310 timeincre-mentthevectorrotates is;41-7:;%W counterclockwise from its rest position at 0 o 1 2?3 4 5,-8 7 V I 10 1112- degrees to the .30 degree position. This it plotted .1, .------along the time base .by placing - one dot-ataand. 2717' ,t other dot above the' I.directlyacross froth -the point of the vector to advance another50 deem to the '66, degree position. the neW "31:93 position of the Vector is Plotted ,along the time Figure 5-2C.:-Pl:ot of Sinevieve after 360 degreesVector base by placiliga dot above-the 2, directly acrosi rotation. . 81 'COMMUNICATIONS' TECHNICIAN b 3 & 2 time -between the begimine and end, Of, one necessary variations arc uSeless unless they,ait *-1cycleof- theresultant sintmave. The time be transmitted to their intended destination. required- is referred to as the -PEltIOD- of the When .cireumstances ,diclatethatintelligenLe cycle. if the, vector makes one revolution per waves rgach a distant point without the useof second, a cycle, of :the sinewa%4-will' have a. telephone ,cables, -they Must be radiated in the period of onsecond, If -the, 'rate -of sotation is forin_Of radio waves., -increased- to -onethousand revolutions-ner secondeach.cycle of-the resultant Sinewaye will As proanced attheir source. information then haVe, aperiod, of one-thousandth - of a waves are generally or such low frequencies that second,(one theirwavelengths (wavelengthdiscussedin b.:The faster the vector rotates the faster chapter 7) are too long to be efficiently radiated' sinewaves -are generated. The nnmber of cycles by,practical antenna-systems; The frequencies of that, are convicted -in one,second is refrred tti the human voice encounteredonstandard as the-FREQUENCY of the wave. If tne yector broadcast Vansmissions. for instart.:.... range only .makei one-revolution per second,the:,compIeted fronutbout,_100 to 5-,000 Liz. Thewavelength at sinewave has a -frequency of one- cycle per -5,000' fiz- would- be.over 3-7; miles. 'and at 100 Hz seoond Hz).4f the rate:of-rotation-is increased it wolild be, 1863 miles. 9bviously, u would, OE to: one -thousand- revoliinons per seeblid-,-the- -be- practical to construct antennas-designed .to frequency -of the Sinewave Will -be one thoand- operate at such wavelengths. -cycles persecond( , , 'c.themagnitudeof'thesinewAve, The solution-to-the problen is to tranSizite normally some value of voltage or current, can. the information wave' up, WO "a higher part of be seen to-Vary above and Wow thytime base. the frequency spectrum- wht:re wavelengths are the value at any given point' along the line is conpatible with practical antenna sizes. This' calledthe,,,INSTANTANEOQS AMPLITUDE; frequency translationis accomplished by -the the maximum value above or .below the lint-iS process _oti modulation. Actually the process of referred -to as PEAK AMPOTUDE. Generally, varying any one of the threecharacterisAs the value is conSidered tOzbePositive.a6ovt. the (aMplitude,phaseprfrequency)Iscalled hne, negative below the line...and zero at the modulation. G,enerally.' mOdulation, of a ctirrier pdints ev.ating to 0, 1:80, and 360- degrees of is named for the wave characteristic thatis veCtor rotation. tered-by 'the modulation process. d. When- it's desired to indicate how-much -Ofa -cycle"has'-peencOmPleted,at a-given 'instant. Ampktude, MOdulation _weiefer to its. ;PHASE, whichis. stated in in amplitude modulation,vthe _peak-to-peak degrees,. -At- time increment 1 in -figure' 5-2C, therehasbeen Jodegreesof -thecycle amplitude of the carrier is varied iliuccordance --completed: therefore, the nhasc isr 3gderees. -with the intelligence to be transmitted. Fbr Likewise at time 2, the phase is 60-degrees, and example. the-voice picked up by,a microphone is: at time_ 3-it 4s 90 degrees. Each of thesephase convertediht0. , ana-f(andiO-trequeney) conditions corresponds to the angle between- the -electrical signal which controls the peak-to-peak starting POint the vector -and its instantaneous amplitude of the '4rrier. A single sound at the positiOnatthelimeincrements stated. microphone Modulates the _carrier,withthe r resuft shown in figure .5-3. me "Carrie rpeaks are INTRODUCTION TO MODULATION no longer ,constani in amplitudebecause they followthe,instantaneOuschangesin the Simple smewaves cannot convey information aniplitude of the ant' signal. When theaLt signal because they do; not vary from their normal swing in the positive direction,the carrier_ peaks state. In order io carry, information there must are' increased accordingly. When th,e a-f signal be somevanaticTjn requLney,phaseor sWings inthenegative_ directioit, the carrier amplitude according- to -the intelligence to be peaksaredecreased.Therefore.the cOnveyed. Even those waves that contain the instantaneous amplitude of the a-f modulating 82 r' 76 t. chaptc.r 4--comm:uNfi6TION I3ASICS . Because of these qualities. it ,is -orconsidetable useincomMercial- broadcasting,butits shortcomings, -including frequency,extravagance and short range on available frequencieS, have severelYlimited itsnaval-cOniinunication applications*. The -Navy1as,4r9yvr, foimd satisfactoty ;for other ,purtioses,,A ong them A-F SIGNAL altimeters andsOine Tadak. SIDEBANDS AND BANDWIDTH- Whewan`y-f carrier is m'Odulated by asingle audionate, twoaddjtiOrialfrequenciesare Produced. One is the upper 'frequency, whin, dARals the sum- of the- frequency 'of the., carrier and sOtY frequept3 of the audionote. The'other frequency is the lower one..,which 'equals ,-,the -differehce.between-the-frequeneiesof the carrier and the 'audio nóte. The one -higher_ than the ca trier-Frequency ---isthOffLIPPER'':-SI D,E -FREQUENCYthe- one lower 'than 'the carrier' frequency -is the LOWER SIDE FREQUENcY. When the modulating .sigriat -is. Made-- utx",of complex' tones,as" in slieech 'or music, each,- individnalfrequenCyComponentofthe .94 1, 3 modulating signal; produces. its own iippt.Tand Fi9Ure Oti-f signal'ortV.arrier in loWer side frequencies. These side frequenciei. . Amplitude'Modulatidn. Occupy a .band ,ocfrequentres lying between the Carrier frequeruty, plus and' minUSthe highest modulating frequenc)T Thetands of-frequencies signal determines the peak-to-peak amplitnde of containing,: ,theside- '-frequericiesarecalled, the4nodulated carrier. SIDEpANDS. The sideband thatificludes--the sumof_the,carrier:'-andthe. Modulating 'Frequency Modulationan frequencies ts known As thellyPER,SIDEBAND Phase-Modulation (USB). The band containing, the- differente Of. the ,carrier and-the modulating frequenCies is Besides its aniplitude. the carrierwave -has, knoWn as the LOWER SIDEBAND,(LSB). tJip Other characteristics that The can be varied to space carrier and itsassociated sidebands produce ahtelfigenee-carty,ing signal, These are occupy in,a ,frequency spectrum is-, cane& a itsfrettueney and its phase. 'The process Of channel. The width ,of Ate channel (called 'vat) ing tlie frequency, in accordance with the BANDWIDTH) is equal to -twice' the highest audioftequencies of Voice or music is ,-called modulatingfrequency,-For,example,ifa frequency nindulation and the process of 5000-kc carrierismothilated by a hand of :.,arying the ,phase is Phase, modulation. (p7m). frequencies ranginc from 200 to 5000 cycles typeS or ,modulatiônare, Closely (0.2 to 5 kc) the upper sideband extends front' related. When., f-rti' isused, the phaSe of the _ 5000.2 to, 5005.kc, and the lower sideband earner wave is' affected.:SiMilarly. when p-in is extends from)4999.8to,4995kc.The 2, tised. the carrier-frequency it affected-. bandwidth is then 499540 5005; Or,l 0 kc. The bandwidth' is. twice ,itlie,yalue of the highest The prilnary advantages pf f-niare improved . modulating freqUency, which, is, 5 kc. This is fidelityandincreasedfreedoth- from static. illustratedin. figure 54, , R3 COMMUNICATIONS TECIINICIAN. 0 3 & 2 et, transmittedsignal.it iseliminatedafter . CARRIER- FREOUENCY modulation is- accoMpliShed; and reinserted' at- the receiver for-the demodulation process. All'r-f energY appearing at the transmittei Output is -concentrated -in- -the sideband energy or "talk I 1.1 4949.6,KHz 4 560b ikHz 3000 KHz power." , t After eliMinating the Carrier, the upper and 5005 KHz BANDWIDTH lower sidebaiids remain; If one of the. two sidebands is: filtered out ,beforeit reaches die ppyieramplifierstageofthetransmittel,,- -5940 -hoWever,- ghesmileintellieencecan',be' Figure 54.Sidebands Produced hxArnplitude tran'smitted on thereinaining sideband.All Modulation. ,power isthen transmittedinone sidebarid, instead of being divided between-die-carrier tlid both sidebands, asin conventional ahn. This for Single Sideband, provisiOn amounts to an increase in power the. wanted sideband. Equally important;the A :mode of radio emWSion, that'has-become bandwidth required . for SSB voice circuitsis. increasingly imPOrtant to the coMmunicator is approximately half that needed fOr conventional_ single sideband -(SSB). Single SidebandIS,hot a a/nL-TSee figure 5-5): neW term in the _histOry of cdinMunkations. It has-been--usedextentively, hy,the-shore comnignidation' system -for many years,: The 6 KHz \ congestion in the -mediunv,and high frequency 4% bands, ,anirecent- developments -thathave CARRIER reduced- the physical sizes of equipments have CONVO:TIONAL A-M I bd.ven ;a new inipettis to the adyantages of using SStin fleet communications, Pollowing isa b,rief gach :carrying- the same intelligence."Naturally; C24 thii- appears to be azi uneconomidal-means of transinission. By eliminating the carrier and one UPPER SIDEBAND of 'the sidebands, the sameintelligence cati-,be .transmitted at a-saving in Power, and freqUency bandwidth., 59.51 Figure 5.5.Compar'j on of Bandwidths of Conventional a-n1 a SSB Voice Channels. Supp;essed 'Carrier .., In SSB, the carrier itself is suppressed (or elimimited), at the transmitter, so thatsideband INGI.,E-SIDEBAND, TRANSMISSION carrieris frequencieSare .produced but the is the reducedtoa minimum. Thisreduction, or sideban& (SSB) transmission usually; isthe- most difficult o? -most common communications linkused today. elimination in naval.- troublesomeaspect in"Miderstandhigsp Someofthe SSBapplication suppressed carrier. In single sidebandsuppressed communicatiom isdescribed- in the following carrier,thereis no carrierpreSentirtthe paragraphs. 84 2 . 78 Chapter 5tOMMUIVICATIONBASICS SSB Voiee Circuits HOU-al The'high command (HICOM) net uses SSB AUDIO t as a Means of conuminication between fleet FREQUENCY- r commanders, and fleet commanderS use it for, communication withtheir subordinates and k adjacent commands. 12 kHz Whenever special,voiee circuits-Are necessary, .50.145 either between shore activities or ships-and,shore Figure 5.6.Radiefrequency4SB Channel and activities, SSI3 isselected becauseit'isless -Frequency Filandwidth. susceptible to atthospheric interference than is amplitude modulation. Often..SSB is used -for voic.eOrder-wirec-lrcuitsbetween NAVCOMMSTAs. SHIP-SHORE SSBTELE-TYPE- CIRCUITS.Many ships handle enough message SSB Teletype Circuits traffic to juStify ship-shore teletype circuits. Depending on traffic load, these circuits can be from pne to four. teletype channels on one SSB With few exceptions. SSB istised on all circuit. If the traffic load warrants more than existinglong-haul(great&stance)teletype oneteletypechannel,usuallytime division. circuitS. It is also used- on ship-shore circuits. as multiplexorfrequency,divisionmultiplex well as on shin-shore teletype circuits. MoSt of (MUX) equipmentisused.This equipment these -systems are 'now covred circuits: that is, handles up to four incoming and four outgoing an elecfronic cryptodevice op both ends of the channels. One channel nofmally is used as an circuitautomatically encrypts and decrypts order-wirecireuifforhandling, messpgetraffic. These devicesare u ed on eoperator-to-operatot service messages and for paint-to-point-,ship-shore.Ship-ship,a`nd making frequency changes when necessary. broadcast cifcuits. Threeremainingchannelsareavailablefor handling official Message traffic. PO INT-TO -P 0 I NT TELETYPE CIRCUITS.Most :point-to-point,longhaul SHIP-SHIP SSB TELETYPE circuits between naval communication stations CIRCUITS.Ship-to-ship SSB teletype circuits need more channels Than SSW can provide. To pre in wide use today. Their main application is compensateforthedeficiency, independent with task force or task gr,oup nets or several sideband (1S13)..transinission 'is used. It is similar ships in company. By using this type of net, to SSB. But Where SSB suppresses the carfier ships can send. their outgoing to a and filters out a Sideband, in ISB only the carrier guardship from which traffic can be rel'ayed is suppressed. Both, sidebands are used, and are ashore. This procedure saves manpower and sPflt into two 3-kHz audio channels, as shown in. circuittime,prevents individual ships from figure5-6. 'Eachaudio channel may carry Overcrowding. Ship-shore ,circuits and conserves different intelligence. thefrequency spectrum.Depending on the number and types of ships in company, the The uSe of frequency division multiplex guard can be shifted to other ships frond time to equipment. (discussed in chapter 9) permits 1)5 time. A major- advantage of these circuits is that teletype channels to be put into each of the electronic cryptodevices can be used _to send 3-kHz audio.channels. giving a possible total of classified messages without -the need for manual 64 teletype channels on one ISB circuit. Usually, encryption. These circuits are used for incoming * Only one or two audio channefs`are available for as well as outgoing traffic, and they can use 'voice. and/or facsimile, depending on the needs either HF (high frequency) or UHF (ultra high of participating stations. frequency) signals. COMMUNICATIONS tECHNICIAN 0- 3- -84,- 2- MICROWAVE TRANSMISSION -t SCATTER TRANS MISSION Microwaveis a linefof-sightradio 4-ward propagation scatter transmission is a point-to-point' methodof HF or UHF- radio transmission system. Line-of-sight systems are reliable made up`of one or more links,havinga:clear path com diunications.It-permits between antennas-at the ends of multichanneltelephone.teletype',anddata frequencies -Used are above 900 mHz. In the transmission out to_a range of 400 Miles. been Naval Communicatión System,,threeequiPments Two types of scatter systems that have Currently in use are the VQ, operating between used are ionosp'ierie and tropospheric.Because the 1700 and1850 MHz; AN/FRC-37 system, of greater capacity and_ 'reliability, only operating between 1100- and 2400 ,mHz; and tropospheric,systern is.now:being used. AN/FROB4 system, operating between 7125 and 7750.-mHz. Wideband transmission,suitable Forward -Propagation -Ion Ospheric for 24-. to 600 voice channels,_has beenobtained Scatter(FPIS)' by proper, system planning. Terrain _detennines the -length of asingle Forward- propagationionosphericscatter link. In actual practice, transmit-,and receive (FPIS), a systeM using HF rang!. utiiiLc SSB or by--a.slightly greater ISB, A transtnittedsignalis beanizd at the antennas can be separated is se_attered In a forward distancethantheactualhorizOn-to-horizon ionosphere where it 'line-of-sight distance, due to refractionofkhe direction. A ,receiving antenna iS beamed: at-the bytheatmosphere. Most same pointinspace- to receive the_ mictowaVe-beam relative systems are composed oflinks of 30 miles ot Becauseof -its'limitedbandwidth, andcrowded HF less, excePt where especially-favorable sites can, highpowerrequirements, befound: Repeater-stations- -may .beused-to spectrum,..this.systemjs_not used. connect one link to another toform long chains, thereby- setting up long paths for manyvoice Forward-Propagation Tropospheric Channels where needed. Chains of Morethan 40 Sca t ter ( FPTS) States links,for example, ercisi the -United in carrying voice, teletype and televisionsignals. Numerous communication networks now operation, extending for thousandof miles. Microwave links are often used forcarrying utilize "tropo" terminals with hopsof 300-miles signals from. a portion of a.navalcommunication or -More.These-relay hops are accomplished by transmitter using both transmitting and re,ceivinkequipment station to another; froni and to the the initiah sitesto the main- station,for and- antennas at each terminal. At andreceiver point,, many separate telephone example. transmitting conversations and teletype circuits arecombined in a tower Microwaveradio link systems have the into a single radio signal'. A feedhorn advantage of greater flexibility, economyof- beams the signal out toward thehorizon, and independence thusissimilartoa huge, preciselyainwd operation, and almost complete of the- over weather.conditions/ They have excellent searchlight. A minute reflected portion is- picked -up by a parabolicreceiving reliability (over 99 percent), extremelywide signal it is information-carrying bandwidth, goodresistanCe Antennawell over the hOrizon. There to interference, ancl low powerrequirements. reamplified and sent onits way again. 'if relatively necessary, for another-leap over the horizon Limitations are. that they require a other end -of the large portion of the frequency spectrum,and are toward its destination at the effeetive at only a short range.. ,circult., other -.Usually microwave radio is used wherelarge Tropohas, many advantages over channel capacity is required, links arerelatively methodsoflong-distancecommunications? difficult or costly to Besidesgreatereconomy ifi at:aswhere ,short; and where it is 'more whionh. install cable. construction and maintenance present 86 8 0 'Chapter 5COMMUNICATION BASICS it is relatively* free of atmoSpheric interferences AUDIOFREQUENCY LANDLINES that affect other transmission methods. Audiofrequency landlines-(as they appear in The number of channelsthatcan- -be a CCL) are pairs of wire' used for handling tone transmitted over a given link depends on the leletype equipment. One pair of lines is capable degree of distortion the particular circuit _can of carrying up to 16 teletype channels. Be^ause acCept. For 'Inks that ate part of long..haul Ihese lines are .engineered to handle a 3-kc telephone sYStems, di:Aortion must be held to a ban d pa ssatau diofrequencies,they Ire minimum. Typicaltroposphericscatterlink- considered to be.in the narrowband,system. capacities-are-given in the atcompanying liSt. LEASED LINES AND CIRCUITS Distance No. voice channels Telepitone companies'use Inany 'types. of -i-1.00 miles To 252 circuits and systemsinhandling their vast 100-200 miles To 132 telephone and-telegraph netWork. Each circuitis 200-300 miles_ To 72 engineered to meet specificitions of individual bver 300 miles users. In general; these circuitS and systems."can (quality usually be classified as landline types, two-wire and- limited) four-wire cirCuits, audio systems, and Orrier systems. Landline Types LANDL1NES .0 Landline systems that carry various circuits Almost all landlines used by the Navy are are further broken dszTn into four types -of lased,. When itissletermined _lines: _open wire,..wire cable_pairs,_coaxiakcable, Nith another. the -telephone company serving and submarine cable. All fotir of these lines are area- is _notified regarding the type of circuit capable ohandling all circuits and systems in kind_of service licsired. use today. Depemding on the type of installation, these WIRE CABLE PAIRS.L'Use of cable%came t zuits may either be d-c lines or audio lines. about because of unsightly congestion resulting Patching ustially .is accomplished at a control fromoverheadwires,especiallyincitiest center of a Navy communication station or in -Underground wire -cables are less vulnerable to the communicatiOn control link (CCL) of a stormi 'and other weather conditions. During tributary station. wartimttheyalsoarelesssusceptibleto sabotage and eneiny attack. DIRECT CURRENT (D-C) LANDLINES Wire cables are made up of many pairs of c wires insulated in such a way as tO prevent crosstalk between various circuits in the cable. Theielines are used for controlling different typesofequipment.suchas keying a COAXIAL CABLEToday,nearly30 transmitter. and for short-haul teletype circuits. percent of all communication services flow over In sonie instances they are used as secondary or acoast-to-coast onxial cable network. This backup circuits for prima* nib:rowave circuits percentage is destined to increase in the future, thatlink,differentsitesofanaval along with usage ofitsnewer companion, communication station. Some tributary stations microwave (discussed later). Together, they will of a NAVCOMMSTA may have d-c landlines as replaceolderopen-wire and cablecircuits. their primary teletype-circuit and aho may have Coaxial cable falls into the wideband group of them for remote keying COMMSTA transmitters. communications systems. t 87 COMMUNICATIONS TECIINICIAN 0 3 & 2 C, -4 ."'.:..Z.EIL4' CY , e a shorthauf service. These two-wire Circuits, are 1 MOdern coaxial- connuctors are Constructed _chiefly of 3/8-irich dOppertubing.-Exactly in the comparable .to siinplex or half-duplex drcuits, center, a No. 10 gage Copper .Wire is held -by the voice .frequency group also includet the imall-plastic -disk insulators-spaced-about linch four-wite, cable circuits in which a separate pair amt. Both- the -outer condueting tubeand the of _cable conductors is used-for transmission in wire -1,1ayt the saMe center or axis, hence:tile each girection tliqe_ foUr-wire ,circuits can be namecoaxial-.-Insome- typesof 4 coaxial cbillpared to the Navy'.; fial_Auplekciteuits. conductors, onsulationbetWeen . thesetwo -:ExCept where cbaiOal, cable it- .used.. carrier conductors-it made of-a-solid-dielectrio material. ii.cuitt employ -the sat* (or similar) kinds -of Coaxial conductors are made- up into-cables, wire-. facilitiesfor -transinissionas- do voice with eight or -more coaxials arranged-in.a_tight frequency circuits.Bothcircuits Mutt -hae ring.Also -cOntainedWithin the cable 'is'a amplifierSLOrrepeaters at regular-interyals along'. number-of paper or nblyethylene-instilated-wireS; .xtife-tina-r:s . ..,4 -0--- -3,..__ , usedforcOn-4q1; -maiPtenance,alici--4t!' . Short-distance -comnit Air. oi nitrogen '1 Itis impssible- to make an unqualified . is ;introduced -under pressure into coaxial' ,statimient ccfM...gas cern ing particular situations. hi . cable.in soices txtween tubes7pd wims. The air .... wiiiiY.aItype Of ciiciiit may be beit applied 'or gas keeps -out moisture .agd also _aids in i'. in a-wt.'$, ..," ,,ilii.-general,,however.two:wire. detecting my.&maptha occur, to the .tcircult.t-eo unohly are used for relatively short disttim!_esnot-;-,.--- more than a few1- hundred, iniles c:able. . . VoiireAkre -cable cm unts_are tor somewhat, lopger SUBMARINE eAlJu.-Becguse _submarine distanees. Landlide carrier or-microwave -circuits cable -nov reaches almost everY Continent, it is ordinarilyareutilized :tor lOngestdistances, _ . 1. A: 1 possible to Ontact.griearly every part of the- althopgntun.'use.isnot. limited ;t6such world-without-using-radio-as- adirdc-thitil,-1-9S6. --applIcation:. 'existirig tele'graph cables..could nOt- carry-vOice" .- . .. circuits. Since 195_6 seyeral,cables have.been laid AUD1.0 SYSTEMS.T-Audio=syttems Used ,by U. that-can carry,up to 128 voice channels., lelephohe:'coMpaniet can b,e coMpared to-audisi .- Thefirit telephone cabfe had external armor._: lines,terminAing in a CC.L. Each -pair of .lines l'or strength and protection, add itsflexible', .jearrkt'a têlepitone -conversatiOnat.the one-way amplifiers or repeaters -were spaced'-freq ueney of-the-participants, about 40 miles:apart. Isower for these repeaters.... audiofre_qmency. By using terminal equiri*ment, was 'fed from -terminals.Improvements in thiS,.. tWelvejObvpin teletype- circuits can ty put (vn system increased its -capacity froin 36 to.48:Yone Vol."40#-Audio channel'. , e. circuits.' .-' n,,epfyi,develoomeRt -called -a phantoM -A newer -typeof cabie and improved,4e, ci,duit Was uS'ed on, open-wirelines. It enabled amplifierS brought circuit capacity up to 128. of three circuits'o'n'One pair of lines: A key circuits. New cable, constructed in _a manner to prbper cpCration of a. phantom group is the -thatmakesitstronger,employs two-way *precision witii which line wires and coils alt amplifiert `spaced about 205miles kart. balanced: Any unbalance perrnitscurrents 4.thevarious kinds of linefacilitiet and _side cigEuits to-le4ik ihto the phantom iaild vice apparatus describedsofar are,.,inpractice, 'versaY.4hese unwanted currents make circuits% applied tO -developing several/ distinct types of....noisyOn severe Ntses. they actually callow a 161.1g-distancecircuits. Such circuits may. be conIgation -on one cirePit- to be heard on broadly classiqed as, between those operating at othert This phenomenon is called crosstalk. 'voice frequencies and circuits that operate at i4-= . higher (farrier or radio) frequencies. In the CARRIER SSTEMS.-Carricit,".siWteAfilised frequeticies - former group are ordinary two-wire circuits, by telephone companies are carrier which erriploy a single_ pair of open-wire cable axe _modulated hyinforrhationto be conductors as their transmitting medium,orlis _ifinsthitted. Various .modulation Means used is,the general practice with', mostlocaland fliit YO0 arealreadyramiliar with inelyde .88 Chapter 5COMMUNICATION gASICS amplitude modulation(a-rn)and- frequency carrierrsyStemsincreased.Theywere -modulation'(f-m). progressivelYi0Sed for shorter distadceS. When, carrier systems were -first used, cost- of Matiy; tyPes of carrier systems are in use equipment andinstallationswashigh. "For .todak. The itthe division Innitiplex process and economy of Use, therefoie, it had to be-used-,on freqUency diVision multiplex equipment used on long circuits, where equipment, costs were lesS these carrier Systerns are :sitnilar to;systems used than,the price of additional- wires owthe line, -by the Navy. Chapter 9 of this manual describes As new techniqueS- -were developed and the complete prOcess of time division and better equipment was built,, the number of frecfnenCy-diVisiOn mUltiplex. 0 0 89 . AT. 'CHAPTER 6 SATELLITE COMMUNIcATIONS and security =Ex-perience with satellite communications ts . accompanying i:eliability require inents, -Wks len e rateddemands for has-dethonstrated that such systemscan-satisfy , -andfrfor many militaryregnirements for reliable,: coMmunicatiOns -with- 90 ai 84 e ChaPter:6---SATELLITE,, COMMUNICAtIONS DSCS will 'vary as 1 function of equipnient degree upon the parameters ;of the satellite's availability; that i, an eXterisive digital traffia ,orbit. 'In general ternis an orbit-is eitherellipticill capability will not be available ountil digital Or circular and its inclination is classified as Inctglems, ind baseband-equiPMents-are inclined, Polar 6r equatorial. A special type -Of Howeyer, the overall performance-of the Phase orbit is a synChrondus ,orbit, one ,in'which the- 'II `DSCS willbe, -.greatly enhanced -over the iieriod-of the orbit is the same as that oFthe- -Capability provided in- the mdsf (or -PHASE-_I- earth. An orbi.t which is not synchronoris is -DSCS) throUgh- the ase of -the new PHASE II called`, as,yn chrorrops, With a further ,sate !lite s . ThOe Satellites :provide a greatly subidentification of a -near synchronous tyPe in increased, effectiVe radiated power (gkP) and which the -period of-orbit approadhes that of the RF bandwidths, together wittra,highly flexible earth. Orbits.= discrosed th More detail-later in -satellite-configuration using,both,earthcoverage- the sucteeding paragraphs. . and- nariow ;beam ntennas:16 provide ai Wide 'range of communicatiOn se,rvices' and The essential-1:40c systern-coniponents of an capabilities. In .additiOn-, these PHASE II operational cothrnunication satellite- system are satellites aredeployed ifisynchrinioue .orbits (1). an.orhiting vehiale with a communication- which eliminates the problems ,that cUrrently rebeiver,and trarisMitter installed _and (2) two 'exist with the drifting nonsynchronOusPHASE-I etirtit terminals equipped to transmit signals 16 satellites. :andleceive_ signals from :the satellite. The design of the overall:SY-stern-determines thkeompléxity of the various .comporienti- and the manner in ,SASIC SATELLITE "whith' the ,sYstern. .6perates. With the Present COMMUNICATION SYSTEM oPerational nuilitry c6riununication, satellite system only two earth -terminals dan use -a A. satellite-communication system is. One that satellite at -one time, ,and this has -led- to the usesearth ,orbiting Vehicles pr saiellites-to relay establishment oT satellite scheduling or cOntrol radio transmissions betWeen earth terrninalS.. faCilities., there are' twer types of -commtinteation satellites: active and -passive'. A Passive _Satellite merely reflects radii -signals back to earth. An ORBIT DESCRIPTIONS .active ,satellite, .6n, .the other hand, acts -as- a. repeater; it amplifies .signals -received and Then As -Stated preVionsly, othits generally 'ate re-transinits thein,back to- earth. This.increises deacribeit according tO the, physical shape_ of the the- signal strength at ''the receiVing tenninal oriiitand the angle ofinclination-of theplane of compared to that available, frOM a passive theorbit. A tyPical operational link involves an active' a.'Physical Shape.. All satellites orbit the ,satellite and two -earth tarninais. One station earth in elliptical orbitithat are determined, by transmits to the 'satellite on a frequency called the i t i laurreh-'parameters and the later the up4ink frequency, the satelliteamplifies_ the ..deploYMent tedhniques Irsed. (A circle is a signalf_transiates, it to the doWn4ink .frequencyi _special :caie of in 'ellipse.) The path Of any ahct then transmits it hack to earth where the satelliteitarthdearth.located at one of its f6ci signal is- pickea uP by 'the receiving,,,tenninal. shoWn,in figure&2. This-basic concept is illustrated-by figureArrl. "L,Perigee -and _apogee are two of the -three paramefers Customarily -used- to,describe orbital DESCRIPTION OP' COMMUNICATION .data of a- satellite.Terigeeis-dermed.as-the_point SATELLITE SYSTEM , in the ofbit- of' a-satellite that js nearest to-the center of the earth; )tpOgee is defined' as _the The /Louie designoil',a satellite ° point 'in the orbit of -a satellite at. the greatest communication sySteM. depends tO greact distande 'from the center of the earth., , 91 , COMMUNICATIONS" TECHNICIAN 0 3 & 2 -AIRCRAFT ,TERMINAL ,o SHIP TERMINAL' 0 31.95 Fiire 6-I.Satellite communicatiónlystem. . O oth distandes usually are 'expressed from the 'surface, -o( the earth- in'statute. miles, . although nautical__ milesusually are used for milit4ry systems: , )b.Angle, of ThcliiiatiOn. The angle of inclination is the third pariAleter customarily .0 , used to deScribe- orbital data, of a satellite.-Most satellites orbit" the earth in-orbital- platievwhich do not poindide With lthe -eaith'S equatorial 31.96 ,plafie. A satellite ,. orbiting in any plane, hop Figure 6f2.Elliptical satellite orbit. identical With the equatorial plane iv in, an inclinedorbit. . C. Special Types of InClined 'Orbits. The angle of inclination.is the angle between -(1) Equatorial- Orbit. A salelliteorbiting the equatorial plane and the orbital plane as in a xlane that coincides with the earth's Shown inifigure 6-3. equatorial plane is inan-equatorial Orbit. The inclination- of _the orbit determines the (-2) Polar-Orbit. A satelliteprbiting in an geographic limits- of the projectiOn of ihe path inclined orbit With an angle OT inclination of 90 or the satellite over- the earth's surface. Tim degrees or near 90 degreeV is in dpola. orbit. greafer the inclination, thg greater, the amount d:Circular Orbits. A cireular, orbitis a of the -eartit:s surface that is coVered by the special typeof elliptical orbit in-which the major Otepite._this is shown graphically in ,figure 6-4. ana mihor axis distances are ,equal or 0 O. 0 Chapter .6.--:5ATELLITE*.COMMUNICATIONS NORTH POLE 411" N MS NNIIIIIIICAM .,, ANGLE OF- (HCLINATIOH 111111111111/111111M11111E111 EQUATORIAL PLANE 111111111111PAIIIIINW deliSSIBREINNIRI SVilinlitilWNWN . 11111111PHIAW r.4 - 31.99, SGTELVTEN..1%.1111111,0/ MOTION -...witurAiwd- Figuie 8-5.illumMation from a-synchronous Satellite.. SOUTH POLE how one of these:satellites can illuminate almost 31-.97 one-half of the-earth!s Surface. : Figure 6-3.Inelided-satellite orbit. Three of these satellitmdan prOvide-coyerage over moSt of the-earin surfacéleXeept.fOr the- extreme north and' south tOlar regions): Apolar ORBIT PEANE proiectiOn )af the global coverage- of sych .a thfee-satellitetystem,isshdftlii-figure (-2) Near SYnchronous Orbit. A .Satellite in a circulai orbit within a few thouSand 'miles Of 19,300 nautical- miles above-the-earth is-in-a:near synchronous orbit. 'If `-the orbit is -lower than .19;300 ,nautical miles, ,the satellite'S :period is NOICATES-APLc OVER ' ICH SATELLITE PASSES less than the earth's and' the satellite aPpeart-- to -be moving, slowly aroun&the eafth fronywest-to- east. (This ,type of orbit iS also called 31.98 sub-synchfonOus0 'If the orbit ,is higher than Figure 6.4.Effect of orbit plane inclination on 19,300 nautiCal -miles, -the satellite's' Period is 'satellite coverage. greater than the- earth's ahd thesatellite_appears to,be moving slOWly' around the,eailh fr.= east approxbnately equal. Mean height above earth. to west,. Although ihclined and pOlar near., Instead of perigee and apogee, is used in synchronOus orbits are possible, common usage describing_a_circular orbit. of the terni near synchrOnous, implies- va, hear synchronous-equatgtia1. orbit. Special TYpes of Circular Orbits. p. Mediurn Altitude Orbit. A Satellite in (1), Synchronous Orbit. A satellite in a a circular orbit frOm aPprOximately 1600 miles- circular orbit at a height of approximately to I 2 000 miles above the earth is considered to 19-.:100 nautical miles above the earth is in a be in .a medium altitude orbit. The period of a naronous orbit. At-this altitude the satellite's medium :altitude satelliteis_ dOnsiderably less period of rotation is 24 hours, the same .as the than that of the earth, causing such Satellites to earth's. and the satellite orbits in Synchronism appear to Move rather quickly across the sky v.ith the earth's rotational motion. Although from west ,to east: inclinkl' and: -polar synchrohous .orbits ate possihie. the term synchronous, as commonly SATELLITE CHARACTERISTIC$ 4ised now.' refers 'to a synehronbus equatorial orbit. In 'this type of orbit.-sAellites appear to Early communication satellites were limited hocr motionlessly -in the sky. Pigure 6-5 shows to the diameter-of the -final stage of the rocket COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIA & 2 type of power source is that the satellite-has no -powe.r when the satellite is' in eclipse.l'or continuo us coin municatibns, th is- outaae Unaceeptable. A- combination of 'solar cells and storage -batteries is a -better prime. power sourct. for satellites. This, is, a -practical-choice at this -t ime. even though the result-is-far from anideal-power source. About ten percent of the sunlight energy converging -on _the solar cellsis converted to electrical power. Even this low efficiencyis further decreased- -when the -solar cells are bothbarded by high-energy particles that are some times-,encoun tered- inspae. The 'IDC813 -satellites have over -8500 solar cells mounted-- on the surface- of the 'satellite. Initially these cells supplied' about 42--watts. No battery backup was-provicted: TheThase 11DSCS satellitewill have about 9 31.1(30 32,000 solar cells, initially stipplying'Aput 520 , Figure-8.6.Woridwide sybchionous satellite watts, -mounted on the surface ofthefaltellite. A system viewed irom above North Poic, nickel cadmiumr battery will be used -for backup . 0 k power during-eclipses. that was to'' tie- used _forlaunching:Similarly, the Although numerous nuclear power sources Weight was determined by =The thrust of the- -hzive-been uscd,in space for special purposes.-the rocket-motors and-the MaXimum weightthatthe state of the art has not progressedsufficiently rocketeoultr-lift into-the desired orbit. -for nuclear ,power to be competithe As- early as June- 1960,;, twoSatellites,,were with the 'solar cell-battery-sources combination'for With ,successfully placed- in orbit =by the same-launch synch ron otrs communication satellhes ve.hicle. With, the development of this solar cells exposed to the sun continuOusly (and m ulti-launch,capability, additional- flexibility battery bacK,up for eclipses), the solar was:made available in the design options as to_ cell-battery inStallations will-be lighter in weieht. siie, weight -and nurnber of satellites to be' More efficient and less costry thanevisting included eachiaiinch. nuclear power sources. ,rhe Phase N DefenseS-atellite ConinAnicatiOn.SyStem (bSC) Will have'Ia'rger Satellite-Orien ta tion and" heavier satellites. in synchronous equatorial orbits: Present planning indicates- that.twOof Satellite orientation in space k quite these Phase 11 satelliteswill -be injeCted into important for-two reSions: continuous solarcell orbit froin a single :launch.Figure 45,7is' orientation, and,continuous antenna orientation. drawing of-the Phase II satellite. . Since the primary source of power in most satellites is from solar cells, itis essenthil that Satellite Power SOurces the maxtriiiim number of the solar cells be :exposed to the sun at all times. iMoreoveg.for Early communieation-satellites.were seVerely useful- cOmmunications, the satellite antenna_ limited by the lack pf suitable flower sources; must be -visible to appropriate earthterminals. this, in; turn,,severely-limited the output pOwer Elrly ,communicatibn satellites *used spin of the satellite transmitter. The only soureeof stabilization to meet these imporrant poWer available within early, weightrestrictions requirements. was a very inefficient panelof solar cells vithOut Spin stabilization operates cin the principle battery backup. A major disadvantageof this- that the direction of the spin axis of a rotating 94 9. 0 :Chapter 64ATELLITE a5MMUNICAIONS 0. . i01 Figure`6-7,4hasi_li oscs Satellite.; , bPdy tends to remain.,fixed in sPace..A' nattiral is oriented: 'to Ihe earth's aXis hy-lheanS:of-the example: of ,spin- stabiliiation iS,the effect of the axial' jetS, which.are- :pulsed _at the proper. spin, earth's rniation imkeeping its axislixed in spaCe. phase. The velocity jets, pinsedat the proper, A satellite having a spin akit parallel to the spin phase, prpiiide-orbit position and velocity 5.., earth's axis will-maintain:this poSition:Since both,corre ctio n.= (Seelig. 6,91) axes, are :fixed in space. figure 6-8 illUstrates the uSe of this principle With an equatorial, orbit By, installing sOlar cells .ali: iroUncl- the''- satellite ,to keeP a doughnut-shaped, antenna outside suitaceor.the spin-stabilized-satellites a pattern pointing toward ithe earth. -large number ot solar cell§ is-eicpoted?tO-thesun Spin., stabilizationreqUires Virtually no itall *timesexcept -When :the additional, energy, once-the systemis in motion. eclipse). By instilling antennas that:radiate inall A-spin-stabilized- satellite is uSualfr:Cotistructed directions aroUnd the spin axis a small part ,of the totalTadiated energy -is directed -to-Ward The 'like a flywheel With the heavier, tquipMent. mOunted id the same plane...and:as, close-to earth:at all times. outside surface as POsSiPle., T h;I) haSeI "IDSCS" satellites are spilt After orbital injection,. the `radial jets are stabilized,, as described aboi,e. They utilize solfir pulsed lo initiate spinning. Thesatellite spin axis cells mounted on the outside surface of the tk 0 *24. * FIXED STAR FIELD. 0 it V , 31,."1d? 64.-4pin-stabiPied satellite antenna pattern. COMMUNICATIONS TECHNIdAN,- 0 3 84: 1,- of -the7ridiated- energy in -.the directiori of the SPIN AXIS earth. -. . . The Phase II psts satellites will use a despun 'platforth with-four-high sain antennas.- -two, steerable narroW -beam- antennas will be ',used for comMunications between_ and Within TegiOns of high traffic density. TwO ,horn , antennat, will-provide for.earth cOmmunations- be tween facilities outside the narrqw, -beam- COVerage: The antenna arrangement propoted for theThase.II satellites js-shown,in figUre 6-7-. EARTH TERMINAL CHARACTERISTICS: bComiriunication satellite earth Aerrnirkals generally are Iodated in areas -rethOte4F9111 the - 31.103 -actual users of the'se comMunicatiOns. .This is F controls. necessary to diiniinize RFinterfeteride to the .satellite Corhthunicatidns. =Characterestic of c;_rernoteness. is a ,need f,or interconnect Iinks to-- satellite and ,have two-oninidirectional lntennas- perthit ,Cornmunication, flow to and'from the installed around the-.,spin'axis. tzserii-otthesatellite systems. TheSeintertonnect In- an-effort-tii3OVercoine4illediiadvantage-of links ate usually Aria telephOne .cableS or onmidirectional-antennas, which radiate oniy'a microNave ridie With normalterminal small_ -amount of -energytoWarti_ the earth, equipthents. 9triods techniqUes to 4chieire an -earth-oriented. - Earth.termirials generally have a single large ,antenna, systern -have-been developed -and-the antenna, a; -highly sensitive receiver, apoWerful ,rn.oSt promising 'have been- testedin- space "tkansIni,4ter, multiplex P:quipMent; *,ehicles. The 'best systentdevelopecrto date uses, modulating-demodulating equipment, arid, .satOtabilizatiOn- for. orientation of the satellite. teleMetry equipment. despun iniier platforni for- midunting co nt-rollable_ antennas..Tlie satellite is.. constrUdted, in two Parts,-with ,hothparts,haVink Antennas radialjets: The inner ,i3art is conceritriC'With t4k .outer part and, contains the 'comMuniaation Earth terminal, antennas are antennas .,and the-cOmmUnications -package.The directional, higfi gain antennas capable .of satellite is laUnched and, injected intoObit in- transmitting a'nd receiving signals _th0 usual ntinner. The whole: satellite Spin-- simultaneouslY. Qenerally, large, high gain, stabilized. using the outer, radial jets.At:tee:the parabolic antennas ate used. , sa-tellité. is -stabillied withthe deSired .0 oiientation, -the-, inner radial jets -spin the,inner Three sizes of patabolic7type antennas ,ait. Part in the opposite riirectionlo counter the currently hn use with the -Phase Imks eakth:- initial spin. This results ina, despun inner terminals: the AN/FSC-9 uses a 4arabohc platform, which is. Stationary v.fith respect t,o antenna 66.feet hi diarneter, theANIVISC-46- earth. The- despun platfOrm is:oriented tosuch.a uses, a. parabolic antenna' 40feet-in diameter; and position\ that the, communication antennas'point the CAN/TgC-54, uses a cluster, of 4 parabolic co ntinuoUslytoward- the earth*. This,.antennas, each -10 feet ih dianieter, which- in arrangement allows 'the useof high gain combination are elquivalent to 'a- parabolic directiOna.i. Antennas tO.cOncentrateAlke majority antenna 18 feet in-diameter. ,96 3. 9 Chapter,6-;SAT41..ITE COMMUNICATIONS ReceiVers 400-MHz band and is the- rcsponsibility of the Air 'Force. -(A normal Navy earth terminal will All satellite coMmunication earth terminals not have a 406-MHz capability') are equipPed -with specialldesigned,' higJil receivyrs: These highly sensitive'-, General Description of seeeiverSare'required to overcornethe doWn-link pscs Earth Terminals power ,limitations and, to-Permit extraction- of the desired,sommuniCation information from There are three types of earth ternunals the received signal. All,of,the-terminals,,curreMly urrently in te in the DSCS: AN/FSC-91 in use inthe, Phase. L JOSCS system utilize .AN/MSC- sand AN/TSC=54. The; tivio, :Pecially designed, preamplifiers mounted AN/FSC-9-ear'k terminals were built originally direct!) behind the antennas. The preamp noise for the ADVEN program, were modified later temperattires vary with the sizes, of the earth for the Si'NCON,program. 'and finally were terminals.- modified, for the iIDCSP prograin. The AN/MSC46 and: AN/TSC-54 equipments were. Transmitter's built for the IDCSP program. 4 eprth terminal ,transmitters generate high AN/FSC-9.The ,AN/FSC-9 terminals are power signals for transmission to ;he permanent installations located at Fort Dix, *coMinunication satellites. The combination of New Jerseyand'Carnp Roberts, California. They ',high powered transmitters and highly are used as the principal terminals for directional, high gain -antennas is necessary to communication links to- Europe, and to the overcothe-, the tip-link limitations and to-ensure Pacific respectively. A:60-foot parabolic antenna rf,)4t -the signals received by the satellite are is mounted on a 60-foot steel antenna toWer on strong' enough, to be detected by the satellite. a-concrete foundation 30 feet deep and, 84 feet Although_ various,. arrangements 9r functional in diameter. Theantenna mount includes a bridge c7p popen ts are possible ,in transmitters. all the-' superstructure that acts as a counterweight rod , transmitters in use in the Thase.1 IDSCS earth serves as a housing for electronic equipment. terminals have the_ same general arrangements. Theestithated weight of,the antenna is 190 tons. Each IDS:CS trans,rni-tter *has an A '200-foot covered TassageWay, connects the exciter/podulator and ,a _psiwqr amplifier. The antenna to a000-Squate foot ,operations modulator accepts the baseband input from the building. An AN/F_SC-9 sho-vn.in figure 6-10. terminal, equipment andsinod iilates- an IF carrier. The 'exciter translates the IF signal to the up-link AN/MSC,4 6,The AN/MSC-46 isa frequenc) and: ainplifies it to the level-required transportable cotirmunicatiOn Sate:Ite terminal by the klystron of the power amplifier. The that is.housed in three vans. A rigid radome (not oiltput power of the AN/FSC-9 is variable from supplied with the terminal) is usually installed 10 W to 20 ,kW: ,that -of -the AN/MSC-46 is over the antenna. Power is furnished by three variable from 100 -W to IC ky;_and- that of the diesel generators (supplied as a part of AN/TSC-54 is variable -from zero=to 5 kW. ,AN/MS-46 of 100 kW each, or local commercial poWer may be used-if available. The Telemetry Equipinedt complete terminal, including the disassembled antenna, weighs 1 14,000 POUnds but' it can be, Telemetry eq,Aipment isincluded inall transported by three C1130E aircraft. After co min uni ca tionsatellite -systems to permit arriv.al on site, the terminal'can be assembled by monitor;ng of the operating conditions within a crew of eight trained men. An ANA.3G-46 the satelliteTelemetry can be used also for antenna with its-pedestal is shown in figure 6-11. reinore control of satellite operations, such as energizing axial jets for-changing the spin axis of AN/TSC-54.The AN/TSC-54, smallest' the satellite. -Ini\hePhase 1DSCS -system of the Phase I -IDSCS earth terminals, is a highly ,te !eine try informationis' transmitted in the transportable comthunication satellite-terminal. . 97 COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN 0 3. & 2 331 _ r Ar . 31.104 Nure satellite earth terminal: The antennd, klystron and preamplifier 'are 7.25 to 7.75 GHz. Figure 6-13 is a pictorial moutited on,a,trai1 et,_4nd the remainder of the representatioh.of the AN/SSC-6. terminal equipment is-in ari equiiiinent-shelter. The AN/SSC-6 isa shipboard installation Power is supplie& by -a trailer-rndunted diesel installed as an interim_ SI-IF capability until senerdtor. The complete terminalweighs replaced by AN/WSC-2 terminals. The 'antenna 19,500 pounds and can be transported by group is mounted on theship's.weather deck. C-I33E airdraft, H-37 helicopter .cir it can be The servo electronics; modem, transmitter, towed by suitable trucks oVer unimproved -prime power, and electronics- groups are located' te.rrain by. attaching, "goat" mobilizers within the ship's structure. The servo (furnished with thelerminal) to the equipment electronics, modem, and electronics groups are shelter. A well trained, experienced crew,of six collocated. can-set up or dismantle the AN/TSC-54in less The AN/SSC-6 uses a six loot diameter than two hours. A rigid radome (not supplied Cassegrain type antenna system*ith an with- the- terminal) is available for automatic tracking teed system capable of semipermanent installations where required. An tracking synchronous.. and near-synchronous AN/TSC-54 is shown in Figure 6-12. communications satellites.- a. 0 SA.TELL1TE ACQUISITION AN/SSC-6.The' _AN/SSC-6 y a shipboard AND TRACKING satellite communication earth Wminal. It provides the .capability for tracking a satellite An essential operation in establishing and for the Capability of long-range, high-speed communicatiens via satellite is the-acquisition of data, voice and teletype communications signals the satellite by the earth terminal antennaand transmitting at 7.9 to 8.4 GHz and receiving at subsequent tracking br the satellite.Initial 98 92 4. Chaptei 6-s#E4ptg commumdkpoNs 31.105 Figure 641.-AN/MSC-46 antenna and pedestal. v,> acquisition 'depends upon-an exact knowledge of however, the satellite movement is enough that the satellite's position which, in combination accurate tracking is required to keep the narrow wjth the seographic 'location of The earth .beam in tenna pointed toward the satellite. terrninR1. enables the computation of accurate Satellites in Medium altitude circular orbits or in antenna pointing information. The degree of elliptical orbits are more difficult to acquire and difficulty in acquiring and tradking a.satellite is also to track because of their relatively rapid deterpined largely by the, satellite's .orbital changes in position. paraffieters. 0 Acquisition and tracking of a synchronous Orbital Prediction satellite are relatiVelisimple,because the satelfite a*ppears to .be stationary. Acquisition of a near In order to be able to supply antenna synchronouksatellite is relatively simple because pointing information to earth terminals, itis of the slow relative motion- of the satellite; necessary to know with a high degree of ° 99 93 COMMUNICATIONi TECHNICIANQ,3 & 2 tracking stations in otherpaxts of the world. The other tracking statibns around tr,i worldiyatch for the satellite during its first trip and record additional data which enables more precise- predictions to -be made. Thus, -during the first- , week ororbiting, tracking station's all around the world ate obtaining progresSively, mote accurate data concerning the satellite. This data is. put into a computer where corrections of earlier estimates of the orbit are made. Once the initial predictions are complete.and the satellite link becomes operational' there is very little change inthese calculations. The orbits yill change slightly over a period of time; however, these changes are so gradual that predictions will be -accurate enough to be used fOr weeks or even months without -further corrections. When the orbits are known, precisely, an ephemeris can be calculated for 4 each-satellite of _The system. Antenna Pointing Antenna pointing- instructions are derived %from the ephemeris of a,atellite. These- instructions must, howev. -_;.,, be computed separately for each ground st tion location. A- satellite which bears due south of station A at an 31.1.06 elevation of 25 degrees may simultaneouSly bear Figure 6-12.AN/TSC-64 satellite communication due southeast of station B at an elevation of 30 terminal. degrees. Antenna pointing instructions are determined by taking into consideration the accuracy the orbital paraMeters orthe satellite, orbital prediction'and the, latitude and longitnde A table showing the calculated positions of a of each ground station. satellite (or any heavenly body) at regular 'From. the standpoint of acquiring radio intervals of time is. called an ephemeris. The -contact with a satellite,_the onlY important local ephemeris of a satellite is calculated from its C-, ()ordinates of position are bearing and orbital parameters and a knowIed0 of the elevation. Knowledge, of the bearing and physical laws of motion. After the ephemeris elevation of a satellite at the time planned for. data of a satellite are determined, it is possible acqdisition permits the antenna to be properly . to predict for any- given location the apparent pointed. track of the satellite as viewed from that . . location. 'CONT0L CENT5R The constants defining an orbit are initially INFORMATION.The use of satellites to set up obtained by the process or tracking. At the time particular conimunication links requires launeh:the rocket is tracked by radar from "lift planning. Varying and contingent needs of users off" to injection, and then until-it passes out of must be considered. -With a limited number of sight. The recorded tracking data obtained in either random orbit Or quasi-synchronous this way, is sufficient for making rough satellites,itis possible that there may be no predictions of the orbit. These predictions are satellite-in the coMmon view of certain pairs of made rapidly with a computer and sent to other ground stations for minutes or hours at a -time.0 100 Chapter6SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS, ANTENNA SERVO SYSTEM RACK MODEMS NELC NELC NELC / TEST O EOUIPMENT CABINETS CONTROL CONSOLE LOW LEVEL EQUIPMENT CABINET POWER ArLIFIER PRIME POWER 8 SUPPORT EQUIPMENT COOLING UNIT r- Figure .6-13.AN/SSC46 shipboard terminal. Also. there may be afailure of electronic of the *Naval TelecommunicationaCommand, eqpipment.. ['inners must Pk; all-of these allocates Navy-assigned operatingtime to atter to make best Commur:cations Area,Master Stitiorks(CAMS) tiThigs into cohsideration in _of.ealth terminals use of thev,tellites. which, in turn designate pairs Antenna pointing instructionsarecalculated to use the assigned time. for planned satelliteacquisitions-and for additional acquisitionS- to 'providereliability in- Acquisition . event of gatellite equipMentmalfunctiorc Imthe by a 'IDSCS a central computer in' ffieAir force .The acquisition of satellite signals Satellite Control Facilityperforins these ground station equipped with large antennasand, calculations for each earth. terminal-loeation. operated at microwave frequencies places severe Tile -Satellite Communieationi Control requireinents on 1he Acquisitionsystenli operated by the DCA, schedules particularly if, the satelliteis in . a medium operating time for:tho OF the various altitude circular orbit 6r in an ellipticalorbit. The 14avy These requirements can be dividedinto two satellites by the three nervices. and Satellite Operations Center, unler thedirection problem areas: spatial-time unwtainties 101 -COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN- 3 & 2 f.reqleney variations. A.. The spatial4ime -appropriaXsomputation equipment-to'gene.rate acquisition (acquisition, ofa signal at:some point --.4.9finna."Pointin% angles. Theantenna, pointin& in .space at some instant in' -,timg)must also- afer fed as commands -involve acquisition, a the siTnal-frequency. -to the, antenna . . . pItionirigérvo-mechanisms which. pOint'llic: - ,atitenna,4_the required direction:The amount SPATIAL-TIME PACTOR.Veryatcurate 4.c_i:Vd'arar;-find Ornputation- antenna vbint data Will be availablefo-the 'involved in using earth I-37-9.X.,-,JnVed,--..iradkihg to point .narroW terminal from the Satellite Control.Facility. ;:-...keaRiwigii HOwever, due ufrequiptherit 6a' iffennas. isqmite. exlensive. lithitations itis .idffit to*, sothe---,deviations froth calf:Ida-Zed necessary. -to conduVgAsiriall 'search aout_ the ptmoot anglis arisë predicted location of the satellite in as a result of antenna order to- moxinl flexure and atthosphericand ionospheric make initial eóritaCt. This searchinginvolves bleiging Of-radio eilher _manually or autoMatically waves. Since these Uncertainties 'scanning, a .etWt,R.fpr:Ogratrimd tracking isnOt vholtY small area around the point where thesatellite .1gatiitWtory and il-not appearance is predicted. , used extensively.' ,"tkalt , d=1,4V1I&MATIC TRACKING.--In autamatic TIMING CONTROI.;.--_,Timing signalS,for the entire System are ,trahsthitted. ty tp.v9Tre,t:; ,ntenna pdinting inforthation is the lArThy ,generilfel-Aiy comparing'the.-direction of .t.lid satellite-terminal at Camp:ROterts,,Califofnia-to antenaxiS ,With the direction from Which Fort Dix. NeW Jersey, Mil* Velma:0, an actual satellite signalis received:"Sinceautomalic .Fart Dix retransMits these tithing signals_to.all tracking Imemr.; track the terminals-in the AtianticEuropean-Africall-grea, apparent positi.On of the _satellitethat is, the direction ofarrival of and_ Heleniano transmits the aisnalsto all-Facitic sites. the 'radicr-si,gpal-,knowledge.of the reatpaition of the Otelfite iS npt reotiired.The,_autdmatic trackintsyStein is a.,SerVo-inealanism'and, once FREQUENCY "CONTROI--=the frequeney a_cq,14,isitiiin -has teen accomplished,'it of a ra'ciio signal received_ -from_a 'satellite ..dontinUallyefierates its_own pointinvia9, nerally is not exactly the assigned downlink thus 'elittlinaChig. the requirernent,fordata- input and frequeney because of vatiatiOns in the _roceive4 cOrnputation: frequency..The exient of this .ffequencY .0. variationis quite dependent upon_thelorbitai SATtLIATE OUTA6"E TIME.Thesystem geometry of the satellites. Tile greatest -spocificatiOn for the-DSCS-allocates frequency variation's- are observed in'siinalstrom 110,seco.nds for ,slewirig the earth terminalantennas*, satellites-in thediuni altitude,, circularorbits-and acquiring -the satPlyte signal, and checking from those in glliptical, Orbits. The .for smallest- circuit continuity at haridover. Thisrepresents. frequency vadatipns areobservedIn signals froth fhe,minimum outage tithe. 'Howevi,r, forseveral, satellites in nearisynchronoW andsynchronous feasons satel.kife may not- -be hilmOiately . sorbits. airailatile, and, iliese reasons-may combine :to increase the-outage time. The difference of.drift Tracking velocities .sof the -PhaseI .IDSCS satellites will lead to bunching of satellites withlaps When cawing - a -partieular .satellite has been incrsased-outage times..In additionrwhen twoor acquired, the. earth 'terminalantenna must continue-tO track that s'atellitt for-aS-Iptig more satellites simultanously occupy the ` as it is _coniMcin vohime of the link terminalantennas, - to--be used as the zoininkttneatidn relay. Two,of they will mulually interfere and prevent several' methods -of _trIcking reliable are prograninted.. ef:oinglimicallo-n. 'Other factors leading.to, tracking andautomatic tracking. inOreas-ed -outage limesare satellite-sun. can-junction (-increased noise: from thesun- 1. PROGRXMM'ED ifte.venis .cothinunication). sataileitclipse programmed tracking the knoWn Orbital (ilisenc.e:Of power from solar cells),and satellite parameters of _die satellite are -fedinto failorét..ljefice, the distribution.oroutage -times te 102 ( 0 Chapter .6.,-SATELLiTE C01441.1NICATIONS 0- I is a corriPlicated 'function of time and -repreSenti the normal .-.ernployrnent of the earth-statiOn locations. satellite subsystern. This application provides additional high-capkity wide-bind trunks fora Variety of transmission modes and..added ROLE-OF SATELLITE -flexibility for rerotiting traffic. COMMT2INICATIONS eii.-D CS Area Co min o n Uset CommteCation. Area CoMmunication- supports -Lti the don.te-xt of -a- global military large concentrations of -forces engaged in cothinunicatiOn-s network, satellite Operations_encompassing-a-dis'crete remote area. coMinuiication systeds ,become Subsysterns Such-Service-eXtends high-Capacity,,long-distance add i g* sorely needed capacity or additional DCS trunks to-a-high-density ,of potentialusers alternate, routing for CommunicgtiOns traffic. A. engaged in fluidtactical-Situaticins. satellite link is just one of several- kinds of c. _Contin-gency Operalion. In this long-distance links that interconnect switching .application the pcs facilitie3 are extended ,to :centers-located strategicallyaround_the world io 'support: a military operation or.,humanitarian comprise the Defense' Conimunications SyStern -effort. In this Connection, the Capability of the (DCS) network. Satellite links-are usuallyin satellite subsysteMcan Se Used to advantage-to Para.11el with.- links -that employ the Mort SuppOrt rapidedeployrnent and-to furnish reliable conirentional means of acornmunic4onHF -1ông-disteande trufiking_service withina-utinnnum radio, tropospheric scatter, iOnosphericscatter, mieroWave, and landline. Satellite cf. Command and -Control of Widely links prOVide added- capacity -between variOus Deployed Forces': BF communicationto points in the network; ,and, since these links eleinentspf widely deplorul- forces is -difficult continue in- operation under conditions that wren under ideal propagation conditions. On-the render other -media- operable, -they make other hand, the capabilities ofa satellite .significant contribution to.the irnProvernenti of subsyStem offer rapid, reliable cornmunitation reliability. The primary purpose-olthe-DCS-isto ,bdtween-and;ainorig mutually supportingtheater lani-haut, point-to-point andifleet CoMmanders. A-satellite subsystem-alsO communicationt^ capabilities to Department of possesses- the- necessary flexibility for4system Defense tiiets. Users -need only establip configuration -without loss of contact during comniunieations. with the nearest switching sudden oi frequent heachitiarteo displacement.- :center to become network subScribers and- to _e. TactiCal Comitinnications. 'With ,the 'have access ^to- the entire DC$ network. Beyond development of suitable -antennas and the point-to-point-communicationirequirements equipments that can be installed in most -types there are the tactidalcomthunicatiOns of ships and aiicraft, satellite communications requirements of the individual .services. For -the will be able ta-fill:the -requirements for various Navy, the potential of:satellite communications tactical communications, such as ship-to-ship; 'for tactical -(non-DCS)- -service -is mOst ship-th-aircrak shiP-to-shore-to-ship, and encouraging. aircraft-to-ship. This typd of kcoinrriunications will -be more reliabre -and *less subject to TYPICAL AiPLICATIONS deteCtiOn than methods presentlYieuse. f.Pleet Broadcast and' Ship-to-Shore. In the ,a pplication of satellite Present -fleet broadcasts and ship-to-shore communicati'On resources tO military communicatiOns rely heavily upon HF for communications, certain typical deployments communication- over extended \distances. As will- exploit th the maximuth extent their with tactical communications,a satellite versatility and capacity. Some such applications subsystem will-be more reliable and' less subject z. ate: ' to detection. Thiswill-ensure reliable lOng-range links bkween major -fleet units and naval a.DCS Long-Distance, Common-User communication stations- ashore- and -will Cotinnunication. This tYpe of communication simultaneously enhance fleet security.- 103 , COMMUNICAfIONS TECHNICIANo 3"k 2 ADVANTAGES OF Vulnerability . SATELLITE-COMMUNICATIONS Within 'the present state of art in-rocketry, Satellite coniunications offer unique -destruction _of an orbiting vehicle is possible; adVantages Over nventional transmission for -howeVer, destruction of a single cornmilnicatiOn long-distanceervice. Satellite links are satellite would be guiteAlifficult=and-expensive. unaffeeted bY the propagation abnOrmalities Ike cost would- be excessive, compared cL the thatinterfere With HE radio,, are 'free from the tactical -advantage gained. It would, be high attenuation of wire;or cable fanilitieS,,and particularly difficult to -destroy an entire are capable, of spanning lông distanees without multiple-satellite' systern-such .aS the twenty-six the nurnetous intervening yepeater stations random-orbit i'atellite system currently in-use in wbieh arc required for -line-of,sight or the IDSCS. The earth -terminals offer a more troposcdtter links. TheY can furnish the greater attractive target -for physidal destruction, but reliability and flexibility Of service needed to they cam-be prOtected by the same measures that -support a military-operation. -* are-taken to.protect other vitaliiistallationS. A high agree Orinvtilnerability.fojamining is---afforilethby -the highly'disctional_antennas- at tbe earthAerrnibals and by- the-wide bandwidth Al tlyoUgh- exiS ting commercial 'satellite system which can accommodate sophisticated -cOMMUniedtion,SYstenis,are-tapabie- of-thandling ariti.a_jam Modulation techniquessuth as spread lundieds ot voice-frequency .channels, 'the spectrum_andirequency hopping. -prekent operational ,military coniiitunication -satellite systern, flie Thate IInitial Defense Satellitë ComrhunicationS, Syaern .(IDSCS),, is Flexibility leSs:=tha-doien -voice,channels_per :earthtermfnalr. _Fotir seParately- aSsigned_ channels, eachcal)able of- handling-elevin--Voice Almost all of the existing Operational -channels, ast. available-in -each-IDSCS satellite on- -military satellite earth terminals are housed in -both the -up link and .down link; however, the transportable irans that can be loaded-into cargo PoweOrilitations ipt. the Phase, Isatellite;on the planes and' flown o remote areas. With trained downlink,prevents the use amore ;hamtwo RE" crews these -term;nals can be puf into operation shannels sirnultapusly, (one full -duplex. in k matter or 'hours. Therefore,difect long-haul circuit): TheThase ILDSCS-satellites, now urid communications can ,be established- quickly ,to contract, will have °greater channel-capability remote areas-nearly anywhere in the free-wprld. with a considerably wider RF-bandwidth. (The present and 'proposed DSCS- satellites provide slight coverage in the_polar, s'egions at latitudes greateithan 70 degrees.) a Since propagation of communication LIMITATIONS satellite frequencieS is not dependent upon .reflection or refraction and is affected only slightly by atmospheric phenomena, the Limitations of a satellite, comMunications reliability of active satellite communication system are determined by the satellite's systemi is limited, essentially,. only by the technical characteristics and its orbit41 reliability of the mipment employed and the parameters. Active comMunication satellite .skill of the opHating and maintenance systems are limited by satellite transmitter persOnnel.' This improvement in reliability is, power on 'the down links and to a lesser extent remarkable advantage for Navy communications, 'by ,satellite.receiv.er sensitivity on the up links,. so, long dependent uPon0 unreliable I-IF 8arly communication satellites have also been propagation for_most tactical eommunications. -limited,by low gain-antennas. " 104 98 Chapter 6-SATELLITg 'COMMUNICATIONS Satellite-Transmitter Power Limitations DeVelopment of :stabilized,high gain antennas and improved RF inputstages in thd -receiver will make:thiS probleni lesscritical; The amdunt orpOweravailable iman active satellite Is limited by the weight restrictiOns Satellite A.vailabllity imposed on the satellite. Earlycorrimunication satellites were limited to a 'few hun4red pounds The' availability Of a-satellite because Of launch-vehiclepayloat restraints. Thee to act as a relay only feasible power statiOn-betWeen IWo earth -terminalsdepends on source 'consistent With the the locations of the earth abtive _weight limitationis _the inefficient:solar terminals and -the cell:("total orbital -parametert of the-satellite.All satellites, power generation in the Phase I except those in a Synchronous-orbit, MSC'S satellites is lessthan 50-watts.) Thus the will- be in view of any given-pair ofearth stations only part RF power output is: severelylimited, and a of the time. The length of relatively -weak signal istransthitted by the tirne that a satellite on the downlink. The nonsynchionous satellite in:a Circularorbit will weak transmitted be in the zone of mutual- viMbiiity signal; further diminishedby propagation-losses, depends upon restilts in a very weak signal: the -height at whichthe satelliteis circling. '71eing available at Elliptital orbits cause the the earth terminalS. Thelevel of signals received satellite zone of .frOn mutual visibiIity betweenany tivo earth a satellite is coMparableto the terminals to vary-from orbit ,cornbination of externalatmospheric noise-and -to orbit, tont the tiMes of mutual visibilityare predictable. See 'initernal nOfse ofstandard receivers. figure 6-1:4 tor Consequently, special techniqbes an illusttatiOn of the zone of must be used mtitual visibility. to permit extractionof_The desired' , . communication-inforinatiOn-ficrnr-the receivet sigpal. Large, high gainantennas and special FUTURE SATELLlig types of preamPlifiers solve thisproblem but add complexity and sizeto the earth terminal. COMMUNICATIONS (The sniallest terminalin the IDSCS hasan 18:foot antenna and weighs 19,500 When s-atellite communications.are well pounds.) established and Navy ships Development of More efficientpower sources have need for and relaxaticin of weight perinanent terminals,a new type will be restrictions wlll permit integrated into the ship and be -imprOved Satelliteperformance- and increased fully compatible capadity. with other electronicsystems ant equipment. .Satellite Receiver .40 ZONE-CiF-' . Sensitivity MUTUAL VISIBILITY AlthOugh powerfultransmitters and highly directional antennas can'be used at an earth station, the spherical WavefrOntof the radiated 'signal spreadsas it traVels °through space. The satellite antenna interceptsonly a stall amount of the transmitted signal.power and, because-of its low gain-, a relatively weak" signal is received NO.-2 STATION NO. I at- the satellite receiver. Althoughthe strength of 'the :signal- receivedon the up link is not as PATH OF SATELLITE critical as that receivedon the down link, careful design of -the RF stage ofsatellite receivers is required to achieVe satisfactory, - 31.108 operations. Figure 614,Zone of mutual visibility. 105 9 9 COMMUNICATIONS IECHNICIAN 0 3 & . . When this happens, the number of conventional the credibility of our deterrent. ror this reason transmitters and receivers aboard ship can be the Department of Defense is engaged in the reduced. ConimunicatiOns yia satellite will developthent of new communications techniques augment existing comMunications as part of the, and systeths, including some that are space Overall system for the command and contról of based, to improve the iurvivability_of our naval forces. Satellite ctimmunications will not strategic commttnications against nuclear and replace all existing means of radio electronic attack. ("4 communicationi; hoWel/er, it is a mkior step in For m-ore information on Satellite mcidernizing Navy comniunicatioris and will Communications refer to NTP 2, Navy Satellite relieve the Navy of its total=dependince on HF Operations. This ,publication was designed to Ladio transthisiions, ultimately reducing the concisely explain. the Navy's role,in Phase of need for many HF ground stationsoverseas. the Defense Satellite Communication System The Survivability of reliable ConiMunications and to promulgate procedures for effective, for the command and control of our strategic coordinated utilization of available satellite nuclear forces is of paramount importance to resources., 106 100 CHAPTER 7 WAVE PROPAGATION AUD ANTENNAS In the two previous chapters we studied the ;transmitter, frequency used, distance between basic concepts of the various Communications fransMitter and receiver, antenna configuration, systems. Essential to communication systems is andY.sensitivity (ability to amplify weak -signalS) the theory of transmitting RF energy through of -the leseiver. The ability of the earth's space and the 'various conditions affeeting its: atmosphere to.condu;st energy to its destination, &Ogress froth the point of transmission tO the together with the;naturc -Of the 'terrain- between point of feception. - sending-and,receiving points, fnay be responsible This Chapter will present ina simplified for the frequency, selected-. Interfering signals rria-n rier the basic theories involved in can make reception impossible-at a-desired time. propagating radio- waves, the characteristics,of Moreover, the athount of nOise -preSent and antennas designed to radiate radio waves, and transmission line -losseS May combine to make the different antenna configurations utilized in unintelligible an otherwise gOod-signal. coMmunication systems. VARIOUS COMPONENTS OF , ,BASIC gADIO A PROPAGATEP'ELECTROMAGNETIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WAVE In° any radio: systern, energy in -the form of electromagnetic (radio) waves is generated by-a When a radio wave leaves a vertical antenna tiansrnitter and 'fed to an antenna bY means of a the field pattern Of the wave resembles-ahuge tfansmisiion line. The antenna radiates this doughnutlying on the grotmd- with the antenna 'energy otit into space at the speed of light in the hole at the center, as seen in figure 7=2. (approximately 186,000 .miles per. second). Part of the wave Moves outward in-contact with. Receiving antennas, placed. in the path of' a the ground to,form the GROUND WAVE, and traveling radio wave, absorb part of the radiated the remainder of the wave moves upward and energy and send it through a transmission line to outward to form the SkYWAVE, as shown in a receiver. Thus, -components required: for figure 7:3. 'The ground and sky, portions of the. . suceessful transmissiOn of intelligence bymeans radio wave are reiponsible for two different of radii) waves:are a transmitter, a transmission methods of carrying the intelligence from line, a transmitting antenna, a medium through transmitter to receiVer. The ground wave is used whieh radio waves travel (for example, the both fOr rshOrt range, communications at high atmosphere surrounding the earth), a receiving. frequencies with low power and for long range antenna, another transmission line, and the communication at lOw frequencies and with very receiving equipment. Figure 7-1is a block high power. Daytime..spception from most diagram showing the arrangement of these commereial stations is ,carried by the gound components. Wave. Successful communication by Means of the skywave is. used for long range higha radio waVes degends chiefly on the power of the frequency daylight communication. At night, 107 10-1 " COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN. o 3 &*-2 \ MEDIUM propagated Within the troposphere (the first 7.to (EARTH'S. ATMOSPHERE) 10 miles 'above theearth's surface). There are 'PORTION ORA* WAVE fewer yariables -.involved, and these are not INTERCEPTED BY RECEIVING 'ANTENNA subjeCt to, sueh .rancldm behavior and extreme excursions- as is the case for sky waye 111r transmissiOns. TRANSMITTING RECEIVING -ANTENNA ANTENNA Refraction (bending) in the troposphere of electromagnetic energy (radio waves) toward the earth's surface accounts for the tendency of a -TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION ground wayeAo f011ow the contour of the earth's -NELI LINE surface and thereby achieve transmission distances beyond the line of sigia.In the troposphere, the amount of refraction normally decreases with height so that a ground wave is TRANSMITTER RECEIVE4t bent or tilted toward the .earth in a Manner similar to the.refraction of, radio waves in the ionosphere. The\defraction effect of' an obstacle 'in the 31.6 path of a\ radio wave i$ shown in figure 74. The Figure 7-1.Basic radio communication system. resultant wave fronts are-distorted, and:the wave front is 'extended downward. Instead of being shieldedr, an antenna erected at point A.'-wOtild receive some, energy from the transmitting .ANTENNA antenna., AXIS The ground Wave is responsible for most of the daytime broadcast- reception. As it passes over and through the,ground, this wave induces a voltaie:in the earth,'setting up eddy currents. The, energy used to establish these currents is absorbed from the, ground wave, thereby weakening itas 1tmove's awaY from the transmitting antenna: Increasing the frequencY rapidlY increases the attenuation sb that the . ground wave lransmissidn is limited to relatively low frequencies. Shore base transmftiers are Able to-transmit long range ground wive transmissions by using frequencies between 18 -and 300'kHz with extremely.high Owen. Since the. electiical-propertieS of the earth 179.474 alOng whith .t,he: surface wavetravels are Figwi 7.2.Vertical antenna field pattern. relatively -constant, the signal strength ,from a gIveh station at a given-point is nearly constant. the sky wave provides a means for long range This holds essentially true in all localities-except contacts at somewhat lower frequencies. those having distinct rainy and dry seasons, There the difference in the aniount moistnre GROUND WAVt causeS the conductivity of the soil to change. The physical mechanics of ground wave The conductivity of salt water is 5,000 times propagation are less complicated than those of as great as that of dry soil. High yower, loq; sky wave propagation'. Ground waves are frequency, transmitters are placed as close to the X 6 108 A , Chapter 7WAVE PROPAGATION AND ANTENNAS ' .0 179.495 Figure 7-3.Groulia end sky waves. 4. if particles of the atmospheric layers. "A'recewer located in the vicinity of the returning sky *aye Will receive strongsignals even though several Inuldrid miles beyond -therange of the,ground wave. a zr IONOSPHERE The ionosphere As fo?,nd in, thevery ,high . 179.499 atmosphere approximate), 30 to 250 miles Figure 7-4.---biffraetion-of transinitted energy ,by tharp edge of a niountairl. abOve the eirth. It differs from .other utmoOerle parts in that itcontains a Much idge of the Ocean as practical because ofthe higher numbeCof positive and negative:ions. The superiority of sUrfaCe waye conauction by salt negative ioni are believed to be, atoms whbse wa ter. energY -levels have beeir raised .to,a highiev:elby - solar bombardinent ol ultra-violet.and particle SKY WAVE. radhitions. The rotation of the- earth oriltsaxis, . the annual course of the earth-aroundthesun, That :portion of theradio \wive wLichmoves and the development ofstin spots all affectthe upward.' and outward is not in-cOntact with; the nuMber of ions present-in the ionosphere, and 'ground and, is called the SKY-WAVE.It behives these in turn affect the quality and distance of similarly to. the gio und Wive. Softie of thd electronic transmis.sions. energy of-the sky waVe'islefractect(bent) by'the The ionosPhete is constantly Chvging. Some ionosphere -so that -it coMes back toward the cif the ions are returningtO their normal energy, earth.. Some,,eneity is lost indissipation to leVel, While other atoms are being raiseato 109 0 COMMUNiCATO4S TECHNICIAN -0 3 & 2' higher energy level. The rate of variation RADIATIO between high and low level of energy depends FROM ubon the amount of air present and the strength SUN of radiation from the sun. 4,iS N., v2. LAYER STRUCTUREOF /4_41- THE IONOSPHERE LAM? Densities of ionization in the ionosphere tend to, peak at variOus heights aboye the earth. asAresultf diffeyeriCes in the physical properties_ of 'the atmosphere at different 'heights:The levels at which.the electron density reacheS a maximurri are iermed layers, and these are identifiedas the D, E, Pl , 'arid F2 lay'em in order -of increasing height and.ionizatiOn density: Actually, there is thought to beno sharp dividing -;line between layers,"k"out foi the purpose , 31.109 of discuSSion,.'such demarcation iS indIcated: The Figure.7-5.Distribution of laieri in ths- 6 relativei, distribution -of these layers aboVe the iohosphere. earth Is showri in figure 7-5. The nurriber ,of V. layers, their heights,.41?-d their '.ioniiation be practically useless as an aid to I-IF -radio (election) density yary both geographically and communications. The density of electrons in the with time: E layer is usually great enough to refract to earth ,-iadio waves at, frequencies as high as 20 kLayPr. MHz. The height of this layer and its refractive properties make it imPortant for daytime The D layer lies betweenheights of about 30 propagation at distarices less than approximately and 55 miles' above the earth, and absorption in 1200 Miles. Longer distance transmission via the this layer is the principle cause of the daytime E layer is usually impractical because of the low attenuation of high-frequency sky waves. The D layter height and correspondingly low vertical > layer exists only in the daylight hours and its angle of departure of the transmitted wave. With,4 ionization density correlates with the elevation this geometrxt multiple reflections between the angle-of the sun. Compared to the other layers E layer ..and the earth's surface are n'equired Tor at higher altitudes the electron density is lorig distance transmission, and a wave folloWing relatively low, but the free electrons are excited such a' path suffers pronounced absorption .by the presence of an electromagnetic wave. durihg its travel-through the D and 8 layers. Pronounced energy losses occur because of An unprediCtable phenomenon associated collisions between the -electrons and the with the E layer is the Sporadic E, abbreviated molecules of the atmosphere, Es. Irregular cloud-like areas of unusually high ionization often occur near the height of: E Layer maximum ionliation ofthe regular E layer:The physical . proceSses that produce the quite- The &layer, second iri order of height, exists unpredictable E ionization are not fully ,known, betWeen 55 and, 90 miles above the earth's but the frequency of occurrence and the degree surface 'with ,maXimum density relatii,ely Of ionization vary significantly with latitude. constant at about 76 miles. The variations of Sometimes the Es layer, or cloud, is opaque to this-layer are regular and quite predictable. The radio waves and blankets the upper layers.At intensity of ionization follows the-sun's altitude_ other times, the Es may be so thin that, although closely, reaching,a maxiinum about noon, and its Presence can be Verified, radio waves fading to such a weak level during the night as to penetrate it easily to be returned, by the upper, 6 - 10,4 .- Chapter- 7WAVE PROPAGATION AND ANTENNAS layers. 1Iiese characteristics can be eithethelpful inte.nsities (and noise) to be generally higher or harmful to , radio communications. For than theyare durip daylight hours.. 'example. bla4eting Es may block proPagation via a More EiVorable regular layer .in a certain EFFECT OF IONOSPHERE. ,frequency range or cause additiOnal attenuation- ON THE SKY WAVE -at other frequencies. Partially reflecting-Es-can cause serious Multipath interference, espeCially The ionosphere hasmany chan.cteristics... detrimental to data-transmission systems. On-the Same waves 'penetrate and pass entirely through other hand. Es may enable long-distance itinto space,, never to return. Other waves transmission at very high frequencies, or may penetrate but bend. Generally', the ionosphere permit short-distance transmission to locations acts as. a iconductor, and absorbs energy in that would ordinarilybeoirra skip zone. varYing amounts from the electronic °wave. The ionoSphere also, acts as an eledtronic mirror and refracts (bends) 'the sky wave:backlo theearth, F Region - as. illuStratsd in figure 7-6. Here' the 'ionosphere ' does by reltaction*what water doesto a beam of For HF 'radio cOmmunications, the F region light. is the most important part of -the isbnosiihere. The ability of the ionOsPhen to retuin an Lone tcren .studies of the structure of the F electronic waVe lo the earth depends upon the region femote probirig techniques shoiv' angle .at which the sliy, ivave strikes the conclusively the existence-of two, distinct layers, ionosphere, the frequency of the transmissions, called the F-1 arid =F2 layers. These-Iwo-merge at and ion density. When the wayelrom an anteria night into a single Flayer at a height of 170-to strikeS the ionosphere at ,an angle the Wave° 200 miles. buring the day, ,the -F1 layth" has a begins to bend. If the frequency and-angle are, lower limit of approxiMately 100 miles, while elOrrect and the ionosphere is sufficiently dense, the F2. layer 'has a loWer limit of about 160 to he waVe will eventually emerge from .the 25,0 miles depending-upon-the season Of the year ionosphere and return;to,the earth. Ka:receiver andlimeofthe day. is locateCat either of-the points B, figure 7-6, the transthission from point A .viill be received*. Fl LA-YER..:The Fl layer has not been as The sky wave in figure, 7-7is assumed to be. well 'defined as the F2 layer in' terms of its, compose,d of rays that emanate from the, pre.di,eIabre characteristics. This layer antenna in .three -distinct. groups that_ .are occasionallY isthe refracting region for HF identified according to the angle of eleyation. transmission', but usually oblique-incidence The angle at which the group I. rays strike the 'Waves that penetrate the klayer alsp penetrate ionosphere is too nearly vertical for the rays to the Fl layer and are bent earthward by the F2 be returned to earth. The rays are bent out of layer. The principal effect of the Fl layer is to introduce additional absorption of such waves. .14 spKgRE F2 LAItR:The F2 layer is by far the most iLz important layer for HP radio cominunications, and unfortunately, it is also the most.variable. It is the 'insist highly ionized'of all the layers and its height= and ionization density vary daily, seasonally and over-the-14 year ,sunsPot cycle. The degree of iOnithtion does not follow the -altitude of the' sUri,in any simplefashion, but it generally peaks, in the afternoon and.deereases gradually throughout the night. The,absen, ce 13.20 the Fi l4yer at night and reduCtion in Figure 7-6.Refraction orthelicy waves by the absorption irr the E layer cause nighttime:Signal ionosphere. a ' COMMUNICATIONS 'TECHNICIAN 0 3 & 2 0 4, be used for a communication circuit arc the ;i0geot 44.1.444'iti height of the ionized layer used for refraction vwt,:v, and the -distance between the two ends of. the circuit The Maximum frequency which,.Will be .3 refracted "for a given distifice-of transmission is, calleclAhe maxiMum usable fiequency .(MUF), The MUF is .always higher than the critical frequency. a Frequency of Optimum Traific Fxperience-biS shown that the .74Y1UF may 1111.111/ SURFACE OF E4RTH increase or decrease significantly, especially during daytirne'because -of changes-occurring in the ionosphere. Therefore.' the frequency of ;13:30 oPtimum traffic -(FOT),-is =used, so:that i/ariations Figure 77.gffect_of the angle of-dop.arture on in the ionosphere will have- less effect on the tho-ares of reeirition. communication'cireuit. lin, but pass completely through the ionosphere 'SKY WAVE PIZOPAGATION . and are lost. .A currently popular thesity on prcipagation is explained, aS foi1óys. . Sky wavelransinission are those refractedly The angle Made by the group 2 rays is called the ionosphere.. Ionosphere refracted sky waves the -CIOTICAL ANGLE for.thatfreCitiency..Any, are generally the only ,usable 'waves for long ray that leaves _the antenna at an angle greater, range communications. Figure 743 illustrates than this angle (0) will penetrate lhe ibnosphere. some of the many possible paths that radio Group, 3 rays strike the -ionosphere at the waves of various frequenciemay take betWeen a smallest _angle that will be refracted and- still transmitter and a. receiver ,by refraction in _the leturn tolhe-earth. At any smaller/angle thelays, ionosphere. Some of the waves of too high .a will ,be refracted but will-not return tcytheearth. frequency (30 MHz and higher) for refraction by As the frequenayincreases, the ,initiai 'angle the.ionized layer pass on through and arelost in decreases:Low frequency fields can_beprojeCted space. Other components of_the wave, which are straight upward- and Will be returned to the assumed to be of the correct frequency (below earth. The highest frequency that can be sent 30" MHz) for refraction from the' ionospheric diiectly ul,)ward- ind still- be' refracted back to layers, are returned to the earth; these waves 4 the earlb is 'called the CRITICAL picwide Communications. Note alsO that the skiE3 PREQUENeY At sufficient19 high trequenCies, distance-is the.distance from the transmitter ,t4e regardlest of the angle' at. Which the -fiya.itrike. thee nearest point at which the refracted waves the -ionosphere, -they-will 'not be returned t6the return to earth. The skip zone and its relation to earth. The critical'frequency is not,conStant but the-grótuid'wave are.shówn in figure 7.-8. Varies .from one locality to another, with ihe NOte-the dittinction between° the terms SKI? lime of daY,. season of the -year, .and. with. the DISTANCE and ..SKIP ZONE. For each iinspoi cyCle. frequerfq at which 'refraction froni an, .ionospheric layer, laket, place, 'there is a skip MaximiinfUsable,Vrecluency distance that depends On the degree of 9 ionizatiori present. The-skip zone, on the' other, As the incidenCangle is lowered from the- hand, depends on how far the ground wa..e veitical, there is acorresponding increase in the, extendt from the transmitter and ,where the sky freqUenCY- which. will be returned toeaith. The wave first returns to earth by refraction from an factors which-determine the aCtual frequency to ionized layer. The skip zone is Ihe zone between 4 r thapter 7WAVE PROPAGATION AND ANTENNAS THESE, WAVES a PA TIOUGH 0 THE -IONOiPHERE AND ARE LIST_ 11 TRANSMITTER SKIP 'ZONE , . 4 SKIPDISTANCE , THESE viAyEs, WHICH RETURN TO EARTH PROVIDE COMMUNICATIONS 31.16 Figure 78.Various sky-wave transmission paths. the end of the ground wvetransmirssion and the MULTIPLE-HOP TRANSMISSION point on the earth were the sky -wave first returns from the ionosp ere. The sky wave path of a signafprOpapted at t wo different vertical ,angles is illustrated in figure 7-9. When the vertical angle is 01, the M noted reviously in the discussion df the signal is returned to lhe earth at point A, ionosphere, the\high0 the frequency of a wzve, reflected back to the .fonoiphere andreappears the lessitis iefracied bY a given degree of at point B. If the same signal is-transmitted at ionization. lower vertical radiation angle 02, it can leach 113 :107 0 IL COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN 0 3 & 2 ..4.4.1.:,a; 12 LAYER " *: 11: "...I.". tr. : ' c:t t1,440,* N RECEIVING TRANSMITTING 'slrg SITE ,7As14,i8,K, a.* .-114:11!ii:1; 1544... a 179.497 Ftguni7-9.Path of a sky wave signal propagated at-two different-vertical angles. point Bi-n a single hop. The signal transinitted at There.Gare 's.everal conditions which Can angle 91 will suffer more ionospheric a n d produce fading. One type of fading is prevalent ground absorption losses than., that signal In areas wbere sky waves are relied upon for transmitted at angle 02:;.In general, single hop transtnissiori. Figure 1-10' shows two sky waves transmissions result in greater 'fiekVintensities at. traveling paths ,of different lengths, thereby , a distant point than multiple hop transmissions. varying about the same point out Of phase and By inspection of figure 3-9 itis evident that thus producing 'a weakening of the signal. For, longer distances can be covered:by multiple hop instance, if a portion bf the transniitted waw transmissions as the vertical radiation angle is front arrived: at a distant point via the E layer decreased. Frequencies-in the 9 to 80 MHz range and another via Gthe, F layer, a complete , are generally utilfzed for long distance- cancellation pf signal voltages would occur if the transmissions, and in order to minimize the. waves arrived 180 'degrees out of phaSe and with number Of4ef1ections pf the signal in arriving at equal ainplitude. Usually, one signal is weaker a distant point, lower vertical radiation angles than ;>the other; therefore, a usable sknal is are .used, However, -thereisa limit to -the' obtained.. improvement obtained by low angle radiation, One method of overcomingfading is to place because absorption and other factors make two intennas a wavelength apart, feed two operation on vertical radiation angles below 3 separate receivers, and combine the audio degrees impractical. outputs. thig-is kno'wn as diversity reception. DUCtING FADING Uninual ranges 'of VHF ancl UHF contacts When a received signal varies in intensity are, caused by abnormalatmospheric condition's over a:relatively short period of time, the effect _a few miles above the earth. Normally, the is knoWn as fading, Which is ,one of the most warmest air is found near the surface of th5 troublesome problems encountered in electronic water. The air gradually becomes cooler .as the reception. altitude increases. Sometirnes, unusuaLsituations 114 , 08 ' f Chaptér.7WAyE ROPAGAtION ANbANTENNAS. /0 / TROPOSPHERIC PROPAGATION' 4 r The foregoing, sections of.. this -chapter have provided a diScirssion Of that portion of radiaied ehitrgy which is- aeted upOli ,13y the ionosphere and tretufned to earth and. also that portionsof radiated- energy which 'is piopagatedalong the. earth's ,surface. Iri this section, conSideration given- to that part of thIotal radiated energy: , which -undergoes' ceflections and. refraCtions the troposphere. 179.498 RefractiOri of radio ,w0,esliff the troroskhere Figure 7-10.Facling caused by arrivalof iwo sky.waves at lie same point (RI out of various_meteorOlogical variables. phase. BeOauie of the 'uneven- heating of 'the earth's, surface,: the air in the troposphereisin,consiant , develops whe'rewarm layers of air ate found motion. This motion ti.uses small- turbulences, above 'cooler layers. The condition is known as or eddies, to be fornied-. These, turbulencesare TEMPERATURE.INVERSION. qu siibilar to the Whirlpools, in al-,rapidy s moving stream of water. The turbUlenceismost When a- teinperatUre inversion exists,the intense near the eartIVS sprface arid gradually. --N--a-"Mount of refraction (index -of refraction) is .ditriitiishes-with altittide. , 'different for the _particles-trapped-within the.* For frequencies Up to. abOut 30 MHz' -bopirdaiiës -frOm those :outside- them.These wavelengths are:large- compared-to -the- differences form channels size of or ducts thatwill .-"the turbulences: therefore, theturbillences,have -aconduct the radio waves many milesbeyond the little effect on the transmitted signal. 'However, assumed normal fange -as the frequency is increased', these lotal bule ire e s beco me increasingly Sometitnes these' ducts ilnportant are in contact With because they are responsible, tfj-r-tropospheric the water and may extenda few,hundred. feet scatter transmissio tr. into'the air.. At other tinri the dna_will Start at , an elevation ofbetween 500 arid -1,000 feet and FORWARD PROPAGATION BY extend an additional 500 to 1,,000 feetin the air. TROPOSPHERIC SCATTER -. , . 7 This ScatteringPhehornenon Iri the If_an-aritenna-extends-into-the-duct-orif-the,'t troposphereis based on the theory that wave enter4 a duct after leaving an antennai_the, t" transmission, may be oónducted fora jou: ..., , diStance. An-eximple of this type of..:-0'..---... -transmission of radio paves in' ducts formed ooct by SURFACE t3/40 temperature irivetsions iS shown iri figure 7-11. DUCT . Ac:c , ., - - . With Certain exceptions, ductsare formed over water where the folloWing conditions are pcSOL RANG t observed aboard ship: A wind is blowing from the land. 2. There i 4 a stratum of quiet air.. 3.High pressure, clear skies and little wind.. 4.Cool breeie over warm,open ()dean. 5. 'Smpke,'haze, or dust fails to-rise.- - 20.255 2.15, Received signal is fading rapidly. Figure 7-11.Duct effect in highfrequency transmission. 115 /0 MUNICAT1ONS TECHNICIAN 0 3 &2- turbulendes- prevailing in the troposphere ,:ause increases as height is increased, (2)_th: ainotint scattering-of the signal beyond the horizon, and of' turbulence decreases with heiglit. As the take place primarily when operation is -in the.circuit distance is increased, the height of the UHF range:The scatter effect is the same as if ft scatter volume must also be increased. each turbulence received the signal and Therefore, the received signal lever decreases as rera'diated it. Wh'en properly engineered-, the circuit distance isinCreased. FOrWard Propagation by Tropospheric Scatter Since tropospheric scatter depends op (EFTS) is reliable up to distances of 600 miles. turbulences inthe atmosphere, changes in The word "scatter" implies that the atmdSpheric conditions will affect the received spreading of energy'is equal in all directions; signal level. Both daily and seasonal variations Iiii,vever, the directiori-,of energy distribution in are noted. These changes are called long-tet4n tropospheric scatter propagation differs only -fading. In addition to long-term fading, the .slightly from the, direction of .the path of the% tropospheric scatter signal- often is Jalso main wavefront. The Scattering Occurs,chiefly:in charatterized by very rapid fading whlfh is the forwa-rd direction; 'therefore, the term- caused by muttipath propagation. The signals "forwa rd, scatter" is sometimes used. when, received at any-one time are the sua of all the talking about tropospheric-scatter. signals received from each of the turbulencei in The magnitude of .t he received signal the volume. Since the turbulent conditio.n is .de*pends -on the number of turbulences causing constantly changing, the path .lengths and scatter in the-desired directionandthe direction individual signal levels are also- _changing, and. gain of the reCeiving antenna beam.. This 'resulting in a rapidly changing signal. Although quantity or magnitude "is -called -the scatter the signal levelis constantly changing, the voluine. The scatter voluineand scatter angle are aVerage signal level ispersistent, and no .shown in figure' 7-12. As the scatter angle is complete_fdde-out occurs. - increased, the abount of received scattered Another characteristic of a tropospheric energy degreases Very-rapidly. scatter signal is its relitively low power level. The amount of Teceived energy decreases as The scatter volume'can be pictured, as a relay .the, -height of the ,scatter volurne -is increased. station, located ab.ove the horizon, receiving the There are two reasons for this: .(1). scatter angle jransmitted energy and4.'Teradiating it- to some TRANSMITTING RECEI-VING 'SITE SITE 50.148 Figure 7-12.Scatter.propagation. 116 11 0 Chapter, 7WAVE PROPAGATION ANDANTENNAS point beyond the line-of-sight diStance. Since OBLIQUE pcNospHgRic SOUNDER most of the -transmitted eifergy is_not reradiated- RECEIVER AN7UPR-2 to the receiver, the -efficiency isvery low, and the signal-level at the final receiver pointis low, The Ionospheric SoUnder Receiver isan To compensate for the low efficiency'in the equipment that will aid the fleet communicator scatter volume.the incident power must be high. in frequency selection. -As previouslystated, the This is accomplished by using -high-power key to, frequency selection is the -condition of transmitters and high-gain antenr4as-Which the dionospere midWay betweenthe two concentrate -the transmitted power intoabeam, stations that -are communicating. Frequency thus increasing the intensity ofenergy on each selectiari with 'the aid of the,, Ionospheric turbulence in the volurne. The -receivermust also Sounder Receiver is accompliSlied in the be very sensitive to- detect the- low levelsignals. following manner. A transmitter stationed ashore sends a series of pulsesequences at, preciSe ti'mes $pecified by its ,published FREQUENCY SELECTION transthission schedule. The sounder receiver is Programmed to atitorbatically tuneto each of 80 frequencieS in the range from 2 to 32 MI-lz. The -Radio wave propagation, conditions have . tuning thariges- must occur at exactlythe .right their gre*St-effeCt on Iv1F/t-IF circuits-between timeS 2nd allowanceS must be made for Ships and- itatiOns 'separated the time bY grellt diitancesi taken for the signal to travel iromthe frequency selection in the MF/14IFrange is, transmitter to --thereceiver. Frequencies that determined by propagationconditionk, rOpaga_te_ar,e, displayedon a tcathode-ray frequency authorilations arid 'frequency oscillograph in. the form ofan Ionow-am. The availabilitieS.,The sky,waves of 'higher lonogram also shoWS mUltipath propagation frequencies- can -be Used during, the daytime,. which produces excessive while -lower frequenbies must be distortion and the used _at night. effects Of "solar flares whichcause- increased The key to -frequency selection _is thecondition 'absorption ,of the lower range of frequencieS ,of the ionosphere inidWay between -thetwO that propagate. 'stations. NTP 6, SUPP-1 or other freqUency The- Technical Manual contains tablesthat prediction infoirnatien is used' to deteriiiinethe lisf the operating proceduresof the AN/UPR-2 re co m Mended frequency band. Tbe selected in a logical seqUence. frequeney. is Monitored tO besureit' -is nOt already in,service. FREQUENcY PLANS In all other frequency ranges, circuits_usually p era te under---semi-stAble--prOpagation- Frequency plans contain Afiformation conditions, and fre-quency selection is based -arid on guidance for intra-service, joint,and, combined frequency authoritation and frequency use, and for op.)rating-in specific areas. JANAP availability. 195 contains infOrrnatiOnsand guidancefor Nayy and Marine,Corps.use; suppleinentsto ACP 17-6 contain inform.ation fOr Unitsoperating REQUENCY PREDICTIONS with NATOand SEATO pact natiOns. The Institute °tor. Telecoinrriunication - Sciences, previously known as-the Central Radio ANTENNAS Prppagation Laboratery of-the National Bureau of' Standards, receivh anil analyzes ionospheric An antenna is a conductor data -from many statioris:throughout the or a system of world. conductors for radiating (transmitting)or The$e ionospheric data are utilized by .the intercepting '(receiving) radio Armed Forcet as Well as by many other waves. In its users th eleMentary form, an antenna.-may besimply a j)roduce 'Itironthly Median FrequenCy length of elevated wire- like.lhecommon Predictions. receiying- antenna for an ordinary broadcast 111 y COMMUNICATIONS TECHNI6IAN.63 & 2 receiver.If an antenna is fed a radio-frequency the water. With the disturbance as the center, current from atransmitter,it. will radiate wayes are produced which move. bumard in electromagnetic waves into Space. If an antenna expanding circles. As each ciielealp% es ot is placed in the path of an electromagnetic-wave _toward the edge of the,porid, a new on}trorms-at traveling through space, a radio frequency the center. Eventually; the waves/Cover the current will be induced in the antenna. The surface of the pond, and the leaves/are bobbiria induced current is used as the, input to a up and down as each wave passt.7 Notice that receiver. However, before discussing specific the leaves are not carried along uith the ua% es types of antennas, it will be helpful to discuss and washed up on the shore, but have an several terms which are used to describe the up amid-own motion. This-is because the %ater characteristies of antennas. on which the leaves -float is not moved sideways by the waves. The only effect' of_the wave is to ELECTROMAGNETIC ' raise or lower each particle in its path. The part -WAVE-MOTION- oF the_ wave that raises a particle is called the crest; the part that lowers a particle is called-the The mOyeinent Of Waves iri a pond.and- the -trbugh. movement of electromagnetic waves liave Suppose that a source of RF energy. such as characteristics in common. a .radio transmittec, is connected to an antenna: Suppose you are standing at the edge of a The antenna sets up fields in, the surrounding sniall -pond of water. The surface of the pond-is space, and the-resultant waves areyropagated in smooth and unbroken *except for a feW dead alldire,ctions in .the form of expanding leaves floating near your feet. If you toss a stone concentric circles, as shown in-figure 7-14. When into the center of the pond, ripples spread out these waves encounter s6me device, such as a from the place whereshe stone Struck the water. receiving antenna, On which they can act, some In a few inoments, the disturbance reaches the of their energy is given up to that device. The leaves ,floating near you, and they begin to bob essential fact in this picture is that energy is up and down. The energy imparted by1he stOne transmitted by means of wave motion- in this has made itself felt across the surface of the pond; as Shown in figure 7-13: When the Stone :is tossed into the pond, it sets up a disturbance at the place where it strikes PROPAG.ATION OF ENERGY 2 31.110 31.111 Figure 7-13.Wave motion in pond. Figure 714.Electromagnetic wave triotion in space. 11!31.12 Chapter. 7WAVE PROPAGATIONAND ANTENNAS o case by _electromagnetic, waves, Some' Of the 300,000,000 = 30 meters, or, since, energy produced by the transmitteris 10,000,000 - 1 meter = 3.28 feet'. transfetred thtough spaceto- the receiver in . 30 X 3.28 = 98.4 feet sôniewhat-the same way, asScoie of.the energy of the stolie tOs-ted in the p&Iiiwas transferred If half-wave through the-water.. or quartér-waveantenna valuesare desired', simply divide thd resultby 2 or 4. The velocity of these electromagneticwaves ..moving through -space is: foundin the same POLARIZATION Manner as the velocitY of thewater waves. It is the distance divided by -thetime required to A radio wave consigts of travelingelectric cover 'that distance:Instead of takingany distance, suppose you. oonsider and magnetic fields. The,magnetic field (H) the distance produces an electric field (E)and the two fields roin -the crest of one wave to _thecrest of the (called the electromagnetic 'next. Thit is the length of-one wave, or one field) radiate into wavelength. The same distance space. The polarization_ of a wave-is deterrilined can also be. by the ditection of the-eleetric-linesof force (E Wom the _trough ofone Wave to the field).-If the E field is trough-of-an adjacentwave. The.electromagnetic Vertical,:the polarizationis wave in space 'has-definite -wavelength vertfeal. Since -ttie-t fieldis ;parallel to the wire which-can or arms of a.simple antenna,an antenna that is measured in the mannet 'just ,described.It _is veitieal- with respect to the sisually meaSUred'in meterS, andits-symbol is the earth radiates a' -Greek letter lambda-(X). s vertically polarized- wa've,while 'ahorizontal antenna 'radiates a horizontally.poldrized waVe. Figure 745A repteserit'S thevettidal-electriclield- Since the velocity ofan electromagnetic -comfionent of a vertical antenna. Figure Vave in free spice iscOnsidered -to be 300 7,1SB snillión meters shows the horizontal electri'Clieldcomponent of -per second, the formula for a horizontal' antenna. Therefore, omputing wavelength is we referto the expressed-as: aritendas.' is beingvertically or 'horizontally polariied.antennas. 300,000,000 , For low frequencies %avelength in meters = the. polarization is diSturbed. and the radiation -fieldhas the Saine Frequency (in hertz) polarization at-the distant receivingstation that it -had at the tranSmitting "FOr example, to compute the antenna. -When length 'of a full high-frequency transmissionis uSed, the wave antenna for use on 10,000 kHzproceed as follows: -polarization ,.usually Varies', sometimesquite rapidly. Therefore, the polarizationof the wave VcRTICAL POLARIZATION B. HORIZONTAL POLARIZATION XMTR RCVR 4°P-ftrI7E f 31.112 'Figure 7-15.Vartical and hcirizontalpolarization. 119 /6 COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN 0 3 & 2 at the receiving station may or may not be the transfers the power of the _engine to the rear same as .the polarization of the waveat the wheels; itis the connecting link. In radio we transmitting station.. must have a connecting link between-the When the antennas are close to the ground, transthitter and antenna, or between the vertically polarized waves Yield a stronger signal receivers and antenna. This linkiscalled a close to the earth than do horizontally polarized -transtnission line. The transmission line-transfers waves. When che antennas are atleast one energy from the transmittertO. the antenna or wavelength above the ground, the two types of energy from the antennato thereceiver. If the polarization give approximately the same field antenna could be puilt directly onthe intensities near the earth. When the Antennas are transmitter and the receiver, -then there would several wavelengths iiboye the ground, be no need for the transmission line. However, horiiontally polarized Waves yield a stronger even in a compact installation, sudh as asbip or signil-closer to the eirth. aircraft, itis_not uSually convenient to locate the transtriitter or receiver near-the-antenna. Perhaps Directiiity you have gainedthe litipreSSiori that transmission lines are used only for conducting All antennas are directional:to some extent radio frequency energy from one point to (Ace-0 for a hypotheticat unipole). This means another. This is- not true. The lines thatSupply that an antenna used, for transmitting will electricaliefiergy to your house are transmission iadiate most of itsenergy in certain directions; lines- justas-much-as areith,e wires_connecting one an antenna used for reeeivingwill' best receive -circuit-to another. signals, froth certain directions. The directional - A transmiSsion line- can therefore be defined characteristics of-an antenna are determingd-to a as-a device -for transmitting orguiding electrical great extent ,by its ,design and- the positiOn,in energy from one point .tci ,another.A poor which itis installed. Thus _certain directional traristnissionline decreases.the amount of energy ,qualities are associated with eadh, typeor' available at the trarisniitting antenna- for antenna. TheradiatiOn papem, which is agood radiation- or di the receiver for recePtion. -indication of the directiVity of an antenna or Conversely,_ a perfect trans,mission line delivers antenna array, -is plotted on .a chart. the entire transmitter outPut to the antenna or Mathematical derivation of antenna patterns for the entire teceived, signal to the receiver.In such many of the more cornmon typesof antennas an ideal system, ihe -antennaalone radiates or . are.given in Standard antenna tekts,and will not receives energy. be diScussed in 4his-manual. RF transmissiOn lineS_,behave differently in The following- three terms are used to different frequency ranges. An:RF transmission- describe general directional qualities of an 'line:designed to operate at the relatively low antenna: frequencies used in-the-standard broadcast-range is nOr likely to be- usable. -in point-to,point OMNIDIRECTIONAL. Receives orradiates aircraft communication *system. An RF equally Well in all directions eXcept off theends. transniission line can be expeeted to transfer energy effic:ently.froth one point to another BIDIRECTIONAL. Receives or radiates only at the frequency for which it, is designed. efficiently in twodirections; for example, North When this fine iS -used at higher frequencies,it AndSouth or East and West. will have greater losses. In practice this means,. that different kinds of transmission lines must UNIDIRECTIONAL. Receives or radiates be -available for use indifferent .frequency efficiently in only one direction. ranges. BASIC TYPES OF:ANTENNAS . TRANSMISSION LINE .An iiiention often borrows the nameof its- You, make use of a transmission deviceeach -inventor; This islrue-about two basic antennas. time you drive your car: Thetransmission the Hertz and.Maiconi. 12411 ° Chapter 7WAVE PROPAGATIONAND ANTENNAS Half-Wave A basic forrn of antenna with-a length of VOLTAGE tz. ofie-lialf Wavelength or a- multiple theyeof is ANTENNA -known as a dipole or Hertz antenna.(See fig. 7-1 6.) This type -ofantenna will not functiOn effickientlyunlest its length is one-halfwave TRANSMISSION CURRENT lengtp. z dr a multiple thereof) -ofthe frequency LINE to -bie -radiated or received.Therefore, -this- ante4a is ,ciot_,suitable when -a wide rangeof ROUN GROUND freqdbricies is to be used.A diStinguishing FEED / featur ofa POINT IMAGE I dipoleantennais-that it--need not be 1 =FENN& conne ted tO the ground aS-are other-antennas / / whi.clwill. be- described later.At lbw / frequef cies,- half-wave antennas- IMAGE are rather long; /ii::\ / CURRENT tkerefbre _they are used primarilyat Shore ,/ . IMAGE i lriitallat oils where there _is sufficient-roc.M. At VOLTAGE r- / Very hi t -and ultrahigh frequencies,, theshOrter I 1,- wayejen th_. _permits. ,constructionusingmetal... ,rods or -tubing. Depending upon-the waye polarizati n-deSired,-the_dipole Maybe Mounted either ;Ito *zotitilly -ot -vertically. 13.35 Transmission Figure 7-17.Marconiantenna and waveforms of lines May be cOnnected- in the-centeror ,atthe current and voltage ends Of t é dipóle. Because 'the-dipole is an- -'ungibundel --antenna, -it-may- 'be- installed' 'fat _ above The,gróund or other absorbing Wav_elerigth, the earth_acts as another structures. quarterwave _antennathi image-antenna-shown Ouarier*a in figiire 743. Half-wave operationis-obtained bY--aid_ofthislMage. This-tyPeof:antenna can be used on -planes and shiPs AgrOui\ded antenna,- which liaPne-four.th where 'the plane's - fuselage-or the ship's -hull provfles- the iinagi 'Wavelength; or any odd Multiple thereof, of-the antenna-. It is often prietical frequency toeradiated-or receivedis_knoWn-as tO use a -a Marconi antenna. (See _fig. 7-17.),Notice -that qtiarter-wave --antenna -where space-isa-problem. thetratismissidn lines There are many yariatiOnsf thequarter and- are con ected 'between-the the-half-wave antenna bOttom, of the antennan-d the grbund.' as well=as many 'different types ,designed for special Use- throughOut-the Although the Otenna .itse f ,is- onlyauarter range -Of Vietadio, frequency Speetruni.They 'ire often uSed as compbnentSof mOre complex antennas. CoMbinations, of-elements,- electrically Conneeted and physically- tpiced inthe proper Manner, can -be uied toobtain many desirable Te-aturev, Such- coMbinations of elementSare t called ARRAYS... \ TRANSMISSION LINE cOmmoN.'CCNFIGURATIONS It is difficult to clasSifya-particular-type of antenna aS strictly,a shore station' type or a ,Shipboard type unless, Ofcourse, its physical dimensiOns are the fundanientalconsideration. 13,34 For this'reasOn, soveral'antennis Figure7-16.Half-wave (liertz),antinnl. described in the remainder of this chapterare used-both ashore ,11 11 5 /0 F a 1 7 CONIMURICATIONS TECHNICIAN: 0 3 & 2 and- afloat. even though- they Ray be indicated as either tyPical shorestation or typical shipboard:types. The typesdes,cribed are merely sampling of the many and varied antennas wllieh will-be encoantered. - Horizontal Rhombic Antennas 13.37 In its basic configuration, a rhombic is Figure 7-19.Three wire'rhombic antenna. composed, of four-Ionghorizointal cOnductors-or legs, arranged in- the shape of a rhombus. The :rhombies used at _Naval Securilty-Grotip receiver Sleeve Antenna - sites are4generally -the terminaced, unidirectional ,type as shown in- figure 8.- kloriZontal. - _The sleeve_ antenna _is used primarily as a__ rhombic antennas are the- most commonly, used receiving antenna in Navy Comniunications. It is a-n-tenn-as. for -ro,int-to-point, H-F -naval a broadbande-d, VerticallY polarized communications. The Main disadvantage of this omnidirectional Intenna. ConseqUently, its type of antenna is the requirement for a large primary applications, are in broadcast, area. " ship/shorilship, and grOtind/air/ground Service rather-than-pointttozpoint_corniminicationS. Originally, the sleeve antenna was_developed Multi-Wire.Rhombic to fill the, need for' a versatile antenna, at shore stations,.butit has been mOdified for shipboard use also. Figure 7-20 isa shore station version:of A. rhombic antenna will improve in asleeVe antenna. The-shipboard sleeve antenna is performance if more tharia single wire is used to shown-in figure 7-21. form each leg. By using three wires (see figure 749), to .form each levand connecting all of thern at, both ends to- a common. point, but ,Conicil Monopole Antenna-. spacing them vertically 5 to 7 feetapart, at the side poles, an improved antenna known as a .Codical monopole's pre Used extensively in "curfaih rhombic"-is formed. HP Navy Communications: They were devtloped to. fulfilla need- for efficient broadband, vertically polarited, omnidirectional' SUPPORT POLE antennas that are cOrnpact in size. Their INSULATOR cornparatively short height is a definite asset to be codsidered iii conjunetión with threir TERMINATING excellent power handling capabilities Ind broad TRANSMISSION RESISTOR LINE bandwidth. Conical monopoles are:readily MAXIMUM RADIATION adaptable to ship/shore/ship, broadcast, and ground/air/ground service. A conical monopole antenna is.shOwn in figure 7-22. Like the sleeve :4 4,0 antenna, it is used both ashore and aboard ship. TOP VIEW Wire Ant6nnas 13.37 For some applications ashore,. especially in Figure 7-18.Typical rhombic antenna., VLF and LF transmissions, it is_ practical to use .0- -Chapter 7WAVE PROPKOATIONAND ANTENNAS :vertcally or horizontally-from a-yararm_(or the 14=N mdst itself)to out.riggers; anotherrnast, or to the - suPerstructure If Used- fdy transtnitting, the wire antenna is tuned electridally o the desired frequency, RADIATING - SECT ION' lyfitcn- 'larger wire is used for shipboard .,antetiniSAhn, for lihd-installatiohs. The)arger wire-is less likely to 'break"tinder the straih ship-04d.. vi6katititis.Additionally,, it 'can be stretchedjighter id avoid sagging in hotweather. -the-'Wire-i's twisted aridstrand.ed" for additional sttenttlf: tkially "it is made-of PhoSphor=bronze, a material th at is 'filontnagneitic and; resists rCorrosion:.:Wire -or rbceiving"antennis ordinarily covered' -With' a ,plaStic.insuiation; bilf wire pr.-- SLEEVE trahsmittingantenhaS is uninsulated. , SECTION Reev'ing, w.iip. a"ni enn a s, ;riormalI',OP -ins`i:a-11 ed.- -fiitward..-,op Alte;-shiproriSing7nearly verti,Caily.frojrrthe,pilOthouse-toptO,brackets on the -mast;or yardarin, They;are -locate'd,* far As -possible from transmitirnS antennasso , ininiiiWm '. of energy is:. pkelted;.up- TRUNK FEED' frdm local LINE transmitters theitiansiniisidr! .line-',(lead-in) for each receiving' atitehila: sterininates,, inantenna TO transfer patielsin radio ipaCes. TRANS MIS9ION LINE " 'fansttisSiii`h;.lines ,of the AranSmitting antenna' may -te of coaXial. -Cable-or soplier,.,4 tubing: Theyáre.supporteon stand,orr iniulatOrs :ainhare enClosed in. rectangular.metal Figure7-20.,,-Sleeve aotannalihore station): ductS,411ed -antenng'4rithks. Each .tiansinission, .t' line ;Connetts with an- im;lividital:transtnitter.ot with,arilfitenna-,multicoupler. - an intenna 'that -it.sitnplya long wire with one end connected t6 the equipment. Along-wire The metal- rings; antenna! Inife; sWitcheS; .anterma will usually be 'stretched ,between pOles a h t6n,na hardwiie,.!and accesiories associated, 'In such a Manner that the wire is essentially witit transmitting antennasare painted led. parallel to _the surface Of the earth. (See lig.'" Hardware ahd accessories -used- with reeeiving 71-23,),Longling1e-Wie intenriasare Constiticted aiitennas are painted'blue.This,color stheme is* a- seyeral wayelengths long; in some' eases- inthe safety precaution -in that it< shows at a.,glance VLF -baiid, the ahlenna may extend: several; Whether an antenna is for radiating .or If- a ,IOng-wire antenhai,.is TiVe drmore receiVing. .)wavelengths-,'`.The more direOtiOnal it w4be along its.axis. . . Inverted, Cone.Antehnit Wire-antennas (fig. 7-24) aieinstalledaboard , ship for medium- and high-frequency.coverage. /4orrhally, theyare n ot c'ut tor a given Inyeited cone antennas similar frequeny: Instead, a wire to- the one: rope is Strung either illustrated in figure 1-25are vérticallyopolarized, . , 123 117 -66MMUNICATioil8. . ACHNICIAN, 0 3 &. 2 . , 3.. 4DIAM. .4 ....--UPPER RADIATOR. 24.2' ' DIAM. UPPER .IRADIATOR INSUL4TOR ,NT-e6I335. CdNNECTOR INSULATO Nt4I3,35 +-1-81161Ato. bi_EgVE 3!-151AM , MATCHING e, ° ,SECTION SLE4vE ONNEcToR ApLE bEc DECK' , 10- 30me:LEE4 ANtEIINA:6,18mc.ti.EEVE ANTiNNA I 25.117(67) -* :Fiiiia,7.214Sleive ant:arias for shipboard Os.: lb very.,broadkanded. radiators. the' requirement for vertical ground mounted This antenna is, Widely, used -in Navy HF ,antenhas. The radial wires are one-quarter communications in ship/shore/ship, broadcast, vyaelength long at the lowe,st design freqUency, and iround/air/ground applications. The andare spaced 3 .degrees apart. .designed fiequency.fange is fofapproximately 3: 3 4 .* to -30:Maz.. inVerted cones ara,electrieally similar to The sadial ground, Plane .that forms thr OonicaL MonOPole antennas. Atso, the -inverted ground, system for inverted;.,conei is typical of cones generally are niore expensive than other . 4 pitopApOoN_ AND;ANTENNAS k5. 'or : TRANSMISiION, 4 LIN E > 13.36 'Figure 7-23.Lonovire antenna. BRACKET 'INSULATORS : A TRANSMITTING, ANTENNA 1 RECEIVING ANTENNA TRUNK 'Tb , TRANSMrr-TER ENTRANCE ,INSULATOR 1;46 Figure7-24.Shipimard Wire,antennas. = 25414 F19ure-74=Conical motif:410eantenna , . essentially seif-suppollinktmak .be deck-mounted, Or mounted:on bricketsonthe stacks or supeistrueture .COM m Only usd HF '(figure 7-26). The' omnidirectional Vertical physicaLcharacteristies- antennas. tiltible whips'for Use Along-the edgeS of aireraft carrier nikht.itecks- . and -retractable whips:fôr use-aboardSubtharines ,;e,t,wp snoreadVantages.of the whiP antenna Whip Antenna for ghipboard -ute: Whivantennas Coniniunicationi,are made of tubular metal or :Whip,type,intennas havereplaced-many Wire 'antennas ,abOard ship fiberglass- CoVered. metal.They ate usually 35. because they are,. feet "in, length; however,some modelvare A if COMkUNICATIONS TECHNTIAN' 46, & 2 SUPPORTING POLE6. WIRE'ELEMENTS.OF. INSULATORS INVERTEDCONE RADIAL FEED POINT 'GROUND PLANE 31.113 Figure1-25.Inviited.cone antenna. narrow bandwidth arid:will also be limited in po.wer radiating capability. Whip Antennas are vertically pOlarized 35"-.WHIP. . ANTENNA omnidirectional monopoles which are electrically characteristic of the,general-class of vertical: radiators. They ire .used: in shortrange ship/shOr e-/ ship commtriacations, in transportable comMunications systeers, And ,in INSULATOR laboratory and shop inStaliations. .. 'FOUNDATION VHF-UHF AntennaA At VHF, and- UHF freqtrencies, 'the'shorter LINE * waVelength., '126 120 c, Chigger 7WAVE PROPAGATION AN1) ANTENNAS . PARABOLIC REFILECTOR VOCAL. POINT, -41X I S I MbUNT NG ARM I sErLEcreo "ENERGV r TRAVELS ;ARALL.,EL TO AXIS 1.49 Figure 7-28.Principle of parabolic reflection. 1.48 Figure 7-27.UHF antenna AT-150/SRC. PARABOLIC ANTENNA..Communicafion Systems s411 as..-microwave line-of-sight radiO' and tropospheric statter, use parabolic antennas. These systeins -operate .at -frequencies that have radiation properties,approiching those of light waves and therefore can_ be reflected in 'much the, saMe manner that ;a .searchlight reflector Controlsiiiii0-beam. 0 It thus 'becomes practicable at; microWaye frequencies to use high-gain antennas that : resemble .reilectorS used-in. searchlights. These antennas. concentiate .energyAntri a narrbw; beam in the. smile Mannekas light :energy. With. the, beanrclirected'in the desired 'direction, it can be seen that a Much larger signal' arrives' at the .receiifing anten*na- than woUld'hapPen with a nondirectiOnal- antenna. Figure 1-28' depicts' a' paraboliC.antenna that is used for- transihission and reception of microwave electromagnetic energy. 79.58 Piiures-7729 .and: 7-.0 show tWo types of Figure.7-29.Mobile tropositheric 30 foot scatter tropOsPheric; 'Scatter antennas. Because of the '7. antenna. wave propagation .in the :troposphere, the signal strength fluetilates considerably; conseq:uently, diversity reception. To obtaih signals over much or ,the aignaLis lost. A steady-signal Can be different paths .tfiat fade 'and vary maintained -by-using-diyersity reCeption. Energy iridependentlY, soMe or allof, the following from each of a ,niunher of fluctuating signals methods may be used. Signet Obiliiied-oVer_two may t?e combined. All tropo Fattersysteins use or More independent-piths by these methods are 1 272 11 COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN 0 3 & 2 _< Figure 7-31 shows,a-possible arrangement of a trOposnheric scatter site. Antennas.onrheleft are,called billboard -antennas;, those on the right are dishantennas. Antennas vary in-size frain 00 feet in diameter to 120 feetiri diameter ormdre. Log-Periodic Antennu A requirement ,has existed inth'e Fir and VHF badds, as well as other frequ*y bahds, fdr an antenna which- will operateover an extremely' wide frequency, -range. tigure 7-32 shoWs a typical LPA designed for ex;remely br'oad,bandY VHF communkations: Tiese antennas ar,e ora general class whOse,structurels such that the .directivity pattern will vary periodica1ly with the logarithm !o( the frequency. If the variations over one periOd are small, and continue to -be Sitiall for alL periods, th'e. result will. 'be an extremely, broad-band afitenha. The IPA can be mounted on-steel towers ot' utility poles that incOrporate rotaling 76.59 me-chanisins and-is -particularly usefid where Figure 7-30,-rTroposphiric saatter anienna. antennkarea islinfited..A. rotating LPAisknOWn as -an .RLPA, and posscsses essentially thestud .charadterisfics as the- fixed LPA, but has a. combined in the .receivey in such ,a way as to different ,ph ysicarform.'(See fig. 7-33.) 11,LPA's 0 utilize the best signal at all times. comthonly are used in Ship/shdte/ship and in point-to-point communications. Theahjlity, tO- i'otate the arraY 360 degrees' isa' distinct a.Space diversity; Receiving antennas advantage when the relative meritS of °the. fixed separated by 50 wavelengths or more at andtotatable versions-of the LPA are compared. the signal frequency (usually. 10 to 200. feet is sufficient): Wullenweber b. Frequency diversity: Transmission on Antenna Array': ,different frequencies fa-cles independently, even when transrhitted and received thrdugh the same antenna. The Wullenweber array is aneffeCtive vertically polarized antenna- array for Navy 1-1F c.Angle diversity: To feedhorns produce receiving systems. AlthOugh its initial two beams fforn the same reflector at deyelopment was for high frequencY direction slightly different angles. This method finder applications, the Wullenweber has been- Tesults,..in tvo paths based- on accepted for service as a point-to-point illuminating different scatter vdlumes_in communications antenna. Most Navy receiver sites rusing the Wullenweber mit t.a for the troposphere. ". :1282,2,,e Cha'pteriW-AVE_PROPAGATION AND- ANTtNNAS o 76.60 Figure 7-31.Posaihie arrangerhant of alropospheric scatter comMunicationsite. ts, . I. periodic antenna. COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN 0 3 & 2 o 31.114 Figure--7-33.-411otitible-log Periodic ihienna.- . , point=to,point coinniunications do SO, ort a This vertical scieen arrangernent cOntributes to sliared:basiS with-Other missiorrrequireMents. :the directional characteristics for Wullenweber typtcal-ullenweber array, as- shown: in array. figure 7-34; csists of tWo' reflecting- screens and two setS 8 atnra plenients .arranged in- Selectively Directional fatir concentrietrCles, over a- ground plane Monopole Antenna system of iand .matS. The lowfband, . The- latest Model.of this antenna -has been reflector scrIlen, fo,)the -innermost-circle; and, _ _ _ proceeding--outwarii: tlieri is-the &die of 40 low _placed: -in service for, Navy HF transmitting :bandantenna earnents;, then the higkband applications- as /he AN/FA-109. It is a tiigh -reflector sCreen,_ -fiVd -then- the -circle .of 120 -Power ladiator capable- of 'ciperating either high-band antenna elements. oinnidirectionally or directionally, as Selected. The WullenWebirarray. is designed- to-reteive - The AN/FRA-109 antenna systeM consists -HP signals ranging:_from 2. td-,10 MHz on the of two separate mono.pole antennatplus, low-band, and- froin -1 0 to 30, MHz, on the-high auxiliary- equipmentas Awn in- figure 7-'35.. band antenna,. One -monopole (the lOw-baid) covers the- 4 The low and-high-band reflector screens are to-11 MHz rat*, while the other inonopole (the composed of verticilWireS atfddlied at theUpper 'high4,and)--cOvers-the.11 to 30-MHz--range. The end ,to pole-supportedhorizontal beams, and tWo antennas are -identical in constructiOn connected-to the-ground plane-at the lower-end. except for differences in 'physical size dietated 130 12 Chapter 77-WAVE PlEtOPAaATION AND ANtENNAS /17 25.117 Mint ciisPoisciantennaway (CDA4). MIN-IPSNO MONOPOLE-S/176NR CONTROL _CONSOLE 'kW SAND MOUND TRANSINITSR SCREEN_ SIXTEEN Serous . coAJTIZTIMS11a1011LIN sotramuls:rous witmoraiikteibit mama. owls REFLFerommerr NIP SNITCH ARO REMOTE CONTROL ERUIPMENT 110 LOWINNOSIEFUOTOR SYSTEM icamtorsore'werucro,$) SWIM SCREEN U5SkIDAND IMTCNINS UNIT 'sori-asso *wow Ammo 31.115 Fire 7.35.--An!ehm) set, AN/FRA-109. 131 //l COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN 0 3 & 2 ,3--DOME a UPPER TOWER: 1111 iji sprioN 1 it li I RADIATORS 10 (36 PLACES) Ii! I ii! I MID RING' 1_011 52=111/i' LOW-BAND ANTENNA 191-2". HIGH-BAND A ANTENNA TO ANCHOR 01 TO, ANCHOR Jiy Ii9 MIDDLE TOWER SECTION pvi 101 folik, ,M IP OING3'" 1 LOWER TOWER SECTIOW -AAVIA411 Iii r LOWER:G_UY LowEf li! 3-PLAOES' RING ASSEMBLY' i I g '101-APART) INSU'LATOR ril 0.0 Figure-MO.Low anci high ban& monopole antenna. by frequency. The Monopole is illustrated-in einergencyantennalocal least assist) to restore. figure 7-36. communications on a. tempo ry basis until the gular antennasan be repaired., " Emergency Antenna, The simplest emerzency ante na consists of a length of wire rope to which high-voltage Loss or damage to an antenna from heavy insulator is attached to one end àd a heavy seas,. violent wOds, or enemy action may cause alligator clip or lug- is soldered to the qther. The serious disruption of communications. Sections end with the insulator.is hoisted to th'e nearest of a whip antenna may be carried away, structure and secured. The end with the âligaf or insulators may be damaged,. or a wire antenna clip (or lug) js attached to the equi -tent May snap Ibose from its moorings or break. If transmission line. To radiate effectively, -Vie loss or -damage shoulcU happen when all available , antenna -must be sufficiently clear of 11 equipment is:rieeded, yOu may have to rig an grounded objects. 132 . 126 1 0 CHAPTER 8 CoMMUNICATION TRANSMITTERS ANDRECEIVERS Transmitters and receivers must each This type of transmissiOn is sometimes referred_ perform two- basic functiOns. The transinitter to as interrupted continuous wave. CW. must generate an electric current of sufficient tranSmission' was- the first type ,of radio _power and at the desired frequency, and have conirnunication usell, and- it isstill Used some means of vatinglor modulating) the basic extensively, for !Ong -range communications. frequency sO thatitcan carry an intelligible Some of theadvantages of CW transmission are-a -signal. The _receiver must select the desired narrow bandwidth and ahi$11 degree of frequency to receive and reject any undesired, intelligibility even under severe noise -cOnditions. -frequencies. Selecting-the intelligible portion of The four essential components of a CW the desired- signaland converting:the intelligence transmitter are:(-1-)a generator of gp into audible sound waves or Some-type'of visual oscillations; (2) a Means of arnPlifYing these presentation (page print. facsimiletopy,:etc.) So oscillations; (3) amethod 'of turning the kF that it can, be -understood -. fn additiOn.reCeiVers output 'on _and- off ,(keying) in.accOrdanCe -With must -have proVisions for amplification to the intelligence to be transmitted; and (4) an- increase the volume of the received Signal in atitenriw to .radiate the keYed, output of the oiler to overcorne the -attenuation thatit transinitter.' necessarily suffers in its journey-through space. A block- diagrain of a CAV transmitter Generally, transmitters are located at remote together with the ,power supply is showh in, sites and, operated by personnef of the RM- figure 8,1. The oscillator generates -the RP (--ra dio:m a n-)rating. in description of cacier Of a- predetermined' 'frequency and se presentative transmitters, only fundamental, maintains it 'Within required limits. The features are discuSsed in.-this manual._ oscillator may -be the -self-excited type,' which -originates,asiguaLinelectrorilubes or transistors and- associated, -circuits. Or -it May be' of -the TRANSMITTER'TYPES 'crystal' type, -Which 'uses, in co nj un etio thanJ electron tube or transiStor,.a-qUarti: drystat.cut- Basic coMmunication 'transmitters include to Vibrate ata certain frequency .When .t he cbn tinuous wave ,(04, amplitude electrically--energized.lneither type, Voltage and mOdulated (AM), freqUeridy -modulated (FM)-, current delivered _by the oseillator are- weak. arid single sideband-(SSB) types. A brief Thus, the Output of both 'types of oscillators -description of each typejollows. rituf, be .amplified ,many tinies to be radiated any-distance. CONTINUous _WAVE The buffer stage or fiist intermediate power ° (ov) TRANSMITTER artiPlifier stage isa, voltage aniplifier that increases the amplitude of-the oscillatorsignal-to The continuous wave is used principally for a level that will drive the poWer amplifier. Power radiotelegraphythat is, forthe transmission of delivered by the buffer varies with the type of short or long pulses of kF energy -to form the transmitter, but it may be hundreds or dots and ,dashes of the Morse Code charadters. thousands of_VoltS. 133 a COMMUNICATIONS TECUNICIAN 0 3- & 2 AMPLITUDE.MODULATED KEY CLOSED 11" (AM) TRANSMITTER POiER -In :amplitude modulation, the instantaneous OSCILLATORiiitI I awn 11 1 1 11111 I I I AMPLIFIER I p implitude ot the RF output signal is varied in proportion to the modulatine signal. The modulating sigual may consist of,inany POWER frequencies of various amplitudes and phases. SUPPLT siich as-the signals comprising speech. The block diagram of a simple AM 179.383 _ radiotelephone transmitter is shown in figure . Figure-84.ow. , . transinitter block diagram. 8-3. The oscillator, buffer, and power amplifier serve the saMe purpose as in Ahe-CW transmitter, The Microphone convert§; the;,andio, .(sound) The bufferseryes two other purposes, one of input into- corresponding electii4 'energy. The which is to isOlate the oscillator from the° modulatOr amplifies the .audio signal to the amplifier stages. -Without the buffer, Changes in a mplit ude -necessary .to. fully modUlate -the the amplifier due to .keying or variations :in carrier. The output of the modulator, is applied souice voltage wOidd varY the load on the to -the power ainplitier. The RF carrier and- the oscillator ahd cause it to change frequency. It -inodulating signal are combined -in the 'power maY also be a frtquency mUltiplier as we will amplifier Jo produce -the- amiilitude modulated= seiater. 'RF carrier- ontput for' transiiiission. In the absence-of a:modulatins,signal;,a continuous RF The final- stage of a transmitter is the_power carrier is radiated b,Y"--the antenna, amplifier..Power. is the product of current,times voltage, and. in the pOwer, 'amplifier a iarge -SINdLt SIDEl3AND amount 6f RF cutrent is made available for (SSBTTRA11. sMiTygR radiation .by theantenna. A single sideband (SSB) 'transmitter The key is used to turn the buffer on and translates audio frequency intelligence to desired. off. When, the key 'is closed, the RF carrier radio fre.quencim Unlike the amplitude passes .through the buffer stages and when the. modOated (AM) transinitter, usually only ofie key is ,6pen, the .RF carrier E prevented from of the sidebands, either the upper or thelower :` getting through. sideband, is transmitted while the remaining The power amplifier of a hiih-power sideband arid the carrier are suppressed. transMittet- may sequire ,fat more driviug poWer Figure 8-4 is the block diagram of an SSB than. can -be supplied by an oscillatOr and its transmitter. The audio amplifier increases the buffer itage. "One or more jOw-poi,v.er amplitude of the signal to a leyeradequate to intermediate amplifierS may be. required operate the SO generator. Usually the audio between, the -buffer and the final aMplifier that amplifier is just a, voltage amplifier? feeds the antenna. The main-difference-between The SSB4enerator combines tlie audio input and the carrier input frOm the frequency manY 16w and high-power transmittersii in the ,v number of intermediate-power-amplifying stages generatorL-to--produce -the- two -sidebands; aml that are used. jhen suppresses the carrier. The two sidebands are then fed to a filter which- seleCts the. desired In the block diagram of figure 8-2 the-input sideband and-suppressesthe other 9ne. and output powert are-given for each stage of a The SSB generator in most cases operates at typical medium-frequency transmitter.Itis a very low frequency compared with the norm.; shown that the power output of a transmitter Aransrilitted erequency. It is necessary, therefore, can be increased by adding' amplifier stages to convert (or transIite) the sideband output capable of-delivering the power required. from the filter to the desired frequency. ThiS is Chapler OMMUNICATION TRANSMITTERS AN15 RECEIVERS 500 istf FIRST ogc BUFFER .5W 5W ' SEt.OND INTERMEDIATE INTERMEDIATE 25W POWER AMPLIFIER. .AMPLIFIEF3 AMPLIFIER 76.15 Figure 8-2.-1-Intermediate amplifiers increase tratumitter power. 3 the frequency of the ,oscillator, to vary around ihe center frequency in accordance with the modulating signal. The output of the oscillator is then fed to a frequency multii3lier to increase the 'frequency and then to a power amplifier to increase the amplitude to the desired leyel for trar4mission. 7 EARMONICS AND FREQUENCY MULTIPLICATION \ 179.384 'Figure 8-3.AM radiotelephone transmitter block The term harmonies. sometimes is loOsely diairam. used-to desigriate unwanted radiations-caused by, imperfections in the tranSmitting equipment, the purpose of the mixer stage. To Obtain a but this interpretation is not entirely accurate. higher carrier frequency for the mixer Stage,a True, harmonics are always exact multiples of second output is obtained from the frequency the basic or fundamental frequency, generated generator and fed to a frequencY multiplier. The by an ostillator, and are created invacuum tubes oiiput from the -mixer is fed toa linear power and their aSsOciated circuits. Even harmonics are arriplifierbto build up the level.of the signal for 2, 4, 6, 8 (and so, on),-times the,fundamental; trãrignission. odd, harmOnics' are 3, 5,' 7, 9 (etc.) times the fundamental. If an oscillator has a fundamental TREQUENCY MODULATED frequency of 2500 kHz, harmonically related, (FM) TRANMITTER frequen cies arer- I In- frequency 'mOdulatiOn (FM). the 5,000 2nd harmonic modulating signal combines with the'carrier in such a way as to cause the frequency of the 7,500 3ra harmonic, resultant wave, to 'vary in accordance with the instantaneous thnplitude of the modulating 10,000 4th harmonic , Figure 8-5 is the block diagram of a narrow 12,500 5th harmonic band freqUency modulation transmitter., The , 4 4 modulating signaj is applied to a reactance, tube It should be noted that the,basic frequency causing the reactance to vary. The reaCtance and the 1st harmonic are one and the same. tube is connected across the tank circuit ofthe. the series ascends indefinitely untilthe oscillator. With no modulation,,the oscillator intensity is too weak to be detected. In general, generates a steady center frequency. With g the energy irifrequencies above the third modulation applied, the reactance tube causes harmonic is-too weak to be significant.. 135 a 129 COMMUNIATiONS TkHNIOJAN` 63 _AUDIO-INPUT LINEAR FJOWER 179.385 Figuie 8-4.--SSB.transinitter blackdiagram. , FREQUENC.Y- PO-WER MULTIPLIER =-AMPLiFlgft-. OSCILLATOR REACTANCE ru MODULATING. TUEIE SIGNAL Figura 8-5.Nairow band FACtransmitter. If is diffidult _to design and builda stable 3 are triplers; and those multiplyingby 4 are -crystal 6sdillatár,, because the crystal.-mustbe quadruplers. t, ground io thin that it Might ,cradk while The main differende betweenmany vibrating. Th0e trariimitter§ thereforehave low-frequency and high-frequency transmitters oscillators operating at comparatively low is in the number of frequency-multiplyingstages frequendies sometimes,as lowas one-hundredth used. Figure 8-6 shows the block diagram ofa of the outpUt frequency.. Oscillator frequencyis typical Navy UHF/VHFtransmitter. The raised to the required output frequencyby * oscillator in this transmitter istunable from passing ir 'through oneor more frequency 18.7,5 Mhz to 33.33 MHz. The multiplestages multipliers. Frequency Multipliersar'special increase the frequency by a factor of 12by power,amPlifiers that :multiply the input multiplying successively by 2, 2, And 3. frequency. Stages That- multiply thd frequency In Iiigh-power, high-frequency transmitters, by 2 are called dOubiers; those that multiplyby one or mOte intermediate amplifiers may, be 4 *. Chapter 8COMMUNICATION TRANSMITTERSAND RECEIVERS ; TRIPLEk:AND FIRST INTERMEDIATE . SECON1X .powE.R ' OSCILLATOR pi:m.4En AMPLIFIER DOUBLER AM'PLEEIER f X 2 18.75;-' f X t 37.5° 75.00 -33.33 .66.67 roe iv 225 66.67 133.33 400 'MHz . *Hz'l 'MHz MHz MHz, Figure,8-6.Freque6ty4nigtillyin0 ot typical VHF/UHF4rarfsmifter. , used between the last frequency multiplier dnda than shipboard transmitters. This high power, the final power amplifier. Output is necessary to,provide reliable lonthaa broadcast :and pOinf-tolpOint CoMmunications. REPRESEWATIVE TRANSMITTERS AN/F12T-3`0/40 a M-od'ern- rn edium-freqUerfcv and The radio-transmitter set AN/FRT-39,(figiire high-frequency ..shipboard 'transmitters .must be 8-7) isa general -purpoie radio-cOmmunications, . 'Capable bf transthitting over -a Widerange of tranSmitter capable of providing 10,000- watts frequncçjes. In. 40 ditton to 'CW and output thrOughOut a frequeney range 'or 2'0128 'radiotelephone ;modes, of olierahon, they Miist Wiz. The-principle flinction.of the equipmenfis 'be _capable of :handling R-ATT anAX o 'provide long- range cornmUnications from , transiniStions. They 'fifust. 'be Ok-rtIgged -ahore,to,ship or point,to,point,by ,,the construOtion' .fOrJong service 'life. Transinitters single-sidebahelyife of operation. The that 'meet these -requirements, therefore,. are equipMent may also b.eused fOr the folloWing --quite cornplex'and-because of the-IiMited spaCe lypes.of trangilission:' available tof.,their installation naval -VeSsels, theyjre of compadi construction. , MCW (keYeilcarritr) :One method of -obtaining equipMene (2)Freqiiency-Shif,t Carrier comfiactnest is to combine a transmittevanda (-3) SmgleSideband Sipressed 137 0.131 ..com.foNICATV, ptiNI0A.N -,ct 3! .;; AUXILL ART' MilN FRAME FRAME , POWER AMpLITIER METER ''f.tr,i1 PANEL 6 e SIDEISAND EXCITER POWER AMPLIFIER 'FWEQUENCT -AMPLIFIER, w comrito4 MASI E 'OSCIL.LATOR J AF. . AMPLIFIER- CONTWOLLED OSCILLATOR miner . :41 STANDARD MAIN POWER TONE." CONTROL, INTELLIGENCE < PANEL -UNIT . ,DIVIDER; CHAIN' RELAYsii . INDICATOR CONTROL POE -PANELS' SUPPLY. 1:330 Nur. ttimsmitier,sat AN/F RT-39. 138 132 Chwer, 8--;COMMUNOTION IRAN§MITTERS Amb geetwEks , .; 162:17 Fignre,', transmitting Set (synthesized),AN/FRT40, The AN/FRT-39 is constructe4in 'two basic AN/like-32 sec t io nsthe, main frame and the. 'auxiliary frame. The Main frame is located to th&righiof 0,ne of the Navy's most versa,tile somniunication equipments is the ANAIRC-32 the 'auxiliary frame- and houses the pOwer figure 8,9),-.4t is a.transceiver operating in the 2- amplifier, the int3mediate amplifier,power, the id 30-MHz high-frequency range, with a Main Pow'Or supply, and-high voltage-section, the -transmitter peak envelope power of 500 watts. poiVer amplifier loading and tuning controls,,the relay and indiCator control panels, antthe Meter The AN/URt-37 is designed chiefly for panel; The auxiliary frame hduses all of the single-sideband _transmission, and for reception on either- the upper or lower sidebands, or on sideband exciter equipment, exciter power both- sidebands simultaneously with- sePafaté sUpply equipment, and other control-equipment audio- and IF channels fOr each sideband. In for the yarious modes doperation. addition to single sideband operation, provisions 139 COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN ANTENNA JuNandi -NETWORK (ACCESSORY) POWER AMPLIFIER 000. FREQUENCY AMPLIFIER DYNAMIC HANDSET FREQUENCY RADIO' OPERATOR FREQUENCY OSCILLATOR ' RACK SIDEISAND MENERATOR* OW AND MX , ELECTRICAL UNIT FREQUENCY. CONTROL 'AUDIO AND CONTROL o IfileH -VOLTAGE _ POWER SUPPLy AMPUFIER TOWER SUPPLY FRIEOUENCX COMPARATOR', 'HANDSET' ADAPTER POWER SUPPLY HANDstt - JACK tow-vocrial4 u?vdr..Fi. 3 7, 32.13,5 32.278(31B) Figuri84.Radio-trinreirONIURC-320. Figure 810.Radio transmitterANAVRT.2. , , . are included for ANt(carrier reineerted), CWor MHz. The 12F oscillator, produces fundamental FSKoperation. .frequencies froth 2 to..8 MHz. Fsequerick Because of its versatility and po*er, the rttultiplication, prOduces frequencies from 8 to 'AN/MC-32B is installed on ,most Navy -ships 30 MHz: having a requirement for cóMinunfeatingover long distances.It. is being replaced by the The AN/WRT-2 transmitter has an, output AN/URt-23: pOiver Of 500 watts on cW, frequency shift RATT an,d FAX, ',and ',c'onvention,c.alAM, 'AN/WRT-2 radiotelephone. It hie-a pOwerhutput of 1900 Watts -When transmitting single sidebandor The AN/WRT-2 (fig. 8-10) is a modern HF indCpendent sideband. trahemitter used in surface ihips andsubmarines. Coupling to an antenna is through a radio It provides complete frequeney coverage in frequency tuner mounted as close to the 'stepi oyer the frequency range Of 2 to 30, enteiina-as,possible. The radiofrequency tuner is, 140 134 - * -, Chapter aCOMMUNICATION TRANSMITTERS AND RECEIVERS eonstineted so that it maN be iimtiIIctl bil the ri'idiu receiver, natio transmitter T-827/URT, RF Weather3decks,of sutface,ships. pn) p e rA';M:3 007./URT,.and an A 'front panel handset jack is futnished for interconnectiOn box used io .connect the' other ideal Phone operation of the equipment. A three, units together. Both the receiver and dhminy ,lOad ,pennits off-the-air tuning transmitter contain. their, own power supplies, Underconditions or radio silence.. and can beoperated'as individual Units. . a AN/wfte4 kEMOTE'CONTROL UNIT a The AN/WRC-1 (fig. 8-11) -ia single '-To operate aq transMitter from arempte. sideband radib ttanSmitter-receiVer. It is capable loc,atiOn r,equires a remote-control -unit. A -of: trans'rnitting On ariy ,one of 56,000 ty.pical remote-control unit; coininonly. called _frequencies, spaced: in. 0.5-kHz increments, in RPU. (radiophone unit);. is type ..c-11-38VOR the- fiequency range of 2 to 29.095 ,MHzt:This -shown in figure 8-12. This unit contains, a set has- a rnaXimum p6Wer.output of 100-watts. start-stop switch for turning the transmitter on Vernier (continuous) tuning enables teception or off, jacks 'for connect,ing a handset or chest .ortany frequency' in the 2to,30-MHZ range. set microphone, headphones, or telegraph key,.a thg AR/WRC-1 is capable Of t*smitting N;olutme antrol for -the head-phones, atid a and' -receiving, SSW, 'CW, compatible -AM, FSK, indicator lamps for transmitter-on-and carrier-on and' -1-SB eithet a 'simplex Or duplex .indications. , opeiltion: . The AN/WRC-1ractio_set ,consittS Of foln- -DUMMY ANTENNAS separate units. These units arelhe R-1:051-/URR ,,Uncldt radio Silence'Conditions, placing carrier- on ihe, air during transmitter :tuning WOuld givp an enemy the opportunity to take, direction-finding- :bearings and detetthine the location. pf the -ship. Even during normal periods of operation, transmitters are to be tt;pd by methods that do not reqtiire radiation-from the 76.61 7.40.2A 'Figur* 6-11.Rs o set AN7WRC-1, Figur* 8-12.Radiophon* unit (RPUI. r- a 141 a a a , CONIMUNicAtIONS TECI:1NICI4N 0 3& 2 antenna. The reason-tor 'this precautidft isto So me NaVy. transmitters, such- as: the -Minimize- interference to other stations using the .URC-32; -have- built-in dummy :antennas. This arrangement permits connection of either -the duininy afitennaorthe actual antenna-by simply One- way, -to tUne, a transthittet without throwinva _switch. : -Causing 'ariwanted radiation ,is through-,..Use of previou4ly déterminecVand-'reCorded calihration -settings,forthe tuning'controls. Another method RECEIVERS is to -use vciummy 'antenna. Dummy antenna; (called- dummY loads) ;haiie'resistors- "that dissipate-the RF energy in the forth ot heat and Modern. Navy 'radio receivers,are easy to preyent radiatiol -by -the transmitter during the oeera te and maintain. Theyare capable of tuning- Operation. pne 'model, typical of midst receiying seVeral types- of signals and can- be dUrniny loadS, isIhe DA-91/U (fig.-8-13),,which tuned aarirately over a wide range of can'he used with tratis'i'aitters up tO,500 matt's. it frequenciti. Because theyare not required to 0 ,.1hclosed jo a Metal case that has -fins.lo, prodUce or handle -large currents and voltages, increase jts air=cooledsurfade area., The dummy their Size is relatively small when,,coMpared to load, instead=df the antenna, is,connectedto the the size of most trantmitters. output of -the transm4fer, and the normal Unlike the leceiVing.unit's of the transceivers transmitter tuning-prodedure ist011owed.,Use of described earlier,- the radio receivers discussedin the ,clurnmY. load With tansrnitters .suchas, this 'section are separate equipments that-are Aisl/SRTA3 requires manual diSconnedion Of capable of 'independent operation. the transmission- lirr& at the transmitter, and Connectidn of the dummy load.Up'on completion ot transmitter tunMg, -the duminy .klit.TIONS6OP RECEIVERS lOad is' disconnected .and' the antenna transmiSsion line is connected againto the , Radio receivers mint perform the following transmitter. siwfunc.tions(figure.8-14): 1.Signal-interceptien. % 2. Signal selection: 3.kadiofrequency amplification. 4.Detection. . 5. AudiofreqUency aMplification, 6.Sound'reproduction. . .0 TheSe six functions are sufficient for,AM- reception, 'but for CW seCeptionan additiOnalz, circuit (shoikri by dotted lines,' figure 8-14), called a beat-trequency-oscillator, is-required. Signal Interception The receiving 'antenna intercepts a small -portion of the passing radiowaves. The signal voltage extracted by receiving antennas is Onlya few- microvolta, sufficient for -subseijuent 4mOlification -aslong....as the noise energy 76.19' iAtercepted by the antenna is substantially less Figura 813.pummy antinna DA-911U. than this. * Q 42 - 0 'Chapter S-COMMQNICATIONTRANSMITTERS AND .RECEIVERS 0 SIGNAL INTER-CEpT16 --11EPRODUCT-10 1,, 6 . RA140- AUDIO- -SELECTION SOUND FREQUENCY DETECTION ,tREQUENCY (TUNED CIRCUtt WAVES AMPi_IFICATION AMPLIFICATION 5 r BEATI 1 FREQUENCY OSCILLATOR 1 I 1 J 5:\ 76.423 oi otradicsreception. . 0 Signal,Selection by separating_the modulatioirsignalifrom the RF, castrier. The circuit that separates the Some .means.must be provided to select the audiofrequency signal variations froni the RF desired signal from all carriers intercepted by carrier is called the detector or demodulator. the antenna. 'This selection is made by lUned Most detedtors do not_operate well, at very low citctiits that pass only-their-resonant frequency . and,this is one of the reasOns why RF (frequency tO which the 'rt ceivee is ttined)-and DamplificatiOnis requited, ahead of the detector. reject-other freqUencies'. Thus the receiver is able In CW (radiotelegraphy) reception, a to differentiate-between the desired signal beat-frequency oscillatof (bfo) is.used in the frequency ana all other frequeliscieS. rec:eiver circuit.. The ,bfli provides an- RF signal thit beat§ or heterodynes against tine frequericY Ralliofrequency Ampliffeation. infected into the detector. The resultant -.The weak signalsinterceptel by the anternia frequency.is a low-level audiofreqUency. usually -must be amPlifiea drigifiltrably before the intelligence conta'n them ah be Audiofrequency Amplification . recovered. One or more plifiers serve to .increase-thesignal. to the-required level: A `tuned circuit- in ea0i ,IIF.amplifier makes sure that The signal frequeng in' dip output of,the only the-desiredsignalis amplified. detector generallyiloo weak to operate a headset mimic:Apeer. One or more stages of Detection.(Demodulation) A F am plifi eatio thereJo&required to . ..-:'. - . strengthen the. au p, tput of t eetector to a .- .,. If thecispal is amplitude modUl, ated, the level sufficient tolopera ç'et eadset or loudspeaket. original intelligence must ke fecovered from, it.. .. ,\ .i. ..- -.--.... 1,43 COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN0 3 & 2 Sound Reproduction . RESONANT RESONANT . FREQUENCY RESONANT FREQUENCY FREQUENCY The amplified AF signal is applied to the, V headset 'or loudspeaker that translatesthe A electrical AF variations into corresponding I -5KHz 5KHz sound. waYes. For AM; the sound'outPut oe the speaker is a close :replica Of the çoriginal audio sounds' at the _transmitter. For CW,_theSound is a tone the frequency Of which dependsupon the U. . frequency of the beat-frequency okillator. This. - tone is heard -wheneve the key irdepressed at the trapsmitter,:and, consequently,it reproduces -COMMERCIAt VOICE BROADCAST- -*COMMUNICATION C. W. - the intoirpplions of-theRrufrier COMMUNICATION accordiiñé A with the Morse code. 8 C SENSITIVITY- 76.24 Figure 8-.15.Tuning curvei of three typeiof The sensttivity of a receiver -is a measure Of ridio-receiiers. how:Nell it-can amplify weak signals. Com municatiOn receivers- -are highly Sensitive You-will remember,Thelnilysisof amplitude, and :can operate On Tat weaket "Signals than modulation- treated earlier in -this chapter., It home'raclio. showed ,-how the intelligence. transthitted'was In-. an, area of -strong loCal interference, a contained in the sideband. frequencies. receiver needs 'a strong signal to give good . Carrier Waves from- CommerCi4 broadcast teception: If the local- interference" ha.ta 'field stations con tain:sideband-frequencies that Strength of _100- Microvolts per inetet,a signal' extend. 5 .kHz -on either side of thecarriet strength of from `500 ter -1000 inietoYoltsper frequency. If.a Station -is tranSmittingon 1140' meter is fequiredlo-4ron -the- noise. The saine _the complete carrier wave contains receiver, free of local intetierence,_may give, frequencies from +135 to 1_145.If a- receiver good reception on g signal. strength Of la tunesi too. sharply; some of the, sideband mitioyolts per metei. It is hard 'to state the frequencies' are lost,. Witha corresponding exact miniinum _field Strength-needed to Operate sacrifice of fidelity. The commercialbroadcast a receiver -satisfactorily, but Many sets under receiver tuning curve ghown in figure 8-15is ideal conditio,ns can functiOri.:on- a signal OPTIMUM'"at i;s best."The tpp is broad an strength of froth' t6-3-microvoltsper meter. To flat and the sides 'are-steep. Actually,most A (IA bring,such a signatto an audible level requires-aw brpadcast receivers haye tuningcurve amplification-otmany:thillionSOftimes. resenibling the btoken line, and,manyfrequenc compdnents of,voiceand music containedin t signafare notreproduced by. theset. SELECTIVITY tho Ugh ;sharp tithing ina home rad would Make for poor listening,,it isxlesirable4 Selectivityis the ability of a- receiver tO militarY sets for the sake of frequencyeconor 'respond -to,one particular signal and-to reject-alt and reduction of interference. Radiotelepho others. A very Selective .receiver is said to-tune Messages e.an. be sent-on frequencies that exte sharply, only. 2 Icliz on either side Of ,the c"arrer Sortie type§ of receivers are more selective frequency. The voice may sound unnatura1,1ke than, others'. A radiotelephone cornmunication a- voice on the telephone, but it can ibe 4 _receiver tunes' iriasre sharply than a-cOrninercial understood. tbroadea,st receiver, and .a, ,CW communication The Clk sets:tune so sharply that. unlesan receiVer is even .moreselective. You can compire operator is careful, he can tt.rn his dial tht ugh the -three--tuning curves in.figure 8:15. the siinal without even hearing it. , 144: ° 138 'Chapter_ 8COMMUNICATION TRANSMITTERS .ANbRECEIVERS /3/ BASIC-SUPERHETERODYNE produced. One is equal to (the sum of the RECEIVER' incoming sigrfal and the local oscillator; the other equals the difference between the The basic stages- "for "AM superheterodyne incoming signal and the- -local oscillator .receptiort are -shoWn -in figure-8-16 in the-order frequencies. Most receivers.'are designed with in which a signal= passes through the receiver. selective circuits to reject: thesum frequency; the laustration also shoWsthe changes in, the difference frequency is usedas the Wäve-shape of the signal-as it-passes through the intermediate frequency (IF). Thus; the AFamp -receiver. The operation of -the superheterodyne and local oscillator are tuned simultaneously. redeiver _for ihe reception of AM signals isas (gang-tuned), Sp that the difference frequency from mixer is' always' the' same. It contains the same modulation as the-original RF-signal. 'M o d t ed :RF signals froni many transmitters are -intercepted by th,eantenna. 4. The IF ,signal is aniplified in the They- are fed -to the -first-stage of the 'receiver, fixed-tuned IF amplifier stages arid is=eoppieti to which is a-variable-tuned _RFaMplifier. the detector. 2.The desired RF signal- is, selected -by the 5. The detector Stage removeS the audio timing circuit:of the RF amplifier. This signal is modulatibn contained in the IF signaLand filters and all other .sign'll's are rejected to out the IF carrier, which no tongerris heeded. some-,degree. 6.The resulting audio-signal is atnplified-to -A; The amplified RF2iiknal is coupledto the level,required-by the loudspeaker. the mixer:stage, wItere it is combined With:the 7. The electrical audiô variatiorisare autpikt-Of the IdcaLoscillator- In this process of converted into Jhe-cOrresponding soundwaves 'heterodyning (rniking), two.new frequencies aie by-the lOudspeaker(or headphones). t IVP RF --ANTENNA-AMPLIFIED FIXED AMPLIFIED . SIGNAL RF SIGNAL =IF IIGNAL I F SIGNAL A F SIGNAL AMPLIFIED .AF SIGNAL, RF DETECTOR i F A F. AMPLIFIER MIXER IDEMOD- AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER .LILATOR SPEARER, 'OSCILLATOR- SIGNAL LOCAL OSCILLATORI 7.6.25 Figure 846.Suparheterodyna receiser, showing signal wave-shape. 145 . 139 I 2 COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN, 0 3 & 2 .. REPRESENTATIVE RECEIVERS output for connection to a remote speaker. An IF (intermediate frequency) output is ,also Most radio receivert operating in the VLF, provided so that received radio teletypewriter LF, MF, and -1-IF bands of the frequency Signals may be fed to other equipment for spectrum_ are of the contirfuOus .tuning type. conversion ,into signals usable by teletypewriter TheY -can be attuned -to any frequency within printers. _their frequency range, and -they usually, cover , - this range- in several- tuning bands. Switching Two of three receivers-can+be connected as a space-diVersity -receiving system for reception of frOM,;one band AO another changes-the receiver's voice signals (fig. 848), This system provides trequency-;-determining -coin ponents, permitting substantially- uniform audio output to a more accurate ,tuning- than is possib1e-4if -the -loudspeaker or "headSet, thinimizinglhe, effect-of entire frequency range were covered by a Single- fading signals. Rhombic-antennas spaced at least setrof cdthponents. .4 600 feet apart are,conn6Cted _to the i.ceivers. RADIO RECEIVER Figure 8-10 shows tWo, receivers Connected R,390A/URR ' in a space diversity tele,typewriter system. Rhombic- antennas feed the iricoming-frequenCy the radio-receiver R,390A/URk (Fig, 8477) shift, signals to the reLeivers. The- output of the *is. a superheterodynetype and, provides rectiVers is applied to-a-converter whicir provides reception Of C. W (continuOus Wave), MCW ,diversity combining and produces d.c. (direct (M-odulated-,cOntinuous-wa,ve),- FSK :current) signals for the operation of (frequency=shift keYed), and sss (single -teletypewriter equipment. sideban4 signals. NOTE: .SS13. reception -requires A receiver -and a single sideband- converter _use of 'SSE-converter (CV 591), discussedAater. may -be connected as shown in figure-8-20. This A dOuble sideband signal, either 'AM .or .PM -system perMits the reception of SSE signals. (phaSe-modulated), Oceupying up td 'a.,total of occupying 12 kHz:of RF spectrum space,divided 112 kliz,:of spe4riim for- Voice transhnision, may into two 6 kHz sidebauds, one 6 kHz sideband also-bereceived. on .eath side -of -a rethieed, carrier. This systeM is The reCeiver furnishes an, AF (audio use'd primarily for the reception ,otmultichannel , frequency) output to a local lbudtpeakerand/or radio-teletypewriter transmissions. headset. There is also a balanced -line audio, ANTENNAS SPACEO APPRomitottm .100 FT APART V- RADIO RECEIVER LOUDSPEAKER R-3110A/URR OR- (RCVIr HEADSET- RADIO RECEIVER R-390A/URR IRCVR=II) 34.15 31.117 Figure 8-17.Radio receiver F1.396A/URR. Figure 8-18.Spacediversity receiving system. 146 140 Chapter 8COMMUNICATION- /33 TRANSMITTERS ANDRECEIVERS ANTENNAS SPAC-E0 APPROAINATELT 600 FT APART: V Ramo RECEIVER e R- 3II0A/URR (RCVR Al 4 - --CONVERTER: CHANNEL W TELETTPEWOITER -SET ICHANNEL.Id a010 RECEIVER R-3100A/URR (RCVR 41 31.118 .78-19..Space-diversity radioteletypewriter receivingsystem. RADIO iEdElvra SiNGESIDEIAND TERMINAL SEVERAL R390A/URR CON EiTER EQUIPNAEMT TELETYPEWRITER% \ SETS Figure 8-20.Single-sideband 3'1.119 radio tel receiving system. RECEIVER TUNING superheterodyne receiVercapable of receiving "..ani type Of radio signalin the frequencyrange 2 Alt,ho-ugh much ofthe Navy's° to 30 MHz. Itcan be USed as n independent communication equipment isset up or timed receiver. O,in conjunction autothaticajly, an 6perator stillmust do a lot to with a transmitter, it obtain ,proper operation can be used fe) form,a transmitter-receiver from the equipment. combination, such the operatingprocedures of the R-390A/UJIR, as radio set AN/WRC-1 being a iepresentative degcribed previovsly(gee figure 8-11). receiver, are covered in Basically a crystal-cOntrcilled APpendix I. The Controlson other receivers may equipment, the vary somewhat in their placement, R-1051/URR etploysa digital tuning scheme appearance. for automatic timing and, perhaps their nomenclature,but the basic to anys one of 56;006 operating functions will besimilar to those on operating frequencies.A djsplay window the. R-390A/URR. directly above eachcontrol providesa readout of the digits to whichthe cOntrols are set. The RADIO RECEIVERR-t()him* displayed ,fre4uencycan be' changed in -1 kHz increments. An additionalfine tuning control The R-1051/URR (fig.8-21) is one of the provides cdntinuous newest radio receivers.It tuning thrdughout the is a-versatile receiver's,frequencyrange. 147 14-1 /31/ COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN G 3 & _2 LS8 USB USB LSB PHONE LEVEL PHQNE LEVEL LINE LINE LEVEL CONTROL CONTROL LEVEL SWITCH US8 SWITCH VERNIER , USB LSB wog LINE LEVEL Hz INDICATOR PHONES. _FUSE -LINE -SELECTOR METER SWITCH JACK (WITH LEVEL SWITCH - INDICATOR) METER VERNIER, DIAL . CONTROL LSB. PHONES J.tck' LS8 LINE USB LEVEL LINE LEVEL CONTROL CONTROL .10.MHz DIGIT 1 kHz INDICATOR DIGIT- INDICATOR 1 MHz ,-RF 100 kilz BF0 1 MHz ,I0 MHz- 'GAIN 10 kHz CONTROL DIGIT - kHz , FRED 10 kHz CONTROL DIGIT INDIcATOR, CONTROI.: C-ONTROL 'CONTROL CONTROL -DIGIT CONTROL -INDICATOR- ,INDICATOR 76.03 Figure 841.Radio receiver li-1661/yRR, operatingcontrols and indicators. This receiver is designated asstandard the desired bandWidth is by meansof a equipment Tor, use aboard all. ships.Although front:panel iwitch2The interrnediate frequency presently available in limited numbers only,it is is 2 MHz. being procured for distribution througholdthe fleet. proa iqtgivER R4414/URR The R-1414/URR radio-receiver (fig.-23) is purpOse HF receiver RAMO-RECEIVER R.-1401A/G a solid-state, general intended primarilY for operation.,in fixed fixed The R;1401A/G VLF receiver (Figure8-22) is statiOns-or in transportablevanS When at' a tunable overthe frequency range of -1kHz tb station. It is capableof detecting AM, CW, SS13_, 1.5 to 32 600 kHz in .one band. It may beused for the ISB, FM, and FSK Signals within the .reception-of AM, CW, MCW, SSB or FSKsignals. MHZ frequency range. the . A direct-reading digital readoutis used to Altholigh the future status of indicate the frequency to which thereceiver is g-1414/U1R receiver is in dOubt at present, a' The frequency is normally displayedwith description is included inthis text for your second.1 A information'. Initial distribution.' of alimited ant a,ccuracy of 1 00 hertz per made for front-panel :sWitch permits,expanding the number of these. receivers has been Treque4cy field evaluation. Itis antiCipatedtiiat the readout by a :factor of 10, so That. the replace the may be read to an accuracyof 10 hertz per R-1 41 4/ UR R willultimately provided so that R-390A/URR at ail NAVSECPRU sites. second. A fine-tuning control-is R-390A/URR, the the receiver:can-be easily tuned to-this accuracy. In comParison with the 150 hertz.per moderniZation can be readily seen.The -Four IF bandwidths are-provided: mechanically tuned, second, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, and 6 kHz.Selection Of R-1414/URR iS solid-state, ./ 148 142. 13( ChaPter 8COMMONICAT1ONTRANSMI7ERS AND -RECEIVERS:, 93.89. Figurei-22i7R-1401A/GAILF'receiver. ' k /11/ /if" 45.6 loMmitmr,. 0, - 10 Mom* Mt 0 t! mom; itui tilt t 111' IONS $41 1/111 jiteimLgritl 4.7 3* Cl/ a. .FMAK wolf loon IR . / ^ 2 5 Figure 8!23.Fieciioreceiver.F.1:1414/UFIR: Covers 1:5. to 32 MHz frequency range, uses digital AFt network.Botb frequency 'stability double conversion,"andhas a digital electronic ,and readout frequency Counter display. accuracy are withih ± 50 Hz. Peing sOlid-state, the throughout the frequenCy R-14 1 41URK is imallerin siie than the tange of the receiver.' R-390A/URR, and operatescooler. It als6 has RA;DIO 16;CEWER A/4/SRR-19A independent sideband monitoringcapabilities that are not ,a.vailable inthe R-390AIURR. Another i'eatuli of the The. ANJSRRA94e.Nisa low frequency R-1414/URIZ iS, its multi-channel shipboard radio frequency stability achievedby an in teinal receiver fOr the .30-300' kHz frequency'range (fig. 8-24). This 149 , COMMUNICATIONS*TECHNICIAN. 6 3 8/.. ;Figure 8-24.Radio receiver AN/SRR-19A. ; . 9 ' cluii-conyersion superheterodyne,. receiver is interference with no aetiitnental effeCt to 'the intended for single,sidebandonultichannel radio-desired- signal. The tuning of single,sideband teletypetvriter -bro.adc.astS,_ AM and CW signals:is greatly Simplified becausejinal- tuning reception. is dOne at'the converter, not the 'receiver. A ReceiVer operation iS characterized bY mechaniéal=anct electrical bandspread tunes over extreme, Stability, permitting long perioilS of the IF bandpass. This effe.ctive vernier .eisily unatteqed,opetation. Counter type tuning dials tunes.-.8Sg or exalted carrier AM signals within tacilitate aCcurate luning to a desired frequency, cyclei of correct tone. Either sideband is and:frequency errors caused.ty drift in,thelocal seleCtable, either with the bandpass tuning oseillatori are removed by drift-cancellation feature-Or by inverting the oscillator separation. circuits. the receiver-can be incrementally_tuned Confintious waVe and MCW signals are,easily in' s.t,eps of 1.0 hertz or continually tuned. tunable 'with' bandspreatf feature. For ;eNtreine :(t;ween increments) with ,partjal stability,,the first Oscillatoris Svatchedlo crystal deft-cariCellation during continuous tuning: conirol for -both -upper ,and flower sideband , positions. .4; The -local Or rem6teAUned VFO feature of Ciii.5,91A/U*R S.54 CONVERTER the -coniietter. permits- operation with any receiver.having an IF.noniinally centered' at 455 'rife CV7591.A.jURR single sideband When the oscillator is switched to crystal converter-rig. 8-25) is used to-Convert standard', control and the proper cyrstals -inserted, corn,tnunIcation ,recelvers such as the' however, most any receiver IF may be R-390/1.11kR for. SSB tise. :overall selectivity of accomModated. 0 most teceiving systems is greatly sharpened, All operational controls are located pn the rejecting unwanted adjacent signals or 'front panel. These, controls' are similar in o 144 . . ChaPier 8COM11:IUNICATION TRANSM11,1hk.S. ANDREcEIVERS .T.Itl-d.:777,,..i'' :"" 1., ----- livU -.14.4,.Immo:. .1& .....:-...1-, .- 44 - 109;30. Figure 8-25.-4SBconverter CV-591A/URR. 4" o unction and 'effect' to ,those 'foundon any Without Modifications receiver.'The ,BANDSPREP- control oL the use of additional tunes the lines or tones By 'thismeans it is possible, to coniierter over a- limited-:frequency,range. A tune the converter remotelyorlocally,-across the MANLIALINTAL switch Setsthefirs,t oscillator feceiver 'IF pagsband, select to/either 'variableor fixed' crystal:operation. The, sidebands with a, BPO, Automatic remote inilitatiOir of whichsideband is in use, Volume Control-,(AVC), and and still retain-all of theremote control features 0.010, GAINcontrols Perform similar of the remote- Control runetions as o.n- a rectiVer.Terininals at the-rear system. The--cofiverter may be used.vvith reinote controI nel provide simple.ConnectiOnS for reMote system iarol-,Of :the main 'A4/FR4-49(1h)-or ANI,FRA-50l,without features of the converter modificatiOn,to,the system. 3 CHA-PTER FACILMES, CONTROLOpER'ATIONS Facilities ,Control 'Operations (PCO) COMMUNICXTION integral section of eadh NAVSECGRU SYSTEM DESCRIPTION -communications center. This section performs the functions of circuit. and equipment control. -Ever( ship 'or, station is provided, with The PCO one -of the mo`st important communication system based on mission. operations within the' IlAVSECGRU Communications systems can, vary from the comniunication center, Since message, traffic 'simple to the coMplex. For' instance,' a flow is dependent upon- the quality_of circuits radiotelegraph receiver system corisistS of an and equipment-provided: antenna; receiver, and- headphones or speakerS: ,'The function of a-facilities controller at large A multichannel broadcast,receiver system May stations is usually performed by trained,circuit consist of antennas, receiVer, terniinal and teChniCal personnel: this functiondtsmall ,equipment, several 'pieces of crypto-equiprnent, an assortment of page.printers, reperforators, ,statiOns May,of. necesiity be :performed by cominpniCatiOn stipervisory, operdtor, Or aiid patching facilitIes. xnairitenanCe ,personnel. The fundamental The sole_-purpose of any comthunication responSibilities, of the facilities controller, syStem,, 'however, is ,the efficienttransmission intelligence hOWever,Temain-afichanged. and reCeption of inforthation. The' The Navat' Electronic .Systern Command Signal is the means by whichthis' is preparei and issues System' plans .for the. accomplished. Figure-94 ,shows asimplified' prOgessing and distribution. facilities .to be . signal' flow block diegrain typical of either a engineered' for each. type, of, shore station _Shore or afloat secUre''el.etype communication sy stein. A deScription of thecdmiincin. system. . ). To consolidate cOmmunications circuittjntp equipment that rnakes'np;each.stage(shown in a network,the prindiples of sy,steni engineering . Figure 9-1) how they, are used and their mustlpply; namelY; the sYsteM has-a .cOmmOn interrelationshi'p. within coMmunications purpOse, 'icompatible .equipment,, andstandard systeth are 'the subjeet of this chapter.When a vracedures 'and% ,pra ctipes. Thesestandard basic, unders,tanding of the effect eack stage has procedures.. and .piactices assist ladilities ;oii the signal is' acquire'd, the need for controllersin-. working with ,adjpiningstations monitoring and precise control procedures becomes evident, - and coordinating withtheCOminercial. or DCS Circuit supplier. facilities. A .fewof the major The audio signal- containing, the ,teletypei signal must 'pass 'through several stages-prior to . Coordination, problems confronting a PCO co ntioller. are Circuitinterruption, frequency being printed by the teletype printer. The audio 'cha,nges, restoration of circuits,equipment signal 'output Of a reCeiver' must firstpass ,perforMance, tests and similar,,teOhni&al- through a receiver switehboard where itis functiont. Standardization'of equipinent, switched:to the desired conversion equipment. procedures' also pernii0 the The' pon,v-,O.Tsion ectuipmentvillither transfer Of perso .ne* :hroughontthe system demultiplex a number of independ'ent telegraPh ,with a-ininimurnamount.of train* channels which are simultpeously conveyed 1-52 146 1 s Chapter .9-FAcvilgs -corrnioL -OPERATtoNs , r" < F I II .1 ,0 AUDIO -DEMIILIPLEX INOI OR: g STRIB . I RgcOVE SFSYS TELETYPE" LITI > A,1 CRYPTO I CONVERTOR, 'PRINTER A , c E 1 A ; VI E t A I- , I AUDIO DISTRIBUTION CONVERSION DC DISTRIBUTION_ I I ENO -TERMINAL DEVICES- ! 1. 17..` 1- L. 1 ,,, 1. I AUDIO . I MULTIPLEX DISTRIB.- TRANSMIT. 1 TELETYPE_ UTION CRYPTO I K MORD t I I -I ... Oigure fctr tocurOittioti/ps comMiiniaition over, One ,aut4o signal, 0 or, in the case, of single The -originated, teletYpe signal.generated-by -the' 'Channel 'freqiienci Shift keying(PSK)-reception . it will, be converted: directly TT.y.ke'yboard, ornilasses-throughthe "RED" to d.c. teletype ail -panel to.the M-S E C equipment for signal. _ , encryptiOn. FolloWing encryPtion: theteletype Inter-Connection betweena NAVSECGRUI signaliS fed' to4he_"BLACK"'patch- FC9 anlIthe commercial panel,where-' or ,DCS- circuitsuppiier it -is patched :directly ;to -thetransmitteti facilities commences normallYin ;the DC ft-eel:U:609y, Shift key,:eror the TnultiPlex distribution. In other' words,at this point the equiPMent,'Where 'it is converted into signal' That, enters 'the an'audio. spaces where the SI signal. The audio,SignaVnow-conditioned 'into,a comthunicatenWill be monitoring thesigns!. fcrm suitable fiir transmisSion larouted to-the ObviOusly, coordination between FCOand transmitter via_ the transmitter transrer Circuit 'suppliers: Is of paramountimportance, switchboard. since the firat two stages'ofthe signal flow pais' through' Other !elements ,of a shipor station before reaching the SI FCOspaces. The 'TT'Y ,sigcial ia fed, to` the "Blick" AUDIO DISTRIBUTION (unclassified/encrYpted ,' signals) patch panel Transferring the audio--output ofa receiver which iS wired or patched- toC M C equipMent 'for decryption to the conversion stage, and conversely-fromthe to'' a -plain text conVersion -to the transmitter, requiresintricate teletype, signal. Following decryption,' theplain text teletype signal is delivered via the switching capabilify. These operationsare "RED" perfOrMed by control panelsWhidh utilize (classified/decrypted signals) -patch_panel where it is wired `or 'patched- td-the switches instead of ylugs and patch cords.Such reCeiving -teletype control' panels are commonly:,referred to as equipment for_print out. switch board's: On the transmit side, the' Signal flow is quite ,Radio i-emote-control 'transferplug panels', similar to the receiVe side, oniy inreverse Order. have beame. tOo cumbersometo be used In, 153 1 4 7 COMMUNICATIONS TKEIWCIAN 0 3 & 2 Shipboard- radio installations, ofi modern Navy ships. Thereföre,, cOntrol 'panels utiliiing 'sWitches 'instead .of phigs arid patchboards are a being installed iri mew construction and in, conversion- jobs. Two, unit=constructed panels .(one for receivers and,-one for-trafisMitters)ium provide ail of the facilities.that wereavailable in three types'of _plug panels (the receiver transfer panel, the ,trarismitter transfer panel-,.. and -the radioPhone 'transfer :panel), and in addition ,altard greater 'flexibility in the remote-cOntrol system'. These _units are Receiver Transfer Switchboard,type BS-82/SRR, and. Transmitter' Transfer Switaboardi Type BS-863/SRT. RECEIVER TRANSFE_R SWITCHBOARD 41, ReceiVer Transfer Switchboard', type ,,SB-,82/SRR,,is.shown in figure 9=2. -t* receiver s 'switchboard has fivevertical rOws of ten double-pole, sifigle=throw- (01WFF) switches that are -cdntiricuously rotatable in either direction. One side of each sWitch within a- vertical row is wiree parallel with the-same sides of .the othei nine sWitches within -that row. SiMilarlyi the, Other-side -ot each--switeh is wired ih, parallel thorizontally. With:the-corresponding ,sides of each of theother four sWitches.in horizontal roW. This ;methodbf`connecting the <- 3669' -'switches permits a higbidegree of flexibility. Fipiri 9-2.External viewitthe receiver The audio putpUt from five,,radio receivers, -,,switchboard.type 3B-82/S14k connected- to -the five vertical;rowS of switches, May,.be fed, to any or all of'the rettote stations -0 by Closing the proper switch Or switches. The rows. Identification of the receivers and remote knob of each Switch is marked with' a heavy stations is engraved on the laminated bakelite white-line to provide visual-indication of the label strips fastened along the top and left edges minunication.setup. In,generalithere are mote of the panerfront. re qte stations, ihan radio receivers, hence the - switOhboards:normallY are mounted iri a vertical TRANSKIVTE, R TRANSFER positi (as .infigure 9=2). This arrangement SWITCHBOARD permits the -outputsfrom fist receivers-to 13,e fed- to the five vertical rows and up to ten rernote Transniitter transfer switchboard, type stations to. be _fed from'the ten, horizontal rows SB-863/SRT, has replaced type SB-83/SRT. The of switches. Si3-863/SRT (figure 9-3) has ten 20-positiOn Switchboards are always installed with the rotary selecror switches in two vertical coluinns. knobs in the OFF position when the white line Each rotary switch corresponds to a remote is vertical. To further standardize all. control station, ana each switch position (1 installations, receivers are always connected to through 18) corresponds to a controlled the vertical rows of switches, and reniote transmitter. Thus, switching control is provided stations are always-eonriected to tfie 'horizOntal for up to10 remote control stations or 19 154 14 ,Chapf,er, o'F.AbILnits -CONTROLOPERATIONS CONVERSION keyers andconverters are-an integral part of 'every radioteletype system. Insome, instances, the keyer is built .into-tlferadiotransthitter, but -- 'PILOT _ the tbnvertei is normallya ,,separate piece Of 'NOUSE equipment. The Navy uses severalmethods of transmitting, teletype signals. FSK.(Radio ° Frequency shift keying) and' audiofrequency- °MMIMIKAMIII° Shift .keying in Multiplexing-are-coveted- -in the sutceeding Paragraphs. 0 ,FREQUENCY-SHIFT,SYSTEM QPEN SNIDGE'r- The -frequency-shift system isillustrated in /figure 9-4'. 'Thetransmitting end bf this system (figure 94-giitelePrinter, .a frequencyAhift keyer unit, whiCh is built intothe transnlitter, and.a:transmittei: When the teleprinter. iS , Operatedtthe direq durrerit teleprinter mark andspace signals are k changed by the keyer uflitintp. frequency-shift intervalS. Mi "on!'or 'a "current?' interval- is called.a MAR.Kor MAItING iMpulse. An .`Off -or no-current" interval is called.a SPACE or SPACNO impulse. IfhefrequeficY shiftintervals' _are transmitted 'aS airierfrequency7shift (CFS) signals: The carrier shift isvery shiall compared -s with the frequency of the carrieqit niay be-on the orderof 850 dycles. . On the receiving, tide of.this systeni (figure? 70.64 9-4 8)-areareceiveri,a frequency-shifi-converter, Figure 93.Transmittar transferswitchboard and; a teleprinter. *hen SB-8631SRf. the carrier frequency:shift, signal .entert,thereceiver, it .is detected \and Changed, intoa- corresponding frequency-shifted-audio signal. The `audiooutput transinitters. Whenmore than 10 remote f the receiver, is fedto-the -converter, -which stations or 19 transmittersare to be connected, changes the frequenCY-shifted.audio signal into additional transfer switchboardsmay be the direct-current mark andspace teletype installed. Position 20 of each rotaryswitch is 'signals. provided for connectionstb an additional COMPARATOR-CONVERT-ER transfer switchbOard to contfolextra GROUP AN/URA-17C transmitters. The switches consist of 12wafers that connect .the start-stopindicator, keying,12 ThCOMparator-Converter Group volt d.c. microphone carriercontrol,/and carrier AN/URA-17C is used to convert theFSK audio Indicator circuits for the varioustransmitters. output of standard radio receiversinto d.c. pulses for the 'operation of teletype AnY of the renibtestations-may be4connected to printers. The ANtURA-17C consists of twOidentical .control anY of the transmitters inthe system. frequency shift converters.CV-483CJURA-17 155 1:4 9 .1 COMIONICATIONS fECHNICIAN 03&12 4. CARRIE/FREQUENCY SHIFT SYSTEM TRANSMIT CARRIER FREQUENCY SHIFT MODULATED N FREQUENCYSHIFT- KKYER DIRECTOURRENY MARK,AND SPACE IL F. OSCILLATOR, SIGNALS WAVE )(MIT TELETYPEWRITER e. CARRIER FREQUENCY SHIFTSYStEM RECEIVE ' vw. -CONVERiER. FREQUENCY SHIP*iT. CARRIER WAVit - M.' D..- CORRESPONDING DIRECT-CURRENT e [Ir ..fry MARK & VAC, E ..., AUDIO ELECTMCAL SIGNALS IMPULSgs - RidEIVER TELETYPEWRITER I - I ..... 0 3 -A "o 1.23o:.231 Figure 9-4.Frequency%hift system. 4 156 150 ' a .... I. Chapter9FACILITI,E1CONTROL (ChERATIONS shoWn in figure 9-5", a _closeup of one converter antennas, space'A diversity usually iflustrating controls infigure-9-6. Each convertet*'shore station is limited -to has' its owncomparator .circuitry. Hence. use. In frequency diversity. a operation, the'two _receivers are tuned separate comparator unit -isnotr(equired as the to different carrier frequenciesthat are cal-Tying case with the older' mddelAN/URA-8.B. The AN/URA-17C is 'a completely identical intellige.ne.e.Frequency diversity' transittprized reception commonly is equipment with -printedcircuit- boards triking used aboard ship for copying fleet broadcasts,which are° -keyed 'its- physical Size lessthan halfthe size ofthe- , .AN/IAA=8-13'. Thereis Still -a number of simultaneously on severalfrequencies. AN/URA-00convertersin_use; ho'wever,present _In diversity reception,-the PrOcurement of frequencyshift converters is audio, output of eonfir4ed- to the each receher is connectedw itS associated P ., AN/URA-47C.- Although frequency Shift converter,Which- Converts the frequency shift charactersinto crc. puiSes. the d.c. (or mark-space)pulses &dm each cOnverter ,are fed to the comparator.In=the comparator, an uto ma tiv circuitcompares the Pulses and= sele'cts the strongermark and the strongerspaee r pulse for eachcharacter. The output Ofthe comparator is p4tched to thefeletypewriter. A escription of allcontrols pOrrnally used ,dining operation and thesequence of operatiCm for.the two modes-(singiereceiver and_diversity- reeeiver operation)are containeclin-Appendix.II oftthis manual. FREQUENCY SNIFT: 4, CONVERTER CV-483/URA-17c-5' ESSENTIALS - 50.76 Fi9urs-.9-5:1-Comparst8rconvertergroupANiURAITM OF MULTIPLEXING-- discuision liereafterwill -be solelyop the AN/URA-j'7C, both Multiplexing is, the armapplied to the conyerters are ,deSianedto process of converting, informationseceived ,perform the-same functiOns. from. A a telephone. cjelegraph, tThe conniarator-copliertér or teletpe circuit in , can be operated original intellieence font into' withtwoladio-receivemin-eitherspace diversify a common time,or ,or frequency diversity receiving spectrum-shared sienal with 'information systems. When receive'd from-other imnditions do notrequire diversity opensdotr, wire telephone,lelegraph:or teletype circuits. 4 .4 each converter can be used sepafate)ywitir a \single reCeiver forreception of FSK signals.-In _ this latter usage, the-two converters can be purpose of muitipiexthg is to4increise' the nu ber ofintelligence ,8hannels, .cperated in two independentcommudication hence circuits. volume of- information,.capable of being sent a Tor either space diverSity simultaneously overa given wireline pr radio or frequency medium. This. naturally, diversity reeeiition, two standardNavy receiyers reduces equipment and- are employed in co'njunotion , line sequirements, andpermits a greater number with the of users to operate ina-eiven radio spectruin. converter-coMparator group. Inspace diversity aither of two methOds'of operation, the two receiverate tuned to the be used. TheSe multiplexing, may same carrier , frequency, 'but their' receiving are "TIME-DIVISION" and antennas are spaced . R NC Y -DIVISION"multiplexing of some distance apart, which frequency division Because of the requiredspacing between multipleking is the most withly used method bythe Navy. . ' 1 51 / COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN 0 3 .& 2 LEVEL POLARITY CONTROL SWITCH SHIFT FUNCTION SPEED 'SWITCH SWIYCH SWITCH FUSES 0.71 Figure 941.AN/LiRA-17 friquerici shift converter, front point controls. IIME DIVISION MULTIPLEXING AND DEMULTIPLEXING Tinie division multiplexing is, a method of combining tWo or more information sources.into TELETTPEWRITER-CHAN. A A single transmissiim by- usingtime sharing or samp'ting -techniquei. All channels_ are Iransmitted on the same operating frequency, ,but alternately,. so that each One is transmitted only part of thelithe.--.....Demultiplexing a time_ division multiplexed signaristhe_process of senSing and separating .the 'channels froin-their---__ position in the mulCil.exed:signals. Time division multiplexing is used primarily on king haul HF chtuitslxicbmmercialmsers -is illustrated in figure 9-7, Tho ,to four separate 31.122 teletype' inputs are sampleA in ,sequehce by a Figure 9:7.-Aasic time division multiplex (trensinit). distributor arm rotating at,apredetenriined rate. -1h one revolutioif of 'the distributor arni a character on channel' A iS picked up-and is fed intp a demultiplexing distributor that is transmitted, then the character sm. 6hannel B, rotating at the same speed' as the multiplex' the channel C, then channel D.,Thus, the time distributor, and in synchronization with it. At required for each revolution of .the distributor the instant that a channel A Character is arm is divided between thefour. separate TTY received, the depultiplex distributor is' channels being multiplexed (combined). establishing electrical contact -with the channel,. Demultiplexing takes place at the receiving A receive equipment and roines the character to ,end of a circuit. Figure 9-8 illustrates the basic its intended receiver.,It then-makespontact with principles of reception and demultiPleling the . channels B, C, and 1) in sequence and routes a multiplex signal. As the name implies,4t reverses character to each -before starting another the multiplexing process. The multiplexed signal tevolution. 4 '158 Chapter 9-1-FACILITIES -C,ONTROL OPERATIONS 170 Hz. Each -channel subcarrier is assigned a specific center frequency, and is always adjusted to operate at a specific operating level. CHAN A Figure,9-9, illustrates the basic principles of frequency division multiplexing. This principle is MULTI PLE X used on practiCally all Navy primary SIGNAL FROM:MALMO comniunication circuits from point-to-point. As RECEIVER illustrated, the-telegrap-h system has a capacity of sixteen-channelS-OLtelegraph (teletypewriter or other digital type) information. All channels are brought into acentrat point, called a Primary Technical.Control Facility. All channels destined for a particular, geographical area are connected to the telegraph terminal assigned tO the appropriate commtmication cirptit for that area. Each teletypewriter_ circuit is connected to a 31.123 "Modplator-Transmitter which is connected hy Figure 9-8.Baiic tinie divisiOn resultiplex (receive). , its output circuit to the output circuits of all other "Modulator'TransMitters." This forms a "Bus," or common cônriecting line to the FREQUENCY DIVISION-MULTIPLEXING 'Common ComPanentsr of the equipment, AND DEMULTIPLEXING where the cOmbined audio channel signals are amplified; modulated, by group for sub-group Frequency diviiion multiplexing is a method modulators, and cOntrolled- by attenuators of multiplexing in whidh the total frequency meters, patch,panelsrand Monitoring circuits. Spectfurri available is divided-into channels, each 'The Modulator-Transmitter conSists, of a of -which occupies a particular° frequency range source of audio of specitic frequency for each all- of the time. channel, and a special circbit by which the direct Dentultiplexing a frequency division current teletypewriter signals Modify the Multiplexed signal- channel is theprocess of ,frequency determining characteristics of the separation (filtering) of the individual channels channel oscillator intsuch a manner as to repeat fromthecommon-groUP of channels into which in audio form what is receNed from the keying the-y loop in direct current form., I.requency :division multiplexing within a All channel osCillators are fed to the telegraph_ terminal_inVOlves translation froM d.c. common "Bus," then aniplified, further carrier to audio frequency carrier of the modulated for spectrum translation where intelligence of two or More (normally sixteen) necessary, and routed through,attenuator pads, reTC"typewriter or other__ digital data channels . , monitoring jack fields, patch panels and line connected to_ the send side of the feriiiib-al. The matching...transformers:for. proper transmission 4 audio frequency carrierS of the individtial of the aggregate tone -signal§tO. the radio channels are then combined into a common transmitter via land line or radio control link voiceband' channel called 'the multiplexed or- circuits. comiosite-channel. These audio frequency The prinCiples of demnitiplexing within a CarrierS are 'referred to normally as subcarriers, telegraph terminal utilizing, the principles of -because they later modulate- a radio frequenCy frequency division multiplexing are illustrated' carrier. Each, -channel- subcatrier is sepatated.in- -by_Figure_9.710. The, common band of ,andio frequency from adjacat sub'carriers-toan extent signals are redeiVed from the radio -receiving._ permitting the transmission Of modulation station. They.first are applied via patch boards information Without the effects- of intercannel and monitoring panels to the system. common interference or bandwitt restriction-the amplifiers, equalizers,. grofip demodulators and separation -on military ch'annels'Is a minimum-of control attennators. Then to the output "Bus" r 4 1 53 COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN 0 3 & 2 o MODULATED. Tr( - MODULATOR / SUB-CARRIER CHANNEL 16 TRANSMITTER 425-2,975 Hz 3KC MODULATED COMMONWu! QAND (ALL CHAN. FREQS. TTY MODULATOR/ GROUP,.MODS, 101. ON COMMON LINE TO CHANNEL 1 TRANSMITTER SUB-CARRIER. RADIO XMTR.) AMP6; CONTROLS S. 31.124 Figure 9-9.-Basic frequency diyiiion multiOlexing (transmit). CHAN 16 425-2975 'Hz CONTROLA AMP D-C TELETYPEWRITER SIGNAL FLT RCVR DET w EQUALIZATION GROUP DEMOD.,' CHAN I (31% BAND OF MONITORS. am- R9VR DET D-C TELETYPEWRITER SIGNAL AUDIO SIGNALS FLT, b.; 'FROM RADIO RECEIVINGSTA.) 31.125 ---Figt-Tin:107-1-c-frequency-cliyision-demultiple'xing-treceive of the common equipMent tO the inputsof all of 90 bauds. Loop options include60 ma individual 'channel -receiving and detecting neutral, 20 ma polar or 6-volts polar keying.The circuitry. thence to the individual end terminal center frequency for channel one_is425Hrahd devices in ,the-original direct current signal form. channel 16 is 2975 fiz with a170 Hr ------prOglession for the channels between 1 and16. FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLEX ------ThRMINALS AN/FCC-69/70' o' D.C. DISTRIBUTION The AN/FCC-49/7 0 'isa two-unit multiplexing system consisting of one -_,Maximum operational flexibility isachieved AN/F-CC-69 and one AN/FCC-70 (figure'9-11) by the installation of circuit patchboardsand Te-leempli_Term mai. The AN/FCC-69 isa distribution frames. The communicationssiation- receive-only unit which demultiplexes d emplo3ts distributiop frames for concentrating coMposite ,signal sent by a AN/FCC-70 individual ,circhits into cables: these-framesserVe sentkonly multiplexing unit. as the point of equipment.interconnection, and The AN/FCC-69/70 system has a channeI as _the interface point betweenthe outside world ,caPacity of Ifrchannels with 170 Hzseparation and the distribution within thebuilding. between-ehannels and a maximum signaling rate Intercorthections between the cables are ti 1611 154 '' ,choier9-7FACIL1TIU CONTROL; oPplATIONs AMNION. i _ t; .SIGNAL TEST PANEL DISTRIBUTION 'PANEL. 'TEST PANEL FUSE ALARM PANEL= FUSE ALARM PANEL . A t 17 L. 1 POWER POWER DISTRIBUTION IIISTRIBUTION 1110 PANEL 9 4P64; 7,4 : 4. ,. .AN/FCC49 :AN/FCC-TO 31.126 .figure 9-11.Frequency division multiple* torminais AN/FCC-69/70. - aJcômplishe:d-by "crois=corinect"wires-that are entrance or ail communicationcircuits run betyveen the: indiVidual wire terminatiOn of cohcerned with lhe inissio,n of the the cables at the framet. the-patchboards serve communicationt- center. Four types of as the .access point fdr- operators tO-monitcr the distribtftion framesmay be used within a signal carried by individual cable Wire 'pairs and communications station and are identified by permit oper4tors' to, :reroute cirCultS and to their employinent. substitnte'equipment Orving a, circuit. Types Of 'equipment;distribu:tion-frames-arid-Patchboards-- . ' w aredisCUssed below. Main Distribution Frame-(MDF) vsillnwrioN FRAMES The MDF is the division point. betweena DistribuiiOn frames 'are usedto terminates coMmunication component and the outsidee The cabling from equipments, "patchboards, and MDF is Configured of horiiontal and vertical battery sources. A distribution frame ,is also Used ferminal blocks. The horizdhtal blocks terminate, :to serie as:a central' 'point for the exit and circuit catiles entering the building. Vertical 161 4 , 15,5 /We' \\ COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN 0 3 2, biocks'*. used to terminate cables that support equipment is "normalled-through", thus, for circuit distril*ution within the building. nOrmal operation the use of patch cords; is not \ necessary. Intermediate-Distribution In 'order to attain complete flexibility, the Franier(IDF) patch panel and ,associated patch cords:Permit access to all lines and equipMent and provide a The IDE terminates internal distribution means for testing inoperatiVe, equipment and/or ----c-_ablesTerfaiinnentsand-pat`Chhbards-that_process lines. In Most instances, test equipment is wired ,black .(unclassifie inforMation. The IDE into a patch panel to fadilitate testing. -should' be- phylically separated '-`froril the CIDF by a miniininti-of two inches; ,hdl,vever, it is desirable-to locate these units further apart or. DC PATCH PANEL BAYS onoppoSitesides of the ipoit. . ' For Control purpbses, all -d:s. circuits appear Classified Intermediate on-One or more d.c. patch panels, and all audio -Distribution Frame (CIDF) circuits appear Cm one or more audio panels. Tire patch panel with the incomingreceive lines And The CIDE terniinates cables, equipments,, the _outgoing Send linesis designated as the ana patchboards that process RED (classitied) UNCLASSIFIED or BLACK patch panel (Figure information. Current security regulations 9-12). The patch ,panel 'with .the crypto prohibit the terininajion of circuits carrying transfnitter input circuits and-the crypto receiver classified information to the same distribution output,circuitsis designated as-the CLASSIFIED fraine as those carrying unclassified ififormatiOn. or -RED patch panel,,(Figure 9-13). The patch ,panels ware wired so _that technically any send device:, may be patched- tb\any 'receive device, Cthithined bistribaticin ;and 'any :receive .device May Ite,:patched to any Frarie (CDF) send device. No two-sendinSdevOes-or receiving devices can be patched together without causing A-CDF maybe Usedat-small'stations-, serving a visual alarm., As -Well as an audible-,larm. ,the purpose of-both the IDE and MDF. When a -Interrelated- circuits- are normally srouped _as CDE is used,, the bloCks :that terminate cable§ gclereaptohgeat1hlye;. nid)oasislicititlee ce(iovp;praotritoionanIslyo latnhde and_ systems that interface with the outside world are to'be pbsitioped horizontally. Blocks same circuit are normally located side by-side. used to terminate, :Cables suPpOrting internal- The odd numbers are send details and the even distribution-are-to be positionedvertically. numbers ate the receive details,. Each circuit, (send and receive). on ,the Standard d.c. parch panel requires two types of -P-A-Te-HING-FACILITIES labels, one :on the BLACK..patch panels and a corresponding label on the REb patch panels. A The smallest of switchboards or/patch panels standardized labeling system giving as clear a add flexibility in the capability of the station's picture as possible of the various_equipments equipment. The degree of utilization of such that are wired into each circuit is prescribed in flexibility is primarily dependent on the the effective edition cf COI 104 and is used ingenuity and seSourcefulness of the operator or throughout the NAYSECGRU. The basic facilities controller, This Means that spare difference tetween the RED And BLACK patch and/or normal equipment and ;lines can be panel labels is that the RED label will identify interchanged and interconnected without terminal equipment and the BLACK label will resorting to physical rewiring: The, patch panel identify trunk lines and circuit numbers. The jacks are actually wired in series to the important thing is rot the faci!ities controller to distribution fraine wiring so that under normal be able to readily identify What is connected to circumstances each circuit and iti associated the circuits. a 162 0.0 Pi? Chapter. .9tACILITIES7CONTROLorwpalls,, C.)UptWA 3,10 .1.. rtijk-,11... .0 , , 31'.67- - 31.66 Figure 9-13.Classifuldcinch panel (RED): Figure 9.12.Unclassified patdi Panel(BLACK). 4. Iodated at the top of reach detail BLACK PATCH PANEL is the aCtivity lamp. Thislam') is designed to blink" when -the circuit is beingkeyed. The lamp is The black patch panel providetpatching activated (on) during . capability a mark transtnission and control for all unclassified d.d. dedctivated (off) during trunk lines and crypto --equipment, d space transmission. in 'addition, Monitor jacks_pertnit lines thIBEACK 13zitch -panel lfat aricillafYeiiipment _tobeianalyted.or-- installed in it for various rnonitOred without interfering'With the Signal purposes (e.g., 'meter, -teing.p&sSeu on the circuit. alarms, fuses, and line current controls). The. ,linejack offers directaccess to the Circuits are 'assigned to "specificdetails on the patch'. panel. Each detail outside line, sendor receive.fi).- patch= cord consists Of five inierted in this jack -willele-ctricgy remove the diwearances, activity lamp, monitorjacks, line line from the rest of the detail. jacks, equipment jack and contro:switch- "(sée fivre 9-14). The thiri3 jack in the detaillocated just_ below the line jack Offersdirect aceess to the. 163 -1 - Ard COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAtk 0,3. & .2 clouif . CIRCUIT logNTIFICATION IDENTIFICATION (i9`Las.,` ,(t). ACTIVITY LAMP p000_0 0. MOHITORJACkS 00000940? o-oppo0 Oi if...LINE',ACKS O 000000) O 00.00 6.4,4":EQUIPACKS:,; O 000000) 0 000c) 0-r.r.CONTROL SWITCH- Oesco'00()) MISCELLANEOUS' (iLo-o0, O 000000\ DETAILS O 00OG Qt- - CONTROL SWITCH-4..O 00000®< O 0,000 107---' O 000000, BLAOK:PATCH PANEL RED' PATCH PANEL 31.127 Figunt 944.-Standard details on a black and; red patch panel. ectuipment normdlty assigned ,to -theeircuit. numerical order dile to their varied use. A When a 'patch coid is, inserted in this jack 'the breakdown bf therniscellaneous details and their , . equipinenf nor piny assigned 'is .electrically varied uses can be found in tlw current edition remoyed from tho;deidil..- C01-104 The cbrit,rof switchln each jaak detail:is used to t'ontrof or to ,"cut off", The signal floW PATCHcogps ..between the'equipMent jack-and-the line on the -jaCk or, allOw the signal tollow through the Each patch panel bay has ,"acord shelf defail is nortally wired. The switch is.marked extending out from the panel. The shelf holds with an arrow in order to recognize its, position. the retractable patch cords and also -provides a When :-the sWitch. is In.the vertical .pOsition the writing spice. signal will' flowArough the detail. If the, control A three wire patching system (tip, ring, and Switch iS rotated to the horizontal position the sleeve circuitry) is employed in the cords and siguaf flow is'Cut off. -jaiks as follOws: MISCELLANEOUs DETAILS a.Tip einiu4s,, The tip,of the- patch cords 'and jacks carries the intelligence signals. Provisions, have be:en made:for miscellaneous b.king Circuits. The ring of the patch det,ails'acroSs the ,bottom of patch panels (figure cords and jack carries the timing or "step" 9-1 4) to serve various purposes. The information. Step jircultry on low speed 'finks is Aniscellaneout xletails consist of a lamp, control utilized only on the input to the C Q M SC switch and jack. They are not numbered in any or error control' equipment.'On high speed links, 164, r, 158 chapter-'9; .-=-FAC1LITIES CONTROLoptii.AiloNs y ring circuitry, also carries step to the receive AUDIO PATCH:PANEL buffer-or Jecei,,lieenct-equipinent. c. SletSve tircnits. The sleeve of the -Patch The audio patclii panel (figure-9.45)operates. cords and jacks carriethe' supervisory or alarm- Inacompletely (unclassified.) BLACK circuits; These alarm- circuits indicate visually envirbriment and is,used primal-0y for, high-speed and- audibiY when a niispatch, has been made data circuits. Circuits appearhigat this ,boardare, sendc-equipment patched to-a receive line, also routed through- the comincrciah And,DCS-2- . ,orfin ineorrectly seated patcbcord). -repea t,stationS_, but, the the. .to audici conversion,_does not take as the signals are 1 tell cords are usually colcir coded (white, air-ea d y in audio form and ready for red., black; 'and gre-en)-and- have five different .transmiSsion. use ', . ,. . - The patch facilityis divided _into three se ctios:he- uppermost sectionisa panel- a.SEND. The send cOrdsare white 'in containing two -decibel- -(db),-meters; the 5619r, ecitlimied second with a single ping, the other,encr section- dontainS the equipment, line, andjack =beifig 'permanently wired to keYboardsin the patch modUleS;_thethird section /FC0 spaces. contains alLthe tett eqUipnient jacks. -There -isno -tot& Shell. b. RECEIVE. The-receive cords areredand associatedwith the_audiO patch facility. also single plug with, the other, end beinghard Whereas the d.C. gaol use§a .ground ,return / wired-to-monitors in -the FCOspaces. SYstern, the:audio- -paneliisesa. two wireS and therefOre-eaCh detail containStwOjackseach for c:FOXTEST. ?-nw foxteSt cords ate bla,ck Monitor, line 'and equipment. -Patch in color and equipped with cords are a single phig, the necessarily_ .hvolororiged., the line jackOn the other end being -captive to electronic test keyers audio board- refers-to the outgoing andincoming and designed-the same-is a Send Cord-. line,s, and the equipment -jacks are connectedto d: METER AND SCOPE, The linter, and the Modulator/Demodulator. scope cords are alsdrblack and lotated on the right-andleft of eack Patch panelseparatedfrom _OpvLAT6i1./DEMODULATOR(MODEM) the other rows of COrds. The meterand scope a Cords are designed- .thesame as receive cords, 'MODEM, is necessary to convertan incoming with-a single plug. A push-toqeadbutton is also signal to a- forin Suitable for Operation ofreceive associated with the .meter cord- to protectthe terminal eqUipinent and to conve0 the outgoing Meter,from inidvertent-shorts. signal to g, form-suitable fortransmission. There are, various- MODEMs- used in the FCC)spaces, C. PATCH CORD: The patch cords'are' inoSt, of ,which ,are discussed- -inthe',.currea,l'. green and loOted in the 'two backroWS fartheSt editioriof COI. 104. ' away fronv the controller facing the patch panel. Most MODEMs function.automatically and These -are dduble ,ended, captive' patchcords require little or no adjustments by facilities allowing -the 'Operation of the facilityto -patch control personnel after being initially set. both ends, neither -being peernanently wiredto any facilitY. The pitch cords are -wired-TIP to comSEC EQUIPMENT ,TIF and :RING to RING;ving straighethrough reproduction-of-am signal on,these tWocircuitS:- Though there are geveral different models of on-line erypto eqpipMent in.usethyoughout the By -ma*ulation of the patch cOrds, the, -Naval Security Group, theyare all' designed to facilities controller can -testout ,and/or perform, the same function. This functjon is.to interchange nOrinar or spare lines and-equipMent encipher or decipher a teletypeor digital data as neCessary. In the event of equipment failure, signal. or when -changes occur in Operationa1 BasicallY, the crypto transmitter accePtsa requirementS, the controller can virtually patch "plain text" teletype signal containing classified to or around any poSition on the jackfield. materiaLadds a "key" (randomly chosen marks 159 /5.2 COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN0 3 & 2 =.4L , 31.69' Figura,9,715.7-Jackpeld of aadio board. and spaces) generated within and transmits the patch panel, and the "EQUIFENT" jackS are sum. as "cipher text," and enciphered teletype the termination, point for .t_he teletype signal. The crypto receiver acceptS the equipment. The_ jacks all function in., the same enciphered teletype signal and generates a key tO manner as th-BLACk patch panel. match the one-generated-by the transmitter.Jhe, receiver subtracts the key from _the cipher text As with the 131-..ACK" patch panel, the RED input 'signal, which restores the plain text patch panel has .äncilliary devices installed for teletype ,signal, and passes it,on to the RED firdwit9ring and meter reading. 2..patch_parteLfor_dissemination-to4he-terminal equipinent. Apothet'tinction of the RED patch panel is the, "STEP' sigpl: This _signal is a timed pulse RED -PATCH PANEL emitted by the 'crypt() transmitter used to. synchronize -the teletype keyboard/transmitter The RED patch panel-is, with one exception,.4istributor (tape reader) with the erypto electrically/medhanically of The One desigry as equipment. the EiLACK patch _panel:The absence of' circuit The step pike activates a clutching circuit, activity lamp& in -the RED- pat h iianel is Jhe causing the keyboard 'or transmitter-distributor -ekceptibn. to "lockrup" (stop sending) momentarily. This The "LINE" jacks are ,the terination point action, slows the teletype Qutput to match the for the CO M.S.E-C eguipmenon the RED crypto transmitter's circuit timing. 166 160 .Chapter 9,--FACILITIESCONTROL OPERATIONS END TERMINAL_DEVICO EndS'Terininal DeViCes,rnaYbe teleiypeWriter TIME equipment and/Or ..data terminals -which consist START I 2 3 4 'Of input and output.equipmerif,,modnlationand rok 5. STOP ,demOdulation devices,_and. manual or autOmatic sivg&Kr,{4.a 'supervisory controls.. Thereis-an ever increasing., Variety Of END,'terminaleqUipMent installed afloat arid ashore, .ancf forthis-reason-a separate chapter--(Chapter 10) ,is devoted 1.1 97 to psscs low:7 Figure 9-16.Mark and sPeed terminal-configurations 'whick space signals in the - include a variety of teletypewriter equipment.' teletype character R. A 'detailed examinationOf the 2 'telegraph co d es used in -tie N-AVSECGRU a condition where Current ommuniCations will Ct. the subjectof this flows in the cireuit. A sections space pulse is, a conditionwhere no' curreni -flOws_in thecirciiit.Shaded areas shim intervals DIGITAL SIGNAU. during which- the circuitis closed (mark),, and the blank areavshowintervals during Which 'the, circuit is Open (space). All, in+house teletypewriterand data bit Eadh character of the signals ,are digital. A digital teletype Code conSistsOf a combination of 'five electrical_ signal is mark or space pulses. To one that changes frOmone step to* another in transmit each character disdiete steps. The signals it takeS a total ofseven pulses. The first pulse is that the SI facility alWayS,a spade and is brintioller is concernedwith are digital signals Called the start pulse. The next five PUIses are thoseof the teletype code, that Contain only,,two different atePsor levels; these signals' are termed and their arrangement isdependent upOn which- digital binary, signals. charaeter is-being transmitted. The use of digitalbinary Signals :requires These five piilses all are.called theintelligence pulset. The ,equipments to react to onlytWo-Conditions. 'The seventh terms that are norinally pulse is ahvaysa mark and is called thestop applied tO these tWo PUlse. Althougha teletype Machine conditions in theCommunication fieldare may be operating at itsmaximum speed, thereare MARKS and. SPACES. MARKSindicate ,the always seven pulsea 'active condition andspaces indicate-the ,passive generated for each character, trantmitted: The first:andlast (start/stop) pulses condition. These binary digits(bits) are:arranged are there to maintain synchronization in:a:sequential order torepresentcharacters-in a ,between predeterthined code. Sending and recehringunits;The time duration Upon receiPt Of of eaCh pulse isdetermined by the speed of a deciphered teletype signal operation of the teletyPemathine. from the cryPto D equipment, the teletype Examine figure 9-1.6 equipment must convert itfrom an electrical again. This theoretically a perfectsignal..The time between code to mechanical actionswhich -cause the -eachunit Temaiiitthe _ _ inforination to be printedor punched. In' order same during its' to understand this transmission, and the shiftfrom mark to space conversion process,an (and vice' Versa) is,called a TRANSITION. understanding of the teletypecoding system is A necessary. transition occurs at thebeginning and end of each; unit 'whin it shiftsfroin mark tospace or - space to mark, and there INTERNATIONAL TELEGRAPH will be only 2, 4,or 6 ALPHABETNO. 2 (ITA2) transitions for each character. FIvt UNIT CODE When tguring tintduration of a signal character no allowance fortransition time is made, as the transition,is If a teletYpewriter signal couldbe drawn on instantaneous and is considered to have zero,time duration. The time paper, it would, resemble figure 9-16.In the dulaticin for each unif common teletype. configuration,a mark pulse is is measured in, milliseconds. The uniformlengthening; and 1.6'71 0 4 a COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN 0 3- & 2 shortening of each unit determines the total of 52 printing characters and five MODULATION RATE (signaling speed), functional characters. The one combination There are many_ telegraph codes, in military consisting of all spacing =elements (blank) is service; however, the ITA2 five-unit code has, possible -but is not normally used except as part', been the moSt eommonly used code in modern of. some special 'signal, of when generatedAs a printing telegraphy, and is universally employed result of suPerpositioning of codes as in some for teletypewriter operation. security equipment. The ITA2 five =unit code is In the :ITA2, theoharacters;or symbols to be shown in figure 9-17. transmitted ate represented by a series of five The ITA2 five unit code offers a high degree equal_code elements; each of which occupies_a of, efficiency in transinission, but with t e specific position. The ,code element occupying penalty that any -error introdueed in a bit any of the five positions.may be either a mark or pattern during transmission changes, the pattern a space. With such,an arrangement, a total of 32 _into an incorrect but equally valid-one. There:is' combinations is possible. This includes the 26 no Way of correcting or detecting the errcir, characters of the alphabet, space bar, except by* reference to the Message context. (Movement of one space WithOut printing), Fortunately, in the case of messages Of a carriage rettirn, line 'feed, blank, figures shift and narrative nature, the inherent red,undancy in letters shift. The 32 possible conibinations written language is often Sufficient to' permit available from the 5 unit code are insufficienno errors in transmission to be both detected and handle the alphabet and numbers. since 26 corrected by inspection-Of the-decoded text. combinations are required for the letters of the On the otherhand, theITA2 int Unit code English alphabet alone. This leaves only six is unacceptable in the modern world of 'figures combinations for numerals, symbols, or (statistics, digital data, etc.) where the context nonprinting functions. :It was therefore of a character offers nci clue to its accuracy,and necessary to adopt a plan to enable a larger when the transmission media (radio) inVolved is nuMber of characters to be included, and this subject _to high error rates. In these yin done as,follows circumstances and also where additional Two of the,32 combinations, (figure shift & characters in .alphabet are desired, a code with letters shift) permit 30 of the available 32 more signal elements per character, offering combinations to have two meanings. When ,a more permutation than the desiredalphabet letter shift is transmitted, it sets the °receiving requireslnust be used. teletypewriter in a, condition to recognize any AMERICAN STANDARD CODE signal combination subsequently received to be recorded in the letter case. All figures, FOR INFORMATION INTERCHANGE punctuation marks, and other symbols are -(ASCII). transmitted by using the figure shift and shifting The growing multiplicity of codes used in to upper case. This enables transmission of a computer and other data processing sYstems led , FIG6RES ?:$3:8_6,I)..,9011a5T;2/6" 01VA , _ vi LrnlRs ASCOEFGHIJKLIA4OPORSTUVXYZ ng.- I =111=III= MENONCII==1 = DIDIIIIIMICEMIIICICEIIIMICIIII On 4440m*lacomoonoon0000anconnam000 0000DD INDMIONOCMC0.110DIDICONCOM 0011 411COCIOCIIICCO0001111CMMOVCIIM CC IMBRIUM:IMO 00011CMOUCOO CIO 50.89:1.198 Figure 9-17.ITA-2 five unit teletypewriter signal code. 1 68 ct. 162 , Chapter 07FACILITIES CONTROLOPERATIONS. to a study of the probleth by the American 'Columns 0 & 1: -convain those control Standards Association, with the objectof functionS that were considerei -deviSing a neW coded character Set that wotild.he most important TO meet the requirements of dataproceSsing as *acceptable for the interchange ofinformation among information processing systems, well as communiCations. See Appendix 1IIfor a legend of characterS listed in columns-0Sc. I. comMunitation systems andassociated The seven .intelligence bit character equipment. The ASCII code has been adapted as representation, with b7, the highorder bit and- _--4he-Stindard,code for. teleprinterequipment, the b 1,, the low order bit same as !for digital data -communication are shown below. equipinent. Example: The bit 'reOrespntationfc% the 'character "K" positiOned in:_colunin 4row 11 :The 7,-tinit ASCILcOde contains 10 baudi(or bits-,--a.-rner-e-,cornMenly-userl-term)-prer-character, 1-Y7-6CbTF47b-3 b2 1/1 '-and), is used wherever practicable. nideare the start bit, Seven intelligence bits,a parity bit, and 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 a stop- bit. The start, stop,eand intelligencebits perfOrm :the same functionas they do in the ITA2 code: The PARITY (even) bitis a check bit used, to insure an even DIRECT CURRENT number of marking TELETYPEWRITER CIRCUITS .. _ hits is/ -in eachcharacter transmitted. The examplic-of the letters.,4R" and "Y" shOwn in. Itha,s been pointed out that thetwo figure 0-18, utilizing the 7 unitASCII code conditions, mark and space,may be represented illustrates' the -parity bit 'usage.'YOu %yin notibe 1 by any convenient means. Withinthe DCS, the the letter "R" contains three'marking two most 'common are neutral intelligence bits anda Marking pity bit (Shaded operation, in which current, flow represents themark -and-no Area); whereas the "Y;3containS four marking current flow represents the intelhgence bits (Shaded Area) space, and polar and a spacing operation, in, which currentimpulses of one ' paritt bit. Thus bothcharactersare insured even polarity represent -mark and parity 'acs requireo fot niilitary impulses of the digital data opposite polarity of equal .magnituderepresent . prOceSsing equipment usage.. The 7- unit ASCII the space. -code table presentedin figure 9-19 provides 128 different -bit ;patterns, all available .tor NEUTRAL-OPERATION assignmenrto Character's. The.bits are-numbered' . frOm b7 (high order)to b l. (low order). Neutral -circuits arecommon witilin the DCS . -. Columns 2 through- 7 in figure 9-19 contain and make use of the e English alphabet (upp'er and lower presence or absence* of case current flow .to convey information.These etters), the -numerals 0-9 anda number of circuits.mar-operateWlth-either .. punctuation signs and matheMatiCal symbols. _Or with a.negative MOk; theymay alsa use 60 milliamperes (mA as the line Chrrent-value,or they may use 20 rnA.Aneutral,teletypewriter circuit is'composed; ofa transmitting -device, a ffV4 --battery source to ,supply stun 1-I 3 1 4 current, a variable resistor to control theamount of current, a receivirrg device, anda line for the transmission_ medium. ; "START 2 3 POLAR OPERATION rff7F PARITYr4 The most common direct.currenttelegraph 1.128 Figure 9-18.kispreeentation ofpharacten 'R" mode in NAVSECGRU is Polar operation.Polar and "Y" using even parity glevtlASCII operation.differs from neutral,as information is (MILITARY) code. always present in the system, and iseither in-a 169 '0 163 0 COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN 0 3 & 2 0 10 , - - , 0 1 1,1 ' I OK ,,, .1...... , N. I " I 113$2IN COLUMN . , S itoW,*L 0' . _I 2 3 _14 0_0 00 ó f IVe. I ,e illif or .I4 aro' Er / P lar rdArrzi, 0 ° 0 1 r .:,. 4fa-M I lir 0 0 1; r 7 A4i'M - 0 1 IMEr"riAriff zi 3 0 ° 1 .rfArZ''''.411Dir lir r#Z/A7. 0 1 "0 4 a dd 1111r 0 1 1 Or 1, INDICATES 0 1 1 -1 Erjrd./.rd a WIT I0-0 0 I MARKIN 1 '0 0 1 . 1' de NEN-PARITY' tr ter V Ar/. 10 1 0 1 e.i AVi Wr arr.e i ' 47/A . toil /.7v.41: . : + 111/ 1 1 00' 12- 11111r % ... ,,,e. iirr 1 1 0 1 ' 13 Mr dr #. 1 1 1 o 14' 2.1: AWLS ._.' Mar Ilar r /AV/ed. 1 1 1 1 15 17A Z. ,Firr .. !li Arl; a NOTE: THE UNSHADED AREAS INDICATE-THE'PRINTABLE CHABALIER Figu ilandlid -9difor irifórmi.tiortintarchange (ASCU) for, military use. 4 positive orpgative condition. A polar Crouble whereas the same conditions with teletypewriterircuit is composed- of the 'ianie neutral signaling may only iddicate that a steady items as a neutral circuit _plus an additional epace is being tranimitted. battery -source. The reasOn for having air extra source -of 'battery it that the standard' polar' circuit uses- ,positive _batterytormark -and- SIGNAL DISTOIITION negative battery for space. The noraidt polar operation in NAVSECGRU ;c) mA poikve As pointed out earlier, in the chapter, the mark condition. facilities controlla's primary responsipility is to Thp most significant advantage to polar provide the highest civality, circuit performance operation is that for all placticai purposes it is possible. To do this, he must learn to interpret 4/ almost impossible to distort a signal through low circuit performance through distortion line currents, high reactance or random paicl*g measurements of Signals: _of signal circuits or equipment. Another Any deviation of a signal parameter from advantagv of polar signaling is that a complete that of the ideal signal is considered as. loss of current (a reading- of ZERO on the distortion. In telegraph, timing is a prime milliammeter) indicates line Of equipment requisite. and excessive wrong timina is a form 170 1.64 0 Chapter 9FACIL1TIES. CONTROL .OFERATIONS of distortion .thatcouldcause error in Most binary systerni. . NORMAL SIGNAL An idezil leletypd_writer circbit reproduces .signals at -the receiving end exactlyas they are START I imptessed.at the sendingend. Unfortunately this STOP '..seldom happens under act.ual ,operating, conditions, foi signal units have a -way of MARKING BIAS DISTORTION lengtl\ening and- ,shortening-as -they 'travel. This? I \lengthening and. shortening of marks_andspaces SI oCcurring -during- transinissionrreduse -the quality START STOP of'the-signal, and are cdled distortion. F-undamentally, there are six types of 1 distortion 'which-adversely affect the fidelity of 'SPACING BIAS DISTORTION telegraph signals: -these are- bias, fortuitous, charadteristie, cyclic, c,arrierand delay START 1 STOP I .I distortion. t :BIAS:DISTORTION 31.130 Bias distortiOi is the uniform lengtheningor Figure 4-20.Normal and bias distortedsignal. .shortening5of the -markor-space elements, one 4t the eXpenSe of the cithef. This means-that the total- time for one Mark ,andone 'spate river changes: only the.' length Of -the mark oi NORMAL SIGNAL space... 1 eleinerit changes: If thearnark lengthened,s_the space -is shortenei! -by the same° amount., Bias' START 1 oSTOP disfortion May:be cauSed by Inaladjusted _ I teletypeAine relays, 'detuned.reseivers,or a drift .in, frequency of either the transmitteror receiver. Figure. 9720 .gives a 'graphic illustration FORTUITOUS DISTORTION 4 bias distortion. 4 START I FORTVITOUS' DISTORTION' STOP , FOrtuitous distortion. is the randoM" displicement, splitting, or breakingup of the marks 'or space elements. It is mised bye' S1.131 cross-talk interference between circuits. Figure 9-21.Normal and fortuitoui atriiospheric noise,, power line induction, distorted lightning Storm's, dirty keyingcontacts and Such similar disturbances. Figure 9-21 givesa graphic0, illustration of fortuitous distortion. example would be the repeated shortenine of the fourth intelligence unit ofa character, as CHARACTERISTIC DISTORTION shown in figure 9-22. Chiractertistic distOrtionis a repetitive CYCLIC DISTORTION disPlacement or disruption peculiarto specific portions,Of the signal. It normally is causedby . Cyclic distortion isproduced by a yariety_of Maladjusted or dirty contacts of the sending causes...Although the type of distortion equipment. It differs from fortuitous distorticn is periodic in nature. .it originates from'some in that itiS repetitive instead of random. An e defective or improperly adjusted device in the , 171 4 165 _-= "sr 7 COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN0 3 & NORMAL SIGNAL NORMAL SIGNAL START 'STOP CHARACTERISTIC OliTORTION START STOP ...... 'START I 1- STOP 1 CYCLIC DISTORTION EVERY CHAIACTER THAT HAS THE FOURTH ,UNIT MARKING WILL IE DISTORTED START I SUR' 31.112 A Figure422.Normal-and characteristic distorted signal. s.cirCuit, Some -of the causes are- poor filtering,of a.c. compOnents from ,pbwer .supplies, cross talk j1:1133 Figure 9-23.Ninthal and cyclic froin -adjacent channels, or -radio frequencies distorted 34121 -. _beating ,aiainst each othei to produce 'Other frequencies., CYcliC disrortiVir is illustrafea in, figure 9-..23. CARRIER;INSTORTION . , BOTH V PULSES Carrier dis;tortion is the ;random Grata -THE SAME LENGTH . disPlacement of'signal- element transition that is t a Charatteristic of -carrier equipment. Itis= CARRIER diredity related to 'the rate of the keying signal and -frequency sof the tbne in' tile- channeLheing -keyed'. As-the ratio-between theteyingrate.and -the tone heing keyed become's- smaller, the - MODULATED amount-of-distortion ,beconies greater. Seeligure TUNE 9-24. DELAY' DISTORTION DETECTOR OUTPUT AT" elay distortion is the arrival, of- some REEEIOER component of a signal ar a later tiMe than its other coniponents. When comparatorS accept E FPFUELCSTEI E , tcvo signals and prpduce- one demodulation DOTTED LINES INDICATE output, the resultant signaL may contain LENGTH AFTER PROPER PULSE LENGTH distortiOn due to the delay of some signal' FILTERING component coinPared to others. One method of preventing signal distortion 31.134 on synchronous circuits is achieved by using the Ngure 9-24.theoryof cwier distcrtiop. -172 51 Chapter 9FACILITIES CONTROI.,OPERATIONS A TSEC/1-1W-8_, TransMission DelayCompensator ISOLATION OF TROUBLES (Figure 9-25). The HW-8 isa-digital-equipment that compensates for-delaysirrpropagatiowtime It would 'be impossible ,over various cOrnimmications media. to describe `every , type ,of trouble or interruption thatmay occui. On, at i inc sy nchronous comniunication in cable. radio -,syStem, the, receiver synchrdnizes or wire circuits, or to- describe ori the what course of action -head&be taken -when transmitter. If thelength ofa transmission line is testing a- circuit. Generally eh:anted, speaking, however, t-lrea receiver May lose-time circiiit difficulties fallinto synchronization with the two brOad categories, transmitter. To regain (1) equipment trOuble and(4 line or signal lossOf-synchrohization,The HW-8can,artifidially compenSate for the increase- ;trouble, dependingon the communications° or decrease Of the media used,._ One Of the-most inherent delay created bychanging the, length of impottant step in the tranSmission line, troubleshoptirig iS to determinein which of those ,twO categories thetrouble lies; further steps -will determine the exact-cause of, the trouble. Each- trouble that is TROUBLESHOOTING TECHNIQUES reported. mutt be- firSt 'verified. andtheneValuated. This-is 'usually 4i done---by plugging-a -printer position intO,, the monitdr jack of theCircuit ,reported. The two Trotibleshodtingtechniques _are -based-upon mdst -co minon- troubles a systematic approach to a-,given ,are printers,garbling and problem. When printers, (receive -positions) trouble develops ona 'ommunicatiOn circuit, it the -running. open. Once N .necessary for the fa ft. oubt4 js Verified, itsCause shOuld be ilities_controller =to-apply evaluated. his4criOwledge and eq ipmentin lhe moatlogical .°, nianner possible to dad-prompt restoral Whenequipment tails, the faultyequipment action. . MuSt" %located and °-repaired--or -replaced. ReplaceMent orequipmentInay-be limited by Patehing 'facilities. For tiample,teletypewriter- `RESPONSIBILITY-TOR eqUipMent is- Usualiyhartr-WitedOeilhanently INTEGRITY OP 'SYSTEM Wired) to the -patch panels.If either equipment. fails, -it must-be physicallyTemord,andTeplaced Facility -control.operationsis-reponsible'for with similar equipmentor a -patch- .made ,to troubleshooting all circuits..Andas thefacilities substitute a differentteletypewriter/crYpto controller, your responsibilitystarts- at the combination. It is -necessary,therefore, that teceive side of the circuitsat your station and facility controllersknOW- their patching ends at Ike ,dittant station'ssend-side. in other caPabilitieS. 'word's, trOubleshOoting iSinitiated, on-the receive Evaluation of signalintegrity Is Perhaps the side of, a circuit and ,cheoked.backlothe-source. most important step Of theproceSs.ln fact,-this f -trouble develops 'ori-a circuit yoU must one step may;.be all that is,requiredAcriSolate4he- evaluate all availablefactors,weigh them trouble. 'Evaluation, of sig,natintegrity shouid against past experience -withsimilar troubles, _take place at the pOintlhesignal-eitheréntertor Ind lake cdtrectiveaction. Your responsibility leaves the patch- panvi,, 48quipmentor relays for providing intormatiOnto the distant-Station should never be asSumedto, be defective without a-s to elle 'prokress -being madelowards -first checking the distortionof -the input signal restoration of the direuit isof the utmoir to- see if' the amount of distortionis different importance. Without thisguidance 'from the from the output distortion. receiying: leirninal, the sending-station cannot The equipment at the _distantstation must take effective action of itsown.' also', Ile :Once the circuit is restored, eliminated- as a -possiblesource Of the.-receiving trouble. Thiscan be done by-either a _mental station, is further required tOprovide the sending -station, with the reaSon for deduction. based' on an-evaluationof the signal 'outage and other in tegrity,-orv by requesting a test froin the pertinent information,as required. distant station. COMMUNICATIONS. TECHNICIAN 0 3 4 2' n to- 7+17' 1-7 ..,;4.:ft , . 1,,A. - - I, - 4/4.713.et"flop,712;, Adak '41". szalha41, . ,C ./104441:7*-Calgggr44k 41-`411.. ft, 4 , -06,.-ailb.e.:12 'fait t , l.iir:Af? 31%70 Figure 925,TSEC/H*8. 174168 Chapteir g.--FAC.114T11:5_CONTAOL OPERATIONS . , MI circuittest hould conducted in used- for analysis of sighalsto be obsorete or at cipher, In fact. the Iranspittingstation should least inadequate. noel' switch to plain language unless directed The testset described in the following by the receive station.,-It islikely that the .paragraphs is the most-current equipment would remain ,synchronized equipment in use. during There are othertest:sets inuse forsignal analysis -short -periods ofoutage, saving the time .at various communication otherwise requiredto rcestablkh cipher cOntact. stations, but the ininciples provided, inthis manual -are basically After verifying- that the incomingsignal -is the same. substandard, make a report-to the pircuit supplier, This 'report 'will include-thecirchit bIGITAL DATA -identitiCation and the, DISTORTION nathre of .the trouble, TEST SET AN/USM329(V) 1&,2 'including your effortSlo-restorethe circuit. Opething to remeinber,,don't wait uritilihe The Digital Data DistortionTest Set ciret(it has completely deteriorated'-before not*ing-the supplier. AN/USM 329(y)-consists. ofa digital data signal -If proMptlynotified,the generator anda digital data analyzing system circuit supplier can utuallysave a considerable amoimt of lost circiiiOime. coniposed of an analyzer and anoscilloscope. Note: The circuit.° These units are mounted ineither of two supplier must be notified-even whenyou tett in cipher. IT the. circuit configurations, in a 19 inch cabinetmounted on bht you have to a. dolly ,and nomenclatured AN/USM stay in test and are Titttbw to,past traffics the 329(V.) I (figure 9-26) orall three unitsrack mounted for supPlier must-be notified accordingly. 'fixed station use arid nomenclature , When-a substIhdard,circuithas been restored- 3 29(V) 2. Each of the (AN/USM for you- by the- eircuit supplier,conduct a final -three units 'is sel f-contained and- independentlyoperable, evaluation to -be .sure -that -thecircuit.will meet although the analyzer and Otcilloscope ahi in-station requirementsbefore attempting to are resume cipher contact-. nOrnially -operated- tpgether.For reference purPoses and an- indepth'diseussionoh the Controls andindicatOrs, -APPENDIXIV includes operating-data- for-early-0f-ti)e-functional,units ,;UTILIZATION"OF described below. Hereinafter, the* 'TEST EQUIPMENT Digital Data Distortion Test Set AN/USM,329(V) Will be referrethto-asthe teit Comnihnications periOnnel,whether -engaized in ,facilities,,control;',niaintenance, or bigitalpata Signal- -traffic ,handling, mutrhave a Means of qUiekty, Generator SG-885(P)/U,SM determining the ,qtiality of theCOMmunicatiOn circuits -and etlitipnt ttsecl: determining The- signal generator unit (figure9-2?) of the transmission, quality, traffic personnelrely ,on test set provides simulated`teletype signals ,used -hard- copy moniforing -whichit generally D to test digital-data and teletYpe equipments. The sufficient- to recognize corruptions to formatted; 'generator provides a variety 'of message headints and- texts. -Facilities control, simulated test signals with controlledamounts of distortion. ond maintenance must employ-amore .exactii-4 method of measuring transthiSsionquality and Digital Data Signal . * equipinent performance withoutdepending on message texts.- Analyzer T$2936(?)/USM *. in-,thepast there has_beena tendency toward more 'rigid control equality of transmission The analyzer, unit '(figure 9-28) ofthe test in- set is useeto detemine thenumber and type of the operating system. The trend,toward highe,r- distortion of digital data and transniissiOn speeds.and the-introduCtion teletype signals. of new The analyzer is equipped With 0 modes;of operation-in the system-have line matching not only circuits to minimize loading,and provides a emphaSized- the iwed for better qualitycontrol, but have caused most of the meter read ok. capability of thepercentage equipment formerly distortion of the,received signal. 1:69 COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN 0 3 08c. -2 operator. The input signal for the oscilloscope is supplied by the analxier, along with selectable, triggers and an,intensity modulation .signal. OPERATIONAL PRACTICES Procedures for circuit operation within NAVSECGRU FCO will conformto the procedures set -forth in the current-DCA, DSSCS Operating Instructions (D01-101) an'd C 0-M S EC operating instructions. Unclassified Fixed Station Call- Signs shouldbe used by ft0 in Place of routing indicators. Ordet wire transmissions and coMmunications-to ditant stations should consist of precise times. ptosigns, operating-signalp(Q8c Z)- and generally accepted condnunications phraseology. Clear -text language will be used. only whedabsolutely necessary -to convey the particular information ;-to- -be- expressed. Order wire transmissions.are to be suffixed witli:the-operator'spersonal sign. -Greenwich 'Mean Time. (GMT-ZULU -mg) 'is used throughout NAV-SECGRU FCO and the DCS; hOwever, local time is used when .cdordinating with commercialcompanies. MASTER FACILITIES tONTROL LOG A record of eventsismaintained inthe MASTER facilities Control Log as shown in figure 9-30,Itihould be -utilized for the. reporting ,of any unusual circuit interruption or circumstance. This includes instances such 'as peisonnel errors, short-term- forecast, scheduled C 0,M S E Cchangeover or any information cOncerning -the circuit operation which.requires detailed ex planatiOn: CIRCUIt PERFORMANCgLOG .31.135 0 Figure 9-26.Digital data distortion test set The Circuit Performance Log (figure 9-31) AN/USM 3_29V (1). provides for the detailed logging of outages on the individual circtlit. One log or one set of9Ogs, depending upon the nuinber of circtfits at, the OscilloscoPe 06S-2f 2/USM station, will be. maintained for each radio log. The log provides for detailed accounting of The oscilloscope unit (figure 9-29) of the circuit outages which might occur throughoutan test set is used primarily to display the received entire radio day. While ei,ch reporting hour is 'digital data waveform for analysis by, the divided into- 15 minute,segments, outages of less 176 a . 170 , Chapter 9,-FACII.IfIES -cc-m*1._OPERATIONS 6 C. 31.136 Figure 9-27.-088p(mitismdigital data signalgeneilitoe: tri t'1"4 b 04410 AJ- 31.137 Figure 928.TS-2936(1))/P6Mdigital data signal-analyzer. than1 5. nihlutes ean be recorded by using Usually double-checkedfor accuracy by symbols_prescribedin-COI 1,04. supervisory personnel,. In- additiOn to recordingcirettit outages on the Circuit Performance.Log. the, facilities controller is responsible for submitting reports CIRCUIT STATUS of excessive bUtage to-appropriate agencieS. ,Basically,,the outage report identifiesthe circt experiencing the difficulty. thereason for Posted within The'facility oUtage (when known) and the contreil spacesis a expected time of status board% which reflects restoration (when known).Both the timeliness up-to-the minute of submission and the circuit inforMation:. Asa .minitimm, the status accuracy of the- board shalllistaI1 fulL ,and part-time circuits information and formatare essential to the actiVated. sehedula C-0MSEC .changeover "effect iveneSs of thereports. PriOr to, times, any equipmetii transmission, reports, of circuit -or line patches in effect, outage 'are status of spare, equipmentand information .0 177 71 -43 31.138 Fibisre`949.-08-212/USM OS'ci LLOSCOPE. Facilities MASTER' CONtROL LOG FigUre 9-30.Mastervfacilitiescontrol log. I. _pertinent -to extensive outage. the accuracy of Of STANT STATION/CONTROL information ,on the -status board should be AGENCY COORI5INATION verified at least once per watch. flOweyer, the communications center SOP may require more. Effective operation of any communieatipn ,.,frequent verification. system requires timely coordination withlocal. , a. 178 I I. k DAY13-4) MO4TH45-7): primmenw , 0113===l3EErrz .47401-orzsmemEztarEEM=Elifirlitst-emEIZMIZEIMEMIZIND IllialillanmilielinnalsasalaussimilisagallillinuisolsMIasssmossasilmannamilalmniminnenhans1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111115M1111111111111111111111111M1 ansilliMMINNINIIIIIIMUM11111111111111111111MMIONIMISPIIIIIIIUMOCIM1111111111INIMIUMINNIM1111111 Mil= IBM NM RI EN ME MI al RS INN MIME IN MI 1111111111 IIIII IIIMEMEIMMINUI11111011111111111111111ININEEMENIIIIINIMINONMEIIIIIIIIIIIMME Ell NM 1111111 IME MEd 1111 111111111111111 II MN MO Ell IN UM= sammossisommiammagollmammammimimmommumminsommoinffillinommilmniummommommilmil=ME MO= 4111111111.1 ME al NM EN Ell NM 112 IN OM El= =MrNM NEM MINI IMMO Ell EN MI Ell IIIII MENM 11111111111111110111111111 MI NI 11111111111111111 IIIIIIIIIIIIMMMOM11111111111111181$111111011animiThimilleiThimmoulinliMinniliMolinsimin 11111111111.11111111111111IMMIlimulmennalumainaselminsalannannununiluilunninssumunalin No MN MI Mall IIII MI ail 11111 MN RN MMUSNM NI NE 1111111.1111119 11/1MI IN uiIuIIIuIIIIuuiuiIIIiuuRlIiIuusuIgIiuIuIuuJIIIluiHIuImIiauIIuIuillaIIagIuIIIhuIIieIIIiIup 1.1111101111111MEMBEINMENEMMEEERIMIEMEMMEIEMEMEEEMEMEMMEMEM MEMEMEIIMINMEMIEMMIMMEM MEM NM ME= NM MI IR MEMMI= IIMMEMMINIMMEIMEMEMEMMMEIMIIIMIIMEMMEMMIEMMOMEIEEEMEMEMIIIII 11111111111M11211111111111111 1111111111111111111111111111111M MI UN IN EIE Min In IN IN IN NIMg IR WWII" OM IMI EN IIIIngunmausimiusumismuninummunlisimmummannounumungelman 1111111111mmiammumnellimmum.firrommommmumnrumtanisumerunsmom M 11111111111111111INN MIME SEM MUM MN MI MIIII= MN NE NM 111111118111111 111111111111-1111111 veseasenameamoggeloonsmemomiginignsionessuimmunumilIN= IN MEIMMINNIMENEll 111111B111111111191111111111111111111111111111111111111111111RUMIEMMIIIIMEI nssimminvisannuelas 1111111111111111111111111111141111-111111111111111--11011171 MN= EMI MN Nil ME MIall 111111 NM PM INN 1111 11111 111111111111111111111111=111111' IIIIIMIIIIIIII111111100011111111:11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110111 InhuaiIiuriuuuuliuuuuuuuiuurdI I , 60141UNICATIONS TIECHNICIAN 03 & 2 intermediate, and distant stations' facility adMit or to, discover that circuit troubles are controllers. This coordination goes beyond the ift-house. Rather than losing face, respect and mere ability .to _talk from one terminal -to goodwill uslially result from an honest exchange another. The, cOoperation must be mutual:2R of in formation whenever itis found. The must work bath ways. It doesn't take_ very long important thing is' to -maintain coMmunications -to realize that it can_ be difficult to communicate and to provide the highest quality of circuits for with anyone, distant station or lOcal supplier, passing traffic.Itis even possible that future withoutalittle mutual cooperation. outages can be reduced from hours to minutes Nothing can be gained either, by losing dour when information relating 40 the cause and cure temper and trying SO bhime ant* the troubles of previous outages_is freely exchanged. on the other end-of the circuit. You have to he A final consideration isthat of being sure that "your awn house is clean" -before prepared and well informed of the job at hand. -blaming- sornething or someone else for circuit A competent facilities controller possesses the difficultis. It must be remembered that the man expert iSeto rapidly correctallcircuit and on the other end_ of the circuit iS trying justoas equipment deficiencies. in addition,to extending hard -to get the circuit 'back in operation. the necessary cooperation whenever possible. Contrary to a number .of .people's way of Ultimately, it pays large dividends in thinking, itis not degrading in any manner to maintaining reliable circuit performance. c, 180 ;CHAPTER -16 END TERMINALEQUIPMENT Many variations of ehd-terminalequipment . quietness, and high speed operation. T ey are utilized__ throughout the N,AVSECGRU present relatiyely few maintenance problms,. communication installatidns. The trendat 'and present tends to be 'toward faster are suited particularly for shipboarduse operating, under severe conditions of roll, vibrationand digital' data -processing equipment.DSSCS- shtick. subscribers willutilize exiiting input/output -Another feature of the Model2-8 equipment with special interfacedevices_or-the AUTODIN Digital Subscribers teletypewriter is its ability to operateat- speeds Terminal of, 65 and 106 wordsper minute. Cohversion -Equipment-(DSTE). 'from-.one speed to another isaccomplished by In this chapterwe cover two 'topics: changing- 'the *driving, gears that are located teletypewriter, equipment anddescription of the within the equipment. Most various modes and terminal eonfigurations- of the Navy% used teletypewriters are presently operatedat 100 -by the DSSCS subscribers. words per-minute. AUTOMATIC SEND-RECEIVE(ASR) INTRODUCTION TO TELETYPEWRITER SEI" AN/UGC-49 - THE TELETYPEWRITER 'One of the The teletypewriter is more commOnly used little more than an teletypewriters istire mOder AN/UQC-49 electrically operated typewriter. Theprefix -teletypewriter, shown in figure "tele" means "at a distance.".Coupled 10-1. Itis an with the electrbmechanical apparatus for sending Word "typewriter" it formsa word meaning and "typewriting receiving both printed ahdtape perforated at a distance." By operatinga Messages and receives messages electrically keyboard similar to that of from a typewriter. signals the signal line and prints themon page size copy are produced-that print characters in Page form, paper. In addition, it can receive . called hard copy. messages arid record them On tape in bothperforated and The characters appear at both sendingand receiYing stations. Iii printed form. With page-printedmonitoring, the this way, one teletypewriter electrically transmitsmessages teletypewriter will actuate asmany machines as that are Originated either by may be? connected together. An operator perforated tape or keyboard operation. It mechanicallyprepares -transmitting from New York to Bostonwill have perforated and printedtape for separate his message repeated in Boston, letterby letter, transmission with virtually as soon as it-is formed in New or without simultaneous York. electrical transmission andPage-printed The same will apply at all receiving stationsthat tie into he network. monitoring. The keyboard, typing perforator, Most of the teletypewriter sets used by typing the unit, and transmitter distributorare operated by Navy belong to the Model 28family of the motor mounted teletypewriter eqhipments. The Model on the keyboard. Selection 28 of these coMponents foreither individual or equipments feature light weight, smallsize, simultaneouS operation is by-the selectorswitch 181 176 a COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN 0 3 & 2 AUXILIARY REPERFORATOR. AUTOMATIC TYPER REPERFORATOR f.: CHARACTER COUNTER TRANSMIT.TER DISTRIBUTOR KEYDOARD \ SELECTOR SWITCH z 1.217.13A Figure 10-1.Model AN/UGC-49 foletypowiiter. located at the front of the cabinet, to the left of ..Kekboard-Unit the 'keyboard. All these components are connected in series in the signal lineo but the The keyboard, unit (fig.10-2) provides a selector switch has provisions for shunting foundation for the arc. motor, typine unit. and various components from the line. The typing -typing perforator This component incorporates reperforator is operated by a separate motor and the necessary eledtrical and mechanical elemen.ts power distribution system. It is connected to a for message'transmission and for controlling the separate external signal line. mechanical printing and perforating of the tape. It also suppohs the tape container, a charac 182 177 Chapter 10END TERMINAL EQUIpMENT Z4 _ TAPE CONTAINER AUTOMATIC TYPER- DRIVING GEAR- INTERMEDIATE -GEAR . ACMOTOR ASSEMBLY SELECTOR CHARACTER SWITCH CAUNTER -MOUNTING FLEXIBLE . STUDS SHAFTS . 'S r 50.92 Figure-i0-2.Teletypewritir keyboard unit. selector switch for :choosing the mode .Of 'Similarities and differences in the two keybOards operation 011ie equipment. are illustrated in figureI 0-3.bserve that the' .The keyboard mounts in the- cabineton rails I oWerease -characters are: thesame, 'and, that 'of a shock-mounted cradle. The front of, the letters of the 'alphabet appear in thesame keyboard protrudes from the eabinet and is positions. The difference lies in-theuppercase of. fitted with a rubber seal for&silencing-eftect. the bottoin two rowS. A trained operatorcan Mechanical pOwer for activatinfthe,keyboard-isi use either the ammunicationor weather derived from the a.e. n-iotOr thrsaugh keyboard without lgss of speed or efficiency. interthediate drive gears and:the typing unit Or Figure t0-4 isan illustration, of ihe the typing perfOrator, depending-orrthe selected. comMunication keyboard ,with emphasis placed Mode.of,the three-position switch. on the function keys. Thg,: action performed hy The 'Model 28 printei-series is equippedwith: either.of two types of "keyboard's: the function keys is describedas foIloWsi communication or we,ather. The-communication a.SPACE-BARThespace bar, located at 4 0 keyboard contains letteri and' _punctuation the frontoof theleyboard, is used to senitspaces marks common to the-standard typewriter. and (as between words). , .14 the weather key boa-rd provides necdsary b. CAR"RET (carriage retum)the carriage, symbols for transmission 'of weather data. return key is Used .to return both the typebox, .. 183 4 COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN 0 3 & 2 located' -in spaces available in the center of the . is.i COMMUNICATION KEYBOARD function key row. g.REPT (re'peat)To repeat a character, depress the character key and the REPT key.' 000T@CIJXDOU2), -The character will be repeated automatically at line speed,as ldng as bOth keys are 'held, down. . r®-ICXXDOCI@ _ The ,three keys_ described neit perform their ,,(S121kCE OAR) functions only on the machine,on which the asmarssiorrioriesms.rrel key is operated (referred-to as "local inatihine-"), without affecting any other machineon the line. WEATHER KEYBOARD h.Loc.LF (local line' feed)-:To- feed the paper up in the local_machine,, depressthe LOC I@ga0C)C)000 C1 LF key, which =feeds the paper up automatically and rapidly as long as it is held down. This key is /00®®00CIOCICI for-use in-locally feeding up paper to tear off a ®CITTITg4;) message not fed up, far enough bythe '(SPACE,BAR transmitting_statiOn. It also is used when insetting a new, .supPly of paper in the machine. i. LO.0 CR- (.lbcal carriage return)To return the type', box ,to the left margin on -the 31.23 local machine,._depress the 'LOC CR key.This Figure:10-3.'.4wo types- oi teletypewriter- keyoardstk, key -is for, use in- omission of carriage return at the end-of -aAransmissionlrom anotherstation. j.BACK SPACE-LAack space mechanism carriage and -the -printing carriage to' the left to is °available through the use of a modification starta nT;v line of-typing, kit, allowing the,ope'rator to back space while, preparing a tape on tlw -typingreperforator and c.LINE FEEIYWhen-depressed;-this key causes,: the ,paper to feed upward one or tvo Ietterfout any erro;s: ,SpaceS deknding Upon-the- pbsition of the single.double -line feed levet located oir the "Typing-71rnit typing unit. The typing unit used jri the ANtLfGC-49. -(figures)The -figutes key is teletype.writCr isPictured' in figure1.0-5. The pressed- to condition the- machine for printing- typing- unit -incorporates ,the necessary electrical ,"figgres, punctuation marks or other UppercaSe and mechanical, ele_m_ents to _translate the characters. signaling code combinations into__ Mechanical e. LTRS (letters)The letterslwyis used aetions xthat print °the:, messages and petform to condition -the inaChine-for printing the letters functions incidental thereto. . Jowercasecharacters; Paper (single- Or multi-copY) eeds from a f.BLANK °(-utilabeled-, key_ in bottom five-inch (maximum) diameter roil' mounted at row.)Depressing the blank- key,tWice-(effective thre.lr of the typing unit. The paperfeeds in upPercase- or 4owercase) locks all around a plaseri which rotates but which does -keybsards_ in :the "cirauit and .renders 'them not move horizOntally. inoperative by setting ,up the teceive condition. Type-pallets are aeranged_in_a small type bbx Res-toratio_n_to -th_e,send condition is (fig. 10-6), which is detached easily for cleaning accoMplished, under individual Litcunistances or replacement. in operation, the typebox through, operation of -the- SEND key by the moves across the paper and presents theifroper operator desiring to send, from-his -keyboard. ty pe pallets to the printing hamMer.which SEND and' REC keys, when installed, will be drives the pallets_ and inked ribbon against the '184 179 Chapter lp.--END- TERMIALEQUIPMENT s SPACE BAR Figure 10,-4.7fANAJGC-48-keyboard.- 1.217.138 paper 'to print the charactert: Com6ined TYping Reperforator automatic carriage return andline feed features. operate 10 return- the 'carriage ifoverprinting &curs at the end of a-line. yTape preparatiOn, b-SI OperationOf' the keyboa'rd, is accomplishedby the typing teperforator (figure10;8). This reperforatoris As each charicter is printed,the inked ribbon feeds from- controlled by medhanicallinkages on the. ones spool to the other keyboard. The reperforatör is reversing,autornatically when theribbon reverse a-transmissible, lever is tripped by the small -five-level; chadless, perforated -tape:withprinted rivet at each end of chaTacters corresponding the ribbon. The ribbonmechanism is shown in tO Me:perforated code. , figure 104, , , The tyPing perforbtor,niounted. on the left 6 Printing is produces! front corner of_ ,thekeyboard, "is powered by Me type box, which through flexible contains the characters and synibols connections and a jack'shaft by- shown on the a.:c. moth!. mounted-on the keybOard. Its the key 'tops. Operation of keysand, space bar tape is supplied frornacontainer Mounted at the moves the type box across Me platenfronyleft left rear, cOrner ofthe, keyboard. to right. Op each key stroke thetype box is moved-into position for the printinghammer to With the keyboard selector switCh, strike the proper type pallet,printing the hi the K (keyboard)- -position,. the typing,perfoOtor is character on" the Paper. Operationof the CAR inoperative. (See fig. RET key returns the type 6ox*to the left 10-9.), In' K-T :(keyboardtap) position,v theselector switch margin. Lid operation of theLINE FEED key connects ,the selector' moyes the paper up to the neXt jine. magnet on the keyboard -typing reperforator into thesignal line circuit of -185- CONIMUNIgATONS *TECHNICIAN 0 3 & 2' 17,) . PRINTING'SP:RIKG ,PAPEIr _x ADJUSTING BRACKET RELEASE LEVER- , PLATEN TYPE'io . HAND-WHEEL CONNECTS WITH POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL -PRINTING', HAMMER? * CARRIAGE. '1 SELECTOR MAGNET 0, "V, 1 RANGE FINDER ) KNOB MAIN SI-IA,FT FRONT PLATE CARRIAdiRETURN DASH PO-T 50.94 Figure 10-5.Typing 'unit (front view). - t . o , the---keyboard- signal ,generafor,, at thecabinet identieal sub-assemblies to the typing t terminal board, to permit preparationor reperforator already, desaribed above. Because perforated and typed tape simultaneously with the-reperforator is not Controlled by keyboard the but receives messages from an incomingsignal . c., signaLline' transmission. In T (tape) position, linkages line instead, it has% selector unit,Theauxiliary .. selector Switch mechanically engages between -the keyboard and Ole keyboardtyping typing teperforator is mounted on aspecial reperforator re.sulting in. maiwal typing auxiliary base and iS powered by an ate. motor reperforator cipration independentof thesignal .and a separate keyer located in theelectrical t:- -line: seri/ice assembly. Auxiliary Typing Reperforator 'The location of the reperforator inthe the auxiliary typing reperforator is similar cabinet is at the top left, above andbehind the .appe..iran.ce,,_ design and operation with transmitter-distribUtor. 2. 186 0 Chanter "10END TERMINAL EQUIPMENT 1,4 which provides a suitable length Of "letters"at the end of each message (by operation ,of the Tape Feed-Odt Switch on tte dome of the cabinet), anfl a tape threading handwheel. Both' reperforators4reprovided with a chad chute which discharges the chad from the gr.* t.lITCH)NG perforated tape by way of chad chute extensions qaTCH into a common c,had container located under the dome compartmmt of the cabinet. Itis imPortant that the- container is ,emptied frequently to prevent chad from backing up and jamming the perforating mechanism. . , Transmitter Distributor 31.28 Figure T0-6.Type'box, frontand back. The transmitter stribntor '(fig.' 10-IQ) is mounted on its own base in front of the cabinet PLATEN 0, HANDWHEtl. RIBBON a SPOOL RIBBON LOCK SPOOL 4, RIBB°;4 K RIBBoN 1:. - , SPOOL SPOOL RIBBON ROLLER RIBBON 'MASON TYPE RIBBONS REVERSE *RiBiON GuIDES BOX REVERSE ,) -LEVER. , LATCW LEVER " ROLLER i.222 Figurc10-7.,=Ribbon inserted. Additional features of the reperforator that on ,the left side. It,is a mechanical-tape reader air not common to the perforator are the_ signal used to convert mes.sages on standard, five-level bell and switch; low tape alarm and switch, the chadless or fully perforated tapes to signaling inedhaincEl Variable speed drive mechanisit,a code combinations Tor transmission ona noninterfering letters tape feed-out mechanism telegraph channel. ' 187 C&IyIUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN 0 3& 2 0 TAPE-GUIDg RIBBON AND ROLLER FEED L MECHANISM' PRINTING POSITIONING MECHANISM MECHANISMS 'BACKSPACE GUARD TAPE FEED SHAFT 'FUNCTION CLUTCH-CAM PERFORATING 'TAPE 'MAIN SHAFT JACt:-SHAFT MECHANISM BACK SPACE DRIVE'MECHANISO figure 10-8.Typing reperldrator (front view). The unit includes & start-Stop, switch in tIe key board. 1If the auxiliary typing which= are incorpOratedtight-tape, shut-off, and reperforator is ,not required,the auxiliary power tree-wheeling tape feed features. A second switch cambe turned to the "OFF" position,#' switch shuts Wit he transrnitter distributor automatically when, ta'pe runs out. Electrical requirements. are supplied by way of the 'Keyboard Mode of terminal blocks in the cabinet through a Operation' connector on, the transmitter distributor base: To transmit a message directly to the line as OPERATING THE ,ANIUGC-49 it.is. typed: rotate the selector switch to the K position. The usual. procedure in transmitting is PoWer to the ANAJGC49 is applied by a to depress the SEND key to unlock thetocal twitch- located on the front of the cabinet, keyboard. Transmit five spaces, two carriage slightly below and to the right of the keyboard. returns and a line feed (in that order) to align Turning the,switch to its upper position, "ON." the sending machine, and start typing the fully conditions the teletypewriter., Mr on-line message. The typing unit monitors the serVice in one of the three modes of soperation transmission, providing a printed copy of, the determined by the selector switch at the left of message. 188 , -Chapter 10:END TERMINAL EQUIPMENT 175-- istributor, or recdiving messages on the printer. The printed -character occurs.six. units after the point at which the five-level code for the chara-cter' is punched into the tape by the . perforator. Since tape preparation is by direct mechanical, linkage..tyPing may be at speeds up -to 106 WPM;-but a uniform rhythm is required to 'minimize* operator induced error. No page copy is typed in -this position. so the character counter automatically illuminates-the end-of-line indicatOr lampnto=avoid too many characters for the length-of the line. As pointed out previously. 0 the coUnter registers each spacing character. Non-printing ftnictions, such as FIGS, LTRS, LF, and CAR RET, are -not-regiStered. Using the Transmitter ,Distributor 76 .34 Figure 10-9.Selector swiich. The, transmitter distributor '(commonly called the TD) is oPerable only irithe K-T and T modes of operation, and- then,only w4en the SEND key iS dePressed. In the follOwing In the keyboard mode of operation, the discussion of the Trt, assume that the selector -typing* perforator "is mechanically isolated from switch is in either the K-T or T position and that the keyboard'. and the eharaCter counter the SEND KEY IS DEPkESSED. mechanist does -not ftinction, Thetransmitter To place a- tape itt the TD, move the distributor. circuits also are inoperable. start-stop lever to the center (OFF) position. Release the tape lid by pressing the tape lid Keyboard-Tape Mdde release button. Plade the tape in the: tape guide of Operation in such*a Manner that its feed holes engage feed wheel with'the portion of the tape having: 0 Keyboard operation inthe keyboardgape tWo perforations toward 0the rear of the TD., (K-T) mode is the same as when-in:the-keyboard Insert printed tapelso that the printed. chad side mode. exeppt thattypecr. _perforated tape is is up. If nontyped chadless tapeis used, p6sition siM ultaneo usly prepared through- electrical- the ,tape so that the open side of the hinged Conine-6m of the ke0dard typing reperforato- chads is to the top. With fully perforated (chad) selector coils to the keyboard sigiial- generatc.. nontyped tape, you must be careful to feed the The charaCit7r counter is not operative in the tapes froM the beginning. Reversing the tape (K-T) mode. but the operatorcan- tfse the rsults in a garbled transmission. While holding Monitored page printed copy as a position the tape firmly in place on the feed wheel,'press indicator un:der, thpse circumstances._ The down on the tape retainingAid until its latch is transmitter diStributor can be operated. caught. Move the start-stop lever tb the left (FREEWHEELING) position and manually Tape Mode of Operation adjust the tape so that the first character to be trantmitted is located over the sensing pins. Vhen the-selector Switch is in the T position, Figure 10-11-shows the path of the tape through tlie keyboard and perforator are isolated frohi the TD. the other unitt. This mode of operation-permits Another feature of the TD is the the operator to prepare 'tape for transmission end-of-tape switch. The switch is_controlled by 0 While transmittimt messages via" the transmitter- piitTrotruding through the tape guide plate. As o 184 COMMUNICATIONS TgqiNICIAN 0 3 & 2 ° CLUTCH TRIP MAGNET-ASSEMBLY START-STOP TIGHT TAPE CONTACT ASSEMBLY SIGNAL GENERATOR ASSEMBLY START-STOP BAIL ,,,\ TAPE FEED WHEEL /ASSEMBLY SENSING-FINGERS' TAPE-4UT CONTACT ASEMBLY 1, I i u 'MAIN BAIL TRIP LEV', TRANs'FER' BA IL.STABILIZER .50:104 Figure 1Q-10.Transmitter disttlibutór (cover plate, top plate and tape guide plate removed). long as thisAsAlepres;ed by-tape feeding through . nornenqhture assigned the units when they are the guide, the TD is operable. When -the-end of employed separately usually is,changed. the:tapepasses over the pin, the pinxises ancl-tlie TD stops transmission automatically. If the tape KEYBOARD SEND-itEdIVE (KSR) is -torn Ori-the bottom edge, the tape out pin also MiETYPEWRiTgR SET raises anct stops the transmission. For this reason tapet thouabe handled carefully. 7 The KSk teletypewriter set willreceive messages eliNfri,cally; from .the telegraph channel - and print them On page-siz e. copy paper. It will ADDITIONAL MOD'EL electricallYtransinii' on -the- 'channel messages 28 LiNITS which Jae originated by keyboard, operation- and monitor the messade on, page. sin copy paper. The design andfunction of the indiVidual The KSR may be-contained in a k.abinet for rack ,units in the Model28 line of teletypewdters ,mOunting as ill.istratecl, infigure 10712 'and is remain basicallythe san.4.'but the AN, nomenclatured AN'tiGe-5 1 . ipo Chapter 10END TERMINAL EQ6IPMENT: When the KSR is contained in a floor type S,TARr-STOP., SWITCH console (figure 10-13),itis designated TT 4171/UG. A dolly is-supplied in which the KS1k TAPE ,LID console can 'bei'laCed, for mobility where needed. Instead of .a dolly-, a stib-base may be TAPE GUIDE added to the cOnsOle which will increase the height- of ,the ,cabinet for more convenient "stand.up operatiOn.!? TAPE LID TAPE GUIDE RELEASE PLATE BUTTON 'RECEIVE-ONLY( RO)- TELETYPEWRITER SET AN/UGC-50 The AN/UGC-50 (figure 10:14) is housed in 1.210 a cabinet for rack moimting. Ijs similar to the Figure 10:11.Path of tape in transmitter K SRteletypewriter set', except.that parts distributor. required for yansmitting mesiages are not 0 30189 Figure 10-12.Key board send.repive (KSR) 1-.217.48 teletypewriter set AN/UGC.51. Figure 10-13.itetypewritor TT 471/UG. 191 'COMMUNICATIONS TF,CHNICIAN 0 3& 2 Ia .. '7> 31:140 FlOre10-14.-,.Receivir,onlyi(RO) ktypewriter set ANARIIC-.56. provided, Typewritten pagemessages,,therefore, can_ only 'be received._Inntrast tOlie nuniber of functions ,that- can beerforined'by a-sending and recdivini teletypewiter, milk two off line functions -can be perfo cLby the AN/UGC-50. The Se non-typing Kuctions (Carriage Return and-tine Feed) are ovided,so that they can ,be operated locally whn required-. . 1.369 AN/FGC TELETYPEWRITER Figure 1015,717308 of AN/FGC.59; typing EQUIPMENTS reperfórator receiving group. The AN, GC-59 Teletypewriter ,Set isan exam* -pr -the type of equipment used in torn-tape rday centers. The operator logs-each iaut7oma tic tape relay centerS. The incoming message, tears it off at the end ot the ,.NIFGC.-59 consists of threegroups: the TT308 message. and determines the proper outgoing ItecOing Group, the i'T309Monitor Group._ ,circuit front the routine indicators on the tape. and-the:773:0 Transmitter Group. He then hand-carries each tape_ to the , In figare 10,15 are receiving banks or appropriate sending bank of automatic ;'consble packages, which house several typing transmitter distributors (figurel0-16) and reperfOratois t;or use on incoming lines in inserts itinthe 'opploprute dreutt tope grid 0 18 7 171 Chaptg 1(.)-.:END TER.M1NAL =EQUIPMENT._ O. (visible at tops Of sending banks). Thetape gidsométimes,called a Washboard because ofa certain similarity of appearance-As simPly.a -place where 'tapes can remain during theperiod they are awaiting retransmission. They,are st-oWed from top down in order of precedence. Other operators in attendance at the sending bank -remove waiting tapes from the grid in ititill1114, order of precedence and insert them in the TDs. MOONSMONO A nunibering TD aPpiies a sequential Channel.- tink.;;%r IRV 9- `, '0,-,4*; number to_each message, thus keeping a-record ts .,Of traffie relayed-over each channel. / If duplicate copies of relayed/t/raffic are' required for the files, monitoring equipment (figure 10-17) is used. This is agroup of typing rdpeiforators that produce duplicates ofapes undergoing transmission on the sendinbank, and wind the monitor tapes 6n reels suitablefor stowage. The monitoring equipii(ent also duplicates the channel nuMber for ea,Øhmessage, providing a means of reference if/ hemessage shouldjv needed in the:future. / /' AUTODIN/DS CS INTEGkAT N As explained in, C pter 5, AUTODIN isa 1, operational on-going ystem. Before presenting '"'" the DSSCS terminal configurationsand the yarious modes utpized by DSSCS subscribers, more discussion/on how AUTODIN works will -. give you a/clearer pictureof- the AUTODIN/DSSCS integration. 1.7 IIC^#111:-Nri4-.11;if T V 401.101%; As a Øigital communications telegyaphic store-and; orward network, AUTODIN consists essentia lly of switching centers interconnected by tr nk lines with local lines radiatingfrom eabh center to subscriberterminals in the area serGed by each center. Messages Originatingat y of the subscriber terminals are forwarded thrs ujh one or more switchingcenters to their a.ddree4 suhscriher destination. Themessage switching enter's function is to acceptmessages from 'any othe subscribers, determine -their classification d precedence, and relay the 1.367 Figure 10:16.-71'310 of AN/FGC-59; trantmitter messages to the addressed subscribers. Figure group. - 10-18 shows the sWitching center andits related terminals. 193 188 MODIFICATIONS gy,5 i.-)26PCZ- of this publication has (have) been deleted in adapting this material for inclusion in the "Trial Implementation of a Model System to.Provide Military Curriculum Materials for Use in Vocational , änd:Technical Education." Deleted materi,al involves extensive.use of military forms, procedures, systems, etc. and was not considered appropriate for use im vocational and technical .education. 189 CHAPTIR 16 MAINTENANCE AND SA:FET`i As a communicator you are not expected to who have' the capability to undertake major do the type of maintenance performed by an overhaul work beyond the ability of a tender or 8lectronics Tedmiciane You must, however, be rePair facility. able to record inventory data, complete work logs and reports, and assist in obtaining part and Although the lineis not always clearly stock numbers from applicable technical drawn between-the three levels of maintenance, pubkcations: Moreover,you ate required to and there may be certain exceptionc,,itis perform routine maintenance on teletypewriters intended that .organizational level maintenance and typewriters.. be performed by- personnel assigned to the Ba-sically there are two types of organization and other maintenance work be maintenance.4l )Pre'ventive Maintenance accomplished by employing the services, of includes regularly scheduled actions taken to specialists.. reduce or elitninate failures and to prolong the Your hand in maintenance will be limited to 'useful life of equipment. (2) Corrective operatiOnal use, manipulation, and operational Maintenance includes the repair of failures maintenance of electronic equipment associated which have occurred because of aging .with the technical specialties of your,rate. These components, through accident or other causes. pOrtions of preventive maintenance will be of a Nfaintenance is further divided into levels. nature as not to require equipment alignment The .department of defense, inCluding the Navy after maintenance has been aCcomplislid. specifies three separate-levels of maintenance. AIL other. .mairitenance will be Ofidled_by__ the specialists having the adequate facilities to a, Organizational level.Organizational undertake the specific job. level maintenance is 293 .190 COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN 0 & 2 performance data on each equipment must be withinit's, design characteristics. tdefines kept. Coniparison of data taken on a partiCular uniform maintenance standards and prescribes equipment, at different times may reveal slow, simplified procedures and management progressive drafts that may be too small to show techniques for the acconiplishment .f up Significantly in any one test. While the maintenance. The Maintenance Requirement week-to-week changes may be slight, they Card (MRC) schedules,-describes and lists tools, should be followed carefully, so that necessary materiala ,aondtest equipment necessaryto replacements or repairs may be effected before perform the minimum maintenance required-on the margin, of performance limita is reached. a specific pieq of equipment. The Maintenance Any marked: variations should be regarded as Data Collection Sub-system,(MDCS) provides a abnormal and should be investigated means for recording the expenditures of irnmediately. resources (men; material, and time) ,associated Such an approach to-preventive maintenance with certain categories of maintenance action. leads to maximum operational readiness orthe MDCS success is dependent on the accuracy, equipment AbOard your ship. Your contribution adequacy and timeliness of the information to the preventive maintenance- program will be reported into thessystern by the operator. In made through-the 3-M- System. addition, the system provides data concerning the initial. discovery of a rnaltunction,_how the THE 3-M SYSTEM equipment malfunctioned,how niany than-houra were expended; which equipment was.involved, The growing complexity of electronic what repair parts arid material Were used, what equipment, increased tempo of fleet operations delays were incurred, the technical specialty or and the constant decline of available resources w6rk center that performed the nfaintenance. made it impossible for previous PM r'stems to MDCS, reporting on OPNAV Form 4790/2K control :ad accomplish required maintenance. incorporates the use of coded data eleinents, for The Maintenance, Material and Manageinent data atandardization and facilitating automatic (3-M) system was iMplemptedin-the Navy in an data _prodessing. These -codes and other attempt to solve these problems and to provide a amplifying-information are-contained in tlze more adequate system of collecting inforthation Pocumentor's Hndbook OPNAV 43P5. required t6 support equipment improyement ProjeOts. The, 3=M -system was designed, to function as ,an integrated system ,which would CLEANNG improve the managernenf of maintenance and - ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT provide for the colleclion and dissemination of maintenance d information, Itis All electronic equipment should be-cleaned, emphatized that 3-M snot a passive system and not just for appearance, but to assure goon will not operate by i self. The key tosuccess is performance. Before starting any kind of active and aggressivsuperVision at all levels in cleaning be sure to secure power to equcpment order to athieve a 0..4ghdegree, of combat and discharge all capacitors to ground. The operational readine/ss. safest and best method of cleariing_ inside The 3-M sy!st-niis composed of twO Jransmitters and receivers ia to use a Vacuum subsystems, the PMS (Planned Mainten ince cleaner with a tionmetallic hose. A small Subsystem) and the ,MDCS (Mairitenance )ata typewriter brush is handy forgetting dust gut of Collection Sub-syttem); and will contrioute congested' areas where die vacuum cleaner will signifieantly toward achieving improved not reach. A hand bellows can be used for readinesa with reduced expenditure of resources. blowing out dust particles, but is not as The Planned; Maintenance'Sub-system (PMS) satisfactory as the vacuum cleaner because of pertains to the planning, scheduling and the likelihood of blowing-dust into inaccessible management of reSOurces (men, 'material and spaces where it is harder to remove. time) to perforrn thse actions,which cootribute During routine transmitter cleaning periods, to the ,uninterrupted functioning of equipment the contacts of rotating inductors should be is 294: 1 91 .51 Chapter IdtMAINTENANCE AND SAFETY checked, as well 'as the surface of these parts. Preventive maintenance is applied for the Poor operation ,of contacts is disclosed putPOse of detecting 'and correcting troubles ''sometimes by erratic "jumping" of the plate before they develop to the point'of interference Ar, current meters as the circuit is tuned through with iatisfactory operation of the teletypewriter resonance. Both the contacts and the surface of eguipment. Proper lubricationbut not a the inductors must be-clean and smooth. A tiny overlubricati on is an impatant preventive amount of petroleum grease \may be aPpl'N if maintenance measure. When work.on equipment necessary to prevent scoring tliel copper surface. is necessary, use care to avoid introducing Steel wbol or emery in any form must not trouble% lit 11-SPri'hn elpctrianir equipment Sandpaper and A thorough visual inspection of equipment files may be used only ori competent guidance, during periodic checks may uncoVer conditions or not at all. that could possibly cause trouble later. Appearande of 'oxidized (red) metal dust MAINTAINING AIR FIETERS adja.cent. to any bearing stirface indicates- insufficie`nt lubrication. Adjtistable cleaances of The cleaning of airfilters is exceedingly working parts should,be.observed also. important for the proper oPeration of electrônic A visual exaMination should be *qt./Tamed equipinent. For sOme reason (perhaps their by a: manual test. Cortnections at terminal 'irnportance is not fully recognized), filters often, boards should .be checked for-tightness.° are negleeted or ,disregarded until excessive- Vibrations sOmetimes. loosen these conriectionS heating cauSes a breakdOwn- of the equipment. just-enough to give intermittent troubles that are Forced air Cabling used in' most modem difficult to locate. Nutscand screws that hick transmitters and receivers. Thistype of cooling. adjustable features should be observed Carefully tySterkinoves a large ,rolume of air over the-hot for loosenese, and should be tighteifecr if portions of the equipment. The-air is filtered to necessary. While cleaning the units, care should keep dust and-otherforeign particles out of the be exercised to avoid-damageor distortion. to equipment. If the filters are efficient, 'they delicate springs-that might weaken their tension.. rerriove ntost* of this foreign melt* from the Electrical contact pOints should be kept free,and ail- that passes throtigh thern-..Dust and dirt tend clear of dirt, oil, -corrosion, or pitting. Check. to dog the filter and prevent the. air from that opepating, clearance imaintained when a movifig 'through'. The resulVis triat the contactis cleaned. equipmeOt becomes overheated andmay be mine*a LUBRICATION An a.rialfsis of the failures, Of parts in electronic equipment -indicates that, the Majority lvlOre .than 60 pictures and Jiagrams in the of failures can. be traced to'excessive heatcauiet equipment technical' manual illustrate by ditty air filters. Ot4iously, then' ,the lubrication pointi of The teretypeWriter. In mainten_ance Man can reduce his workload addition, to points to 'be lubricated, :technical substarltialiy by en'surffig that air filters are manual pictures show the type and quantity of serviced properly. lubrication to use. A new telitypeviriter should , be lubricated before it is pfaced in service foethe fit st tiMe. Aftera. ew weeks 'inservice, - TELETYPEWRITER relubricate tt, make e air' that all pointsare PREVENTIVE-MAINTENANCE ! Inbricatea adequatelY, lubrication Schedule -.Use pA4h0-equA)Men6 technical manual is . , required' for prtiPer-Preventive maintenanceon teleiypewriter must be lublicate,dmore teletypeivriters. The scdpe of, thpinforrnktion frequently'as operating speed increases. Thus,a% contained in the techhical Manual isiridicaled in machine geared for operating speedbf 100wpm ensuing topics. requires lubricatiOn more often than one .5 * A C. 0 192 0. . COMMUNICATIONS 'TECHNICIM-0- 3 & 2 . operating at 60 wpm. Hew is the-recommended Fuses - -r lubrication,schedule: #4, Power dircuitS of the teletypewriter are protected by ,two caVge:type :fuses. Thenlain Operatint,speed Lubricating interval fuse for the basic eq pmentimn -the right end (words-per minute) (whicheverdecurs first)- of the ,power distribution panel underthe Cabinet dome behind the keyboard. A.separate go 3000 hours or I year fuse for power circuits of the1.yping- 2400, hours- or 9 -months reperforator is iopted on the terminal board 100 1500 hours or-6 months _bracket to the left of the printing uniton the typing reperforatOr, base. Fuse locationand symptqms of failuW are sumnwized in the Regarding the. lubrication interval,en accompanying tables. important 'point _to renumberare- the words "whichever occurs first." To illustratc,a machine in contintious 'use- at lb&wpm will 'accumulate I.:Amp Replacement' 1500 operating hourS int-only 2 months. For Machines uSett occasionally -or intermittently, . Four bayonet-ty,pe lamPs for the some kind oflog is needed-to keep track of total teletypewriter .are located beneath the cabinet operating hours. dome. Mainwnance afid-copkillizmination lamps are 6-volt lamps- in a circuit- supplied byo a transformer at the rear of the -cabinet. These OPERATOR'S" EMERGENCY lamps are inStalled on either side of :the riglit MAINTENANCE front ,doMe doo? and aboxe the typing perforator (three lamps) and the margin indicator or trid-of-line lamp (one lamp)-at the ,Even though some teletype-operatorsmay extreme right of the dome. All Jampsare -have receivecler maintenance training,they can accessible when the doMe is .raised. The be authorized to perform emergency: accompanyinglamp replabement data table gives- maintenance to the extent of rePlacing fuses and the location and electricaF characteristics of lamps: lamps. Symptoms of Fuse Failure F Maintenance Keytoard Reperforator Blown Valtie Comment** lamPs motor motor . . ..-- . -fuse (amPs) . . / Otit Off Operating 060 6.25 ,t, In power ., distriliution 8 , # ' panel. ... - On Operating Off ' F230 ., 4 On typing - . .- repgrforator base. . . WARNING: Never replace" a fuse With one of higherratingexcept in emergency or battle condi- tion.when continued operation of equiPment ismore imPortant than possible damage. - if a fuse burns out immediately after replacement, donot replace a second fuse until the cause is cbrrecte6. . . e 193 a * a< Chapter 16MAINTENANCE AND SAFETY Fuse'Locaticin = Reference deSignatibil symbol Location Protects Amps VOlts F800 In power Main a-c 6.25 250 distribution. panel supply P2300 Pntypipg Reperforata 4 250- xeperfoxator_base_ a:c-SuPPly; Lamp Replacement-Data , Reference , . designation Function Location . Volts Wags Amps B,ase symbol . . . _ a . . 14250 o Maintenance Left of 6-8 1.14 Bayonet, 9 and copy Tight front . double illumination cabinet . ;- contact ' dome door. .. a , 14251 - ...... do.. .. Right of .do .. . .do. do. . light front - a s cabinet dome door. . - , - ., . . 14252' ...,.5do .:.. Left frOnt- .do. .do. .do. , do. door of- . cabinet. ti . dome:_- , 14350 ...... , R;ght front .do. .do. .do. d. ' . s end Of , cabinet a -'doine.. ,t .," TYPEWRITER PREVENTIVE a.Be sure yOur typewfiter is properly MAINTENANCE placed. on the desk, or secured to the Well tyPe, of desk, so that it. will not,fall. 'Your typewriter may be heavy and rugged b.In lifting a typewriter, grip it by its case, lOoking, but. itis really a delicate instrument. NEVER by itt carriage. Treat it like one and give it daily care. A keep your typewriter coverea when not in macliirie infirst -class conditiOn is easier and use. Always cover it or close it into the desk at quicker to operate and turns out better-looking the end of the day: work. c.KeeP it clean by wiping the outside with a soft 'dry cloth and dusting -the inside with a -Observe the following routine procedures: Jong-riandled brush, 297 4 <-3 COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN '0 3 d.Clean the type daily with a stiff brush, reMoving a plug' from a jack by grasping the and it s'eldoth will be necessary to use chemicals. ping, nol the cord:Avoiding kinks_ or other e.Take care in eraSing to move'the carriage strains in the córd; avoiding rough handling of to one side so,that erasure crumbs will not fall microphones and headphones; and avoiding into the mechanism. - eXpOsure to moisture. Carbon microphones may At regular intervals you should give the be dried out with heat lamps; periodic heating typewriter arnore thorough cleaning. Frequeney may prevent acculnulatIon ofindisture. -of these CIO-Zings dePend on the amount of NOTE:, Do not blow into a microphone. 'use the typewriter receives and the amoluit of This practiceis resprted to much too uften when dust in your ofilce atmOsphere. In general, it is testing a microphone. This practice should be recoMmended that tile following 'procedures be avo.ided to ensure longer life for the carried out weeldy:' microphone. f.,Clean the" carriage rails and Marginal stop Repair of headphone and microphones bar, using a clot slightly mcsistened with oil. consists :largely Of replacing or repairing plugs, g Move the carriage back and forth in the prOcess. jacks, and cores. Always try to repair defective g. -Clean the platen or cylinder. ,RemoVe,if equipment first.If you are unableto,. repair possible, and wipe with a Cloth moistened with a. defeetive equipment, tag itas defective and then very small amount of denatured alcohol or uSe ready ,spares. When time permits, see that cleaning fluid. bc; not wipe off; allow 'fluid to defective phones are rep,aired: evaporate. .h.Clean type, using a short-bristled type brush. Tap,lightly with the points of the bristles SAFETY AND ACCIDENT to locisen the dirt; then brush- uP lightly. PREVENTION i.Brush tyPe bar segments arid :,clust the interior of The machine. Use a long-handled When working with radio, or with any bruSh, brushing toward the front,of the electronic equipment, one rule that must be machine'. By elevating a few type bars at a time, stressed strongly is: SAFETY FIRST,. Dangerous you can mach into the mechanism. DO NOT voltages energize much of the equipment with foRcg THE BARS, Use a softcloth alternately which you'work. Power supply voltages range up 4 with brush. to 40,000 volts, and radiofrequency voltages are j.Wipe the sides and back of the machine. even higher. Alivays 'clean the typewriter before cutting a Special precautiOns are also necessary Mimeograph stencil.; If the typewriter ribbon' because electrical fields, which exist in the lever is set for stencils (usually a white dot on vicinity .of antennas and antenna leads, - may the machine),-both the type and the ribbon will introduce fire and explosion hazards, especially .be cleaner than otherwise. where flammable vapors are present. Additional preCautions -are needed to warn personnel If operating" instructions for your typewriter working aloft to prevent injuries from falls and are- available-, the *ill help you identify parts stack gases. and give you' additional informition.about care. Safety precautions outlined in this chapter If further oiling or repair work is needed, the are .lbst intended to supersede infoimation. given machine should be turned over to a typewriter in instruction books or in other applicable, Mechanic. instructions :for installation .of electronic equipment. Additional 'safety information is MAINTAININb HEADPHONES colitained in NAVSHIPS 0967-000-0100 AND MICROPHONES (Section 3) Electronics Installation and Maintinanie Book (EINB). The best way to maintain headphones and &lost accidents are preventable. However, microphones is to ensure that they are handled through ignorance or misunderstanding, there is properly. Proper handling includes hanging up a common belief that they are the inevitable headphones_ by their straps, not by the cord; result of unchangeable circumstances or fate. 298 19,5- ,* Chapter 16MAINTENANCE AND SAFETY This belief is untrue beciuise it fails to consider accident ptevqn..tioh is_the ..butiness- of every the basic law of "cause and effect" to which individualnot just a delegateiffew. accidents are subject: In other words, accidents As an individual, you.have a responsibility to do not occur without.a cause; most accidents are, yo.urself and to your shipmates to do your part the direct result Of some deviation from in preventing accidents. You must always be prescribed safe operating procedures. alert to detect and report unsafe work practices A Preventable accident may be traced to and unsafe conditions so that they may be caUses at: basic as the heredity and early corrected before they cause accidents. environment of the individual. These causes may Each individual must: be revealed> in the form- Of personal characteristics which permit the individual to a.Report_ any condition, equipment. or perform an unsafe act or permit a hatardous material which_he considers to bc unsafe. condition to exist: when an accident results, the b. Warn others whom he believes to be "cause and effect" sequence is completed. end a nge red bY known hazards or by One purpose of.safety rules is,to remind the their failure to observe safety precautions. individual of the dangers inherent in his- work. c. Wear protective clothing or use Training-in the observance of safety precautions protective equipment of the type approved for can be instruinental in avoiding preventable- the safe performance of his work or*duty.,., accidents and in maintaining a work d. Report to his supervisor any injury or environment which is conducive to accident-free evidence of impaired health .occutring. in the operation. Operating procedures and work' cOurse,Of hisAvOrk or duty. methods adopted with hazard prevention ar a e.Ex-ircise reasonable caution as specific criteria do not expose personnel approkiate to, the situation in the event of an unnecessarily to 'injury or occupational health emergency or other unforeseen ,haZardous hazards. Accidents which are. about to happen condition: .can be prevented if the "cause",is detected and appropriate remedial action is taken., ,Post,accident investigations have revealed ,that themajority ofaccidenti result froM unsafe practices or acts, most of which are known RESPONSIBILITY beforehand to be unsafe and in violation of safetY practices, rules, regulations, or directives. Other huMan factors found, to be the cense of Responsibility for,the Safety of personnel is accidents include fatigue, monotony, vested in the cornminding officer, so he preoccupation .atacritical monient necessarily delegateS: his authority to the (inattention), mental and/or physical problems, executive officer,. fifety officer and other improper supervision, lack 'of motivation and sUbordinates tO ensure that all prescribed safety such. Because of various factors, individuals do precautions are understood and strictly not always act (or react) as they were trained, enforced. The cOnimanding officer attempti to instructed, or directed to act. Results of this insure that the perSonnel under his jurisdiction condition, most probably., will tle_an accident are instructed' and drilled in applicable safety because of "humarrerror:" :precautions; he requires that adequate warning signs be posted in dangerous areas; and he Human error includes all the actions or establishes a force to see that such precautions inactions of an individual having a bearing on an are being obserVed. Itis the responsibility of accident or on an unsafe practice that can lead supervisory personnel to see that precautions are to, an accident. To reduce human error as a strictly adhered to in their own work areas, since predominant cauSe of accidents,itisthe they are responSible to the commanding officer. responAjlity of every individual to acquaint Furthermore, each individual concerned should himself with the environmental hazards strictly observe all safety precautions applicable surrounding him. He should condition himself to to his work or duty. Thus, it is obviOur that be alert, both mentally and physically, so that e. 19 6 /g1 , ---COMMUNICATIONSTECFINICIAN- .0-3-A he can protect himself and others by not as 100 ohms from temple to temple' if the skin is foolishly or unnecessarilY ekposing himself .tq broken. Volt fox yolt, DC potentials are hazards. normally not as dangerous as ACas evidenced ACtidents do not happen withouta cause; from the fact that reasonably safe "let-go "when. each individual can be made. aware Of the currents" for 60 hertz alternating current is 9.0. hazaids inVoLyed With his wotk, fewer accidents milliainperes for _men and 6.0 milliamperes for will result: Accident preventiOn must be wom-n while the corresponding values for_direc! Continuous effort in which each individual gains Current are 62.0 milliamperes for men and 41.0 experience and knowledge through day-to-day . milliamperes fog women. - association with co;workers who are aware of the hazaids of their environment. SYMPTOMS OF Remember! As an individual, you have 'a ELECTRIC SHOCK responsibility to youiself and-toyour shipmates. You must always be alert lo.detect and report In the event of severe electric shock, the hazardous Work practices and conditionsso that victim is usually very white or blue. His pulse is they can be corrected before they cause extremely weak or entirely absent, accidents. In all cases, when working on or near unconsciousness is complete, and burns are electrical Or electronic. equipment, learn to usually present. The victinf.s body may become respect your equiPMent'S potential for rigid or stiff in a few minutes. This condition accidental damage' and injury. can be caused by Muscular reaction to shock, and it shall not, necessarily, be considered as rigor mortis. Therefore, _artificial respiration ELECTRIC' SHOCK shall be. administered immediately, regatdlest of body stiffness, as recovery from such a state has Fundamentally, current rather than voltage been reported. Consequently, the appearance of is the criterion of shock intensity. The pasage rigor Mortis should not'be accepted as a positive of even a very small current through a vital part sign of death. of the human body will cause death. The voltage necessary to produce the fatal current is ;dependent upon the resistance of the body, ItESCUE OF VICTIMS contact conditions, the path through the body, 'etc. The probable, effects of shock are shown in The rescue of electric shock victims is the accompanying table. dependent upon prompt administration of first aid. AC, 60 Hz DC (mA) (mA) Effects WARNING 0-1 04 Perception DO NOT ATTEMPT TO 1-4 4-15 Surprise ADMINISTER FIRST AID OR COME 4-21 15-80 Reflex action IN PHYSICAL CONTACT WITH AN, 2140 80-.160 Muscular inhibition ELECTRIC SHOCK VICTIM 40-100 160-300 Respiratory block BEFORE THE POWER IS MUT OFF. Over 100 Over 300 Usually fatal OR, IF THE POWER. CANNOT BE SHUT OFF IMMEDIATELY, Itis imperative to recognize that the BEFORE THE VICTIM HAS BEEN resistance of the human, body cannot be relied R EM OVED FROM THE LIVE upon, td.pievent a fatal shock from I i5 volts or CONDUCTOR. even lower voltagesfatalities from as low at 30 volts have been recorded. Tests have shown that body resistance under unfavorable conditions When. attempting to administer first aid to may be as low as 300 ohms and possibly as loW an electric shock victim, proceed as follows: 300 197 Chapter "1-6L--MAINTENANCE AND SAFETY . a.Shut off the power. Ifjhe power cannot INTENTIONAL SHOCKS be- shut off, use a well insblated axe-and cutthe ARE FORBIDDEN poVver cable. if Such cable-is involved.- Intentionally takinga shock at any voltage is b.If the power canncit be' deactivated,per always' dangerous and isSTICTLY Step a, remove the victinvjminediately, FORBIDDEN. Whenever it becomes observing the following precautions'. nedessary to check a Circuit to see if itis alive,a test lanip,, --a voltmeter,: or SQUie other Protect yourself with dry insulating appropriate _ indicating' device shall be used.The indicating material. device employed Shall be suitable for obtaining Use a dry board, belt, dry clothing,or the desired withoUt jeopardizing other available non-conductive material personnel; and_if necessary, irshould be used in to free the victim (by pulling, pushing, conjunction with authorized safety devices. or rolling) from the power-carrying Never implicitly trust insulating material:treat object. DO NOT TOUCH the victim. all wiring as though itwere bare of insulation. Insulating material haSSailed before andmay fail ,againbe on the alert! ° c.Immediately after removal of thevictim from the powerzcarrying object,administer RUBBER FLOOR MATTING artificial respiration, as described laterin this chapter. To eliminate likely -causespofaccidents and to afford maximum protection^to personnel- from the hazards Associated with electricshock, GENERAL SAFETY only the approVed -rubber "floormatting "for PRECAUTIONS AND POLICIES electlic and electronic spaces shall beused. In many instances, after aecidents had oCcutred, investigatibns showed that theoperating When working on eledronic circuits, lOcationsandareas around electric and operational and maintenance personnel must 'electronic equipment were coveredwith pnly -bear in mind that accidents are alwaysready to, strike those yho are careleis. Therefore, general-purpose black rubber floor matting. This gome type of matting should not be used'because its essential precautions must be takenbefore electrical charaCteriStics nol provide, acleqUate starting any work on electronic circuits.For insulating properties 'to proteFt personherfidm example, a technician must alwaysremember the pos?ibilitY of electric shock; alsO, that Prior to working on an electronic the circuit, he Material used in the manufacture of thismattirig must deactivate all powersources to that is not fire-retardant. particular circuit, or use theproper and The careful design and fabrication of the auThorized safety device and procedureswhen floor matting material minimizes the he thinki that it is not practical to possibility secure power of accidents. Hotyever, to_ensure that the safety to the circuit. Such a basic, but :vital, safety lactors'.Which_wpre incorporated in the precalition, as 'wellas other such vital safetY manufacture 'Of the materialiate effeetive, precautions pertaining to the arid proper handling,of that *the Matting is- Completely safe foruse, electronic equipment circuits,are compiled in operation an dv maintenance personnel this subsection. -"These _safety must precautiOns, make certain that all foreign substances,that together Vith those contained in equipment._ could possibly contaminateor impair the techriical' manUals and Maintenance dieletric properties of tht., mattingmaterial am Requirements-Cards, comprise a nuclens for the promptly iemoved from its surfaceareas. For, promulgation of detailed instructions for this-reason,- scheduled periodic visualinspection accident-free installation, maintenance, and and cleaning 13ractice proceduresshould be.. operation of electronic equipment arid facilities established. During visual inspections; personnel ailiore and afloat.- ihould make Certain that thediel.ectjic 301 , /90 . . COMMUilfCATIONS TEGINICIAN .0 3 (i2 properties of the matting 'have not been open electric or electronics apparatimwith.loose impaired or destroyed by oil impregnation", metal objectfs attached td clothing. Stowage or piercing, by metal chips, cracking, or other insertion of tools or other foreign'articles in or ,causei. if itis, apparent that a section or tne .near switchgear, control appliances, panels, _entire -length of matting is defective for any is strictly forbidden.. 'reason, it should beremoved, and replaced Po s t -a c cid ent. investigations _usually have immediately by new matting material. shown that accidents reSulting from: energized - t electronic equipment could have been prevented _NEVER WORK ALONE by adherence to established safety precautions -t arid procedures. Among the established safety 'Never Work on 'electronic eqUipmerit by precautions are the following. yoUrself; have another person (safety.dbserver) qualified in firstaid for electrical shOck _present a.Carefully study the schematic_and wiring atall times. the safety obserVer should also diagrams of the entire CirCuit, noting which know which circuits and &itches control the circuits must be de-energized in addition to the equipment, and-should Ise- given instructions to- main poWer supply. pull .ijie switch immediately if anything b.Oblain permissioti from your supervisor Unforeseen happens. and the Maintenance supervisor tin chacge if it becomes neCessary to work on energized AUTHORIZED equipment. PERSONNEL ONLY c.If approval is given to work on equipment. With the poweL applied, never work Because of the danger of fire, damage tot iilone; always have, an asSistant who can provide material, and injury to personnel, all repair and' or get-help In anemergency. maintenance work on electronic equipment shall ,d. When making measurements or teSt, be done only by duly aUthorized and Aualified always keep one hand= behind your badk or in persons. your pocket, e.Do not reach ino the equipment ENERGIZED ELECTRONIC enclosure..* unleSs absolutely necessary. When this EQUIPMENT must be done, Make sure that approved inulating material and procedures. ge used: Personnel should not' reach within or enter stand on a rubber matting, wear rubber gloves, energized electronic equipment enclosures for and the like. the' purpose of 'servicing ddjusting except 0 when such servicing or adjusting is prescribed by -REPAIWOF official' applicabletechnical manuals (instruction. grti.ERGagE0 CIRCUITS. .,'boOks). and 'then' only with the immediate -assistance of another person capable of Corrective maintenance, or any other type rendering adeqyate aid in tfie event of an of repair work, shall" hot be performed on' emergeriCy. Personnel will be wirnedAo eXercise energized circuits except under emergency extreme caution .when reaching into the conditions which are considered essential by the encloSures of equipment havirigiriternal exposed commanding officer insuch an emergency, the correctiie maintenance of energized circuits high voltage points. the metal shielding shell of *. sOme capacitors, klYstrOns, cathode-ray tubes, shalt be accomplished under the supervisidn of and other components are at high potentials an experienced electronic technician di officer, aboye 'ground, and-every care shall be taken to observe the In addition, be careful ,with loose metal following safety precautions., . parts, tOolls and liquids. No persón shall take a.Proyide amPl.e light for illUmination. loose metal parts, tools or liquids near or above Remove loose clothirig. and metallic ,a'-'starter box or above open electric or ekctronic objects such as bracelets, rings,,etc., from the . equipment. No person-shall he permitted above worker. 302' 199- Chapter M.-MAINTENANCE AND SAFETY .- c.Insulate the Worker from ground with OPERATING-POWER SWITCHES shetts.,7 of ptepolic insulating materialor a suitable rubber lira, depending upon conditions As a general, rule, use- -only one hand for involved. . switching. Keep the.other hand clear. Onlyone d. Cover metah-tools with insuldting rubber switch should be touched at one time byone tape. person: Before Closing a switch, make sure'that: e. Use only-one -liand, if practical, inc- accomplishing the woik. a.The-ciituitis readY and all.parts-irefree. -f..Rubber gloves will be wornon .both b. Men near moVing parts ate notified that hands if at all possible. If not possible,a rubber the circuit is to be energized. This is particulatly glove shall be worn, at leaSt, on the hand not important in cases where rotating antennasare used for handling tools. -energized.' g.'Have men Siationed by -circuitbreakers c.Proper fuses are installed for protection op switches so that the ciicult or switchboard of the circuit. :can be deenergized iinmediately in case of d;Circuit breakersiare closed. emergency. , . C. 11. A,Man qualified in first aid for electric When opening and' closing switches,ease the shock shall be present during the entire period lever or knob to a position where safe arid quick of repairs. * action can be made, and then make 'the final i.If equipment' must be energized after motibn positive and raPid. For switches carrying- removal frOm its normal rack of-mounting, make high current, the break Should be positiveand - certain that allparts, northaly at- ground- rapid. pot entia 1 such aS chassis-th-frame ground For switcli'd enclosed -in watertightcases, terminals, are securely-grounded., siich .as snap switches and multiple rotaiy switches, it is imPortarit to make Aire that the OPERATIIIQ 013.cutrBREAKERS ,switch, has heen operated to ths position .actually intended. Reports have beeri received , Except for operating handles, allparts of -indicating that switch- handleswere not moVed circuit breakers are pornially conductive.,While far enough when transferring circuits ,from opering or closing circuit breakers!' one station- -to another. Consequently,the .switch contacts,wete left in an-"in-bitween" poSition and a.fice only onetand. -the-circuit was actually open, leading to yosiible b. Keep -your _Ilan& clear of parts other, casualty: The cause. was traCed to exCessively than orierat;ng handles. tightened-gland rings on the switch-shafts which c. TouCh only one 'breaker 'handle at a preyepted the action of :the Switch Aetent -time. Mechanisms from being itadilY felt by 'fife : d.- In Cast where positiye. arid negative operatots. breakerS have two handles, closeone breaker at ° 'Main tenon ce:, personnel- should check all a time. -water-tight totary switches usedas "Safety" e.Close thehreaker first and then close the Switches on totating and.transmitting-devices to switches. eniiire that each is operatedto its proper f. Trip circuit breakers -befOre opening positions and. that none ate sticking, inan switches. s ;- "in,betweeni'position. g.Never disable a circuit breaker. h. Ketp- your face- turned away while TAGGING-OF OPEN SWITCHES s-closing Circuit 'breakers. Wearing of safety gogglesis recominended while operling of-closing Before perforMing correctiveor routine non-enclOsed tyPes of 'circuit ofeakeriand maintenance ori :any electricor electronic: switches., equipment, the main-supply Switches of cutout i.Never stand-over a circuit breaker while switches in each circuit,I -from which power .-power;IS on.' could possibly be fed, will, be spewed inthe 303 r 92, COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN'? 3 &,2 open or "safety" position and tagged when repairs of energized circuits are required'. The tag shall -read: "THIS 'CIRCUIT NA'S ORDERED, OPEN FOR REPAIRS AND SHALL NOT .BE CtOSED EX*CEPT BY DIRECT ORDER OF" -(Naine arid- rarikOf penon making; Or directly in charge of rtpairS), or "DANGER7SHOCK HAZARDDO NOT CHANGE POSITION OF DANGER . SWITCH, EXCEPT BY DIRECTION OF" (name t and rank of person making, or directly In Charge, NOCK. of repairs, or as specified by the oPeratiónal/type coMmander). The latter of the .HAZARD two tags described above is shown- in figure 10-i. DO NOT CHANGE When More than one -repair party is engaged POSITION Of 'in the work, a tag for,ea'ch oarty'shalibe:placed on the supply switch. Each party, shall reinove : SWIM only its Own tag.upthi completion of the. work. Where switch-locking -facilities are available, EXCEPT -the switch should be locked in the ,open ORECTION Of (SAFETY) position and the key retained by the person- doing -the work sb ^that dilly he, or a NAMIL person designated by-hiin, can remove. the lock ,RANK- andlestore the circuit..- NAVS141PS42112/1(PteVill.1171 GPO" 1247.271-51M SIA 01010 5:4344000 USE OF STEELWOOL AND EMERY CLOTIt .40.67(6713)C Figure 16:1.Warning tag for Marking open position of switches.- The use of steel wool or emery clOth for cleaning is harmful to the nOrmal operation of eleetronic equipment. Also emery cloth or steel PORTAiLE ELECTRICAL TOOLS wool must never "be used to clean contadts. AND, EQUIPhilENT Considering the harinful..effects ofusing, steel wool in ,electronic equipment' the following improperly wired elfotrical tools, portable. statements show how steel wooFis a menace: . electrical and electronic equipment, test equipMenti ete. are extremely hazardoui; a.Ve-ntilatiO.n currents distribute them especially when they are powered by the ship's where they do the post harm anC magnetic 1 1--v o 1 t ,6 0 -the rtz, siriglerphase ,power. The' materials, often being present,will collect Safety precautions inyolving the use of portable ferrous particles. electrical, tools and equipnientand the policies regarding. 'certain wiring procedures are b. *the use of steel wool -on electronic. contained in the paragraphs' that follow. These 'equipment is not permitted, since residual safety ,procedures and policies will be practiced particles of steel may cause a short circuit, by all personnel. :. , The above statements are clear and to, the WARNIN-07 point. When cleaning electronic part's, or NEVER USE ANY METAL-CASED equipinent, DO NOT 'USE STEEL WOOL OR pORTA BLE '.FQIJIPM ENT, 'EMERY-CLOTH. . APPLIANCE, OR POWER TOOL, OR - ' S. 0. ° 93 Chapter 16--:MAINTENkNCE AND SAFETY . ANY CkBLE Olt EXTENSION operator and maintenance per§onnel with CORD' UNLESS YOU ARE information pertaining to these hazards and to ABSOLUTELY SURE THAT It IS' provide sufficient safety practices which, when ' .,EQUIPPED WITH A PROPERLY faithfully enforced, will aid in the elimination of CONNECTED SAFETY GROUND accidents. CONDUCTOR. The hazards associated with the:use of, CLEANING SOLVENTS zportab,le power tools are electrical shock, bruises, cuts, particles in the eye, falls, The' technician who smoke's while using a explosions, and such:. Safe practice' in the use af volatile ,cleaning solvent is inviting disaster. these' tooli will reduce or eliminate such UnfOrtunately,. many such .disasters have accidents. Listed below are some of the general occurred. For .this reason, the Navy does not 'safety precautions that will be observed when peimit the use of gasoline, benziAt%,- ether, or like yotir Work requires the use of portablepower sol,vehis for, cleaningpurposes, since they tools. present potential fire or explosion haiards. Only non-volatile solvents .shalLte used to clean a. Ensure that all metal-cased portahle electrical or eleCtronic apparatus. poweetools are grounded. o. In addltion to the. potential.hazard of b. Do not uSe spliced- cOilds unless an accidental fire or explosion, most cleaning emergency Warrants the risk involved: solvents can damage the htiman respiratory c.Inspect the cord ,and, plug tor prOper systein, in case ofpralonged inhalation. ,The connection. Do not use any power tool that has following list of "DO NOT's" will serve as an a frayed cord or broken or dainaged-plug. effective reminder to technical personnel, Who d. Make sure that the an/Off SWitch is in mut use cleaning solvents. the-Off position-befOre'insertingor _removing the plug from.thesecePtacle, a. DO NOT work alone-in a poorly-ventilated, 4 e.AlwayS- Connect the 'cord of a. portable compartment.- power tool into- the extension cord before the b. DO NOT use carbon tetrachloride.,This extension c,ord is inserted-into. a live receptacle. iS a highly toxic compound, T.Always unplug the extension-cord from 6. DO NOT breathe directly over the vapor' the receptacle before the card or the portable c&any cleaning sOlvent- for prolOnged, periods. power tooris- unplugged qrom the extension d. 00 NOT spray cleaning solvents on - -cord: electrical windings or insulation. . g.See that all cables are positiOnedso that e. DO NOT apply solvents towarm, or hOt theY"will not constitute a tripping hazard. equipMent since this -increases the toxicity .h. Year ,eye .protection when working hazard. wbere-particlei may strike the eyes. A ' i;After coinpleting.the .task requiring .the The follOwing stepsare., poSitive safety use' of a portable poWer tool, disconnect the pi3eautions which will be followed Nhen pOwer cord as described in.-Steps d arid f and cleaning operations are undeiWay. stoW the tool in itS'assigned locatiOn. - a,Use .a bloWer or a canvas wind -chu'te.to - blow air into a conipartnient in.which a cleaning HAZAIIDOUS EQUIPMENT solvent is being used. AND'M 4,TERIALS b. Open .ali usable port holes drid place wind scoops in-them. This section:provides information pertaining c.Place a fire extinguisher close by, ready to hazardi ,and haiardotis- items of equipment for,uSe. that may cause injury andtin severe casei, -death. cl. If feasible, use water compounds instead Itis the -purpose ,tif this sectihn to suPply of other solvents. 305 o. 202 COMMUNICATIONS TECHNI6IAN b 3 & e.Wear rub er gloves to prevent direct a, 'Carifully read and comply with the contact with Solve ts. instructions-printed on the- container. f.Use goplp when a solventis being h. Do not use any dispenser that is capable , sprayed on perimssible surfaces. of producing dangerous gases of other toxic g,Hold:the nozzle close to theobject being effects in an enclosed area unless the area is sprayed: \* adequately ventilated. c.If a protective coating must be sprayed . . \ . Where waterompounds are not feasible, in an:inadequately ventilated space, either an-air .inhibited Meth I ,chlorOform (I,1, I, respirator Or self-côntained breathing apparatus Trichloroethane) sl allbe used instead of the should be provided. 'However, fresh air supplied dangerous carbon tetrachloride. Methyl from outside the enclosure by use of exhaust -chloroform has a threshold of 500 fans or portable blowers -Ispreferred. Such parts-pemillion (ppm) in air, whereaS' carbon equipment will prevent inhalation of toxic tetrachloride hjis a threshold of 25 ppm. vapors. (Tlireshold is,he point above which the d. Do not spray protective coatings on cOncentration in ar becomes dangerous.) Methyl warm or enerlized equipment, because to do so , chlbrdfOrrn is.anffective cleaner and as safe as creates a tire haiard. can be expectedhen reasonable care, such as e.Avoid contact of your skin with the liquid adequate ventilation and observance of fir.; contained in the dispenser,,Contact with some precautions,, is eercised. When,using inhibited of the liquids being used0 may result in burns, methyl chlorofo m,avoid: dirett inhalation _of while milder exposures may cause only rashes. the Vaporit is tot safe ,for *use, everi with a gas f.Do no,t puncture thdispenser, because mask,, bacause i s-vapor displaces oxygen in the itis pressurized. Injury can result from this air. I A practice. a g.Do not discard used dispensers in i wastebaskets that are to be emptied into an AEROSOL-DIPENSERS incintrator; an explosion of the dispenier May result. Deviatiofro-m .prescribes1 procedures tk.Keep dispenser-s away from direct regarding theselection, application, storage, or sunlight,,heaters, and other-sources of heat. disposal oaerosol dispensers containing i. Do not store/dispensers in an industrial sp ys can result -in serious injury to environment where the temperature is above,the personnel 'because of toxic effecis, fire, temperatine limits printed on the dispenser case. . 'explosion,i1 and so on. Specific instructions 4pOsurf; to high 'temperature may cause the -concerning "the precautions and,procedures that container to burSt. must be observed- to prevent physical injury cannot be /given in this manual. because of the fiJNOS-PROOFED AND _ multiplicity of available industrial sprays. zEIBERGLASSINSULATED WIRES However/, all personnel coneerned with the handling Of aerosol dispensers containing volatile Handling fungus-proofed, fiberglass-insulated substances should clearly understand the hazards wire require's certain precautions to prevent skin invôlved and the importance of exercising irritation. Insulation stripped from these types protectilie measures to prevent personal injpry. wires should be placed in containers to keep it Strict clampliance With the instructions printed, off floors, benches, and clothing. Insulation on the laerosol dispensers will ,prevent many of "dust" (small particles of insulation shed during the aqidents which result,from misapplication, stripping or flexing of the wire) should be mishaqdling, or improper storage of industrial' collected with.a vacuum cleaner. Compressed air sprays,: shall never be used ro reinove "dust" from e basic rules which must be observed to bencheS, equipment, or floors. ensure safety in the use of aerosol dispensers .After stripping or handling fungus-proofed are: wire, the hands and *IS should be washed 306 203 I A. Chapter 16=-MAINTENANCE AND SAFETY thoroughly with soap andAvater. If an itching a.Place the tube thth,Js to,be discardes1: i sensation is experienced, in a good hand cleaner an empty carton, with-its fac down. shauld be used to remove theremaining particles b. Make sure that goggles are.worn: of fiberglass. Scratching of the affected area c._ Carefully break off the locatingpin frOm shall, be avoided. If skin irritationpersists, its base. (See Fig. 1'612.) Medical advice shall then be souglit. d-.With'. a 'small screwdriver Orprobe, break off the tip of-the glass vacuum,seal. CAVIODE-RAY TUBES Cathode-ray tubes (Clas) are, potentially, ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION extremely hazardousitems. Thephospor cOating on their internal faces is toxic and,the large physical size of their glass Electromagnetic radiation (also, referredto ef*elOpes,can 'create as RF eadiation) can be neitherseen nor easily -violent implosions, if broken.Their glass ervelopes are highly evaeuated sensed. Therefore, itspresence ,must be and, Measured by use of specialsensitive inStruntenti, conseq uently, their large surfaceareas are or by theoretical calculations, subjected to considerable force by atmóspheric sa that tile safety pressUre. For example, Ofopersomiel involved,in variousactivities-within, the total force exerted the eleetiornagneric environmentwill be assured. on'the Overall surfade ofa 10-inch CRT is-nearly A discussion, of the various methods Used 2,000 pounds, of which 1,000 to pounds is eXerted sense the presence Of electromagnetic energy is on The face alone. When a CRT breaks,-the high beyond the scope of this:manual.,Hoever,.the external pressure cause§ the tube'to implode importance of remaining alert (burst inwards) and, to- the danger of as;a result, the inner Metal overexposure to electromagnetie radiation parts, glass fragments, .and toxic as phospors are well as to the dangers of otherradiatiqn hazards violently exPelled. is emphasized. Extreme care shall also be takenwhenever disposal of CRTs is necessary.All defective tubes will be stored in such BIOLOGICAL EFFECTSOF a way-that injury tb kICROWAVE ELECTROMAGNETIC personnel: will be avoided. Whena =CRTis t. ENERGY removed from a unit', it shotdd not,be allowedto remain exposed tO dainageor shock on work ,The energy impinging On benches etc., but should be immediately, an- object hi an placed electroniagnetic -field may beseflectedor in the container provided fOr thatpurpose or in absorbed. Only the. absorbed energy coatitutes the container that held -the replacementtube, a biological hazard. The amount-Of penetration 'unfit-disposal: of energy into the bOdy andits absotion ,WARNING ;THE PHO4POR alik.TING ON T-HE NECK OF dRT INTERNAL FACE OF 'THE eig IS ExTkE-M'ELY TONIG: WHEN' DISPOSING- OF A, BROKEN TUBE, ' ' 4 'BE CAREFUL NoT.To COME INTO 11111 CONTACT WITH THIS COMPOUND. x/7-47P\ IF CONTACT IS MADE, CONSULT JA A MEDICAL OFFICER VACUUM IMMEDIATELY, SEAL Before a-CRT is discarded,,it shouldbe made harmless by- breaking- thevacuum glass 'seal. To' accOMplish this, proceed ., 20.320(40) as follOws: Figure 16-2.Cathodkay tube bossstructure, ,* 367 2 0 4 / COMMUNICATIONS TECHNIC* , depends upon the physical dimension's of the eXposure to yadiation. information presently body, the electrical properties of the tissues, ahd available and experience indiCate that, of the the w,avelength of the electromagnetic energy. organs just Mentioned, the eyes'and testicles are For any significant effect to occur, She the 'most vulnerable to ,,microwave radiation. physical sice of the:object must beequivalent to Therefore, the possibilityof becoming partially at least One tenth the wavelength of the radiated blind_or temporarily, sterile is mostlikely., energy. NegleCting other physical measurements Of the hiiman body,41 man's height determines .1* at what wavelength the electromagnetic energy HAZARDS, OF -ELECTROMACNETIC Wiltbe most, hazardous to him. As the RADIATION TO ORDNAKE (HERO) .w4Velength decreases, 'the ,mari'S 'height- , represents an increasingly _greater number ,of The uses of elecpically. initiated ,exPlosive 'electrical wavelengths. Inversely, as the devices are increasing gre,atly,,i.e., for ihitiating ,wavelength increases, the ,man, therefOre, booster rocket igniters and warhead detonators, becomes acless significant object in the radiation for stage separation in multistage rockets', fOr field: Consequently, .the likelihood of the reliable, high-speed ope:ration of switches and occurrence of biological effects on human body valves, and for Many. :other_ purposes, Some increases as -the Wavelength 'decreases (or weapons contain'inOre thin 75 electroexplosive frequeney Increases). Additionally, as the deviees (EEO). Continuous development efforts wavelength becomes progresSively shorter, the ire, directed toward reducing weight and space, ,dirnensions of, parts arid appendiges of the lowering power reqiiirements, assuring positive hurnan body becosne increasingly more response, and -increasing reliability andAfety. significant in terms of the number of equivalent However,, these are not ,alwayS- complenientary. eIectOcal wavelengths. Briefly; the-effects from Microwave ejectroMagnetic radiatirin on the At the'-sarhe time, thepoWdr ,of human body increaselnproportibn tO frequency comMunicatiohsand radar transmitting of the radiated:energy. The higher the frequency, equipment iS being Constantly increaseitind. the ,the :greater .the absOrption by the ha:flan :body -frequency speCtriim broadened. The radio and, consequently the greater tItedanger from °frequency speetrum utilized by the Navy noW exposure tO electromagnetic radiation.. ,extends fyorn 10 kilohertz to about '20,000 When ,e1éotromagnetie:ener0 is'absorbed by megahertz. .litsues--:pf, the body, heat is Produced in the Transmitter power outputs:may approach 10 tissues..1If the organism Cannatt, dissipate this Xilciwattso corothoication. frequencies, and heat-energy as fast as it isproduced,thetliptemal peak power outputs extend to approximately 5 temperature of the body will Tiie, resulting in egawitts at radar fieguencies: daniage to ,the ,tissue knd, if the rise. is . these Vends .Prodube incompatible Sufficiently high, in destruction,of the organism. situations. Transmitters-and their antennas have the .body's ability to dissipate heatsuccessfullY only one purposeto, radiate electromagnetic depends upon many rel4ted, factors, such as energy, whereas the initiating elements of environmental air circulation rate, humidity, air ordnance items needonly to be supplied with the temperature, body metabolic rate, Clothing, proper ani3Ourit of elettrical energy foran power, density of the radiation field, amount of explosion to. take ,place. Several shipboird -energy absorbed,..and duration of exposure. incidents involVin,gy ordnance iteins have be,en Certain organs..of thebody are considered to attributed Vo initiation of their EEDs by be more susceptible than othersto the effects of electromagnetic radiation from the ship?s RF ,radiation. Organs, suclhas the lungs, the transmitting ,equiprnent. Each incident occurred- eyes, thetesticles, the gall bladder, and,portions during shipboard operations while the ordnance of the gastfointestinal tract, are not copied by item was handled normally, Therefore, with an abundant flow Of blood throughthe vascular manyexplosive ordnance, item's, constraints are system. Therefore, these organs are 'more likely required for safety and to ensure reliable to be daMaged by heat resulting from,excessive performance. 308 # 7 - Chapter 16MAINTENANCEAND SAFETY Td ineet,the gsowing need fornew shipboard hazards? Is it for the safety of personnel-and procedures to reduce the hazard not to ordnance solely for: passing material andadministrative equipment from RF radiation, the Naval Sea inspections? Surely, but inspection 'Sys t,e ms Cammand (NAVSEASYSCOM) requirementS has must also- be inet.It's policy! However, this stionsOred test's which, coordinated withstudies policy exists for a very goodmasonto ensure :byotheragencies, have enabled the forthation of personnel safety! new guidelines and t estrictions for handling A frequent discrepancy notedon material electrically, initiated ordnance equipment.The basic problem: in determining and administrative inspections is theuse of an ordnance improper, or the complete absence of,'Manger system's susceptibility to RF radiation liesin the Iligh Voltage" signs in spaces evaluatiOn ,of the antenna-like couplings or on equipment that where dangerons electrical shockhazards exist. :Pxist between illuminating fields and:thevarious To satisfy material and administrative EEDs employed in the system. RFenergy May inspections, .and at the same time enter a weapon-as a Wave radiated to ensure ,thrOugh- a personnel safety, the folkiwingminimum luile or crack in the, Weapon skin.RF energy: requirements apply. niay also ,be cOnduCied into- the weaPon by the firing leads or other wiresthat penetrate the a.One "Danger High Voltage."sign shall be weapon enclOstne. The precise probabilitiesof mounted within each entranceOfeach electronic EED act uation are relatively.unpredictable, space and: any Other space containing being -dependent upon variables offrequency, perManentlYinstalled and/or portableelectric. field Sstrength, ,geometricorientation, or electronic equipMent which afforda shock environment, and metallic or personneloontacts hazard:of 70 voltsor above. A space containing with ordnance and ,aircraft. Actuationof an two entrances reqUired two sig-ni,etc. The EED is often undetectablewithout disassembly mounting of each sign must'be ina conspicuous of weapons. The mott susceptibleperiods are location So it will be in view of allpersonnel during assembly, disassembfy loading,unloading,' upOn their entering such spaceS. Excluded. frô'm :or testing in electromagnetic fields. The miist this requirenientare living, eating, storage, effests of premature actuationare supply, and other habituate-typespaces which dudding, reduction of reliability,or propellant have Only lighting, conyenience, andventilation ignition. In the :very wOrstenyironments-there.is circuits. a low,. but -finite probability of warhead b.Switchboards, radio,antentias and tuners, detonation.. and like equipments having exposedterminals-at-Tr- potentials Of- 70 vOlts and above;must, in WARNING SIGNS AND POSTERS addition 'to being cagedor otherwise protected from, accidenlar contact by personnel, have 'Warning signs and ,suitable guards will be a "Danger :High Voltage" sign displayeaon each .provided _for preventingpertonnel 'from sideof the cage and on each door accidentally' coming in:cOntact with or entrance of dangerous the cage. "Dead-Front" type switchboardsnot voltages, for warning personnel of possible enclosed in a cage or mit havinga protective presenCe Of explosive:vapors and RF radiation, barrier do not require display of "DangerHigh for.Warning personnel: workingaloft of Voltage" signs. poisbnous effects of stack gases, and forwarning of Other -dangers whichmay cause injuries to The "Danger High Voltage" sign personnel. EquipMent installations ;.skiduld shown, in not figure 16-3, is 7 inches by 10 inchesin size and be considered complete until- 'apPrdpriate made of 18 gauge sheet steelthe warning signs have been conspicuously largest of posted. available "Dzyigerliigh Voltage"signs. HIPHVoLTAGE RADIO FREQUENCV WARNING SIGNS' RADIATION " HAZARD WARNING SIGNS What is the ultimate goal forthe posting of There: are six radio frequencyradiation signs which portray the danger ofshock hazard warning signsas shown in Figure 16-4. 309 a6 -/ COMMdNICATIONS TECHNICIAN 'CI 3 & 2 *lb 9 40.67(3i) 16-3.:High voltage 'warning sign. Instructions as to where these signs are to lie re-establish breaping, and external heart posted are included in, the iflustration of eac massage tor-eestablish- heart beat and blood, sign. cirCulation. To aid a victim Of electrie .ShoCk, after removal.from,contact with the electricity, immediately, apply, mouth-tolmouth artificial RESUS6ITATION AND respiration. Also, if there is no pulse, . ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION immediately apply heart-massage. Do not waste iarecious seconds carrYing the victim from a .Atsuitableintervals, the competent cramped, wet, or isolated-location to a roomier, authority shall reqiiire that all personnel, who dryer, frequented location, ir so desired, you engage in the operation and maintenance of may breathe into the victim% mouth through a electeonic e q uipm en t,derithnstrate their cloth or a handkerchief placed over his face. If praCtical knowledge in the application of assistance is available, interchange the task of resuscitation and artificial respiration respiration and heart massage. prodedureS. lie, also; shall arrange for any, additional -training, if he deems that itis ,Cardiae Arreit (Loss neoessary, so that all personnel will, attain of Heart Beat) prOndiericy in resuscitationfechniques. , If'a subjeCt is a vict:in of electric shock, and RESUSCITATION FOR has no heart beat, he most probably has suffered ELECTRIC swot a cardiac arrest. This condition can be verified by a coMplete absence of pulse at the wrist or-at Artificial resuscitation, after an electric the neck. Additionally, the pupils of his eyes shock, in'Oudes artificial respiration to will be very dilated, respiration will be weak or , 310, .2_01 0 WARNING WARNING RADIO AIME- NEY RADIATION RADIO FREQUENCY RADIATION HAZARD WO NOT aftme rift° T T.14,11. CAA.. wt.*. _ am, .ftw ft.. SIMKO VOTOUIINCTWw. NAT ft°, YANK N5100 10 FUEL ICAPOWS %not 0.15ii54 . 5551? r.!orsoftwetzeur:er sft SPANK TING IWO. fir OPMIONNIOTIO Wit 1ft VOLTAGES INDUCT° ON m SC »um. 0111:Cfs eftlamO0141601 OVW.WS .gwoftft Wftai.M.. WOK.' . lefts mftn Tift.ftftinftw %Nov( Fuel. .** T ifto e Tr.eons /* , LOCATIMION RADAR ANTENNA PEDESTALS. LOCATION*/ A SOMALI LOCATION IN VIEW OF LOCATION: AT FUEL HANDLING AREAS MOO ARE . DECK FORCE PERSONNEL. - "INJECTED TO RF RADIATION. REQUISTION:No/soars wirassio RECO:SITIO* NAVSIOS 047-315MIO. REQUISITION: NAVSIIPS067,315.1010. S;E: Ar X 04" SZE: 111FrK SZE: Ar 1.4 WARNING WARNING,_ HAWINISOTO7411. 110 RADIO FRE ENO' KAM DON HAZARD NANO FREQUENCY RADIATION HAZARD 11...10511 TIPS 51.11. INT OE sifts 51.1.1 TO tolftwwfty 555 ricer THE ONTITTOW. MOS*ewes RAM QUAramo WFAREHRNIRANAGDI KIN OW AISOCIATE ANTENTIA. Oftlftlft TO 55055 PtellOftott 1051100 T 1.551010051. 1ITTS **- 555 11/3$C T rew eVOIT OOftetIONS 114410011050 55054111 scii,voots viromuommi 56 BEVIND THS SL InsitSEAN TIP VIT SEIM POINT 1, tea 4.5TIOM11. $555 Mr 0/ft....ftftftftell40005 LOCATION: C..çOW ADJACENT TO, RADAR SET , CONTROL. LOCATIOK IN RAMO TRANSMITTER ROOM IN LS/CATION. AT EVE LEVEL AT THE FOOT OF ALL ISATMLE LOCATION FOR FULL VIEW LADDERSOR OTHER ACCESSES TO REQUISITI011i RAMPS 1/%74OS DV OPERATION PERSONNEL. ALL 11011ERVIMSTS AND SUPER: MOMIRES MEN ME SUSJECTED SZE: MEMO*KowaMain40.4 TO HAZARDOUS LEVELS OF RADIATION. .# NOTE: REFER TO RE RADIATION HAZARDS MANUAL , SZE: Ant Or awasmattNAVIIIPS SWIM* 11AVSIPSIONIMS4IN FOR INSTRUCTIONS aziE ant ar TO NITERPERT OR INSERT ENTASSI 40.67(76E) Figure 164.Radio frequintir radiation'hazard warning signa. 209 .w.0 208 ...00 COMMUNICATIONS TECH/4ICIAN- 0 3 & 2 stopped, and hi may have the appearance of a c.With the arms nearly straight, rock dead person. Under these conditions, severe forward so that a controlled amount of your brain damage will occur within four minutes, body's weight is transinitted through your arms unless the circulation is reestablished by and hands to the breastbone of the victim. The application of cardiac massage. amount of pressure to be applied depends on the victims age. However,, it should be applied as Closed Chest Cardiac Massage smoothly aspossible. The chest wall of an adult victim should be depressed 2' to 3 inches with This method has been widely adopted each pressure application. because it is practical and it Can be learned easily d. Repeat application of pressure by anyone who is properly instructed. The approximately 60 times per-7minute, object of the closed_chest cardiac massage is to e.An assistant should be ventilating the squeeze the heart through the chest wall, victim's lungs preferably with. pure oxygen thereby, emptying it to create a peripheral pulse. under intermittent positive pressure. If oxyger. is This must be done approximately 60 times per. not available,li"eshall administer Minute. mouth-to-mouth resuscitation. Howeyer. closed chest massage will cause some ventilation of the lungs. Therefore, if you are alone yourmust Resuscitation Procedure concentrate on the massage until help can arrive. f.Direct other assistants, when, availahle, a.Place the victim 'on his back; a firm to:, keep checking the patient's pulse. Use the surface, such as the deck, is -preferred. Expose leak- pressure that will secure an effective pulse the subject's chest. beat. The, Pupils will become snialler when the b. Kneel beside the victim; feel for the cardiac massage is effective. lower end of the vidtim's sternum (breastbone). g.Pause eccasionaily to determine if a Place one hand across breastbone so that heel of spontaneous heart beat has returned. the hand ,cOvers, the lower part, and place the h.Precautidns. Make every effort to keep second hand on top pf the first so that the the hands positioned as described in Step 2, in fingers paint toWard the neck, is in Figure, 16-5. order to prevent injuries to the liver, ribs or 4.224 Figure 16:5.Resuscitation prOcedure. 31210 imapter 1 bMAINTENANCE AND SAFETY i other' vital organs. Since the heart cannot the mouth, remove it quickly withyour-fingers recover unless supplied with oxygenatedblood it or a cloth wrapped around your fingers. is essential that cardiac massage be administered, simultaneously with mouth-to-mouth a.Tilt the head back so the chin is pointing respiration. Whenever there is onlyone rescue upward, (Illustration A). Pullor push the jaw worker available, the cardiac-massage must be into a jutting-out.position(IllustrationsB interrupted every 30 seconds and C). or so, for These maneuvers should relieveobstruction of administration of rapid mouth-to-mouth the air-way by moving the base ofthe tongue respiration for three or four times. away froth the back of the throat. b, Open your mouth wide and ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION place it -- tightly over the victim's mouth. At thesame time, pinch the victim's nostrils The mouth-to-mouth (or shut mouth-to-nose) (Illustration D) or close the nostrils withyour technique of artificial respiration isthe most cheek (Illustration E). As an alternatiVe effeetive, methOd of the resuscitation method, techniques close the victim's Mouth and placeyour mouth for emergency ventilation ofan individual of over the note (Illustration F). Then blow into any age who has stopped breathing. whenever the victim's "mouth or mote. Air special breathing ecjuipment may be blown orh.e lp from through the victim's teeth,even though they another person ate not available. may lie clenched. The first blowing efforts People who-are trained in basic first aidonly, should determine whetheror not obstruction , usuafiy- do not, have theexperience, spedial exists. raining, or the required special equipment to 6.Remove your month, turnyour head to istinguish whether lack- of breathing :::a result side, and listen 'for the return 'rush ofair that f disease Or acciderit. Therefore,some forth of indicates air. eXchange. Repeat the blowing aktificial respiration shouldbe administered at, effort. For anadult, blow vigirouslyat the rate, -tlje.earliest possible moment. of 12;breaths per minute.. ". Any means that Will obtain andMaintain an d. ,y(iti are noi getting air exchange, open- air pasSageWay from thelungs to the recheck the 'head and,jaw -position, It rnOuth and' provide for you still an alternateincrease and do, not get air exchange, quickly turnthe victim. decrease in the. size 'of the chest, internally'or on his side and administer seyeral sharp blows- externally,,will move air in and out ofa 1 - n orHireathing ;person. Mouth:to-mouth between the shOulder blades in the hope of dislodging the obstructing matter(Illustration resturation -is an excellent emergenCy,technique G). Again Sweep your ,fingers throughout;the which serves this purpose well.In addition to viCtiin's,mouth to remove foreign matter. the ,advantage of prOvidirgpressure to inflate the vidtith's lungs immediately, ,this'technique provide§ the reseuer with accurate information NOTE .on thei.volume, pressdre, and timing of effOrta needed, Those who do riot wish to corhe into diredt . WhIen- a person is uncoriscious and qot contact, with victim may holda, cloth overilie tireathinA, the baseof the *tongue tends to press victim's mouth or nose and breathe ,-* against; \and block, the upper air throughit. passageway. The cloth does not, significantly, affectthe 'The procedurei-described below should 'proVide exchange of air: . .for an o4en-air passageway when a.lonerescuer must ;perform aritifitial respiration. Back-PresSure Aim-Lift Method 'Mouth-to-Mouth Refer to Illustrations A through E,ofFigure Meth'od for Adults 16-7..For this method of artificial respiration, place the victith in aprone position (Illustration . . Refer tO Illustrations A through G of Figure A). Bend his elbows and place hishands one 16-6. First,l, if there is foreign Matter visiblein upon the other. Turn his face to one side and 313 1. 7 COMMUNICATIONS, TEeHRICIAN .0 3 & 2 ft 0 0. 4.224 Figure 16-6.Mouth-to-mouth respiiation method for adults. place his cheek upon his hands. Quirkly.sweep careful not to obstruct his breathing. Place your your rmgers. into the victim's mouth. to, remove hands upon the flat of the victim's back in such any froth or, particles,,while drawing the tongue a way that the heels of your hand lie just below forkvard. I),O NOT waste time, in- loosening the an imaginary line between his armpits. With the victim,s *thing or Warinirig t'he vietim;-this can tips of your thumbs just touching, spread,your be"..done', by, ,an assistant while artificial fingers downward .(Illustration B). 'respiration-4, in Process. -Kneei'dn' eitber the riihf or left knee by the For the .COMPRESSION PHASE head of the.:victim, facing him. Place'your knee (Illustration C), rock forward until your arms at the, side ,of the victith's head, close' to his are approximately vertical, and allow the weight forearrii. Place your other foot near his elbow. If of the upper, part or your body to exert a slow, it is,more ,com fortable, kneel on both knees, one steady, even, downward pressure. This forces air on eiffier side' Of the victim's head, being very , out of the victim's-lungs. Your elbows should be , ,`, , Chapter 16-MAINTENANCE AND SAFETY ,OP EAATOR'S HANDS OPERATOR'S OPERATOR'S, RIGHT FOOT LEFT KNEE ,POSIttOk.OF ':SUBJECT " . . To Begini3ack-Presspe7 Rock-TForivatt Arm:-Lift Method tPlate Airitil -Arms-are Hands on, Victim's Bath AbOdt-Vertjcit. as Shown V PDSITION .OF OPERATOR 0...COMPRESSION PHASE - 4 Grasp Victim's Tack .,Oatkwardt Arms Slightly Keeping-Your _Aims:, Above Elbows. Stralght. lispeatCyclo.. 0 ,:t3ifb- #0011401!fgett a PO.SITIok'FOR, EXPANSION- PHASE ,EXPANS)ON'.0HASEI - ft ,6 'Figure 16-7.Back-Oreeiiire arm-lift method, ,. > 315 213 r 'COMMUNICATIONS 'TECHNICIAN, 0 3 kept -straight and the pressure Should:be exerted beiriergize circuit for the affected almost-directly dpWnwardronthe.back. , equipuient..Every radio- transmitter has For trip..,g )(For !ON KiAst,-(Illuitrations, an EMERGENCY OFF switch that and -E), release- the pfessure avoiding a final rethoves all power from equipment. In thrust, 'and- eminence' to rock slOwly backward. addition to local power switches on _Race your hand Upon, the victirn!s _argils, just equipment, the power supply to all abbVe -his, elbows (IlluStration D)...braw- his mins transmitters and receivers, converters, .upWard .and tOwaicl, you (Illustration E), but and teletypes can.also be secured at apply. just,enough:- tofeI -fesiitance- and power diStribution panels. tenSion at the victinrs shbulders. Do, mit bend b. Spread -the alarm. call the fire your elbows as yOU .rOCk backward. Then, 1:Ower de,partrnint. Aboard'AShore, ship, use the phone the vietim'S-arrnstici the. 0ound. This cbmpletes or imercom. if available,, send another -the fall: cycle. The- arni lift expands-the chest. bY person.,to sound the alarm in accordance Pulling on the chest Mtisclei, arching the.back, ,with-ihth's fife' bill. and-felieVing-the weight-on-the-chest. c.Secure, ventilatiov. Turn off -blowers; , The Odle :Shorild'berepeatedaPprokirnately clOse clqdrs:, - times., per minute at .a steady, .uniforni- rate. d. ;Report .fire',io the 001) by telephone Or p-res:si.o.n, ,phase, 'fake messenger.' ipproiiMately. :the same time as Me expansion, e.Attack .fire with equipment available in ,paSe. With ,felease., periods .of ,miniinurn immediate 'vicinity, such. as portable AiuradOn,. Tjie whole prolcess 's`otild (Cirbon dioxide) continued' withoutfinteritiptiqn extinguishers, revived:. If-possible;'-nothingshoUlneallowed to interfere With:proper and,rythmic motions, . Mien extinguishing an electrical- fire, If a drY, ,bianket is. available,,,slide it under remember that quick actiOn is reqfrired onlY the/ Viotirn witholft interrypting the respiration, deenergiZe the circuit When_this action has-been cycles'. f his maybe acoomplishedeasily with the taken; ,STOPt LOOKI TFIIIIK! The use'of CO2- aid of an, assistant. Cover the victini loosely'by. fireextingiiish'ets. directed at, the base of. the. wrapping the 'ends -of, the blanket aiound- (lame AS always best for allelectricalfires. Between Odes, also loosen, all tight clothing Because carbon _diOxide is ,a dry, noncoriosive, beltsand collars. in.ert- gas, it Will nOt damage' eleCtrical DO riOt, ,,give up hope. Continue to..apply equipment. And,-becausells a:Tioncoi;ductoi-ot artifiCial_ respiration until the victim begins to electricity, it can be used-safely, in fighting fires breathe regularly. Soinetirries, as much asight. that otherwise would preseni ;the additional ciintinuous artificial respitatiOn,is- hazard-of electrib shock. -n edesSary to ;restore reg}ilar.,briathing. Remember, -o,nry- a croctor iqualifieft to- `PORTABI.:E FIRE 4. pronoUnce death under circurnstances, requiring EkTINGUISHERS , ,artificia0esPiration. 'A -revived ,person May.. suddenly, s.top breathing and additional, Some portable 15-pound- cfirbon dioxide fire .respiration --Mak 'be- required, Forthisreason, he extinguiSfiers have a sq.ueezetrip style release must be :Carefuity.%watched., Never leave a valve that is- operated by esiniple hand resusCitate0 person 'alone until- you are certain squeeze-grip. Others- have a, release valve that he is fully Conscious and' breathing operated bY a handwheel at the top. Both valves normally: , have- a locking pin to prevent unintentional discharge of the carbon dioidde. To operat, ELECTRICAL 'ARES observe the folloWing stePs. 3 Any:fire is a potential source of disaster. Ip . Carry fire extinguis,her in an Upright: electrical fifeSthe following-procedures ihould position, and approach fire as closely as be observed. heat permits. (Keep ektinguishet erect 31 6 o :chapter T6-LMAINTENANCE.AND.SAFETY Wvh.i Iv: s i rt:Vit _B ev,..e-a use Or its` from one-or several-of..theseextinguishers is '66nstructioriOt thould.pot be laid on its insuf acient to', redlice. Mow side.) a daigeroUs Inininium-ilie total oxygen,conten t of the:air M b,RemOvelocking'pin from yalVe. a compartment; , )-Osp nozzle horn by itsfianale. (It' Miyond using a carbon dioxideextinguisher insulated to protect your hand 'from should be warned that snow:hlisters the 'e ztreine cold of discharging carbon' skin.and 'causes painful burns -if dllowed to-remainon, the dioRide:) . . v ()poi valvebpturning valve wheelto left If all Offq4-ts,with carbon dioxide Oil (or, squeeze releoSe lever), thus 'opening ,to-put :out i 'fire, fresh water applied.:With,a fog, valve and_ releasing carbon dioxide..A. applicator may be used. Because ofthe fine :the sante time direct the flowtowardvthe diffusion of its -particles, fog 'base of the- fire. Move liorrrslowly reduces-but does, -front ndt entirely retrieve danger,ofelectric shock. "side VtSide; and follOw flames upwardas -In able fires,M,which the *they tecede inner layers of, , in'sulatiOn, (or- insulation covered byarmor) valite as soon as conditions permit. support combustion, the. onl'i% positive and' OOPtinue to open and close Method it 'as of preventing the-fire from.runningThe len,gth of necesSary, The firefighter vmay shu! off the cable IS -to cut the -cableafter it,is -handwheel-tYPe: Valve fOr brief intervalS, deenergized, 'arid ,separate the,wo ends. This without appreciable loss ,_of carbon- preventive.'actiori shcitild be accomplished dioxide: Blit -once Nark seal- iboeh ,with only -carbon, diokide. will leak tools:such ,ks AWay,,in 10 wooden-handledlire_axeS or-insulated pliers. , Minutes or sCP.-.-The squeezelrip'type likewise,rnay be ,tumed'aff.whilein'Usve, 'BURNS-- bt, it wiIl had cc:intents indefinitely- 4 , WitlioUt leakage,. In continuoits, 74uriis and scalds are caused by. operation; the 15-,Pound: -cylinder or exposure-to ;intense' heat, such as-that-generatedby fire, either type will expend its contents iit homb,flash, sunlight, hot solids, 'ab'Out 40 Seconds. hot..gOses, and v- hot liquids._ Contact wi:th electric The discharge shoulnot ,beAtopped too Orient also cause-S:burns, particularly if-the skinisdry.,(Dry soon. hen flame is extinguiShed, coat skin -6,ffers about 20:finieSgpore entire surface engaged in lire "With resistance than, -Moist skin to the' PasSage Vol elect*Current: carbOn dith,dde.snow iworderlo prevent When the slcin is dry, ,therefore; loa4 reflagh. heath* .0 effeots (4ling) are ,gleater,even-thoughtotal dainage,to body< is-less than when-the skin is The firefighter mnst be-Warned thattheVery,. wet) , v _qualities that..pake carbon 'dioxide a desirable' v If should be noted that burnsvand scaldS are eXtinguishing agent -also --Malut dangerous 'to eSsentially ,the sante type 'of heat ;life if tlie: conipartMent should, injury. When beobine filled injury is-caused by dry 'heat,it is called a, burn; ° Avithlt. Certainly., ,,vhen it replacesoxygerilmthe air when Caused by-moist beat, it iscalled a sCald: . tor the 'ektent that CombustiOri-carinbtbe Treatment is the same in both sustained, breathing cannot be cases:. v' sustainecLeither. ClaSsification- Of Nails: 'Burnsare classified Itadicv roOmt do not' have' CO2 systems total. in sevetat Ways-4y the -extent flooding'such as those, installed :in utiifihibitid of the burned surface; hy the depth of -the burn,'and by the, spaces -used for gasoline and- paint Stowage.,v cause of the 'ID*. Of. Consequently, when using 15-pound--pOrtabk these:categories, the extent of body ,surface burned is thePrincipal -fire extinguishers, the firefighter usuallydOes. 'factor in determining not have to consider the -Pobility orhirM,'fov seriousness of the, and alsO.plays-the greatest role,in the caualty's personnel- Because oarbon diOxideviS heavier ChariceS-for survival: than ah-, itdoes not rise, but remains- in_ a pool Shock can beexpected in adults with burns ..close,lo,lhe 'deck. The:quaritity ofps released ofover 15 percent; in small children,_with-burns '311 215* a .0 .COMMUNrCATIONS TECHNICIAN 0 3 & 2 of over JO percent of body surface area. In ice-cold moist towels to the burnecl area. adultS, burns ,to more than 20 percent of the Treatment should be coatinued until no pain is body endanger life. Usually 30-percent,burns are felt who the:burned area is withdraWri from, the fatal If adequate medical treatment is not water. This treatmeqt may last from 30 minntes 'received.' tO as long ,.as5 hours. When avail,a.ble, The depth of injury to The tissueS is spoken hexachlorophene should be added to the water Of in &gives, Firskegree btirns are the mildest, to destroy bacteria After the ice water prodn Ong redness, increased warmth,, treatMent, the regular treatment for burns tenderness, aud mild ,pain. Second-degree burns should follow (discussedlater). ,redden and blister the skin and are characterized 'Relief of Pain: Simple firSt-degree burns by severe pain. Thir°ree burns destroy the that do not cover a large body_area may require slafi and may deStroy musele tissuc and bone in no more than onc or two aspirin tablets to severe cases. Severe pain may be.absent:because 'relieve diScomfort. Severe brims cause extreine nerie endings have been destroyed. The colOr pain, which co.ntributeS to the seVerity of shock. may vary frorn ,white and lifeless, (sealds) to A person who,has suffered exteniive ,burns may black (Charred). be given not 11101i than 14 grain of Morphine to kiwayS remember that the size of aburned relieve the pain'. The injection site should _be area may be far more significant than the depth massaged for a few minutes to help circulate the of a -burn. A first-degree or second-degree bum morphine. (CAUTION: The casualty may have that CoverS a large ,areaJrf the body usually is other injuries. Do not, give morphine to any ,more serious than a small ,th1rd-degree burn. A person who has a head injurY, chest injury, dr firs t,degree sunburn, for, example, can cause who is in deepshock, eVen ifhe is suffering froni death if a large areaot the:bOdy is burned.' extensive bunis.) . In general; the cause& of burni ate Classified Treatrhent for shock: Any person who has as thermal great) or chemical, or as resulting been seriously burned must be treated for shock from sunburn,. electric Shock, or radiation. immediately. Serio s shock always accompanies Whatever the cause of the burn, shoCk always an eXtensive burn,nd is, infaCt, the most results if the burns are extensive. dangerous consequencof, the injury. Start the treatment for shock be orerhaking,any attempt TreatMent of Burns to treat the buraitself. and Ssalds RelieVing the casualty's pain is, of course, an IMPortant part of the tre,atment forshock. After First aid for all burns consists of the easing. his 'Iiiffering, 'place him in a position so folloWing main items: (I)relieye pain; (2).prevent ,that his head islower than his feet. Make sure or treat shock,and (3) preventitifection. that he is, warm enough; do not remove, his ,Ik,electric shock; the burn rnay have.to clothing. icUmediately. Remember that exposure temporarily ignored while resuscitative measures to cold will cause shock to become worse, but are carried out. Otherwise the treatment is the do not ov4r1ieaf hint sathe aS for heat bums. Int burn caSes; an'cxception must be made to Local treatment for chernical burns varies, the rule of Withholding liquids from a patient. A depending On the causative agent. Chernica1 seriously burned person has an overwhelming burns are, discussed more full)", later in this need for liquids; and administering liquids in -chapter. such- casesis an indispensable part oltreatnient Ice water treatment: Clean waterand ice are for shock caused by burns. Give small arnounts riot always arilable, but When they are, ice of sweetened tea, fruit juice, or sugar water, if water (as an .etnergency measure) provides the casualty has.. no internal injurieS,'s immediate relief' from pain and also...seems to conscious, and is able toswallow. lessen the damaging effects Of burns. For. burns Prevention of infection: Second, and Iffecting less _than 20 percent of the body, third-degree bums are, in effect, open Wounds immerse the burned part in.ice water or, where and ,must be Covered to reduce possibility of ,immersion is nOt ,practical, repeatedly, apply infection. Every effort must be 'made to use a 318 21% 4 Chapter *16-41AINTENANCE AND SAFETY # 7 sterile covering, but makeshift wraPpings suchas mit allow absorbent cotton, powder, adhesive dean sheets and freshly laundered towelsmay tape, or other substances that- might cling tothe be used. burn to come in contact with the burn. Never Ointments aiid Other medicines mustnever apply iodine' or any other antiseptics_ona burn. be )put on the, burn wound. Using these agents When you haVe cleared away as Thuchof the may make later treatment by a physician clothing as you cari, dress the bum. Applya difficult or-impossible. single jayer of sterile, fine-mesh petrolatum !Donot open any blisters. Do not cough_or gauze over the burn wound, beginning at .the sneeze near the casualty. If possible, keep-a ...otitside of the -burn wOund and NVorking toward the center) in ,a circular Manner. Next, place pie,te-of,sterile gauze over your mouth andnose while you ,are working pear -the burn victim. bulky fluffs of gauze Over the'burri, witha large Contaminationb), micraforganisms from the padded dresSing as the outer Jayer. Wrap gauze motith and nose is a:frequent cause of seribus strips smoothlY and gently around the dressing.- (arid. posSibly fatal) burn infections. The- bandage should give light, even pressure and imrnobilize the injured part. Once the bandage is Treatment: If the casualtY- isto receive aRplied, it should he- left:alone. Leave it it] place medical attention soon, do nothing Mit than until the casualty receives Medical care., relieve his' pain, tteat for shock, and coverthe Bums of .the eye: Burns of the eye require buni with a sterile Wrapping or clean sheetor special attention. If they are true heat kurns, towel. Do not attempt" treatment of the burn caused by exposure to steam,,. bomb flash, wOund itself. Welding arc, or.anyotner source of intense heat, If More than 3 hours may elapse before- the treat them as follows: set:vides 'of a Physician can be obtained, you shOuld dress-, the burn. Firstremove the a. -Put a few drops of clean mineral oil or ,castialty's clothhig from around and Over the olive oil into each-eye. ' burned area, preferably by cutting itaway. Be b. Cover eadh eye with a small, thick espeCially c4reful not to causefurther-Witty. If compress, and fasten ,the compress in clothing sticks to the burn wound, do not plade with a bandage oran eyeshield. attempt to pull it lOose. Merely cut around the C. Make sure that th,e casualty does not rub part that sticks, and leave it in place. ifany his eyes. matenal suCh as wax, metal, dirt, grease, or tar d. Get medical attention for the casualtyas adheres to the 'burn,v do*not try"to reniove somi is Postihle.- 319 A 21 o 0 s,:/"12:P'ENDpet .:RECEIVER R-39.0A/URR OPERATING:PROCEDURES Haphazard operation-or improper settings of receiver. This signal allows the operator to receiver controls can fesult in poo-D reception. It calibrate his receiver; that is; to ascertain that is important, therefore, to know the Tunction of the reading of the tuning dial sorresponds to:the Y every control. The front panel of a Receiver frequency received. The Calibration circuitry ,of R-399A/URit is shown in figure A1-1. Refer to 'the R-390A permits the operatcli to calibrate the figure A,1-1 when studying the following, receiver at each 100-kHz point throughout the descriptions orswitches and Controls, tuninuange 61 the receiver. In' connectlon with calibration, nOtice the ZERO ADJ knob near the. a.Function switch: The futiction switch frequency dial. When turned clockwise, this serves several purposes: It has a nuniber of knob disengages the frequency indicator from positions, each of whfch is discussed. Its OFF the -KILOCYCLE CHANGE tuning control. The position (Self-explanatory) simply turns off cihbration procedure ,cOnsists essentially orPthe L power to the reCeiver. . -following steps: When the fUnction switch is in. STANDBY position, filament-supply yoltages.are energized, . 1.Tune, the receiver to a point where but plate supply volt'ages are not apPlied to the the frequency indicator dial- shows an exact tubes. This condition readies the receiver for multiple of 100 kHz. instant use without a long war up time. 2.. turn. the ZERO ADJ knob clockwise -The abbreViation AGC stan s for automatic -to disengage the .tuning contr,ols -from, the gain Control. Placinethe funtti switch' in the frequency indicator. AGC. position activates the circuitry, which 3. yith thefuncti'onswitch iUthe CAL automatically adjusts the RF and WI-F amplifier position, turn the -KILUCYtLE CHANGE gain to compensate for, variations:in the level of control to- give the maximum response to the the incorning signal.In connection with the calibratfdri signal. AGg function, notice that the AGC -switch at 4. Turn -th.e Z E'R 0 -A DJ k'n ob the top of the panel has three positions 'marked counterclockwise to reengage thel.tuning control SLOW, NIEDIUM, and FAST, This AGC.switch to the frequency indicator. adji4tS: the rate at Which the AGC circuitry responds to a change in the signal level, The .' b. ,Tuning controls: Two rront -panel knobs correct position of ;the AGCswitcli depends on provideThe tuning control of the.R-3908. TheY the type of signal received. are the MEGACYCLE CHANGE knob and -the The abgalation, Mbc stands fOr manual KILOCYCLE CHANGE knob. ,The MEGACYCLE gain contr,o1. When the function -switch is in the CHANGE knob selects any 1-mHz-bandwidth MGC position, the AGC circuitryis not the tuning range..Turning this knob changeS,the activated; and the gain is controlled manually by reading of the first two digits ofuthe fie.quency means of the RF gain contrcl. indicator. The KILOCYtLE .CHANGE knob When the function switch is in theealibrate tunes the receiver to any 'desired . frequency (CAL) position; a -ilable crystal oscillator within the inezahertz band selected by the introduces a signal at the input circuitry of the MEGACYCLE CHANGE control. The last three 320 r 4. Apridix 1RECEIVEit R-*39.0A/URROPERATING PROCEDUR4 c ANT 1,1K;. KIER LINE GAIN TRIM ADC LIMITER Of CAR,DeR LEVEL MID* RESPONSE b *WO, Keirtv6 Notaskiph GANDW1DTH. ITO KC _RITCH+ FUNCTION s 81.4 III" *14 Is M ti fl El titi 0 ord Is, KILOCYCLE CHARGE MEGACYCLE cApIGE DIAL CAUTION LOCK READ INSTRUCTIONS PACKED WITH EOuIPMENT MORE USING' LISCAL GAIN NT GAIN PHONIES Figure A11.4rontpine(of R:390A/U.R13. digits/of the freuency indicator dial provide-the set tUo narrow, part, of the inooming signal will, kilohertzjeadhlg. The tuning controls actually of course, be lost: adjust the tuning Circuits in.the RF stages and-in d. the 'iotal. oscillator in order to` select thedesired Beat' frequency oscillator: Some radio transmissions, sudh as Moise telegraphy!and FSK statidn frequency andto .proVide.simultaneously lel,etype cuntairi the desired I-F Signal to the I.F portion ofthe no audio freqUeney redeisier. The DIAL LOCK knob Information' when, Theyare receiVed, The is issociated .R-390A is equipped, with 'with 'the tuning, controls. This knob locksthe a Beat Frequency KILOC*YCLE CHANOEcontrol- so that the Oscillator, (BFO)tO pfoduce an audibleoutput if -required. The IEWO is activated by the .frequency setting 'Will no,t, be ghanged BFO aCcidentally. On-Off sWiteh and,the -pitch of theaudiooutput can be adjusted by the'BFO Pitch Knob:- 'c.Bandwidth control: ScSnie transmissions elGain control: The II-390A has three use narrower bandwidths in the RF spectrum front ,pariel :gain -controls. ;The .11F- GAIN cOntrol than' others. Receiversare ,therefore provided permits -manual adjustment of the, gain of the with a dontrolthat allows the operatorto adjust RF and, I-F sections of ths receiver. TheLOCAL, the pass band of the receiver,,sd that onlythe dAIN and LINE GAIN knobscontrol the giin desired bandwidth is receivecf. On the .R-3 of 'the a-f circuits. The LOCAL GAINControls receiirer, this control is ,achieved by adjust the -level of the output to thephonejack. BANDWIDTH KC switch. Itadjusts the tuned The LINE GAIN, controlS the,level of theaudio circnits of the I-F portion, ofthe receiver, output uSed to operate terminal equipment., 'thereby controlling receiver Selectivity, Proper f.Antenna trimmer: The .front panel adjustment of _this control helpsto eliminate control labeled ANT TRIM adjuststhe input noise and interfering signals. If the bandwidthis Cirdukt in such a manner that opthumcdupling 321 21.9 ,s COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN 0 3 & 2. from theantenria to the receiver.can be achieved grounding the antenna and 'receiver audio at-tali-frequency. circuits Whenever the transmitter is energized. g. Audio response-: The AUDIO j.Indicators: Three indicators aremounted RESPONSE :control,. whiceh ,adjusts the on the front panel of the R-390A. The bandwidth of the audio circuits, has two frequency indicator dial indicates the.frequency settings: SHARP and:WIDE. The setting of this to which the receiver is tuned. This dial is of the contrcil depends on -the type of signal rectived. digital-counter ttype, which permits frequency to 4imifer: When _the control labeled _be' read directly with little chance of misreading. LIMITER is,activated, the pperator-can-_Control the -amplitude 0of the _audio ouiput circuits to THE CARRIER LEVEL indicatora meter predetermined limits. The-setting of the limiter measures the level of the RF signalappealing at contrOl :depends-on the type of Signals received. the input Of the receiver. The operator will find A low setting,of Ole Control, for example, would this meter valuable in tuning to the exact be 'desirahle to, prevent loud CrisheS of-static in frequency that gives the strong* signal. It is the output. tvhen.monitoring voice signals.,If the also used to indicate Proper adjustment of the reCeived signal is fsk-modulated; it may be antenna trimmer. The indicator, labeled ,LINE desirable to reMove all amplitude variations by LEVEL monitors the level of the line audio out using a high :setting on. the .LIMITER control. used to drive The terminal, equipment. This For many ty'pes of reception, however, the. meter is placed acroSs the output circuit by the LIMITER-should-nôt be activated. LINE METER switch. The three available values 0 1. -BrealOn: The ON-OFF switch labeled of :meter' sensitivity (voltage required for 'BRE/kJ( IN is used when a °receiver and full-scale deflection) are determined by the transmitter are-operated together as a radlo-set. setting of the LINg METER switch. This meter In the -ON position, -circuits are,.activated for is valuable in maintaininik, the proper output removing,the antenna from ihe receiver and for level when making tape reCordings. 4 a 40 3" 220 et APPENDIX H CONVERTiRCOMPARATOR GROUP AN/URA-17C OPERATING PROCEDURES A11,Controls,normally used during operation are ohen the result of properly tuned receiver. are located the frOnt paneis Of the two Each converter has a small oscillosCOpe mounted identical convertors (figure A2-1). Table A2-1 m the front whibh supplies the operatOr with a lists ll operator's controls by name and visual presentation of the inPut Signal into the function. Other Controls are to be adjusted orily convetter. The scope patterns for correct and by a Maintenande -technician. incOrrect tuning are shown in,figureA2-2. The oPeratOt has a choice-of twO modes of Following i$ a step by step summary of. operation: (1) single-receiver operation or, (2) operating procedures_ -for..singie ,reCeiver diversity operation. operation and diyersity operatic* Ascertain if equipment is :Connected for .Single-Iteceiver Operation. single or,diversity receiver operation. Allow the assóCiated redeiVeri and teletype printer(s) to 1.Turn receiver ind teletype printer power Warni up. Turn the Conimiter POWER switches switches to On. to theON (Up) position- andlalloW a;five,minute wannup TeriOd. 2.Set converter controls;as follows: ',Proper tuning of -the receivers ,ofeeding the a. POWER switch to QN. - ciniyerters is important. Good coMmunications - b. FUNCTION switch to TUNE. POLARITY ,POWER- !WITCH os-i SWITCH 4 SHIFT -FUNCTION .SPiED °$ WITCH SWITCH SWITCH Figure A21.-AN/URA17 frequency-shift conv.rtsr, front panel controls. -.123 .2'721 COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN 0.. 3 & -2 Table A2.1:Frequency shiit converter CV-483C/URA-17 operating controls CONTROL' POSITION f FUNCTION - , LEVEL 'Variabl e, Adjusts the -signal level to the discriminator. 0 to 10 -° , . NARROW Selects the narrow input-filter and discriminator (10 to 200 cps shift width).. SHIFT , WIDE Selects,the wide input filter and . discriminator (200 to 1000 cps shift width). SINGLE Used' for singl e-receiver 'operation. . .FUNCTION TUNE , Used when tuning the receiver (removes \the input signal from teletype printer). , - . DIVERSITY Osed. for diversity. operation. \ NORMAL A1Sed when keying' fail ses 'are of normal . pd:lity. . . POLARITY , REVERSE Used when keying pulses are of reversed polarity. - FAST USed for\igh'.§peed keying signals. SPEED SLOW Used for low speed keying signals. .P"OWER - Off Turns line vo\lage on and off. 3.31.173 , c.POLARITYswitch to NORMAL. indica tr.(If two receiver tuning positions d. LEVEL control.to3. occur, use tronger.) . e. SHIFT swftch to WIDE (for_ f.-Adjust receiver audio output to 60 wide,shift- signals), or to NARROW (for milliWatts.\ iiarrow:shift signals). - 4.Set c verter SPEED sWitch to SLOW for single-chann 1teletype signals or to FAST 3.Set receiver controls as follows: for four-channel, kme-division multiplex. rezeiver_b r- 5.- -AdjustcorNerter LEVEL control until narrow-shift signals ,or to 2:0 kc fOr wide-shift _patternfills spaceetween upper and lower signals. horizontal line§ on crt..,., b. Tune receiver- to desired rf signal. 6.Set converterUNCTION switch, to c.Set receive-r bandwidth to SINGLE. approximately 3 kc fOr wide-shift signals Or to approximately 800 cps for narrow-shift ,sign'als., d. Tune-receiver for strongest NOTE .beat-note. , e.Tune receiver for symmetrical, If teletype printer is printing ,arbled copy, vertically- centered pattern on converter tuning set converter POLARITY switch tREVERSE. 324 2 2 2 .2/3 Appendix 11CONVERTER COMPARATOR GROUP AN/URA-17C OPERATING PROCEDURES CORRECT TUNING INCORRECT TUNING INCORRECT TUNING -NOISE CONTINUOUS SPACE CONTINUOUS MARK CONTINUOUS MARK CONTINUOUS SPACE WITH NOISE WITH NOISE 123.9.3 , Figure A2-2.Monitor oscilloscopepatterns for frequency-shift convertéri., TO SECURE. indicator. (If two receiver tuning: positions Turn converter. POWER switch to Off. occur, use stronger.) T. Adjust receiver audio ,output to 60. Diversity Operation. milliwatts. 4. Set ConVerter SPEED. sWitch to SLOW 1.-Turn receiver and teletype printerpower for single-channel teletype signals Or to FAST switches to On. for four-channel, time-division multiplex. 2. Set controls on one converter as follows:, 5. Adjust converter LEVEL control until a. POWER sWitch to On. pWtern fills space between upper and lower b. FUNCTION switch to TUNE. horizontal lines on crt. c.POLARITY switch to NORML. 6..Se tconverter' FUNCTION switch to d. LEVEL control to 3. DIVERSITY. .e.- SHEFT switch to WIDE 'for 'ide-shift signal§ or to NARROW for narrovo-shiftsignals. NOTE 3. Adjust associated receiver controls as follows: If teletype printer is printing garbled copy, a.SET receiver bfo to 1 kc for set converter POLARITY switch to REVERSE. narrow-shift,sigrols or to 2.0 kc for wide-shift signals. If receiver has agc switch, turn on. 7. Set FUNCTION switch to TUNE. b.Tune receiver to desired rf signal. 8. Repeat stept 2 through 6 for second c.Set receiver bandwidth to conyerter. approximately 3 kc for wide,-shift signals or to 9. If teletype printer is printing garbled approximately 800 cj)s for narrow-shift signals. copy, set conveiter POLARITY switch to d. Tune receiver for strOngest REVERSE. beat-note. 10.,Set FUNCTION switch of Tirst converter e.Tune receiver for symmetrical, to DIVERSITY. To secure turn power switches vertically ceniered pattern on converter tuning of both tonverters to OFF. ,'% 325 23 0 APPENDIX IR AMERICAN STANDARD CODE FOR INFORMATION INTERCHANGE (ASCII) :Modern technology his led to the EOT (End of Transmission)Displays improvement of telecommunication capabilities symhol ET and switches terminal frott receiving in many areas, thus improving the.quality 'and mode .to local mode,. unless option elected not speed o f, communications. Throughout this to. Ignoredby receive only printer terminal. manual We discassed the concept and objectives of s,..ne':aittomated -iyStems and data BEL (BelDrDisplays symbol BL 'and cause's transtnissions. To accomplish data transthissions beep sound.. a -new- code was needed because of the 'Specific lirhitations to the'teletypewriter 5-unit code. '13S (Back Space)Moves cursoi left, one The ASCII Code was developed- for data character. transniission and provides for additional,symbOls andY also parity 'checking (error detection) of . HT (Horizontal Tab)Displays symbol transmitted data. (1Kefer to 'Chapter 9 of 'this and moves cursor to firit tab stop on right, if manual for more details .on .the ASCII Code). equipped with tab control feature. If there is no Fijure A3-1 illustrates Me ASCII code and a tab setting on right, cursor moves to start of legend of characters listed in columns 0 and 1. next line. If there is protected data en route the The discussion that follows applies to ASCII cursor .stops instead at first unprotected Control -as they' apply to Model 40. Data characte`r following proteeted data, wliether on Terminals. that line or next line; It not equipped \with tab control feature, the cursor moves one character td the right after displaying 1. MODEL .40'DATA TERMINALS NL *(New Line)Displays symbol and ON4,INE TEIZMINAL CONTROLS moves cursor to start of next line, and causes minter to print next character at start of next Receipt of ASCII Conti:Ols line. Also ,serolls display up on.line if cursor was . 4 on last line on screen-, Receipt of, the follo*ing ASCII controls VT (Vertical Tab):7-Displays symbol VT and. cause the following actionsAo be performed: causes printer to print next character at start of next line. .ETX- (End of Text)Displays syinbol Ex and switches terminal from receiving mode to FF (Form Feed)Displays symbol FF and local mode, unless option elected not to. Also switches terminal from receiving mode to local feeds out 16 blank lines of paper from printer, it' mode, unless option elected not to. Causes option elected. Receiver-only printer terminal printer to print next character at start of liext feeds panel. only. line. 326. 9 Appendix 111-rIERICAN STANDARD CODE FOR INFORMATION INTERCHANGE (ASCII) /re Bs 0 o 1 \ , 1 0 o 1 \ 85 0 1 . 0 1 Q I 1 14-1312 1 CooNN ROW- 1. 2 3 4 5 8 7 0000 I reVeMA sp a p r J,,eAr ed. 0,0 0 1 \ 7AZI7 A Mr A 0 o 1 0 \ 2 7 frTA° " Er B- IIEFW Arje, .9 0 0 1 1 , ArEIPIErr=Mr ... , . 0 ...lrie t Wir WY`. ,, ..j oi a 1 rd''..Lra:41117111011111r. ..1rie.4 6 1 1 0 ri,d,a'Arr AllEirMINIIIIF v,i.. 0 1 ' r .'4v/ASf,/WY 11117v,i;:ff', i 0 0 0 4r 111 7 ii -MY Jr or I001, 9 "Ar L/1.11091:11111r 1 A 1 0 1 0 1 0 \V07/,f eA Err e 111 r re% dr .0 1 -° 1 . 11 V.47.74r Mr ., 1 ° 0 12 r '' ,P%-:-"AWFIEINIOr A Y .1 i0 1 13 rfe Ar-',0! I-. 41,4P: ,.. Mr affr rd'AV 11 rIS:e I° 44 r:e/r i, iller ..I4 Harr / 1 1 1 15 ' 7;1,1A / 0 NOTE: THU UNSHADED AREASANDICATE THE_PRINTARLUCRAWACTERs:- 31.174 a 'Figure A3-1.American.StanderdCode for information Interchange I ASCIth 4 f LEGEND NUL ... NULL/IDLE. A character which may be inserted into or removed froma stream of date withput affecting the.information content Of thit stream. Some-transmission sysiemsmay not be able to occult the.use of this charactor. BON... START OF HEADING. A transmiuion cpntrol character md st. th* beginning ofa sequence of. characters which comprise a machine-sensible iddress or routing information. Sucha sequence is referred to as the : STX START OF TEXT. A t:ransmission control character which Precedes a sequence of characters that isto be treated as an eniity and entirely tranimitted through to-the ultimate destination. Sucha sequence is referred to as tixt. .ETX END OF TEXt. A transmission contr-of character used to terminate a sequence of characters staked with STX and transmitied as an.entity. 225 COMMUNICATIONS 'TECHNIdAN 0 3 & ECif... END OF TRANSMISSION.:A transmission control characterused-to iddicate-the end oflransMission. ,i. " ., gNa ... ENQUIRY. A trininriasion tontrol character reserved-fo r. ute- in data communication systemsas a request for-a response' froM e remote station the rispOnsemay include statiOn- identifiCation and/or station.status. ...... ACK ..., ADKNOWLEDGE.. A transmisrion control character transtnitted by ereptiVer ase. positive response to a . der. . r- ,.,- ,ser. . BEL... A character for use when there:is eneed ;to Call for human -attention; it May cOntrol alarM or attention devices., BS BACKSPACE.- A-layout character which cont*rols the movernentof the printing position one.printirig ;pace, backward on the-same printingjine. , HT HORIZONTAL TABULATION. A layOut character which-controls-the- MoVement of-the printing position to the.nekt in a series of-Predeterminedpositions-alongihenrintingline. LF LINEFEED. A layout character which.controls the moveMent of the printing porition twthe nextline. -- VT VERTICAL TABULATION: A-,layout character Whichcontrols th. Movemintof the printing position to the next of -Lieriei ofpredetermined printing lines. 9 FF FORM -FEED; A layout Character Which controle-the movernent of the 'printing' positiOn toTthe first" predeterminidyrintingline on the-next form. , CR OARIMAGE RF.TORN. A layoutcharacter-which`coritiols the mOvenient of the printing position to-the. firstprinting position on the sainePrinting line, SHIFT OUT.. ,The shiftout character means that ail the code combinations which follow shall1:34.7 interpreted as oUtside of the character sat of the standardcOde table-until a shift-in Character irreachedJ, SI ... SHIFT-IN. The shift-in. character ,means that all the code combinations which follow shall be interpreted according unite standard code table. . , . . ,:4 i , i , , DLE 1.. DATA. LINK ESCAPE. A transmission contral character-which will change the meaning of the following .,.. code combination(i). 1,,t,is used exclusively,;to provide supplementary control in data transmission .. netWoriis." -, . . . DC1;DC4 .. DEVICE-CONTROL& .. , . . 'NAK '.. NEGATIVE ACKNOWLEDGE. A transmission cntroFcharacter transmitted by a receiver as i negae.ve ., rusponse to thaiender. .- ... . SYN ... SYNCHRONOUS IDLE. A transmission control character usad"by a synchronotis transmission system in. - the absence of any other character (condition_tO provide a signal from which synchronism may be achieved 'or retained). , .. , - . : , . . ETB.... END OF TRANSMISSION BLOCK. A tranimission control charaóter used`to indicate the end of a block Of data for transmissionpurposes. : .. . CAN . : . CANCEL A chr,facter used to indicate :tiiit the, datli with which .it is associated is in error or is AO be i disregarded. , 0 Ap'pqndb; III- AMERICAN STANDARD CODE FOR INFORMATION INTERCHANGE(ASCII) -- EM END OF 'MEDIUM. A control character whiCh may-be used to identify the physical end ofthemedium, or-.- the end of the' tisedj, Or ,wanted, portion of informatiOn recorded.,ona medium. The -position of this character does;fiOt necrsarily correspond to the physicarend of thkrnediun -START OF SPECIAL-SEDUENCE., A character which is -used .to indicate the start of'a varieble length sequence of- cheracters ,Which have-special significance., or which are-to receive Special handlino. 'This SS may be used for tranunissiOutontrol.purposes. . f it 0 0isc.._. ESCAPE. A fOnctional 'character which May be usedforan _extension of the Standardcharacter set of-the , - Coda by changingthe Meaning Of4he next single following code combination. Theprecise-meaning Ofthis. foiloilini icheracter requires Prior agreement between the sander, and the recipient'of the data. The.. "ESCAPE",Character itself.may therefore be-regardedsea warning ix nOn-lOcking shift character affecting the_next single following, character itie-ingle character.whiChiollOws "ESCAPE" may be interpretedas I graphic or control character pot included in the stenderd-eet. Alternatively-the Meal-lingof- thii..single ' characteilmarbe."gointo avel< and stay init."- FS F ILE SEPARATOR. (See,IS for definition) GS,.. GROUP SEPARATOR. (See IS for definition) . . . RECORD SEPARATOR. (See-IS for definition) UNIT SEPARATOR. (See IS for definition) $ , INFORMATION SEPARATOR. There are' four information separators(FS, (s, RS, US); Whichluve a hierarchiel relationship with eathother. They ire related; as follows: .. p. UNIT' SEPARATOR, (US),_ RECORD SEPARATOR (RS), GROUP SEPARATOR .(0),- and,FILEi2_. , SEPARATOR .(ti), (os) *the most liowerful separator.A "UNIT" cannot includea "FILE", "GROkr t Or "RECORD." , A A "RECORD" may inckide (and if it inclUdes, it includes comiletelY) a variable. nunilun'InOne;, oneor more) Of "UNITS." `.4 , A'"RECORD"Cannot include "FILE"or "GROUP." , 4 A "GROUP" may include* (and irit includes, it includest'conikletAily)a tiariable-numherinone, one of more)-of "RECORDS" and/or "UNITS.7A-"GROUP" cannat include ,a "FILE.",' , 0 . . A "FILE",,may-inclifde . rendiflit includes, It includes CoMplitely),e,variablenirnibir (none, onerOr"rnore) ' of "GROUPS", "pkCbRDe, end/Or "UNI I'S."' SP ... "SPACE:Anormilry: non-printing graphic character used' w separate words. Itfis alsoa layoOt chiraeter which controls,the rilistiment esf theiPrinting pOsitiOn, one glinting positiOninthe forward direction. CR (C'irriage Return)=PiTlay symbol 4- and causes, terminal to distonnecf from line and and causes printer ,to print mext- chaTacter at ,switches -it from receiVing. mode to_ 1ocmode. start of line 'unless option elected notisi. Roceivb-only, printer terminal disconnects- only. . DLE EQT sequence (Data,LinicS Escape, End GS ,(GroUp Separator)-Displays symbOl,-Gi Of Transthiiiion):=ThiplaYs symbols DL and and switches terminal from receiving mode to ; 329 . COMMUNTATiOIISJECHNICIAN 0 3 & 2 r, rocal, mode unless, optiOn elected "not to. ,ESC 4Causes characters Olaf; follöw to not Ignbred:by receive-onlir printer terminal.'. be.highlighted. ESC W,-Puts terminal in protected -dita Receipt of ESb mode, during0 which all received, dafa Will be' (Eicape) Sequences displayed as protected data, and -during Which receipt of ESCWill cause protectea as Well .as unprotected data to be cleared. ,R e cte-i p-i "E'Sc. (Esca_Pe),-,:-shiractef..:seq.uences, cause the ESC X7Removes- terminal: from- protected : :TOlip wing 'aCtios tO 'be perfornied,,- if the data inode; ternii0I isrAo-etitiipped and the Optiod*electeit, , - to PerfOr-them, Terminals not .tipipped or not ES,C:4-1,;dears all unprotected data from all elected to- perform the ictionS disPliiy the, lines_ below line cursor is on and to the right of egtiefice symbols-instead. . -the, c'ursor;oxilliefine the Cursor is on. ." ;ESC 0',(zero) se,quenceSets.,a tab stop and . Esc :R *penceAdvances, display to first displays the 'tab symbol:.(a smallIKlot 'at the. 'segment,' nioyes c,ursor to start of firstline.and lower, left-hand :thiner Of the chiracterposition)- Clears all data from disPlay, memory, whither at the Clip& locatiOn, on fhat lineonly. proteCted Orhriprotected ;and 400' stops.., 4 1 ESC. l- sequence -=Sets:tab..stops and-displays. Tranithission rOf tab -SymbolS, at,:the cursorlOcatioh-, on thatline ASCH-Controli. ,and on all lines helowi ,the,..end of display ,filen.ory. Transmission of the following/, ,. ASCII . controls from the, terminal' cause the fo,llOwing HESC 2 sequence4Clears tab 'stops:from the- actioni to be-performedty'the terminal; , ;_ctirscir location to;:the end of the. line, on. that` ,line and on ail _linesbelow, tO the-end Of 4iiplay ETX (End Of Text):-tHalts trunSmission and memory., sWitehes terminal 'from send mode to receive, Or local, mode,, depending on, option elected, Or ES( seqUetice-=Mes-cursor to ,first 'tab does not switch inode-at ,all if option elected not ,stoP,on.`right. If no;tab setting on right, cursor. to. 1:n0es-to start-ofAext.line. If there, is protected' data'en- route;"the' bursor 'stops -instead' at :first,a EOT (End of Transmission)Halts, ungrotected.charaCter following protected data; transmission and switches' terminal from sehd whether On thatlincor.the next HOC., mode to receive mode, unless option elected not : to. ESC 7Moves-cursor up, one line: 'G'S (Group Separator)Hilts transmission ESC ,BMoves' cursor doWn' one line and sWitches terminalfrom,send mode t6 receive or Itical mode dependkii-oh "Option elected, or ESC.C,lriovei cursor right., Orr character. does not switch, niode, at all if option elected not ,ESC GMoVes,cursor to start of line: ESC HAdvances display, to first segment FF (Form Feed)Haltt transmission and and-moves cursor'io starfof firstiine. ' switches terminal from send made to receive or local mode, 'depending 'on option elected, orl ESC 3Causes chiracters that follow to be does not switch mode at all if option elected not highlighted. to. 330 225. - ApperidiX 'HIAMERICAN STANDARD 'CODE r-OR INFORMATIONINTERCHANGE (ASCII) Irausthission Of ES ESC 4F6llows transinisOn of, each block .AEseape)Sequenc61 of Iiighlighted,characterS.' ESC WPrece.des transmission-of each block Transnlission:of :the following ESC of protected charactprs. '(Escape)chkatter,sequen6es can be'electedto accoinpanY 'the- transniission data stored ih ESC XFollows _transthission of each block 'display Memory: of.protectea characters. ESC ,0 -(zero).Tran-shatd..- ahead of -ESC 3.Preèedes transmistion of each block character at ,..ahy location Where there is a tab 'of-highlighted-characters. -stop-setting: p APPENOIX IV DIGITAL:DATA DISTQRTION TEST SET ANIUSM3'29tV. OPERATING-pROCEDURES . , SECTION A4r1) seleCtS thetype of: signal, pattern. As shown in figure'A4-2 selection. of .the steady . SIGNAL GENERATOR ' Mark (STDY MK) ,or steady spate (ST& sp) OPERATING,DATA signal toufes these signalS direet to the output circuit. Selection. of CHARACTER involves the a. CONTROLS AND ISIDICATORS.The MARK/SPACE switches (6 through 11; figure controli and: indicatorof the signal- generator A4-1,), which mpst .be set to the desired are shówil in figure A44 and listed in table, charactee; and the CODE LEVEL switch, whick A44. ifiust be set to the ,desireduliit level. The 'b. POWER TURN-ON.Power is applied to MESSAGE position selects the FOx Message the generator by the POWER switch (18', figure signal pattern, which is,ayallable in the 5-unit A4-l): Check that POWER lamp (13) jogs on code, The REVERSALS ,position selects the when theswitchji sato its ONTosOion. mark-to-space-to-mark reversal pattern. c. ,O.PERATING PROCEDURES.The operation of the signal generat9i is largely (2)SE.LECTION OF SIGNAL" -dependent on the type of signal desiredl The CHARACTERISTICS.Five switches are- gignal,-in turn,- is determinedtYthe settings of involved in setting the general characteristics of.- the 'generator front panel 'controls. The front the output signal: the RATE switch (28). the panel controis, and their-functional relationship. TIME BASE sWi.tch (2 3 )the to, the, output signal, are shown in ,figure SYNC-START/STOP.(StoP Length) switch (°27), and the CHARACTEVRELEASE switch (25) -Noie that for convenience, the diagram is divided. intofoUrparts aS folloWs: with the associated SINGLE CHARACTER switch(24). The ',RATE svAtch sets the.baucl Jate . Selection ofsignal pattern of the signal. The TIME, BASE switch selects Selection of signal characteristics eitlfer the internal timing, generator or an S@ectiOn of distortion external tiMing signal confieocted to- the 'EXT TIMING cOnneCtor. The SYNC-START/STOP ..2_...Selection of output circuit (Stop Length) svAtch selects either synchronous, Or start/stop operation with Tour.óPtionson the method of signal transmission: c. NOTE The iMplied sequence and left-to-right - (a),In the SINGLE CHAR position, a flow `4h o wn in figure A4-2 is for start/stop signal is releaSed one chardaer at a illustrative pUrposes only,. It does not time each time 'the SINGU CHARACTER repritent tiOal flows The controls- switch is piessed. May be set ifl any sequence 'desired b}r (b) In' t'he bcT STEP position, a the operator.' start/stop signal is released one character at A time each time an external.step input is-applied (I)SELECTION OF SIGNAL to the External Step Inptit terminals located on, PATTERN.The OUTPUT Switch (22, figure the rear panel of the signal Anerkor. 332 230 Appendix IVDIGITAL DATA DISTORTIONTEST SET AVUSM329(V). OPERATING PROCEDURES', SY 4 to,It 12: 13 14 a9 15 SPACE BIAS W WANK BIAS ZER , SPACE, EXT STEP IIIT Plait CNANACTER Fftet STDY - ESSASE Viht RUN SP ` REVERSAL DISTORTION STOY SELXCT 1.....;.tmscstar 01117011TION....1 r. AIX S1SNAL LOW LEVEL 75 II 7 NAMUR 150 1.0LO L51\ -OUTPUT, POLAR0FFNEUT SYNC 2.0 RELEASE POWER .$IONAL .., `ORD FOOTpUT4 ON STOP LENIITN .SYNCtSTART/ST 041. ESEL SINSLE INT CHARACTER sod BASE EXTMuni LtVEL 1-/( .9! 28. 27, . <26 -25.24 22 23 20 19 2 17 16 . ' . a MON LOW STEP PIT EXT LEVEL. LEVEL PULSE POSE sisemssits 0 OUTPUT- OUTPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT sso ono ooncooAve.e)OTO+W-cxcJ.;eiZo :14'; , 73.4 1, s s 's to ti12 IS 14,11 II 17 UV. szo fvk * .,l/S AMP I/2 'AMP VI 'AMP +soy Loor -.Sas; Loos NEUT SATT BATT LOOP 2$ 30 3 2 - 31.175 Figure A4-1.Sighil,pinerator controls -and indicitors. - . . (c) In: the ,EtIt 'PHASE Positio switches (2 and 3, yhich set the amount in tens sy nchron o us'signalis phase-locked, with .an . and, units, respectively. external 'bit-phase timing signal- toensure that' (4) SIE LS CT ION OF 0,U TP UT the signal generator output is synchronized-with CIRCUIT.The signal generator provides both the timing generator in the receiving-unit. high and. low -level outputs. The LOW -LEVEL (d) In' the --FREE RUN position, the jack.:(13) ObVidesa low-level polar outpuot,at signal (syrichronous and .start/stop) is, released iolts,tstablished by an internal, poiver Supply. Continuouily without interruption. This jack and the cOrreslionding terminals at the (3) SELECtION OF DISTORTION.-,-The rear of 'the signal genthtor should bt used for -.amount ifid:type 'of distortiOnare selecied on polar output connections. For three switches. The DISTORTION SELECT high-level' polar and neutral' signals, the HIGH switch (1) selects onelif fiye types of distortion: LgyEL jaCk (16) should be used. With the inirk-bias, space bias,,switch ,bias, markend, and HIGli LEVEL OUTPUT switch(19) in the space end. Refer to Nitre A4-:3 for'exaMples of -POLAR position, the output signal available at ' these distortions. The amOunt oI distoitionis the HIGH LEVEL jack is a ±60 volt polar signal selected on the ;PERCENT DISTORTION (negative Mark). The same signal is also available a 333 ,231 5, COMMUNICATIONS* TECHNICIAN "0 3 1 2 - Table 44-1.Signal fienarator controls and indicators c., .FIGORE A4-1 . INDEX ,NO, corriTtoL Oh nitircATOR FUNCTIONS 1 DISTORTIOWSELECT Switch 'SeleCts'type of ciiStOrtiOn of outpui test. .signal . . . . , . . PERCENT.DISTOretION Selects percentdistortionin4put Switch (TENS) . iest- signal it units of 0, 10, :20, 30, and 40 % ... , ...,..:..--- .,, 3.: PERCENT-DISTORTION Selectamercent distortion,in.output ° Switch-0ns) test.Signal-iirunits4rom 0 tti '9 - ., 4 MARK/SI:Ad 1 Switch a 'One of a seCof .6 switches. -Sets first digit to mark (door space (down) 0. ,. ' , . Sets second digit,to mark or space 5° _IIAltic/sPACE 2 switcho 0 " ", 6' MARK/SPACE 3 SwitCh- - Sets Ihird digit-tO mark or spice -Ti 1 MARK/SPACE 4-Switch - , ,Sets fourthAgit-to mark or space . t,. - MARK/SPApE 75 SwitC11 6 setkfifth.digit to:maric'Ot:space -A .. 0 9 MARK/SPACE 5 Switch' Sets sixth digit-to mark or sPace -, 10 MARK/SPACE 7 Switch Sets Seventh digit=to. mark or space 2 o 11 , MARK/SPACE 8 Switch. sets eighth dIgit to mark orSince ..... , 12 SIGNAL Indicator Lamp-. Illuminates to-lhOw presence and tYpe . ° . of signal: glows steadily for.ateady 4 mark, -remains off fOr steady 'spade. e . and blinks lor keying signal. , .0 te 13 POWER Indicator Lamp Illuminates when:ac.... .power is applied to the signal generator . . Connector signar ground 14 'SIGNAL GRD Jadk . .- . 15 OUTPUT - LOW LEVEL Connector for low leliel Outplit 'signal Jack 0 0 Connector for high level output signal 16. OUTPUT - HIGH LEVEL I. Jack - f . 0 17 EXT TIMING Jack Input contiector for external timing. signal . 18 . POWER Switch .:Ac power switch for signal generator, . 31.180 334 , '2324 0 Appendix IV-DIGITAL DATA DISTORTION TEST SET AN/USM329(V) 0 A OPERATING PROCEDURES r g. Table A4-1.Signal generator contiols and indicatorscOntinued . . FIGURE A4-1 . INDEX NO. CONtROL ,OR INDICATOR FUNCTION ,_: , s . - 1-9 HIGH LEVEL ottrpwr Switch 3-position,kelector switch that , selects 13. -. . either polar-or neutral signal circuits 4, . e. , , 20 , AC FUSES -,- 1 AMP'Fuse 1-ainpere 250-volt-1uSe connectectto 4 one Side of input power-line 21 AC FUSE& - 1 AMP Fue 1-ampere 250-volt fuse connected to ' . one side of-input power line 22 OUTPUT Selector Switch ''Selects type of output signal,-In S.TDY . . . 0 MK, the- output consists of. a cOntinu- ow-mark signal-.n-STDY SP, the oufptit consists-of a. Cominuous'ipade - 4 signal. In.CHARACTER, the output donsistsiof the -5,-'-- -to-8-unit character. .. selectecrpt the MARK/SPACE switches.In- MESSAGE, the- output 6 C consists.ot-the Fiixoleasage.In . 6 REVERSALS 1o.;:the-outputoonsists 4 0 0 ,of alternate ,marks-and.spaceit . a 0 A. , 0 2 -3 TliviE BXSE Switch Selects either the intérnator external . . . timing-signal . . 0 . , ...... 24 SINGLE Cll'ARACTER Coperites in!vOnjUndtiOn'with CHAR- Pushbutton tviitch . ACTERItELEASEswitch.set to SINGLE CHARposition ' .- - C .-25 CHARACTER RELEASE Selectscharaoter release operating'. 7. .60 - Switch mode; In SINGLE 'CHAR, the output . 'is releasied*s single characters snob,- . -time the SINGLE camt:Acqtk switch is prbssed. In, EXT. STtti"-., , the output , is releaSect when- a step-signal is.ap- 44 , 0 . plieil-to the°external Stepinpittcon-' ) . ,-- .. . nector. - In BIT-PHASE, 'the internal timinereference is Synchroztibed-with .)) an external tiMing referenpe.In FREE RUN,' the output signal iscon- . . - . tinuotis . -1 . -, 26. ,. CODE LEVEI.0, Switch Selects' 5-, 6-, 7-, or 9-unit code , . . . -,, tevels in conjunction With the MARK/ . ',SPACE toggle switches , . 31.180 t. 335 - 233 7 Att. a. 4 COMMUNICATIONS' TECHNICIAN 0 3 & 2 Table A4-1.-Signal generator controls and indicators-dontinued : FIGURE A4-I .. -INDEX NO. cpNTROL OR INDICATOR FUNCTION , 27 SYNC-START/STOP Switch Selects synchronous or start/stop (STOP LENGTH) - mode. 'Also selects stop length in , start/stop mode '28 RATE Switch Selects baud rate "from 37.5 to 4800 of . internil time:base . _ . 1 - 29' Power line cord Applies 115 volts 60 Hi power to the unit. 1, $ 0 P ' ' 30 +60,V, L0c5P B T fuse Fuses -1-60V loop battery lipe. 31 -60,V.LQ0P BATT fuse Fuses' -60V loop battery line 32 -NEUT' LOOP 'fuse Fuses neutral loop . . 34, Terminal )31oök TB1 Providei input and output termina- tiona. o , - . 31.180 at thercorre§ponding high level terminals at the a.The external timing input signal must be = rear of_ the signal generator. With the HIGH 200 tithes,the desired baud rate. The external LEVEL 'OUTPUT switch in Pie NEUTIkAL ,7timing input must be a square wave having an position, the output Signal drives an electronic amplitude Of ±6 volts. Switch (closed for mark) connected to the HIGH b. The external ,step input signal must be a -LEVEL jack. This jack and. the corresponding 12-volt positive-going pulse (-6 too+6 to -6 volts) terminals at the rear of the, signal generator at least 20 milliseconds Wide: should be used:for ,all neutral outputs and high c..The external bit,phase in out signal Must level polar outputs, be a square -waie having an aplitude of -±6 (a), The SIGNAL limp (-12), shown in volts. -.. the-output circuit, goes on whenever the output of the signal. generator is at the mark level and ,goes off.Whenevethe signal is'at the,space level. WARNING Hence, for a stearlY Mark signal;. the lamp glows - , steadily. For a steady space signal, the lamp Observe the followingprecaution remain§ .off. And for keying signals the lamp,, when connecting the sig1 generator blinks on and off. , to the signal' loop to preent voltage from appearing on the tst cable tip and presenting a shock haard. ":0PERATING PREcAUTIONS Palar outputs: Connecttest, cable to The f011owing summary of operating signal loop before conecting test precautions and general information is provided cable to signal generaor (generator for use by the oPerator. rovides loos volta e 36 234 Appendix IVDIGITAL DATA DISTORTION TEST SETAN/USM329(V) OPIiRATING PROCEDUR.ES . I. SELECT 'SIGNAL PATTERN 2. SELECT SIGNAL CHARAC.TERI.STICS C31.17 OUT MARK/SPACE CODE -RATE STOP-LENGTH- v LEVEL CMARACifi SINGLE SYNC+ START/STOP RELEASE ST DV IRK CHARACTER .5 TOY 'SP , 37.5, 4 5 5 SO TIME SASE START/STOP INSI.E CHM CH ARACT LS 1. 0 1i. 1.12 INT 42 *EXT STEP, 7 4.2 . AILS tAIIE T 5 . 41.4* 2 . 0 T PHASE 1 3 0 ST NC FREE-RUN REVERSAiS 300 . 100. 1200. 2 40 0. 4$o EXT TIMMS [Xi-STEP INPUT' ,C SIT- PHASE INPUT MESSASE OUTPUT AT 6 UNIT CODE- ONLY. EXTERNAL TORINO INPUT FROM 37.1 TO 4100 SAUD. VONA,: MUST..SE 2001SAUD RAT E. . EXTERNAL STEPINPUT MUST SE P OSITIVE PULSE (-1 70 SOINS TO.- S VOLTS) AT LEAST 2p M SECWIDE. Ns 3. SELECT oISTOATION 4. SELECT OUTPUT PERCENT oirrocrioN OISTORTION SELECT EIRO MARK. Mit. I 0 Pita 1121 0 I. 1.1.111, SCUM SIAS* 20 MARX ENO 50 7 40 SPACE ENO - I. SIGNAL LAMP GOES ON Gt_IIEN OUTPUT IS AT MARK LEVEL AWO OES OPP WHEN OUTPUT IS AT 'SPACE LEVEL. 31.176 Figure AtkFunctional operatiqn, iignalgionarapr. = Neutral outputs: Conned test cable to SECTION II signal generator before connecting test ANALYZER-OSCILLOSCOPE cable ,to signalloop (station plovides - loop voltage); ANALXZER-OSCILLOSCOPE OPERATING DATA OPERATOR'S'MAINTENANCE Tlie following procedures and instructions Maintenance required by the operator is apply to bQth the analyzer and oscilloscope.If limited to replacement 'of the lamps andfusesin the .analyzer is used. without the oscilloscope, the Signal generator. the instructions that apply to the oscilloscope 337 COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN 0 3 & 2 M/S TRANSITION S/M TRANSITION --MARK UNOISTORTED SIGNAL --SPACESTOP MARKING BIAS (SPA TRANSITIONS EAF9y SPACING BIAS (S/AI TRANSITIONS CATE ) MARKING END BIAS IN/S TRANSITIONS LATE ), SPACING END BIAS (M/S TRANSITIONS EARLY SWITCHING BIAS (ALTERNATE iiARKINe AND SPACING GIAS ON SUCCEEDING- CHARACTERS ) a. CHARACTER CHARACTER NOTE:1HADED AREAS SHOW DISTORTION (APPROXIMATELY 25%) .! 31.177 Figure';',4-3.-LExamples of telegraph distortion. may be disregarded. Separite opetation of the (1) On analyzer, set POWBR switch (14) oscilloscope is not recommended. to ON; check that POWER lamp (9) goes on. (Z) Set analyzer controls as follows: a.CONTROLS AND INDIGATORS.The - (a) MODE switch (18) to typeof controls and indicators for, the analyzer and signal to be measured. oscilloscope are shown in figures A4-4 and A4-5 (b) RATE switch (4) to rate of signal and listed in tables A4-2 and A4-3. to be measured. (c) POLARITY switch (6) to b. ANALYZER-OSCILLOSCOPE polarity sense of signal to be measured. TURN-ON PROCEDURE.Perform the ea) RESET switch (19) to OFF. following ,procedure to turn on ihe (e) FILTER switch (8) to OUT. analyzemscilloscope units: .(f) TIME BASE switch (2) to INT. ,o 2 V.PEAK " Cl/r"--.30 4PPLAR ® TOTAL EARLY blEuT_I LNEICVME:\ GO WA, L ATE- 20MA LIgc 22 21 20 19 IL 43 I H5 14 13 12 kt:r* 23 24 25 6. 0 2% ' TIMMS SM CMASSIS INPUT ISO $1110 TO I 0 TA T 0 t AS I$ S101112 , 5 31.178 Figure A44.Analyzer controls and indicatois. 6 237 238 - COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN .0 3 &2 5 4 - 8 10 3CALC II.U$, 'srece..;:capin .0.0 .71.0 20..110 INTIMMAI. SWIM 'opt elm. MILLISECONDS IIAMS FRU NOIVIZ eim 6:IT 6 . 16 14 13 1 31.179 Figure A4-5.-=Oscilloscope eofitreis and indicators. I. , . NOTE , (a) VERT ,GAIN, .cOn trol(2)' tO, : . midposition. , .. . if externatiiming signal is to be -used (b),INTENSITY -MODULATION .in! lieu Of. InterhaP tithe baSelenerator switch (11) tO.OFF; '-, : I-, ' Ofanalyzer connect external Signal to (c).-i;N T t R Ist-A-.LS W E.E P EXT. TIMING jack, (13) and set TIME MILLISECONDS sivitCh' Op to approximafe ;BASE Switch-to-EXT. rate ofsighil to'be-melsured.. . '(d)SWEEP VERNIER control (10) (3)13on- osciilosc4e, set POWER- switch to' midpoition. , ' (13, figUre 44-5) to ON; cheek that POWER P (e ) TIME BASE RELEASE switch: laitiP (12) goes.Oq., (16).to:tHAK, .- (4) Set INPUT sWitch (7, figure,M-4)to,' ,(4) A dijiiit oscillosebP.e. -muired-Position. controls as required to obtain' a clean-centrally' "-Positioned trace- on oscilloScope CRT (1): -(a) -INTENSITY controj (5); 6AUTIONi (b)'KALF ILLUMINATION (8). (c), Fo,cus- control (4):, A . Always connect test cable to analyzer NYASTIGMATISM control (7). before connecting test cable to signal' :(e) 'VERT GENT-control (3). '(f) HORIZZENT control (6). (g) HORIZ GAIN control (9). (7) Conned analyzer to signal loOp as f011OwS: , (5) Set oscilloscope controls -to initial. (a) FOr current.signils, copnect settings: analyZer in series using INPUT tpliv Z jack (I 1.). ; 349 23;) Appclidix1VDIGITAL DATA DISTORTIONTET SET AINi/USI4329(V) -,OPERATING PROCEDURES . tableA4-2.-AnaKfzer_ controls:and indicatori . FIGURE-M:4 , . INDElc-145. 'CONTROL OR iNiSICAT'OR 1 . - FUN CT ION % .% DISTORTION .. Meter Measures Percentage distortionfrom ... 0 to .56 in 1%,indrements - .: . . '' TIME BASE Switch Seledtseither external, or Internal . time Mae., The.external timingsig.r ,nal -is ,donnectedliarOugh klrl-TIMING judk : .. , 4NDtiv1/8,TRAN8--5/M Seledts either -Mar,k-tO-space, TRANS'igA8 -Swit0 (M/S1- or- sPace- S/M Switch) to-rhark transitions foranalySiLof . end dibtortion an&bias, diátortion, ... . . ivipe?tively, . . , RATE ,SwiWI q ., - \Selects baud-ii4e'from 37.5to 4800 Of' internal_tiine base. . ., . .- . 5 .. DISTORTION SELECT. Sw ItCh Selects 'typeof.disiertion (aVerageor peaki-for-analydis.-. Also-Selects 041,, ' ,' .. . earlif, iindlate for peak distertiOn , .. . meaStitemeritS- °' - , ..., , . , _.. .. POLARITY 5Witch . IteverSes polaiitY 0 inputsignal. .i , . . . INPUTISWitch' ,''''Select'seithergolavor neutral,inpUt cirduits.: The twolieutralpositionir. k' ', A amourrent inputs at 20 and50,ina,.. s- orespeotively.The- 2040, ma,position. . .. l'S`the polar oUrrent hip*and,theligh arid:low-level polar positions are,the 'high and Iow voltage inputs,respec- . :tively- . ,. . - . , 'i'ILTER SWirch , . Connects-filter used.to remoVe. Spikes , arld,,holes -in input' ivaveform. . . Usable "up to,150 baUcl .. , . * . POWER:Indicator .tarnp . tuminates.Whenac power Is applied . . , . .- to:the analyzer t .. 10 "' _ , SIGNAL GRD"Jack Connedter:for ;signal ground 11 INPUT- LOW Z' Jack . 0 InPut connector-forcurrent signals '., ' -- 12- , , INPUT - HIGH Z Jack i Input connedtor 'for all,voltagesignals ,..., . 13 .. . EXT TIMING,Jack, Input connector fOr an external:timing . signals... 31.181 COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN' 0, 3 &- 2 \ TableA4-2:Analyzer cOntrols and indicatoricOntin.ued FIdlgtE A4-4 INDEX NO. CONTROL'OR INDICATOR FUNCTION. ,14 POWER Switch Ac power Switch for analyzer ' * . lk- AC:TUSES - 1 AMR TUse .1-ampere 250.-Nolt fuse connected to . ---oneide of input power line q , 16 ',, Ac-rtrEs - 1 AMP°Iuse .14mpere 250-volt type connected to ,, Ond'side of input powerline 17 TRANSITKiN SELECT,;Skvitch SelecWeither ali or 1 of 9 Spec;ific , transitiona for,inaiysis and display MODE SwitCh, °Selects syriclionoud-or,Start/stop ;* mode. Also ,selebts 5-i,' 6-,' 7-, or 0 8- unit codes. 18 RESET Switch Selects automatic or manual reset-of , a . output.meter. Center position is off 41, g 0 LATE indi4ator Lamp Illuminates .during, average- distortion .. ,measu'rements to :indicate marking . end and sPacing.bias:distortion- , o , 21 SIGNAL, IndiCator tamp Illuminates tO,siloWpresence" and-type , :of signal; a GloWs-steadily for steady .. mark, ieMains off,for steady ,space, . and blinks for keying signal , , . 22 EARLY Indicator Lamp . filuminatet When_ making.average dis.r tortion measurement' Pzi Indicate mark- ,- ing. bias or spacing eiiii distOrtidn, - , 2' LOW Z "INPUT fuse- PizseS' low' iMpedance input ,Iiiie, 24 ', .Y5 cdhnector Connector -for Analyzer 4'6- Co's dillo- , sbope'' cable; , TB1terraina1 board ,grades connection for input signals,,, 25, ., , 26 Input power cable - Provides for cOnnection of input power , , .. - , 0 . , 31.181 342241* ce, 13/ AOpe*Iix IyDIGITAL DATADISTORTION TEST SET AN/UShM9(V) OPERATING PROCEDURES 1 TableA A4-3.',-.Oicilloscope controls and-indicators - FIGURE A4-5 , , . . INDEX NO. CONTROL OR INDICATOR FUNCTION - Cathode Ray Tube (CRT), Displays-dig41-.waveforms- 2 VERT GAIN Control ., Controls-height oftrace on' CRT '3 VERT'CENT 'Control -Controls'Verticai.poSitioncif traceon 'CRT - , i -FOCUS Control Adjusts- focus,(spot size) Of electron beim , , .,,- , ... , - INTENSITY Control' Adjusts intensity-ottrace-on.CRT,' liORIZ CENT' Control .., Controll-horizOntil position of trace, . on CRT 7 ASTIGMATISM Control Adjusts 'aitigniatiim (spot shape) of $ . . - electroo heath. . ' -'SCALE ILLUMINATION- Controls lllionination of engraired Control : iicale (graticule) .. 9 - HORIZ GAIN-Control . dontrols widthtf traCe :On CRt 10 SWEEP VEI'INIEitControl Fine Xdjustinent 'Control-ofinternal '.$ :sweep-oscillator - li` . INTERNAL SWEEP MILLI1 Selects-one ot six,sWeep rangel 1 - SECONDSSwitch- 12 POWER IndicatorLamp Eliminates when-ac POwer -Itiepigied ', /.' to the oscilloscOPe , . . , 13 , povai tvitch Ac- poweryiwitch-fOr oecilloscope.- 14 Ad FUSES - IA1%1E:Fuse. 1-ampere 25(0.7olt4use-couneciedon one sicleof input,line - ., 15 Ar FUSES 1 AMP Fuse 1-ampere' 259. volt- fuse connectedon one eide ofinputline _ 16 TIME, BASE RELEASE Switch,-, ,SeleCts synchrothiageignalkir- .. escillosedpe sweep.. ti-CHAtt;the oscilloscoPe sweep-is triggered for 0 each character.$ Ei-SEL TRANS;the sweep ietriggeredlOr separittiran- illions asmeistire4,on' theanalyser. in,FREE; -no trigger isaPplied. the dHAR aii&SEL- TRANS-Signals-are apPlled tO the_oseilloseopefroth.the analyzer, ,. -17- INTENSiTY*ODULATION '.Connects intenlitymodulatiogeignal . Switch' . froth analyier to Z-axis inputof -Oscilloscope 31.182,_ 343-- 242 ° COMMONICATION§ TECHNICIAN 0 3 8c` 2 (b) For voltate signals, connect Measuring the ayerage end distortion for the analyzer _across loop-using INPUT-HIGH Z jack oyerall signal and also for single tranSitions (in. Start/Stop signals): Measure end distortion as 0 0 :(8) On analyzer, check SIGNAL lamp follows: (21') and verify that: . (1) -perform turn-on procedure.' la) For steady mark signal, the lamp -(2) Set analyier contaols as followS: , glows-steadily, TRANSITIONV SELECT switch (b)-For:steady .space signal, the lamp (17) to-ALL (or selected transition). remains,off. , (b) DISTORTION SELECT switch (c),-Por.keying-, signal, the lamp (5) to AVG. blinks on,(for marks) and'off (for spaces). (c)`' M/S-S/M switch (3)- to M/S. (9) On oScilloscope, Yerify presence of (3) Observe % DISTORTION meter W- signal on' CRT. Adjust 'oscilloscope-controls for and EARLY, LATE, and SIGNAL lamps (22. best p re,sentatio n Of Waveform: 20, and 21) forfollowing: - c. p)3!1, A. 81) 1 S T I 0 N '(a) % DISTORT 1-ON MEASIXREMENT.Bias distortion:is the average meterindicates amount of average distortion. diaplacement of the space-to-mark transitiOn (0) EARLY lampif 'on, indicates : erpin '-fts normal -position referre& to the' Start ipacing end distortion. . mark...to:space transition. The distortion-ls called (c) LATE lampif on, indicates 7) ,Imarking, bias if the transitionr.owurs -early and arlangerid distortion. sPacing bias if the',-Iransitiort Occurs late. The (0);SIGNAL lampblinks to indicate analyzer 'is capable dOneasunngthe' average/bras t at signalls keying. 4istOrfion ,for overall signal, and-alSo for:, . e.F E A K', 'DA ST 0 R TI,QN Signaj..transitiona(inStart/Stop signals).,Meature -MEASUREMENT.Total peak distortion is the bias distortion as foilows: higheSt amount of disfortion that occurs on a (1) Perforin'turn-ort procedure, signal daring a -given period,of time. The - ,(2) Setarialyzer, controls as folIows: distortion may odcur on mark-to-space (a) TRANSITION SELECT switch transitions .or sPace-to-mark transitions and may (17) to ALL(orto selectedtransitions). occur either early )or late: Theanalyzer is '(b) DISTORTION ,gLECT switch capable of measuring the total peak distortion, .(5),to AVG'. early peak distortion (both M/S and. S/M) and (c) M/S-S/11-1 svatch:(3)ib;S/M. late peak -distortion (both:M/S and S/M). _ (3) Observe. %DISTORTION meter (1) .and EARLY, LATE, and SIGNAL lamps (22, NQTE 20, and 21),for(a)%_DISTOR-TrON following: meterindicateaamount of distortion (average). (b) EA RtY lamp7if On, indicates The percent distortion shown on the mark biasAistortion. %DISTORTION meter represents the , (c) LATE lap if o n, indicates peak ',value obtained during the space bias distortion. rileasuring period. The meter displays larnpblinks to in'dicate 1 he peak reading indefinitely until - L that signal iakeying . changed to a higher value o,r reset to d.E.ND' DIST-0,R TION Aro by the RESET switch. The MEASUREMENT.End distortion isthe average, RESET switch offers two options: displacement of the niark-to-space transition manual reset mode, ;Jr whidh the from its' norinal position referred to the staTt momentary switch must be manually .mark-to-space transition.. The:distortion iS called pressed doWn to reset the,meter; and the automatic reset mode, in which . ,spacing end distortion if the mark-tocspace transition is, early and-marking end if the the' analyzer continuously_ resets the transitionIslate. The analyzer is capable of meter at 5-sec2nd intervals. 344. .g43 AiVendik IVDIGITALDATA DISTORTIoN TEST SETAN/USM329(V) OPERATING PROCEDURES .(1) -a T A1. P E :A K (a). Perform turn-on-procedure.- _ EA`SUREM E NTS.Measure the tOtal peak distortionas-follows:- (b), Set analyzer controlsas follows: "(1) TRANSITION' SEI.:ECT ( Tefform tUrn-on procedure. switch (19) to ALL'(or toselected.ttansitiort). (b)- Set analyzer controls as-follows: (2) DISTORTIONSELECT SNVitch (5) to LATE. . (1) TRANSITION,SELECT switch (17) to ALL (orto selected 'transition). (3) RESET Switch (19) to AUTO ,(2)-DIS TO RT1ON if automatic reset feature is desired.OtherwiSe SELECT- set switch toOFF. switch to TOTAL. -' (3) RESET switch (,19)* to 'AUTO (4) .M/S-S/M switch (3) to either if, automatic reset featu're isdesired. Otherwise., MIS _or S/M depending upontype of transition set switch to OFF. to be meaSured. Set to-M/S formarking,endand S/M-for spacing bias.- (c) Obsetve % DISTORT1014meter (.1) and-SIGNAL laMP (21) for following: _ (c) Obsei-ve % DISTORTION metq' (D% DISTORTION (1) and S1GNAL laniP (21) for following: peterindicates Avak value of 0)%'D IS T OR TIO distortion. meterindicates peak value, of markingendand (2) SIGNAL lam,pblinks to spacing 'bias distortion' for MISor S/M , indicate signaIiske'ying. transitions. ,.; (2) SIGNAL lampblinksto (2)EARLYPEAK indicate that Mgnalis_keyinig:. DISTPRTIONMeasuie early peakdistortion ,1 (peak marking. "bias and peakspacing:end) s " (a) Peiform turn-on proFedure. OPERATING.PRECAUTIONS (b) Set analyzer controlsas follovh: The followingsummary of operating (1)JRANSITION SELECT pretatitions and:generalinformation is provided 'switch (19) to ALL (orto selected-transition). for use by the operata: \ . (2)*DlSTORTION *SELECT switch (5) to EARLY. a.The input filter Ofthe ana/yzeris,Usable only, np to Modulationrates, of 150 baud. Set (A. RESET switch (19) to AUTo FILTER switch to OUT positionwhen operating if automatic reset 'feature iSdesired.Otherwise set switchlo.OFF. theanalyzer ibdve jp baud. , b. The external' timing input signalto the (4), MIS-SIM switch (3)to either analyzer must be M& titnes the M/S or S/M. dependingupon type of transition desired baud rate. The external timing signal must bea square to be. measured. Set to- to' meaSure marking waVe having an aMplitude a ±6 .bias, M/S to,spacing end: volts. c.Use' LOW Z connectorwhen,measuring (c) Observe % DISTORTIONMeter current signals. (1) and 'SIGNAL lainp(21) for following: d 'Use HIGH i connector whenmeasuring (1)%DISTORTION 4voltage signals.' meterindicates peak value; of marking-bias and e.Always- connedi test cableto analyzer spacing. end distortion for S/M:or M/S tiarisitions. before connecting,cable to signalloop. (2) SIgNAL lampblinksto 0 indicate that signal is keying. 4.4 (3),LA TE_PEAK OPERATOR'S MAINTENANCE DISTORTION.Measure° late-peak diStortion (peak marking end and peak spacing bias) as 'The maintenance requiredby the operator is limited,to,replacement oflanips and fuses. 345 .24 4 _ APPE-NDIk y OKRATING SIGNALS 0 . Tabie.A5=1 .Oporating Aaswit. Mole" se OtAtt Sigtel , QRK 'Whit la tho rudaatlityiey sigails (rittose -The reidability of Your signals (or thou of,- s- of IT- (1 to 5). QRM Are yon being iseerie*red -I am being laterfered with. QR0 Shall'I increase pout'? laCiatisa 411P aflid.cr.sãspower T, Decrease powers., QIIU 'lave IOU astrhing tor ilea? I Imo nothing for you: gi Witt ia tie strength of my signal. (or thou The strength of your skoals (or *MI of (I to 5). .f QIN Shall I send a series 4 Vs os this'ittoWcy tor Send a aerie, ofsVs on this Irequeney for in* (or (et Mth))? MHz)). 1 WY shall I chug; tO traasmission on anollmr ,cChanne to transmission on another frequency tor on fregaincy? kHz (or MHz)]. ZAR Valais my reqiitst (or reply)..t(1) Fleet. (2) woad, (3) thierair.] a ZIK Are yoo rUelviag my.tefito clear/ j am rultivia; your traffic 1(1).cloar: (2) garbiedl. r ZDK. W 111 pit repeat message (or portion FoUowingripetition (of ) la Made in iiccorderie . )? O. rerun Noy ? -With your rudest. Mess'age -I(l) annoyed (2).unIdeedIfIed. ZED. Have ru recegid assuage give bettleatioi data). This message ime hoes dithered by other means or by a separate transmission)* tho addresuo(s)inimediately followiatthis operating sipal: 0 This is shook meisage and 1011)q11 diliverea assloes .pti address mossage to addressees for whom you ars w "'* reipoosible. Mismanage (or maelagi )ihltelag (or has bun) 'pasiod to yea (or) ootioor 2 () inkramtioe. (3) commoTie= nn bikers mif reply to message There is no reply MMAlleig .ZIA This WIMP (oe Missage,_) I. being (or hai been) passid.out of primes sequonce of elation 'oriel numbers. ((1) date- ZII. What wits of year nurabir_T My (or 's) nUiber had following ((I) date-time group:0) filing WU). time group, ()Wlag this). tadio-pstd for o ZKP Are you (or is )radio guard lot I en (or t fon--..kHs'for (or MUM. , via What is autheaticatins of t(1) Authenticatioa is ((1) Mal/11144, - (3) last traunissioa, (3) - J? (2) laot trusidasios, (3) ); ZOC Staticat(s) called relay Otis nmesap to uldressus for 'Aorta you are reoposalhle. ')oi broadcast ZON 'Place this massage (or message indicatod by immoral* fellowisg (sutural may .-be followed by' specific breseloast designator) ((1) 14311: (2) NPG; (3) RPM: (4) NBA: (5) NPN; (4) NPO; (7) NHY: .(I) NAM; (I) NAP; (10) NM; (11) MDT]. a . Statloa designation pescadleg this operating signal Le Use ZOV correct.routteg for *Ls acme* rerouted Aftirmativo (Yes). "Nogative (No). Your attantion isinvii.d to Standby. 76.42 340' 3 245 'APPENDIX VI DSSCS CrERATING SIGNALS o Some of the most commonly usedoperating . oraddressee stations, as signals are listed-in Appendixy.,ReMernberthat the information contained the Q code is uSed internationally', and speaks of is perishable. (For use by "telegrams" where a U.S. Navy comMunicatOr message oritinafOrs on would say' "Message.". specifie types -Offiiiitic the In addition to operating signals which are text of Which is non-literal. assigned meanings in the 'current edition of ACP. ZNZ1., Messages will only 131, the folloiving signals and assigned Meani4gs be serviced for garbles in .are authorized for use in DSSCS; however, they the 'message heading to u,should not be used oUtside the DSSCS insure'proper handling.) communiiy. ZPO the text of thil message is SIGNAL -MEANIK to be 'relayed in precisely the .iame forniat as that, in ZCA This is ,an exact duplicate which, it 'is received. No of a .meriage which has,1 characters or machine been forwarded via functions are to-be added,. physicalteans. , inserted Or deleted, and 'the relative positions of the ZCA1 This ian exact dupiicate groups are, to be retained, of a message which has Nomally used on those been forwirded -via message's requiHng, physical means to . computer processing.. ZPO messages may be serviced .ZEM Used inthe message-format for 'obvious garbles in the, as a symbol for machine heading and text. recognition, of the, start,of text (SOT)indicator 'Which ZR.T Urgen-t Opereting prevents the incoming line Condition (defined in sensing device from ACP-1 31 as "Will you reacting to certain Michine check your...?" ). In sequences- during the DSSCS the operating signal textual portibn or a is use& to: attract 'the,' message. 'Attention -of a distant station. Receipt of 'this ZNZ1 Originator has indicated° sighal *ill activate an alarm that this message should be - at those Stations where forwarded without service in coming circuits are action on the text at relay equipped with the model a 347 246 234 COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN .0. 3 & 2 2 8 pri-nter. To avoM operational factors.) ZYO unnecessary alarms, use of will appear in message ' this-operating signal must format,line 4; immediately be limitecl to conditions of Pollow,ing the TCC and _urgency. -Separated by a space", followed by ,routirig ZYH Used in the-message format . lndicator of till -station- to as a high precedence whiCh a-ny, subsequent , indicator- whiCF,activates service action shoul0 be an:slarm upon receipt =of a -directed. .InstrUctioris for CRITIC or message 2pplicatimi,of ZYO 'will be .asSigned FLASH or iss,ued-by 'IMMEDIATE 'precedence. COMNAVSECGRU to . , cognizant Naval activities. ZY0 ihis-,kneSsage originated by Navy afloat or 'Navy ZYS To not transmit via mobile unit. All service OPINTEL broadcast.' Message and retransmission . requeSts Will be addressed ZZR The text 6f this Message . to the routingindicator employs a. code which following this operating pr.esents a garbled signal. (Used Iluringcertain aPpearance on ,standard periods to -.precliide teletypewriter equipments: significant delay to seriAce apptoximate length is requests when the Naval (1390 .groupS;; -2: '600 afloa.t units dnot group's; 3. 900 wroups.) t ermknate full Period cómMunications .either zz8 This .isa voluntwry because Of emission correctLOn; disregard control orders_ or other previous-transrhission., 247 348 -1* APPENDIX,VII THE, METRIC SYSTEM. o- The metric systein Was deVeloped by French With-the excepjionof the gnited States, all, scientists in 1790 and was Specifically designed the industrialized nations of the world have to e an easily used system df weightS and athipted the metric system. Even Englahdand measures to benefit science, imiuStry, and Canada are changing froth their traditional Comm erce. The metric system is .,calculated systems of measure. and the metric system will entirely in poviers of 10, so one need not work be almosi universal by 1980. with the varioUs Mathematical bases "used with Althbugh jhe metric system has not been the English system, such -as 12 inches-toa foot, officiallY legislated 'by the Congress, the metric 3 Net tO a yard, and 5280 feet-to system is becoining More prómirient-inzthis 'The-systein is basedon the "Metre" which is country. Most aueomobile mechanics own some one ten-millionth of the,distance from: the metric wrenches to Work on -foreigncars or Equator to the North Pole. It is possible to foreign components in AmeriCan cars. Almost all ;develop worldwide standards -froth this:base of photographic' equipment isbuilttic) metric measurement. The metric system of. weights is standards. Chemicals arid' drugs are.uSually sold base& on tlie gram, which is the weight ofa in metric quantities, and f'calorie couners'-'are specific ijuantity,of water: usin&a.haetric _unit of theithal energY.. 'Soon- after the 'systemzwas developed Because we are allie&with countries who use. Scientists over the' WOrld adopted it and Were the Metric system, thuch ofour military able to deal with the mathematics of their inforthation metric.terms. Military Mapsnse experiments more eaiily.. The data ina ,meters and kilometers instea& .of miles, and particulars of their work cOuld be Understood by Many weapons are in metric sizes,- suchas 7.62 other scientists anywhere in lheAvóild-'ijitrng____mmy-20miii-,-40--mmi--7;5-:mm, an& 155 mm. the ear y tcentury many Euppean natibns Interchange of military equipment has causeda adopted the .new system for engineering and. mixture of metric and ,Englishmeasure conimerce. It was póssib,1e for theie conntridi to equipment since World. War 1 when the-army trade manufactured good's with one another adoPtea the French 75mm. field gun; andrWorld without worrying Whether it,wOuld be possible Warwhen the NavY procured:the Swedishr4O to repajr machinery from another _country"- ',trim Bofors and the Swiss 20 thm=0erlikon heavy without also :buying' 'special wrencheS and machinegunS. Measuring tools. conntries could bUy and sell It is inevitable that the 'United States will machine tools and other sophistiCated and officially adopt the metric system. Exactly when Drecision machineiy without troublesome. this happensr'and how rapidly the changeover modificationsor alterations. It was much easier, will depend on economics, since .theexpense of to-teach the metric syStem, since metrescan be retooling our industry and commerce tonew changed to kilometres Or centithetres with the measurement's will be very great. The cost of movement of a decimal point, which is roughly conversion will be offset by increased earnings, like being able to convert yards to milesor from selling machinery, and productsoverseas. inches by adding zeros and a,decimal instead of. Another benefit is that scientists use the metric nthltiplying by 176Q or dividing by 36. ,system, but their calculations now have to be 349 248 COMMUNICATIONS. TECHNICIAN 0 3- & 2 translated. into English measure to be used by The basic quaniities of the metric System are industry. With adoption of the metric system multiplied or divided by powers ot 10 to give -ideas can go directly from the drawing board to other workable values. We cannot easily rneaure the assembly line. .machine parts in terms of a metre. so the The Navy will be using the metric systeth millimetre, or-one-thousandth of a metre is,used. More dUring the next few ,years. Although you For very fine measure the micron, also called the will find it easier to solve problemS using this micrometre, can be used. It is one-million th.part System, atfirst you will_findit,difficult to of a metre, or one-thousandth of a. millimetre. visualize or to estimate quantities in unfamiliar Forsinall weights the milligram? one-thousandth units of measure. , of a gram is Used. All of these multiples are , fortunately, many 'metric units can be expressed with standard prefixes taken from related to equivalent units:in the English system. Latin: The metre, which-As the basic unit, is approxiMately 6ne-tenth-longer than' a yard. micro =1/1,poomo - The:basic unfit of -volume, -the litre, is milli - -7 1/1,000 approximately one quart. Thegramis the weight centi =1/100 of a cubic centimeter. dr .of pure *deci =1/10 water, and isthe basie unit of 'Weight. As a *deca =10 -common, weight though, the kilograrri, or kilo, .thecto =100 which equals- the -weight pf a litre of water, kilo =1,000 Weighs 2.2:pounds. Thecentimetre is-used where *myria =10,000 v---TewoukILuse_the inch, and where we Measure mega =1,000,b00 'by the .fluid otinCe,--the-metsystem employs the-millilitre (m1). For.powermeasuffefthe-metric____ * karely used system .uses -the =kilowatt (kW), which is aPproximately .1.3 horseipwer. Over& nexiTew years:the metric system will become more used by the Navir In terms of distanee, a land mile iS the -ct/ilian wOrkl. You will find,it easy to work °eight-fifths- of a_ kilometre,_ and-a nautical.mile is with once youhave mastered the 1::asic terms. It 1.852 kilometresor nearly 2kilometres. will be difficult to translate values from our A_basitinetric_expression_ofpressure is present---sytenr-te--the---metrie-system-,--but-this---- kilogram pef square centimetre. which is 14.2 operation will become unnecessary once the new psi, nearly 1 atmosiihere of-pressure. measiirements are totally adopted. When working on foreign machinery, you Tabies of equivalent English meastire am.1 may nOtice that your half-inch,three-quarter metric equivalents are-essential when you work inch, and-one,inch wrenches will fitinany-ofthe simultaneously wilh both systems. The table bolts. These sizes correspond:to 13 nim, 19 mm, Which folloi/s shows the equivalent measures,o? and, 26 mm respectively in the metric system, the two systems. The columns on the left have and are very popular because they _are the equivalent values which are accurate enough interchangeable. The 13/16-inch- spark plug for most work, and on the right are the wrench, which is standard, inthis country, is .' multiples used ,to convertthe values with a high intend0 to fit a 20 rnm nut. degree of accuracy. , -0 p. 2 41'9 350 , Appehdix V11THE KETRIC SYSTEM CUSTOMARYAND. METRIC SYSTEM UNITS OF MEASUREMENTS IN, FEBRUARY OF 1960, THE U.S.BUREAU OF STANDARDS ANNOUNCED ITS POLICY TO.THENCEFORTHUSE THE. UNITS OF THE INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM FOR WEIGHTS ANDJAEASURES,_REPLACING WHAT HAD BEEN CALLED THE -METRIC SYSTEM. THE ABBREVIATION USED FOR THE INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM IS (S1). Meltiples aid SibmIttpki Prof hos Symbols 1 000 000 000 000- at10"-tera (ter'i) 1 000 000 000,= 103 giga 1 000 000 = 106 mega (megq) 1 000 = 103 kilo (1:11',O) k 100 =" 102 hecto (heli'te,) lo.= 10 deka- (dek'i) da 0.01 -= 104 centi "(sen't) cr 0.001=t'310-3 (mvilq) -m 0?-000 001=104 micro (m*PkrO) 6.000 ow ow. = 104 nano 0.000 000 ow col = 1042'pico kO) 0.000000000000001 =10-'s femto (fem/tO), 0.000 000000000000001 =101 .atto 351 ?50 .00t0 -, COMMUNICATIONSTECHNICIAN 0, 3, & 2 . -Multiply .By To Obtain Multiply By To Obtain 30.48 Centimeters Azres -. -40.47, hes Feet . affirm Acres -04.7- , Centaret , Feet 0.1 67 10 Square ckains- 0.3048 Meters 4. 'Acres Feet Ades 43,560 Square Feet Feet per Minute 0.01136 Miles*per Hour- Acrei 4,840, Square Yards Feet_per Second 0.5921 Knots Meters.per Minute -Ares 0.02471 Acres .Peel per Second 18.288 Miles per Hour :Ares, Igo- Centares Feet per Second 0.6818 1;076 Square-Feet -. Furlongs 10 Chains- Ares . Ares . 119.6 ,Square Yards Furlongs _660 Feet Barrels (U.S., dry) 3.281 Bushels Furlongs 40- Rods Barrels,(U.S4 liquid) 4.21 Cubic Feet Furlongs 220 Yards Barrels-(U.S., liquid). 31.5 Gal lens Gallons (British) 4,546.1 cubic Centimeters . a Boa:d Feet (I' x Fin 144 bubic inches Gallons (British) '0.1605 Cubic Feet , Cable lengths (U.'S.)- 120 Fathoms Gallons (British) 277.274 Cubic Indies 1.2009:- Gallons (U.S.) Cable:lengths (U.S.) 720 . Feet Gallons (British)- Cable lengths (U.S.) .240 Yards Gallons (British) 4.546 Liters , Quarts (British) Centares 10.76 Square feet Gallons (British) 4 ,0.03175 Barrels (liquid, Certain . 1.196 Square Yards u Gallons (U.S.) . U.S.) Cent imeters,, 0.3937 Inches - Gallons (11.S.) 3,785.4 'Cubic Centimeters Dubic,Centimeters ,, 0.06102 Cubic Inches -Gallons (U:S.) . 0.13368 Cubic.. Feet Chains 66 Feet Gallons (U.S.) 231 'Cubic Inches 'Chains. 100 Links ., -Gallons (British) - , Gallons (U.S.) 0.8327 ; "Chairis 4 Rods 3.785 Liters Cubic- Inches Gallons (U.S.) ,Cubic' Feet 1,728 . 4- Quarts (U.S.) -0.02832 Cubic Meteri Gallons (M.) :Cubic' Feet -Grains Grams, 15.43 Cubic Feet .' 0.03704 Cubic Yards . ,, 0.001 Kilograms , ubirffiet 6.729 ..._Gailan&,(Rtitish) Grams' Grams -r--1-;00-0 Milligrams 7.481 Gallons (U.S:) . '-C14)10 Feet, . Grams. 0.03527 Ounces (avoir- 28,316 Liters -, Oubic 'Feet , dupois) Cubic Inches, 16.39"-- Cp6ic- Centimeters Hands . 16.16 Centimeters .Cubic Imhes 0.0005787- Cubic Feet . 4 Inches - Cubic Inctif -- -0,003606-_Gallons (Brifish) Hands ---- HeCtares' 2.471 Acres . 0.004329 Gallons (11-.S--.)--- 'Ctibic Inches __ " 1 Hectares- 100-Ares--__ Cubic Inches 0.01639 Liters -- 0.1 Cubic Meters. -Hecioliteis :Cutilc lietels 35.31 Obit Teet. -Hectoliters 26.417 Gallons (U.S.) Cubic Metirs 1.308 Oubic Yards Hectoliters 100 1 Liters ''Cubic-Yaids 27 Cubic Feet Hogsheads 2 Barrels (Liquid, Cubic Yards 0.7646 . Cubic-Miters . 9 . U.S.) 764.6 Liters - cubic Yards a Hogsheads (U,S.) 63 Gallons (U.S.) -Degrees (C.)-I- 17.8 1.8' '' Degrees (F.) '' )1undredweights 0.508 'Quintals (metric) Degrees (rj-32 a 0.5556 Degrees (C.) inches 72 Points Degrees - - 0.01745. , Radjans . 6 , -I' Picas .- CableLengthi (U., Inches Fathoins - 0.00833 Inches 6 Y1 Ems ,S-.) a , . - . ., , Inches 12 Ens 6 Feet . Fathoms -- , Inches 2.54 Centimeters Meters - Fathoms , 1,8280 - 352 AppendixVITHE METRiC SYSTEM Multiply \ ,BY To Obtain Multiply By , -To Obtain !riches 0/0833 Feet. Miles, Nautical 6,076.1 ,Feet - Inchs 1;000. Mils Miles;lautical 7,2,963, 'inches Inches \ 0.0277 Yards Miles, Nautital 1.8532 Kilometers Inches of Merckry 0.49131 Pounds per Squarelnch Milts, Nautital 1,853.2 -''Meteis 1Clogrant.-- ,\ 1,000 Grams Miles, Nautital E1508 :Miles, Statute Kilograms \ 2.2046 Pounds (Moir Miles, Nautical 1 :Mkiutes.of , dupois) . . - ' Latitude Kiloliters Is Cubic Meters ,Miles, Nautical- 2,026.8 Yards Kiloliters 1.108. Cubic"Yatds Miles per Hour,. 88 Feet per Minute .. -Kiloliters 44;18 Gallons (U.S.)"., (Statute) . Kiloliters , 1,000 "titers ° Miles per Hour 1.467 Feet per Second KiloMeters 4:557 Cable Length§ , (Statute), . . Kilometers - 3,280.8 Feet , Miles per "Hour 0.864 Knots ,Kilometers 39,370. Inches Miles, Statute 7.33 Cable Lengths Ki lometers 1,060 Meters Miles, Statute 5;280 , Feet- KfloMeters 0.5396 Miles, Nautical Miles, Statute 8 Fur Itr4S- ." Kilometers 0.62137 Miles, Statute ,Miles; Statute 63,360 int**. , : -Kilometers- 1,093.6 Yards Miles, ,Statute 1:6093 , Kilometers , Knots 1.1516 -Statute Miles per. Miles, Statute 1,609:3 .Metert- Hour . Miles, Statute' 0.8689 Miles;_Nautical Kncts 1.688 .Feet per Second; Miles, StatuteN: E,760 Yards -Leagues, Nautical 26.33- .Cable Lengths'. Millier (See Tons-,..., . Leagues; Nautical' 5.5597 Kilometers metric) ., Leagues, Nautical . 3 . Miles, Nautical MillirodianS -,N .,,206 265 Seconds of Arc Leigutii statute 4:8280 'Kilometers Mils 0.001. Inches -LeaguesStatute 3 Miles, Statuter, Mynameteis. ION.'. 1 Kilometers' Links'- 7.92 Inches , Ounces (aVoijclupois) 28.3495Grams Liters 1,000 ;Cubic Centimeters Pint (Liquid;.U.S.) 4 'OHS (U.S.) Liters 61-.025 Cubicinches -Pint (Liquid,,Br.) 4 Gills,(Briiish) Liters 011998 Gallons (British) Pint (Liquid,,Br.), 0.56825 , Liters Liters 0.26418 Gallons (U.S.) Pint (1.iquid,,11:S.). .9.4732 Liters Liters 0.8799 Quarts (British). - Pounds (avoirdupois). 7,080- Grains ,. Litets 0.908 Quarts" (U.S.,dry) Pounds (avoirdivois) 453.59. Grams Liters 1.0567 Quarts (Liquid, Poundslavoirdupois)' ; 0:4536 _Kilogram's U.S.) - Pounds (avOirdupOis) -16 Ounces Melees 100 centiMeters Pounds (avoirthipois) 41.2153 Pounds (troy). Meters_ 0.001 s Kilometers Pounds (troy) . 0.8229' Pounds (avoir- Meters , 14367yeds------______. thipois) Iieters , 3:24- -Feet Pouods per. Square Inct iii-537 littliiI-01"------Meters 39.37. Inches Mercury Meters 1;006 Millimeters Quirt (British) 1.1365 Eiters - Meters L0936- Yards Quart (British) 2 Pints (British) . . Meters per Minute '0.8547 Feetper Second Quart (Liquid, U.S.) 0.9463 Liters Meters per SecOnd . 2.237 Miles per Hour Quart-(11.S.) . 2 Pints (U.S.) Microns 0.001 Mil limeters Quintals (Metric) 1.97 Hundredweights Milete Nautical 8.44.-. Cable Lengths Quintals (Metric) 100 Kilograrns- 353, 5-2 COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN 0 3 & 2 Multiply .... By. _-- To Obtain 'Multiply , By To'Obtain 'Radians' '57.30 Petreil Square Miles, Statute 259; Hectares . . Rods' 16.3, ,Feet . Situate, Miles, Statute' . :2.59 Square .kilometers Rods, - 25 . Link* i Square Yards 0.8362 1Centares 4 "'Square 'Centimeters " '0.1550 :Squatell,thes Square' Yardi - 9 Square-Feet :Square Feet 0.0929 Centaret, Square-Yards 1:296 Square Inches 'SquateFeet '924 SquareCentiietert Tonslcont) = 1.616 Metrlc Tons SInere. Feet 144 SOW,' blares Tons (Iting) . 2,240 Pounds (Ark- Squari,Feet -0.1111 Squire Yard's', ddpols) . . Square Inches 6.452 Squat," Centimeter; ,,, Tons (Metric) 1,000 - Kilograms 0.006944 _ z: Squarcinchee , Square Feet ;(Millier)_ . Squarekilometirs 190 Hectares Tont (Metric) 2,204.6 'Ponnds.(Avoir- Square Kilemeters -0.61 Soire Miles (Millier) ,dupois). . (Statute) . Tons (Shut) 09072 Metric -Trills Squarilleterk(See Tons .(Shat) - 2,000 Pounds (AirOir- . Ceti tame) :- 1 ,4upois) , Squate Miles, Statute',- '640 - Acres Yards 91.44- Centimeter; Auire.Miles,'Statute-15,900 . Ares Yards, 6.9144 Yeters 0 21i3 INDEX . A Address designators, 223-226 addiess groups, 225 call signs,1:224 AN/FGC-59-te1etypewriter equipMents, 492 plain Iang4age;address AN/FGR-10, 11; high speeiitape,piinch:20I designators, 223 AN/FGT-7, 8; 9;-masteiand slaVeligh,spee4: routingindidators, 223 tak*header, 200. . Address;gronpi, 225. AN/UGC-49, aut6matic send-receiVe"(ASR), ,Administration and operational responsibility, teletypewriter set, 181: . conununications division, 274-292 `AN/UGC-49keyboard, 185 Advandeinent,4-1-1 4N/UGC49,-oPerating the, 188 *per development and, , AN/UGC-50,redeivc-only (RO) -opportunities,,-10 .teletypewriter.set; 191 hOwlo qualify Tor, 4 ANIUGC-51,'teietypewriter Set,91 how-to Prepare for,5-10 AWORA-17'frequency-shift conVerter front' panel controli, 323. AdvisOries, cominunications, 240 AN/URA-I 7Ci,conVerter_dOMParator grOup, Aerosol-dfspensers,'306 operating Piocediirei, 323-325 Air filters, maintaining, 295. AN/USM 329(V), operating. procedures, Aligninen4teletYpe message, 247-253 igitatdata-distortionlest kvships-piesent-messages-,--139 set,.332-345 Allied;communications,,.67 ASCIIAmeridaivstandard code;for information AlioWandes,269 interdhange, 21.6; 3267331 Alternate foutingl:244- . AUTODIN/DSSCS integration, 193495 Ameridan-standard code.for.information -error!cletectión, 495 exChange .(ASCII); 68; 116 , hiput/outPut.devices, .195 Ainerican standard code for information inethanitation by-programiting, 194 interdhange(ASCII), Appendix lii, message;precedence, 195' 326-331 message, tracing, 195 AMPlifYing-and contaCt tepOrts 238 'Sytkein coMpatibility,195 Amplitude modulated.(AM) transmitter, 134 AUTODIN:netwokk;.194 Analyzer controls and indicators, 339 ° Analyzer-osCilloscsipec, 337, Accident;.preventiOn and safety, -2:0-8 AccuracY;real-time c1ock,:180 data: 337-345 Action*,-trader, 289-291 operatoes maintenance; M5 Additionalmodel 28 uniti090i492 operating precautions, 345 IeybOardlerid-receive (KSR) Antennas, 4,17-132 teletipewriter set, 190 basic types of antennas,,12Q redeive-cifily"(RO) teletypewriter commOn cOnfigurations, 111-132' :'set AN/UGC-10, 191 electromagnetie wave motion 118 355: COMIVRINICATIONSTECHNICIAN 03 & 2 Antennas-continued. ,polariiationi 119 trafisMission line; 120 - Antenna.pattentsPin-stabilized Background inveStigationo'(#1),,38-46 satellite; 95 backlogs, 219 Antennas and Wave propagation, 107.432 Back-pressure ann-lift,method, 315 Appendix..4:receiyer.R-390,A/URR Bandwidth and'sidebands, 83 bperatingproCedureS, 320-322 Basic messagejormat, 231,233 \APpendix II, converter cornparatot: ending, 233 , ,:group AN/UltA-17t operating heading, 231-233 Procedures:323-325, separation, 233 APPendiX III, american standard gode for Basic radio cOMmunication systern, 107 infprmation-hiterchange (ASCII), 326-331 Basic.Satellite coMmunicatiOn Appendik IV, digital data:distortionlest sySterni491 set-AN/1.7SM- 329(V) operating' Bias distortion, 131 Prodedures; 332-345 Biologitat effects ofrnicrowave AppendikV, operating signali, 346 electromagnetic energy, 307 Appendix VI, DSSCS operating -filmic-, the Imessage,A0,7223 signals, 347-348 Blank patch panel;s163- Artificial respiration, 313-316 Bbok mess4ge, 219 broadcast fit?, 284. Asspciated terminahequiinnent; 198T262 Built,in diagnostics, 216 conunoncontrolAutit Burns,,3f7 C-8120(P)/G 198 hiet speedtape punth AN/FGR- 1p if 2,01 line printer TT,55810,, 199 ,Inaster and slakcjiighjspeed ta e reader,(AN/FGT-7-; 8, 9), 200 C-8120(P)/9;cOmmon control unit, 198 'teletype adaptor module (TAM), 199 CTO (communications technician 0) 'teletypewriter controlfunit. rating, 1-12 '(CONUS). Western union' 12008k Call signs, 224 and tele`,tpewriter-eontrOl Carrier characteristics, 8042-, unit (overieas)-C-7050/G, ,Carrier distortion, 172 Atidible. tone, 215 Cathode-ray tubes, 307 Audio distribUtion, 153-155 Censorship,Personal, 20-22 receivertrariSfer switchboard, /54 Characteristiodistortion,171 transmitter transfer , Check, security, 280 switchlipard, 1'54 Chief, communication, 276 AUdiofrequencyland1ines,:87 Circuit breakers, operating, 303 Audio patch panel, 165 Circuit degradation and; failures, 279 ------\\Automated-message-preparation; , -Cirolit.performancelog.126.: Automated telecommunications tenter, 291 Circuit status, 177 " atitomated message Circuits and leasedlines, 87439 preparation; 291 Classes of messages, 218 message processing and Classification and, declasSification, 17 I distribution system confidentia1;18' (MPIfiS), 291 downgrading and , AutOinatic send-receive (ASR) declaisification, 18 teletypewriter set Als1/11pC-49, 181. secret, 18 Authbrized -personnel only, 302 top secret, 17 , k 4 ,356 (r() .255: INDEX bassification, security, 234,238 Communications division-continued Clciminu electronic equipment, 294 cornmunicatiOns watch officer (CWO), 278 maintaining airfilters, 295.0 faciiities control, 217 . ,CleaningSOlvents, 305 methods'aiid-results (M&R);277 :aeanliness and up-keep of-spaces,-28-1 training-settion, 2-76 Clearances, security, 38-40 Watch sea,* supervisor, 278 clerk, comniunieatiOn, 276 "Cornmunications division ad Ministration, and --Code- content indicator, 252 operatiOnil retp,onsibility, 274-292 Codes, identifier, communication- ,Comirninicationiimprovement 1,- action, 251s memorandums; 267 Codress, 247 Communidations, introductionto-naval, 54-67 Collective routing,indicators, 243, Comitunications logs,and, records, 282 toinmand and suppOrt profgamS, , 'monitor rolls,'and circuit logs, 283 office-0, 55 personafsigns, 282- CominandAtaining program,52 supervisor log, 282" Commana-vulnerabilitY, evaluation of, 42. CoMeminications OffiCer, 274-276 . Common dolitra.unit C-81.20(13)/G, 198 Communieatkms, 'satellite, 90466 COminunication:action identifier dOmmunications system, defense, 65 codes. 251 ComMunicatiOnstechnician rating; -tonimunication-basibi,8-89 Cornmunications,11S. naval, 54 Cornmunication center and cryPtocenter COmmunicationsmatch officer(CW0), 178 files, 283 Compatibility,-system, 495. Cornmunicationclerk, -276 CornPOnenit, description of major, 182-188. CoMmunication -diVision,organization, 275. Confidential, 1$ . ,Comniunicationchief, 276 -" Conical Monopole antenna, 125 stomipunication links, 76-79 Console; operatbr, 206-210 inodes.of operation, 76, Consolidation of files,.04 Switched networks,17,79 'Contact and amplifying reports, 238. ,Communication organization, fleet, 61-63 Content indicatorobdo,252 COmmunication,principles, 55 Continuous.waVe (tW) transmitter, 133 , Control, facilities, 277 Comniunication-publications, 268-273 allowances, 269 , Controlliog,'master facilities, 1,76 Control operatiOns, faallities,-152-180 familiarity in Osage, 272 Controls And'iridleatoii,..analyzer, 339 navalwarfare-publication, 'Controls abd indicators;oscilloscope, 340 library (NWPL), 269-272 Controlkinctindkators,sighal types of publications, 268 . generator, 333', 'Communication system, basic radio,- 107 Controls,spin-Stabilized satellite, 96 Communication satellite system Conversion, 155457. description, 91-96 coinparator-converter group -Communication systerndescription, 152 'AN/URA-17C; 155457 "COminunication systim, naval, 59 frequency-shift system, 155 Communication transmitters and 't,Onverter comparator group AN/URA-17C receivers, 133-151, Operating procedures, Appendix H, communicationS advisories, 240 323-325 - 'Communications agency, defense, 64 Critic messages, 238, COrnmuniCations, allied, 67 CryPtocenterliles and corpmuniation ComMunications division, the, 274-278 center, cdmunidations-chief, 276 CryptograPhic equipment, 165 cOrrimunications-clerk, 276 Cryptographic equipment destroyers -communications officer, 274,276 - M1A2/M2A1, 49 357 256 144 COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN O. 3 & 2 CWO, communications-watch officer, 278 Destruction,bill. emergency, 45 Cyclic distortion; 171. Destruction devices stowage, St Destructiorionetallic and non-thetallic, table 34;52 . bestrUction priority, 44, 45 Destruction Program, emergency, 45 D.c: distribution, 160,167 Detection, error, 195 audib patch panel, 165 Devices, input/output, 195 black_ patch- panel,-163 Diagndsties,liuilt-in, 216 cryptographic equipment, 165 Digitadata,diitortion test set dc-Patch -paneLbays, I 6Z AN/USM 329(V) 1, & 2, 175 distribution-frames, 161 _Digital data distortioh test set miscellaneous details, 1454 _AN/USM 329(V) operating procedures, mOdulatoddemodulator .Appendix IV, 332,345 ,(MODEM), 1,65 operator's-maintenance, 337 patch,cOrds, 164, , operating precautions, 336 patching faeilities, 162 sighal generator 'operating -red patCkpanet, 166 data, 332-336 -DCS 411TODIN & .psscs, prepared for,format Digital signals,'167 0,as, itappeirs hi MesSage copy, 266 Direct current (D-C) landlines, 87 psscs'Message- fotmat, 260-265 ,Direct current. teletypewriter internal data distribution ciicuits, 169 (IDDF), 260 . neutral (*ration, 1.69 Message-examples, 263-265 potar operation, 169 plaindress message, 261-263, Dispensers, aerosol, 306 DSSCS operating signals; Appendix DiStant-station/control agency Li VI7,34-7-348 dinatitnt118480 bata,,preparing, 212-214 Distortion, signal; 170-113- Data, prOtected, 215 Distortion, telegraph,:examples of,338 Data; tabUlai, preparing, 214 DistributiOn; audio, 1,53-155 .Dati terinirials;:inodel 40, 326' Distributiomframes; 161 Date-time grout* 226-228 Division,.cOmmuniCations, the, 274-278 Declassification and classification, 17' Doctrine, routing, 24,1-244 De.ferise cothmunidations agency, 64 powngrriding-and declassification, 18, beferise commuhication.satellite Duct effect in high-frequency prograM (DCSP); 90 transmission; 115 Detense cominunicatiims system,65 Ducting; 114 Defense satellite communication Dummy antennas, 141' systein (DSCS) PHASE II, 90 'Delay distortion, 172' Delay, inordinate, 290 Delivery of incOmplete text, 286-288 Da-d-figraill of cOiniminication satellite sySteih, 91796 Earth terminal characteristics, 96-103 orbit descriptions, 91-93 satellite Acquisition arid - satellite characteristics, 93-96 tracking; 98-103 Description of cOmmunication Electric shock; 300 system, 152 rescue of victims, 300 Description of majOr components, 182-188 symptoms of efectfic shock, 300 I ' 'Designators, address, 223-228 Electric shock, resuscitation for, 310.313 358 257 INDEX Electrical fires:516-319 Ending, 233 burns.' 317 Enemy. espionage'. 15-17 5 portable fire extinguishers; 316 data desired by the enemy, 15 Electrical telecoMmunications, 68-70 proof of enemy sucCess16 Electrical-tool(and equipment, portable, 304 Energized circuits, kepair of, 302 ElectrOrnagnetie radiation,.307-310 Energized electronic equipment, 302 biplogic.al effects of nikrowave Enlisted jating strutture, 1 electromagnetic energy, 307 naval enlisted OcCupational hazards of,electromagnetic classification system radiation to ordnance , (NEOCS); 1 (HERO), 308 Equipment, end'terming, 181-217 high voltage warning,signs, 309 Equipment, en4gized electronic, 302 radio frequency radiation' Equipment failures, 279 hazard warning signs, 309 Equipment and Materials, hazardous, 305-307 warning signs and posters, 309 Error detectiori,195 Electromagnetic wave motion, 118 Errors, format, 265-267, Efectroinagnetic wave, various components Essentials:of multiplexing, 157-160 of a propagated, 107-109 4, frequency division multiplex- Electronic equipment, cleaning, 294 terminals, AN/FCC-69/70; 160 frequency, division multiplexing Elliptical satellite orbit, 92 . Emergeney.des:truction actions unique and dernultipleiing, 159- to NAVSECGRU oVerseas activities,45:53 time division multiplexing and available.emergency deStruction demultiplexing, 158 devices, 46-51 Examples, message, 257,, 263-265 command training program, 52 Examples, of telegraph distortion, 338 emergency destruction bill, 45 ernerfency destruction prôkram, 45 materials and equipments to be-destroyed;46 Facilities-contro172-77 priority of destruction, 44, 4§, Facilities control operations, 152-180 safety, 52 Facts, verifying, 20 stowage of destruction devices, 51 Fading, 114 Ethergency planning for the protection Failures, and circuit degradation, 279 of classified:material, 41-53" Failures, equipment, 279 emergency Plans, 41 Ferniliarity in usage, 272 . establishing measures and Fiberglass-insulated,and.fungus- - procedures; 42 proofed wires, 306 evaluation of comthand File, broadcast, 284 vulnerability; 42 File, generatmessage, 283 types of ernergencies, 42-45 Files, consolidation of, 284' Emery cloth and steelwool, use of, 304 Filesniessage, 283 End-of-message validation, 253 Films, training, 12 End terminaLdevice$, 167-169 FiTe extinguishers, portable, 316 anierican Standard code for Fires, electrical, 316-319 information interchange Fleet communication,organization, 61-63 (ASCII);468 ,Format;_basicinessage,231-233 digtalsignals,i Format erroit, 65-267 international telegraph alphabet communications improvernent *4. no. 2 (ITA2)'five unit Meniorandums, 267 coder 167 iinproper transmission End terminal equipment, 181-217 prntices, 265 . 359 258 0, COMMUNICATIONS, TECHNICIAN 0 3 & 2 Formulation of routing indicators, 241-243 General-safety precautions and Forms-of mesSage, 246 abbreviated plaindress, 246 energized electronic codress, 247 :equipment, 302 plaindress, 246 intental skocks are forofficiaLuse oniy,.(FOU0), .19 forbidden, 361, Fortuitous ZR:fortiôii, .171 operating circuit breakers, 303 a .Forward- propagation by trospospheric- operating power switches, 363 'Scatter, 115-117 repair-of energized Frames, distribution, 161 circuits, 362 Frequency bands,_71 rubber floor matting, 301. Frequency bandwidtkand radio tagging-of open switches, 3:03 frequency-BB channel, 85 use of stedwool, and Frequency division.Multiplex-terminals emery cloth, 304 AN4FCC-0/70, 160 GrOund wave, 108 ..Prequeney:divislon multiplexing-and Grops, address,,225 demultiplexing, 159 .1 0 Frequency-modulated (FM) transmittei, 135 Frequency multiplicatiOn and' harmonics, 135-137 HERO, hazards of electromagnetic 'Frequency selectiOn, .117 radiation to ordnance, 308 frequency plans; 117 1-iF communications, 74 'frequency predictions, 117 Half-wave (hertz) antenna, 121 oblique ionospheric Sounder' _Harmonics and frequency Inultiplication, -receiver AN/UPR42, 117 135-137 Frequency,shi ft- converters,.monitor Hazardous equipment and materials, 305-367 oscil1oscope-patternsT323=325 aerosordispensers, 306 Frequency=shiftsystem, 155 Cathode-ray tubes, 307 Frequency spectrum; radio, 71-7'6 cleaning solvents, 305 Front phe1controls,;ANZURA-17 fungus-proofed and:fiberglass- frequency-shift converter,323 :insulated wires, 306 Front panel of R-390AtURR, 321 'Hazards of electromagnetic .Functional,operation,.sipal generator, 337 radiation to ordnance (HERO), 308 Fungus-proofed and fiberglass-insulated Heading; 231-233, wires, 306 - Headphones and:microphones, Future satellite communications, 105 maintaining,298 High speed, mode DSSCS,.tdrminal configurationa, 196 - High speed tape pundh AN/FGR-16, 11,201 High voltage Warning signs;,309 Horizontal-verticaliolarization, 119 General message, 220, Hydro messages, 239. General mes'sage file, 283 General operations, 278 backlógS,_279 circuit degradation and failures, 279 equipment failures, 279 IDDF, internal data distribution . General safety precautions and policies, facility, 260 301-304 , Identification% transmission, 247 authorized personnel Identifier codes, communication only, 302 action, 251. 360 259 ' INDEX . Illumination from a synchronous Keyboard send-receive (KSR) satellite, 93. .teletypewriter set, 190 Improper transmissinn practices,-265 Inclined satellite orbit,.93 'IncoMing messages;-284-288 delivery of incomplete text, 156-288 'LF communicationl internal toutingalloat284 _ Landlines, 87-89' ,internal routing-ashore, 285 audiofrequeticylandlines87 references, 285 leased lines and circuits, 87,89 Indicators; collective routing, 243- ,Limited distTibutioh, (LIMDIS), 19 - Indicators, routing, 223 , Line printerTT-558/G, 199 Indicators, routing formulation of, 241-243 Links, communication, 76-79 Ihordinate delay, 290 Locai Operation, (KDkKDP), 205 Input/output devices,195. - Log periodic antenna, 129 Integration AUTODIN/DSSCS1914 95 tog, anpervisot, 282 intentional shocks are forbidden, 301 Long meisages, 259, 264' Internal data distribution facility Long Wire antenna, 125: (IDDF), 260 Lowand high band monopole,antenna,-132 Internal royting afloat; 284 I.Owspeed, model, terminal Internal rbutlhg ashore, 285 Configuration, 196- International telegraph alphabet Loiv-Speedi mode.II, 197 no. 2 (ITA2).fiVe unit .LubricatiOh,,295 -cade, 167 111?.. International treatyorganizations, 19 M.- ,Introduction to naval communications, '54-67 'Introduction to the teletypewriter, 181-) 90 MF-coinmunicafion,.73_ automatiC send-receive (ASR) MPb§, measage processing and teletypewriter set distribution systein, 291: AN/UGC-49, 181 M&R,Inethodsand results, 477 description of inajor Maintaining air illters,:29$ components, 1-82-188 Maintaining headphones, and operating the AN/UGC-49, 188 microphones, 298 Inventory; watch-to-watch, 2$0 Maintenance, operatoes Inverted cone antenna,.126 einergenci),_296. Ionosphere, 109415 Maintenande, preventive, 293 ducting, 114 Maintenande, preventive, effect of ionosphere on the :teletypewriter, 295.297 sky wave, 111 - Miintenanie, preVentive typewriter, 297 fading, 114 Maintenance and safety, 293-319 mUltiple-hop transmissiori, 113 Major characteristics of sky wave propagation9112 NBS radio stations, 281 strutture of ionosphere, 110 Marking requirements,1.9 Ionosplieric.sounder receiver marking identifiaation, 20 AN/UPR-2, oblique, 117 markings.onSssages, 20 titlessubjects,and' v. 'paragraphs, 20 Mitkings',;special,.18 KD- and KDP, local operations, 205 Master facilities control tog, 176 KSR, keyboard send-receive Master and slave high speed tape teletypewriter set, '190 header (AN/FGT-7,8,9), 200 361 26 Or COMMUNICATIONS TECNICIAN 0 3 & 2 Matting, rubber floor, 301, Messages-continued Mechanization by programining,.194 time in, 226-228 Meniorandums, communications' . types, 219 improvement, 267 Metallic and non-metallic destruction, Message alignment, teletype, table 31, 52 - 247-253 Methods and results (M&R), 277 Message, 195,118, 220-223, 23 f-233, Microphones and headphones, 238239, 246, 248-254, 257, inaintaining,298< 259-265, 283-291 'Microwave electromagnetic Automated Preparation, 291 energy, biological effects df, 307 'blank, 220-223- MicroWave transmission, 86 schematic diagram of : Military seryices, U.S., 66 cqntent, 254 Minimize messages, 239 exaniples, 257., 263-265 Mode 195-197, 245 files, 283 DSSCS high speed terininal broadcast file, 284 configurations, 196 communidation center :low Speed terminal ,and cryptócenter con figuration ,I 96 fileS, 283 ,terminals, 195-197 .Conscilidation of Mode II low speed, 197, 245 flieS, 284 Mode III, 246 general file, 281 Mode:IV, 246 : Mode V,:197, 246 .fOrmat, basic, 231-233 fOrinat; DSSCS, 260-265 operation, 197 . terminals, 197 forms, 246 . general, file, 283 Mode! 28, additional units, 190-192 header, 248-251 Model 40, 202-216.326 header, teletypewriter, 249 data-terminals, 326 nohdelivered, 290 one line terminal plaindress, 257, 261-263 controls, 324 Precedence, 195 teletypewriter proceSsing anldistribution equipment, 202-216 systexii: (MPDS), 291' - audible tone, 215 relege/piokuP authorizatiOn, 289 introduction, 203-205 local operation .tracing, 195 0 0 (KD &IMP), 205 MessageS, 218, 219, 226-228, 238-240; operator console, 206-210 258, 259,,264,,284-288 preparing data, 212-214 all ships present, 239 preparing tabular clases, 218 data, 214 critió, 238 printer operation, 210 hydro, 239 protected data, 215 'incoming, 284-288 receiVe orily-page 1ong,,259, 264 printer operation, 211 minimize, 239 ternlinal vocabulary, 215 multiple page, 258' Modes, system operational, 245 , outgOing, 288 Modulator/demodulator (woDgm), 165 ,0), 239' Modulation introduction, 82 - reecross, 219 Monitor tolls and circuit logs, 283 service, 238 t MonitOr oscilloscope patterns for 'special-purPose, 238-240 frequency shift converters, 325 362 2 61 INDEX Monopole antenna, low and high band, 132 ,Qtpenswitches, tagging of, 303 Mouth-to-mOuth respiration for adults, 314 Operating, 188, 303. 323-325, Movement ,reports, 239 332-348 Multiple address, 219 . AN/UG,C749, 188 Multiple-hop transmission, In 9 circuit breakers, 303 - tMultiple page messages, 258 . data analyzer- Multiplexing essentials, 157,160 oscilloscope, 337-345 Multiplication, harmonics and data signal generator, " frequenCy, 135;r137 332;336 power switches, 303' ° N precautions, 336, 34 proceduresConverter comparator group NAVSECGRU indoctrination and vs' 'AN/URA-17C, 321325 debriefing, 40 procedures, digital data - NBS radio statioris, ?Major .distortibn test set characteristics, 281 AN/USM'329(V), 332:345 naVal Warfare publication procedure's, receiver library, 269-272- R-390A7URR, 320=322 National agency check and inquiry signals, ,Appendix .V,346 '(NACD, 38 t. signals, DSSCS, 347-348 National agency check (NAC), 38 Operation, mode 1V,.197. s National communications system Operlion, printer, '210 0 (NCS), 64 Operational practices,'.176-180 National security agency/central circuit Performanceolog, 176 .seCurity service,(NSA/CSS), 64 circuit status, 177 Naval Communication organization, 61-63 diStantstation-/Control Naval COmrnunications, . agency- Coordination, introduction to, 54-67 178;480 NaVal cOmmunications mission,.54 master facilities,control Naval communications, U.S., 54 14_116 Navalerilisted occupational Operations; general, 278 classification System, OPerator-console, 206-210 (NEOCS), 1 Operator's-emergencythaintenance, 296 Naval warfare publication library bperator's"Maintenance, 337, (NWPL), 269-272 Opportunities and career Networks, switched; 77-79 development, 19' No foreign dissernination (NOFORN); 19 NondeliVered Message, 290 Orbit-, 91;93 Notice to airmen, 239 ,'descriptions, 91-93 elliptical satellite, 9,2 ,inclined satellite, 93 Organitation;.55-63 fleet cOmMunication OrganizatiOn:61-63 O61ique7f3nospheric sounder naval- Communication receiver AN/UPR,2, 117 system; 59 ,Objectives, Sixed of service, 228 office of command and -Officer, communications276 support-, program's, 55 , On-,comingswatehresponsibility, 280 Oscilloscope controls and , 'On-line terininal-controls; 326 indicators, 340 363 \ COMMUNICATIONS- TECHNICI>q4 '0 3 & 2 Outgoing messages, 288 Prevenivni'aintenance-co-ntinued verifying facts, 288 teletykwriter, 295-297 typewriter, 297 Printer operati?an,, 210, 21'1 receive onIpage,211 . Priority of destrueon, 44, 45 P arabolic refleetion Frppagated elecao rri agnetie ,principleS, 127 wave components, 07-1,09 Patch cords, 164 Propagation, 107-132 Patching facilities, 162 . antennas wave; 107:132 Personal 'censorship, 20-22 , sky wave, 112 persebal sigris, 282 ; tropospheric, 115 Petty officer, 2-4. Prosigns, 228-231 squalities of a leader, 3 Protected data, 215 Plaindrest, 240,257, 261-263 Publication, 269,272 abbreViated, 24611' custody log, 271 message', 257,261-263 library, nival warfare Plaln lankiage address (NWPL), 269-272 design4tors,-2.23 Publications, 268-271 Plirining Tot the protection of communication, 268-273 classifiedmaterial, types, 268 emergency, 4 f,-53 Pyrotechnics telecommunications, 71. , . . . , Plans, 41, 117 . eniergendy,4t Q - requency, 117 ation,119- Policy offnaval rcommunication's;:55 Q messages, 239 Portable electricil tools and .equipMent, 304 Portable fireextinguishers, 316 PoSters anchvarning'signsi 3,09 ,- Power switChes, Operating,' 303 R-390A/URR, front panel, 321 Precautions and policies, R-390A/URR, receiver,,operating Senersafety, 301-304 procedures', 320-322 Precedence, '195; 228, RO, receiVe-only teletypewriter set _message; .195 AN/UGC-50, 191 speed of service Radiation, electroMagnetic, 307:310 objectives, 228 Radio, 71-76, 85, 107, 309 .0 ( Predetermined 'routing, 244 communicdtion system, Yredictions, frequency, H 7 basic, 107 Preparedpcs AUTODIN*,& DSSCS frequency radiation hazard fonvai,as it appearsvin warning signs, 309 message copY,.266 frequency spectrum, 71-76 ,Preparing, 212-214, 234-238 frequency bands, 71 ' data, 212-214 # HF communications, 74 ; tabu1ar:data,..214 LF communication, 73 text,,234-238. a MF coMmunication; 73 seeurity classification, VHF and above, 75 234-238 , VLF communications, 72 Preventive ithaintenance,,293-297 frequency-ISB channel and three-msystem. 294 'frequency bandwidth, 85 .364 63 - INDEX Rating. 1, 2 Responsibilities of telecommunication. cOmmunicatiolis technician, 2 users, 220 structure, enlisted, 1 Responsibility and security Real-time clock accuracy, 280 control, 17 Receive-only (120), 191,207, 211 Restricted data, 19 page printer operation, 211 Resuscitation and artificial teletypewriter set respiration, 310-316 AN/UCC-50,191 artificial respiration, 313;316 Receiver R-300A/URR operating resuscitatiOn for electric procedures, Appendix -I, shock, 310 313 320-322 Receiver transfer switchboard, 154 Rhombic antenna, tyPical, 122 Receivers; 142-146 Role of satellite conimunications; 103-105 basic superheteredyne .advantages of satellite ,p receiver, 145 communications,404 functiOns, 142-144 liinitations, 104 selectivity, .144 typical applications,,I03 sensitivity, ,.144 Rolls and circuit lois, monitor; 283 ReceiVerS, representative, 146-151 Routing, 223; 241-244, 284, 285 AN/51212-19A, 149 alternative, 244 CV-691A/1.1RR SSE collsctive indicators, 243 converter,' 150 dectrine, 241-244' It390A11.1RR, 146. indicators, 223 WI 051 /1111R, 147 indicators, formulation, 241.1243 R-1401A/p, 148 internal, afloat, 284 R-.1414/URR, 148 internal,,ashore, 285 receiverluning, 147 line segregation, 244 Receivers and transipitters, , predetermined, 244 comniunication, 131-151 Rubber-fldor matting, 301 .' Red'cress Messages, 219 0 Red patch.Panel, 166. *Refereficest-285 Reflection, priaiples of parabolic,,17 40' .Relieving the Watch, 279-281 Safety, 52, 203-319 on-doming watch responsibility, 'accident prevention, 298 280 maintenance, 293-319 real-tiMe clock apcuracy,"280 Satellite, 002:106 security-cheek, 286 , acquisition and tracking, watch-to-watch inVentory, 280 98-103 :Repair of euetgized.circuits, 302 characteristics, 93-96 Reports, 238, 239 communication system, contactand amplifying, 238 'basic, 9i movement, 239 communicatiOns, 90-106 Representative transmitters, 137-142 defense communication AN/FRT-39/40,_137-139 satellite program ANNRC-32, 139 (DCSP), 90 , AN/WRC-1, 141 defense;satellite AN41,VRT-2, 140 coMmunication dummy antennas, 141 syStem (DSCS) remote control unit, 141 PHASE-II, 90 < ?I:Rescue of victims,,100 communications; future, 105 365 264 k COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN 0 3 8c. 2 t., Satellite-continued, Signal-continued comnanications,. role- of; 103-105 responsibility for orbit, elliptical; 92 integrity of : orbit, inclined, 93 , system, 173 . Scatter-transmission; 86 generator controls and A ,-Schematic diagrani otme-ssâge content, 254., indicators, 333 . Secret, 18- generator, functional . - Security, 1340,134:238, 253-257;280 operation, 337 clearances;.38-40 generator operating backgrOund-investigation data, 332-336 security, 22-37 (B1),38.440 - national agency check Signs, call, 224 persOnal, 282 . (NAC),.38 . . nationallagency check. Single address, 219 sand.inquiry, Single sideband (SSB) transmitter, 134 Single sidebahd transmission, 84-86 (RACQ,8. .NAVSECGRU indoc- Sky. wave, 109 -ttinWon and Sky wave pri).pagation;112 debriefing, 40 Sleeveantenna (shore station), 123 -9ateck,"2,ao Solvents, cleaning, 305 ,aassifibatioh, 234-238 'Sound telecommunications, 71 cOntrhland;responSibility, 17 Sounder receiver AN/OPR-2, -tyPes 0,20-37 Oblique ioriospherie, 117 vidlations and compromisds,.37 SPeical markings, 18 for official Use only warning, 253-257. end-of;message (F0d0), 19 . validation, 2'53 international treaty inessage, 253, Organizations'', 19 limited distributiOn Segregatioh, routingi1ine,-244 (L1MDIS); 19 Selection-of frequency-, 117 no foreign-dissemination Separation, 233 ,'"' (NOPORN), .19 Sequence:of textual matter, 233 restricted data-1-19 ServiCeJnessages, .236 special cateOory Shipboard-wire antennas, 125 (SPECAT), 19, Shock, 300,.301, 31:0-313 Special-purP6se niessages, 238-240 éleetric, 3p0 all ships 'present electric, resuscitation for, ' messajges, .219 .310-313 communications advisories, 24,0 electric, symplonis of, 300- contact-and amplifYing intentional; are ,repOrts, 238 , -forbidden, 301 ctitic messages: 238 Sidebands and bandwidths, 83 hktirO messages239 Signal, 2,1-37, 170-173, 332-337 minimize. messages, 239 ..distortion,170-173 -movement reports, 239 .4- bias, 171 notice to airmen, 239 carrier, 172 Q messages, 239 6 characteristic, 171 Spectrum, radio frequency, 71-76 cyclic, i 71 Speed of service objectives,'228 delay172 Spin-stabilized satellite fortuitouS, 171 antenna pattern;.95 265 A , iS INDEX Spin-stabilized, satellite Telecommunioation ders controls. 96 . reSponsibilities, 220 Steelwool and emery cloth, TelecOmmuniciitions, 68-71, 291 use of,,304 electrical, 68-70 Stowage of destruction pyrotechnics, 11 deVices,- 51 sound, 71 Structure of ionosphere, 110 visual, 7,0 Superheterodyne feceiVer, center, automated, 291 basic, 145 Telegraph distortion, examples of:338 Supervisor log, 282 TeletyPe adaptor module Supervisor; watch section, -278 (TAM),. 199 Switchboard, receivertransfer, 154 Teletype message alignment, 247-253 Switchboard, transmitter mesSage header, 248-253 9 transfer, 154 transmission identification; 247 Switched netWorki, Teletypewriter, 169, 181-191, 199, Symptoms ofele-otric shock, 300- 202-216, 249, 295-297 Synchronous satellite illumination, 93 circuits, direct current, 169 System compatibility, 195 ,'control unit (CONUS) western SYstem description, 'union 12008A and conimunication, 152 teletypewriter' control System operational modes,_24. a unit'(OVERSEAS) , mode I, 245 C-7050/G, 199 mode II, 245 equipment, AN/tGC-59, 192 mode III, 246 equipment, model 4o, rnode TV, 246 201416 niode V, 246 introduction to, 181-190 keyboard-unit; -183- messageheader,,249 preventive maintenance, 295-297 lubrication, 295 operates emetgency 1T308 of AN/FGU=59, typing maintenance, 296 reperforator-receiving AN/UGC-51, 191 group, 192 17471 RiG, 191 T309 :of AN/FGC-59; typing Teiminal, 06-103, 167469, 196,.198-202, reperforator monitor 215, 326 grotip, 194 characteristis;earth, 96-103 TT310'of AN/GC-59;transmitter configuration, model- group, .03 low speed, 196 17471/UG,.-teletypewriter, 191 configurations, mode I TT-558/G, line printer, 199 0 DSO-high-speed, 196 TT-558/G, inajOr assemblies, 202 'cOntiols,- on-line, 326 TAk, teletype adaptor - deidces, end, 167-169 module, 199 equipment, associated, 198-202 Tabular; data, preparing, 214 vocabulary, 215 Tagging of open switches; 303 Terminals, 195-197 Tape PreParition and mode I,.195-19,7 transmigion formats, 245-267 `mOde V,197 Technician rating,' Test equipment utilization, 175 cdmmunicationS, 2 Text, delivery of incomplete, 286-288 367 266 _ ' COMMUNICATIONS TECHNIbAN` 0 3, it. 2 Text preparation; 234-238 Transmitter-6Ontinued Textural matter sequence, 233 receivers, comniunication, 133-151 Three-M system; :the, 294 -representative, 137-142 Tinie' division mnitiplexing and TroPspheric propagation, 11.5 demultiplexing, 158 Tropospheric scatter.antenna, '128 Thneoffile, 228 TroPosOheric seatter, forward Time in messages, 226-228 propagation by,,1.15-1:17 - date-time grons,,226-22.8 Tronbleshooting techniques, J 73-175 time of Tile, 228 ; Tubes, -ijathode,ray, 307 Timm zone chart of the wor1d227 Tuning( reeeiver, 147. Tone, audible, 215 types of ernagenines, 4245 Top, Secret, .17 TYpes ofinessages, 219 tracer action, 289-291 book=essage.,119 . inordinate delay, 290 gerieral-message, 220 nondeliVered message, 290 multiple,address;219 Trading; message, 195 singleqid.dress, 219. Training,12, 52, 276 Types'of publications, 268 -films, 12 Types.of seetirity, 20-37 program, command', 52 personal censorship, 20,22 section, 216 signa1.SeCiirity,.22-37 Transmission, 79-87,.113, 120, 245-267 Typewriter preventive maintenance, 297 forthats and tape maintaining headphones:arid preparation, 245-267 = microphones, 298 identificatiOn, 247 multiPle-hop, 113 practices, imProper, 265 UHF antenna AT-ISO/SRC, 127- systems? 79-87 U;S: military communications electrOniCs --carnercharacteristics; -board-(USMCEB);.'64 '80-82 . U.S. military services, 66 s direct curient (d-c) naVal, cornthunications, 54=,0 landlines, 87 conmiunicationS principles, 55., introduction to 0 missionof naVal modulation, 82 communications, 54 microwave .transrnission, 86 policy Of naval: s`catter transmission, 86 communications, 55 sidebands and Up-keep of spades and ?, bandwidth; 83 cleanliness,-281 single,sideband Usage; familiaiity in, 272' transmission, 84-86 Use of steelwool and emery transthission pf in- clOth, 304. forination"by radio, Utilizat(On of test-equipment, 175 80 digital data distortion Transmitter, 133:151, 154 test set ANIUSM 329(W) transfer switchboard? 154 . gc, 2, 175 types,,133-135 .amplitUde modulated, (AM), 134 continuousvavCW), 133. frequency modulated (FM), 135 VHF and iibO've, 75 .snipe sideband (SSI3); 134 VLF corhmunications,,72 368 267 - .7.6711r = INDEX Validation, end-of-message, 253 Warningosigns and posters, 309 Various corhponents of a propagated Warning*ns, radio frequency electroinagnetic Wave, 107-109' 'radiation hazard, 309 grOund Wave, 108 -''Sky, wave, 1_09 Watch, on-coming responsibility, 280 Verifying facts,.288 Wathh, relieving the,,279-281 Vertical :antenna field- pattern. '108 Watch section supervisor, 278 Vertical'and horizo..tal polarization, 119 Watch-to-watch inventory, 280 VictirnsreSCue,of,-3P0 Wave propagation and antennas, 107=132 Visual -telecommunicatidns, 10 Violations'.and:toMprömises', Whip antenna, 126 , security, 37 Wiresjungus,proofed and Vocabtilarj/Vterminal, 215 fiberglass7insulated, 306 Z WatnYtg, security,,,253-257 -, Warning signsOngli.V,Oltage, 309 Zone chart-of,the world, time, 227 -e' P , 2)68 MODIFICATIONS . _ 3 f this Publication has (have) been deleted'in, adapting this Material for inclUsion in the "TrialImplementation of a Model System to PrOvide Ailieary CutriculumMaterials for Use in,Vocational and Technical EdlicatIon." Deleted material involves extensiVeuse of -militar forms, procedures; systems, etc,. and vas not considered appropriate lor use in vocational and technical educatiOn: \ 3 3.7 , 269 Ns.